WO2015115413A1 - Coloring composition, pattern formation method, color filter manufacturing method, color filter, solid-state imaging element, image display device, and method for manufacturing coloring composition - Google Patents

Coloring composition, pattern formation method, color filter manufacturing method, color filter, solid-state imaging element, image display device, and method for manufacturing coloring composition Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2015115413A1
WO2015115413A1 PCT/JP2015/052166 JP2015052166W WO2015115413A1 WO 2015115413 A1 WO2015115413 A1 WO 2015115413A1 JP 2015052166 W JP2015052166 W JP 2015052166W WO 2015115413 A1 WO2015115413 A1 WO 2015115413A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
group
general formula
carbon atoms
dye
ring
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2015/052166
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
金子　祐士
賢 鮫島
宏明 出井
Original Assignee
富士フイルム株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 富士フイルム株式会社 filed Critical 富士フイルム株式会社
Priority to CN201580004351.2A priority Critical patent/CN105899549B/en
Priority to KR1020167020085A priority patent/KR101892551B1/en
Publication of WO2015115413A1 publication Critical patent/WO2015115413A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09—DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09B—ORGANIC DYES OR CLOSELY-RELATED COMPOUNDS FOR PRODUCING DYES, e.g. PIGMENTS; MORDANTS; LAKES
    • C09B69/00—Dyes not provided for by a single group of this subclass
    • C09B69/10—Polymeric dyes; Reaction products of dyes with monomers or with macromolecular compounds
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09—DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09D—COATING COMPOSITIONS, e.g. PAINTS, VARNISHES OR LACQUERS; FILLING PASTES; CHEMICAL PAINT OR INK REMOVERS; INKS; CORRECTING FLUIDS; WOODSTAINS; PASTES OR SOLIDS FOR COLOURING OR PRINTING; USE OF MATERIALS THEREFOR
    • C09D133/00—Coating compositions based on homopolymers or copolymers of compounds having one or more unsaturated aliphatic radicals, each having only one carbon-to-carbon double bond, and at least one being terminated by only one carboxyl radical, or of salts, anhydrides, esters, amides, imides, or nitriles thereof; Coating compositions based on derivatives of such polymers
    • C09D133/04—Homopolymers or copolymers of esters
    • C09D133/06—Homopolymers or copolymers of esters of esters containing only carbon, hydrogen and oxygen, the oxygen atom being present only as part of the carboxyl radical
    • C09D133/062—Copolymers with monomers not covered by C09D133/06
    • C09D133/064—Copolymers with monomers not covered by C09D133/06 containing anhydride, COOH or COOM groups, with M being metal or onium-cation
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09—DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09B—ORGANIC DYES OR CLOSELY-RELATED COMPOUNDS FOR PRODUCING DYES, e.g. PIGMENTS; MORDANTS; LAKES
    • C09B11/00—Diaryl- or thriarylmethane dyes
    • C09B11/04—Diaryl- or thriarylmethane dyes derived from triarylmethanes, i.e. central C-atom is substituted by amino, cyano, alkyl
    • C09B11/10—Amino derivatives of triarylmethanes
    • C09B11/24—Phthaleins containing amino groups ; Phthalanes; Fluoranes; Phthalides; Rhodamine dyes; Phthaleins having heterocyclic aryl rings; Lactone or lactame forms of triarylmethane dyes
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09—DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09B—ORGANIC DYES OR CLOSELY-RELATED COMPOUNDS FOR PRODUCING DYES, e.g. PIGMENTS; MORDANTS; LAKES
    • C09B23/00—Methine or polymethine dyes, e.g. cyanine dyes
    • C09B23/02—Methine or polymethine dyes, e.g. cyanine dyes the polymethine chain containing an odd number of >CH- or >C[alkyl]- groups
    • C09B23/04—Methine or polymethine dyes, e.g. cyanine dyes the polymethine chain containing an odd number of >CH- or >C[alkyl]- groups one >CH- group, e.g. cyanines, isocyanines, pseudocyanines
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09—DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09B—ORGANIC DYES OR CLOSELY-RELATED COMPOUNDS FOR PRODUCING DYES, e.g. PIGMENTS; MORDANTS; LAKES
    • C09B45/00—Complex metal compounds of azo dyes
    • C09B45/02—Preparation from dyes containing in o-position a hydroxy group and in o'-position hydroxy, alkoxy, carboxyl, amino or keto groups
    • C09B45/14—Monoazo compounds
    • C09B45/16—Monoazo compounds containing chromium
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09—DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09B—ORGANIC DYES OR CLOSELY-RELATED COMPOUNDS FOR PRODUCING DYES, e.g. PIGMENTS; MORDANTS; LAKES
    • C09B45/00—Complex metal compounds of azo dyes
    • C09B45/02—Preparation from dyes containing in o-position a hydroxy group and in o'-position hydroxy, alkoxy, carboxyl, amino or keto groups
    • C09B45/14—Monoazo compounds
    • C09B45/20—Monoazo compounds containing cobalt
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09—DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09B—ORGANIC DYES OR CLOSELY-RELATED COMPOUNDS FOR PRODUCING DYES, e.g. PIGMENTS; MORDANTS; LAKES
    • C09B57/00—Other synthetic dyes of known constitution
    • C09B57/10—Metal complexes of organic compounds not being dyes in uncomplexed form
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09—DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09B—ORGANIC DYES OR CLOSELY-RELATED COMPOUNDS FOR PRODUCING DYES, e.g. PIGMENTS; MORDANTS; LAKES
    • C09B69/00—Dyes not provided for by a single group of this subclass
    • C09B69/10—Polymeric dyes; Reaction products of dyes with monomers or with macromolecular compounds
    • C09B69/103—Polymeric dyes; Reaction products of dyes with monomers or with macromolecular compounds containing a diaryl- or triarylmethane dye
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09—DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09B—ORGANIC DYES OR CLOSELY-RELATED COMPOUNDS FOR PRODUCING DYES, e.g. PIGMENTS; MORDANTS; LAKES
    • C09B69/00—Dyes not provided for by a single group of this subclass
    • C09B69/10—Polymeric dyes; Reaction products of dyes with monomers or with macromolecular compounds
    • C09B69/105—Polymeric dyes; Reaction products of dyes with monomers or with macromolecular compounds containing a methine or polymethine dye
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09—DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09B—ORGANIC DYES OR CLOSELY-RELATED COMPOUNDS FOR PRODUCING DYES, e.g. PIGMENTS; MORDANTS; LAKES
    • C09B69/00—Dyes not provided for by a single group of this subclass
    • C09B69/10—Polymeric dyes; Reaction products of dyes with monomers or with macromolecular compounds
    • C09B69/109—Polymeric dyes; Reaction products of dyes with monomers or with macromolecular compounds containing other specific dyes
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G02—OPTICS
    • G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B5/00—Optical elements other than lenses
    • G02B5/20—Filters
    • G02B5/201—Filters in the form of arrays
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G02—OPTICS
    • G02F—OPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
    • G02F1/00—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
    • G02F1/01—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour 
    • G02F1/13—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour  based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
    • G02F1/133—Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
    • G02F1/1333—Constructional arrangements; Manufacturing methods
    • G02F1/1335—Structural association of cells with optical devices, e.g. polarisers or reflectors
    • G02F1/133509—Filters, e.g. light shielding masks
    • G02F1/133514—Colour filters
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G03—PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03F—PHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00—Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/0005—Production of optical devices or components in so far as characterised by the lithographic processes or materials used therefor
    • G03F7/0007—Filters, e.g. additive colour filters; Components for display devices
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G03—PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03F—PHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00—Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004—Photosensitive materials
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G03—PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03F—PHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00—Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004—Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/027—Non-macromolecular photopolymerisable compounds having carbon-to-carbon double bonds, e.g. ethylenic compounds
    • G03F7/028—Non-macromolecular photopolymerisable compounds having carbon-to-carbon double bonds, e.g. ethylenic compounds with photosensitivity-increasing substances, e.g. photoinitiators

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a coloring composition.
  • the present invention also relates to a pattern forming method, a color filter manufacturing method, a color filter, a solid-state imaging device, and an image display device. Moreover, it is related with the manufacturing method of a coloring composition.
  • One of the methods for producing a color filter used for an image display device such as a liquid crystal display device or a solid-state imaging device is a pigment dispersion method.
  • This is a method for producing a color filter by a photolithography method using a dispersed colored photosensitive resin composition. That is, a photosensitive resin composition is applied onto a substrate using a spin coater, a roll coater, or the like, dried to form a coating film, and the coating film is subjected to pattern exposure and development to obtain a colored pixel. . By repeating this operation for a desired hue, a color filter is produced.
  • the method described above is stable against light and heat because it uses a pigment, and the positional accuracy is sufficiently secured because patterning is performed by a photolithographic method, and it is suitable as a method for manufacturing a color filter for a color display. It has been widely used.
  • Patent Document 1 and Patent Document 2 are known as photosensitive resin compositions for color filters.
  • Patent Document 1 reports an alkali-soluble resin produced with a specific chain transfer agent in order to improve color resist characteristics.
  • Patent Document 2 discloses that light resistance is improved by a block copolymer of a dye and a light stabilizer.
  • the present inventors have found that the above problem can be solved by using a dye multimer having a specific substituent at the end of the main chain. Specifically, the above problem has been solved by the following means ⁇ 1>, preferably ⁇ 2> to ⁇ 19>.
  • a dye multimer having a dye structure and having a group represented by the general formula (I) or a group represented by the general formula (II) at the end of the main chain, and a color containing a polymerizable compound Composition;
  • ⁇ 3> The colored composition according to ⁇ 1> or ⁇ 2>, further including a pigment.
  • ⁇ 4> The colored composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 3>, wherein Mw / Mn, which is the degree of dispersion of the dye multimer, is 1.0 to 1.8.
  • ⁇ 5> The colored composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 4>, further comprising an alkali-soluble resin.
  • ⁇ 6> The colored composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 5>, wherein the dye multimer is a random polymer of a polymerizable compound containing a dye and another polymerizable compound.
  • ⁇ 7> The colored composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 6>, wherein the dye multimer contains at least one of dipyrromethene dye, triarylmethane dye, xanthene dye, azo dye, cyanine dye, and squarylium dye .
  • the dye multimer contains at least one of dipyrromethene dye, triarylmethane dye, xanthene dye, azo dye, cyanine dye, and squarylium dye .
  • ⁇ 8> The colored composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 7>, wherein at least one of the dye multimers is a styrene resin or a (meth) acrylic resin.
  • a and B in the general formula (II) are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms or an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms A composition; provided that R 1 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, an alkenyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, a monovalent aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, or a carbon atom and a hetero atom; It represents a monovalent heterocyclic group having 3 to 30 atoms in total, and A and B may be connected to each other to form a ring.
  • Z in the general formula (I) is —SR 1 or an aryl group, or A and B in the general formula (II) are each independently a secondary or tertiary alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms. ⁇ 9>, wherein A and B may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • ⁇ 13> A method for producing a color filter, comprising the pattern forming method according to ⁇ 12>.
  • ⁇ 14> A color filter produced using the colored composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 11> or a color filter produced by the method for producing a color filter according to ⁇ 13>.
  • ⁇ 15> A solid-state imaging device having the color filter according to ⁇ 14>.
  • ⁇ 16> An image display device having the color filter according to ⁇ 14>.
  • ⁇ 17> A method for producing a colored composition, which comprises blending a polymerizable compound after living radical polymerization of a polymerizable compound having a dye structure.
  • ⁇ 18> having a dye structure in the presence of at least one of a compound represented by general formula (Ia), a compound represented by general formula (IIa), and a radical represented by general formula (IIb)
  • the method for producing a colored composition according to ⁇ 17> comprising radical polymerization of a polymerizable compound and another polymerizable compound;
  • Formula (Ia) In general formula (Ia) Z has the same meaning as in general formula (I).
  • C represents a monovalent organic group;
  • D represents a monovalent organic group;
  • Formula (IIb) In general formula (IIb), A and B are synonymous with general formula (II).
  • ⁇ 19> The method for producing a colored composition according to ⁇ 17> or ⁇ 18>, wherein the colored composition is the colored composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 11>.
  • the present invention it is possible to provide a colored composition having excellent solvent resistance and light resistance. Furthermore, it has become possible to provide a pattern forming method, a color filter manufacturing method, a color filter, a solid-state imaging device, and an image display device using the colored composition. In addition, a method for producing a colored composition can be provided.
  • the coloring composition the pattern forming method, the color filter manufacturing method, the color filter, the solid-state imaging device, and the image display device of the present invention will be described in detail. Moreover, the manufacturing method of a coloring composition is demonstrated.
  • the description which does not describe substitution and unsubstituted includes the thing which has a substituent with the thing which does not have a substituent.
  • the “alkyl group” includes not only an alkyl group having no substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
  • “radiation” in the present specification means, for example, an emission line spectrum of a mercury lamp, far ultraviolet rays represented by excimer laser, extreme ultraviolet rays (EUV light), X-rays, electron beams, and the like. In the present invention, light means actinic rays or radiation.
  • exposure in this specification is not only exposure with far-ultraviolet rays such as mercury lamps and excimer lasers, X-rays, EUV light, but also drawing with particle beams such as electron beams and ion beams. Are also included in the exposure.
  • a numerical range expressed using “to” means a range including numerical values described before and after “to” as a lower limit value and an upper limit value.
  • the total solid content refers to the total mass of components excluding the solvent from the total composition of the colored composition.
  • the solid content concentration in this specification refers to the solid content concentration at 25 ° C.
  • (meth) acrylate represents both and / or acrylate and methacrylate
  • (meth) acryl represents both and / or acryl and “(meth) acrylic”
  • "Acryloyl” represents both and / or acryloyl and methacryloyl.
  • “monomer” and “monomer” are synonymous.
  • the monomer in this specification is distinguished from an oligomer and a polymer, and refers to a compound having a weight average molecular weight of 2,000 or less.
  • the polymerizable compound means a compound having a polymerizable functional group, and may be a monomer or a polymer.
  • the polymerizable functional group refers to a group that participates in a polymerization reaction.
  • process is not limited to an independent process, and is included in the term if the intended action of the process is achieved even when it cannot be clearly distinguished from other processes. .
  • present invention has been made in view of the above situation, and an object thereof is to provide a coloring composition having excellent color characteristics.
  • the weight average molecular weight and the number average molecular weight are defined as polystyrene converted values by GPC measurement.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) and the number average molecular weight (Mn) are, for example, HLC-8220 (manufactured by Tosoh Corporation) and TSKgelgSuper AWM-H (manufactured by Tosoh Corporation, 6) as a column.
  • 0.0 mm ID ⁇ 15.0 cm can be determined by using a 10 mmol / L lithium bromide NMP (N-methylpyrrolidinone) solution as an eluent.
  • the methyl group may be indicated as Me, the ethyl group as Et, the propyl group as Pr, and the phenyl group as PH or Ph.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention has a dye structure and is represented by the group represented by the general formula (I) or the general formula (II). It includes a dye multimer having a group represented by a main chain terminal and a polymerizable compound.
  • the dye multimer used in the present invention is synthesized by living polymerization, for example, the dispersity (Mw / Mn) of the dye multimer can be reduced. That is, it is a dye multimer, and the light resistance can be further improved by reducing the proportion of the high molecular weight component, and the solvent resistance can be improved by reducing the proportion of the low molecular weight component. Can do. Furthermore, heat resistance, applicability, and developability can be further improved.
  • dyes may be applied in place of pigments for the purpose of spectral improvement of color filters. However, since dyes have poor light resistance and heat resistance compared to pigments, color filters to which dyes are applied may have low durability. In the present invention, even when a dye is used as the pigment, these effects can be effectively improved.
  • the colored composition of the present invention preferably further contains a photopolymerization initiator and / or a pigment, and may contain other components such as a crosslinking agent as necessary.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention has a dye structure and has a dye multimer (hereinafter simply referred to as “dye”) having a group represented by the general formula (I) or a group represented by the general formula (II) at the end of the main chain. At least one kind of “multimer”). Two or more dye multimers may be included.
  • a dye multimer is usually a multimer having a partial structure derived from a dye having a maximum absorption wavelength in the range of 400 nm to 780 nm in its molecular structure.
  • the dye multimer of the present invention preferably contains a repeating unit containing a dye monomer, more preferably contains a repeating unit containing a dye monomer and a repeating unit having a polymerizable group. More preferably, it contains a repeating unit containing a repeating unit having a polymerizable group and a repeating unit having an acid group.
  • the dye structure preferably has a cation moiety.
  • the dye multimer functions as, for example, a colorant in the coloring composition of the present invention.
  • the dye multimer of the present invention preferably has a maximum absorption wavelength of 420 to 700 nm, and more preferably 450 to 650 nm.
  • the repeating unit containing a structure derived from a dye is preferably 10 to 100 mol%, preferably 50 to 100 mol% in the dye multimer of the present invention when the total repeating unit is 100 mol%. More preferably, it is 60 to 100 mol%.
  • Z represents a monovalent substituent.
  • Z is a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a carboxyl group, a cyano group, an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, a monovalent aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, or the total number of atoms of carbon atoms and hetero atoms 3 to 30 monovalent heterocyclic groups, —OR 1 , —SR 1 , —OC ( ⁇ O) R 1 , —N (R 1 ) (R 2 ), —C ( ⁇ O) OR 1 , —C ( ⁇ O) N (R 1 ) (R 2 ), —P ( ⁇ O) (OR 1 ) 2 , —P ( ⁇ O) (R 1 ) 2 or a monovalent group having a polymer chain is preferred, It is preferably selected from —SR 1 , an aryl group, a heteroaryl group, an amino group substituted with an alkyl group and / or an ary
  • an aryl group is particularly preferably an alkylthio group.
  • the aryl group as Z is preferably a phenyl group or a naphthyl group.
  • the heteroaryl group as Z is preferably a nitrogen-containing 5-membered ring or 6-membered ring compound.
  • the amino group substituted with an alkyl group and / or aryl group as Z is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms or an amino group substituted with a phenyl group.
  • the alkoxy group as Z is preferably an alkoxy group having 2 to 5 carbon atoms.
  • the aryloxy group as Z is preferably a phenoxy group.
  • R 1 and R 2 are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, an alkenyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, a monovalent aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, or a carbon atom and a hetero atom. And a monovalent heterocyclic group having 3 to 30 atoms in total, the above alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, a monovalent aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, a carbon atom and a hetero atom. These monovalent heterocyclic groups having a total of 3 to 30 atoms, R 1 and R 2 , may be either substituted or unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent when substituted include an alkyl group and an aryl group.
  • R 1 and R 2 are each independently preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or a monovalent aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 15 carbon atoms or a phenyl group. preferable.
  • a and B each independently represent a monovalent substituent.
  • a and B may be connected to each other to form a ring. * Indicates the binding position to the end of the main chain.
  • the monovalent substituents represented by A and B are each independently preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms or an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms. More preferably, the alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms has 3 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • one of A and B is a secondary or tertiary alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and the other is an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms or an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • one of A and B is tertiary alkyl having 1 to 30 carbon atoms
  • the other of A and B is more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms
  • one of A and B is Particularly preferably, it is a tertiary alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms
  • the other is a secondary or tertiary alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms (more preferably a secondary alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms).
  • the alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms may have, an aryl group is preferable, and a phenyl group is more preferable.
  • the substituent that the aryl group may have, an aryl group is preferable.
  • these groups may be substituted with other substituents.
  • a and B may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • Z in the general formula (I) is —SR 1 or an aryl group
  • a and B in the general formula (II) are each a secondary or tertiary alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms. (However, A and B may be bonded to each other to form a ring).
  • terminal groups are shown, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
  • Formula (IIb) in general formula (IIb), A and B are synonymous with general formula (II).
  • the terminal inactivation at the time of radical polymerization is in an equilibrium state, and the radical is not apparently deactivated.
  • the dye multimer is preferably a (meth) acrylic resin and / or a styrene resin.
  • the (meth) acrylic resin refers to a resin in which 50 mol% or more of the raw material polymerizable compound is (meth) acrylate
  • the styrene resin refers to 50 mol% or more of the raw material polymerizable compound.
  • a resin in which is styrene Refers to a resin in which is styrene.
  • a (meth) acrylic resin and / or a styrene resin is preferable, and is represented by the general formula (IIa) or the general formula (IIb).
  • a (meth) acrylic resin is preferable.
  • Repeating unit having a dye structure is not particularly defined, but is represented by general formula (A) shown in paragraphs 0276 to 0304 of JP-A-2013-28764, It is preferable that at least one of the structural units represented by the general formula (B) and the general formula (C) is a skeleton. The description of paragraph numbers 0276 to 0304 in JP 2013-28764 is incorporated in the present specification. In this invention, it is preferable that the repeating unit represented by the following general formula (A) is included.
  • the ratio of the repeating unit having a dye structure is preferably 10 to 35 mol%, more preferably 15 to 30 mol%, based on all repeating units constituting the dye multimer.
  • X 1 represents a linking group formed by polymerization. That is, it refers to a portion that forms a repeating unit corresponding to the main chain formed by the polymerization reaction. Two sites represented by * are repeating units.
  • X 1 is not particularly limited as long as it is a linking group formed from a known polymerizable monomer, but in particular, linking groups represented by the following (XX-1) to (X-24) are preferred, and (XX -1) and (XX-2) (meth) acrylic linking chains, (XX-10) to (XX-17) styrenic linking chains, (XX-18) and (XX- 19), and more preferably selected from vinyl-based linking chains represented by (XX-24), (meth) acrylic linking chains represented by (XX-1) and (XX-2), More preferably, it is selected from styrenic linking chains represented by (XX-10) to (XX-17) and vinyl linking chains represented by (XX-24), and (XX-1) and (XX -1) and (
  • L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • the divalent linking group includes a substituted or unsubstituted alkylene group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms (eg, methylene group, ethylene group, trimethylene group, propylene group, butylene).
  • L 1 is preferably also configured to include an anion.
  • L 1 is more preferably a single bond or an alkylene group, and more preferably a single bond or — (CH 2 ) n— (n is an integer of 1 to 5).
  • R represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group each independently. An example of the case where L 1 contains an anion will be described later.
  • DyeI represents a dye structure derived from a dye compound described later.
  • the dye multimer having the structural unit represented by the general formula (A) includes (1) a method of synthesizing a monomer having a dye residue by addition polymerization, (2) an isocyanate group, an acid anhydride group or an epoxy group. It can be synthesized by a method in which a polymer having a highly reactive functional group is reacted with a dye having a functional group (hydroxyl group, primary or secondary amino group, carboxyl group, etc.) capable of reacting with the highly reactive group.
  • the dye multimer used in the present invention is preferably an addition polymer.
  • the dye multimer having the structural unit represented by the general formula (A) in the present invention was obtained by radical polymerization using a dye monomer having an ethylenically unsaturated bond from the viewpoint of heat resistance. A radical polymer is preferred.
  • the dye structure used in the present invention is not particularly defined, and a known dye structure can be adopted.
  • the dye structure used in the present invention is usually preferably a dye structure containing a cation moiety in the molecule. Specifically, dipyrromethene dye, carbonium dye (diphenylmethane dye, triarylmethane dye, xanthene dye, acridine dye, etc.), azo dye, polymethine dye (oxonol dye, merocyanine dye, arylidene dye, styryl dye, cyanine dye, squarylium dye And a dye structure derived from a dye selected from a subphthalocyanine dye and a metal complex dye thereof.
  • a dye structure derived from a dye selected from dipyrromethene dyes, carbonium dyes, and polymethine dyes is preferable from the viewpoint of color characteristics, and dipyrromethene dyes, triarylmethane dyes, xanthene dyes, cyanine dyes, squarylium dyes. More preferred is a dye structure derived from a dye selected from dipyrromethene dyes, triarylmethane dyes, azo dyes, xanthene dyes, and more preferred is a dye structure derived from dipyrromethene dyes, azo dyes, and xanthene dyes.
  • the dye structure derived from the dye is more preferable, the dye structure derived from the azo dye and the xanthene dye is particularly preferable, and the xanthene dye is most preferable.
  • a cation having such a dye structure is used, heat resistance and light resistance tend to be further improved.
  • the dye structure preferably has a cation.
  • the dye structure preferably used in the present invention will be described in detail.
  • the dipyrromethene dye in the present invention is preferably a dipyrromethene compound and a dipyrromethene metal complex compound obtained from a dipyrromethene compound and a metal or a metal compound. At one point in these dipyrromethene dye structures, it is attached to the polymer.
  • a compound having a dipyrromethene structure is referred to as a dipyrromethene compound, and a metal or a complex coordinated to a metal compound is referred to as a dipyrromethene metal complex compound.
  • the dipyrromethene metal complex compound is preferably a dipyrromethene metal complex compound obtained from a dipyrromethene compound represented by the following general formula (M) and a metal or a metal compound, and a tautomer thereof.
  • M dipyrromethene metal complex compound represented by the following general formula (M)
  • a metal or a metal compound a metal compound represented by the following general formula (M)
  • a tautomer thereof a dipyrromethene metal complex compound represented by (7) or the dipyrromethene metal complex compound represented by the following general formula (8) may be mentioned, and the dipyrromethene metal complex compound represented by the general formula (8) is more preferable.
  • One preferred embodiment of the dye structure is represented by the following general formula (M).
  • the compound (dipyrromethene compound) or a tautomer thereof has a dye structure including a metal or a complex coordinated to a metal compound (hereinafter referred to as “specific complex” as appropriate).
  • specific complex a metal compound
  • the following compound forms a cation structure.
  • a metal such as zinc bonded to the nitrogen atom of the general formula (M) can form a cation structure.
  • R 4 to R 10 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent, provided that R 4 and R 9 are not bonded to each other to form a ring. .
  • the introduction site in the case of introducing the compound represented by the general formula (M) into the structural units represented by the general formulas (A) to (D) is not particularly limited, but in terms of synthesis compatibility, it is preferable that introduced at any one site R 4 ⁇ R 9, R 4, R 6, it is more preferable that introduced at any one of R 7 and R 9, R 4 and R 9 More preferably, it is introduced in any one of them.
  • Examples of the monovalent substituent in the case where R 4 to R 9 in the general formula (M) represent a monovalent substituent include the substituents mentioned in the section of the substituent group A described later.
  • R 4 to R 9 in the general formula (M) When the monovalent substituents represented by R 4 to R 9 in the general formula (M) are further substitutable groups, they may further have the substituents described for R 4 to R 9. In the case of having two or more substituents, these substituents may be the same or different.
  • R 4 and R 5 , R 5 and R 6 , R 7 and R 8 , and R 8 and R 9 in the general formula (M) are each independently bonded to each other to form a 5-membered, 6-membered, or 7-membered compound.
  • a membered saturated ring or an unsaturated ring may be formed.
  • R 4 and R 9 are not bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • the 5-membered, 6-membered, and 7-membered rings formed are further substitutable groups, they may be substituted with the substituents described for R 4 to R 9 above, and two or more When substituted with a substituent, these substituents may be the same or different.
  • R 4 and R 5 , R 5 and R 6 , R 7 and R 8 , and R 8 and R 9 in general formula (M) are each independently bonded to each other and have no substituent.
  • 6-membered, or 7-membered saturated ring, or unsaturated ring a 5-membered, 6-membered, or 7-membered saturated ring or unsaturated ring having no substituent includes, for example, a pyrrole ring, Furan ring, thiophene ring, pyrazole ring, imidazole ring, triazole ring, oxazole ring, thiazole ring, pyrrolidine ring, piperidine ring, cyclopentene ring, cyclohexene ring, benzene ring, pyridine ring, pyrazine ring, and pyridazine ring are preferable. Includes a benzene ring or a pyridine ring.
  • R 10 in formula (M) preferably represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group.
  • the halogen atom, alkyl group, aryl group, and heterocyclic group have the same definitions as the halogen atom, alkyl group, aryl group, and heterocyclic group of Substituent Group A described later, and the preferred ranges thereof are also the same. .
  • R 10 represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group
  • the alkyl group, aryl group, and heterocyclic group are groups that can be further substituted, In the case of being substituted with two or more substituents, those substituents may be the same or different.
  • the specific complex in the present invention is a complex in which a dipyrromethene compound represented by the general formula (M) or a tautomer thereof is coordinated to a metal or a metal compound.
  • the metal or metal compound may be any metal or metal compound capable of forming a complex, and may be any divalent metal atom, divalent metal oxide, divalent metal hydroxide, Or a bivalent metal chloride is contained.
  • the metal or metal compound include ZnCl, Mg, Si, Sn, Rh, Pt, Pd, Mo, Mn, Pb, Cu, Ni, Co, Fe, and other metals, as well as AlCl, InCl, FeCl, and TiCl.
  • metal chlorides such as SnCl 2 , SiCl 2 and GeCl 2
  • metal oxides such as TiO and VO
  • metal hydroxides such as Si (OH) 2
  • Fe, Zn, Mg, Si, Pt, Pd, Mo, Mn, Cu, Ni, Co, TiO, or from the viewpoint of the stability, spectral characteristics, heat resistance, light resistance, and production suitability of the complex VO is preferable, Zn, Mg, Si, Pt, Pd, Cu, Ni, Co, or VO is more preferable, and Zn is particularly preferable.
  • R 4 and R 9 are each independently a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a cyano group, or an acyl group.
  • R 5 and R 8 are each independently an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a cyano group, a nitro group, an acyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxy group, or a phosphinoylamino group Carbonyl group, carbamoyl group, imide group, alkylsulfonyl group, ant Rusuruhoniru group or be a sulfamoyl group,; R 6 and R 7 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkyl group, an alkyl group
  • dipyrromethene metal complex compound represented by the general formula (7) or the general formula (8) described in detail below is also a particularly preferable embodiment of the dipyrromethene dye.
  • the dipyrromethene metal complex compound represented by the general formula (7) is a dye structure derived from the dipyrromethene metal complex compound represented by the following general formula (7). is there.
  • the following compound preferably forms a cation structure.
  • Ma in the general formula (7) can form a metal cation structure such as zinc.
  • R 4 to R 9 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent
  • R 10 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic ring.
  • Ma represents a metal atom or a metal compound
  • X 1 represents a group capable of binding to Ma
  • X 2 represents a group that neutralizes the charge of Ma
  • X 1 and X 2 represent And may be bonded to each other to form a 5-membered, 6-membered or 7-membered ring together with Ma, provided that R 4 and R 9 are not bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • the dipyrromethene metal complex compound represented by General formula (7) contains a tautomer.
  • the dipyrromethene metal complex compound represented by the general formula (7) is introduced into the structural units represented by the general formulas (A) to (D), but the synthesis compatibility is not limited. In this respect, it is preferably introduced at any one of R 4 to R 9 , more preferably introduced at any one of R 4 , R 6 , R 7 and R 9 , and R 4 and More preferably, it is introduced at any one of R 9 .
  • a method for introducing the alkali-soluble group is any one or two or more of R 4 to R 10 , X 1 and X 2 in the general formula (7).
  • a method in which an alkali-soluble group is added to the substituents of can be used.
  • any of R 4 to R 9 and X 1 is preferable, any of R 4 , R 6 , R 7 and R 9 is more preferable, and any of R 4 and R 9 is more preferable.
  • the dipyrromethene metal complex compound represented by the general formula (7) may have a functional group other than the alkali-soluble group as long as the effects of the present invention are not impaired.
  • R 4 ⁇ R 9 medium in the general formula (7) has the same meaning as R 4 ⁇ R 9 in the general formula (M), preferable embodiments thereof are also the same.
  • Ma represents a metal atom or a metal compound.
  • the metal atom or metal compound may be any metal atom or metal compound capable of forming a complex, may be any divalent metal atom, divalent metal oxide, divalent metal hydroxide, or Divalent metal chlorides are included.
  • Metal chlorides, TiO, metal oxides such as V O, and metal hydroxides such as Si (OH) 2 .
  • R 10 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group, preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • X 1 may be any group as long as it is a group capable of binding to Ma.
  • water, alcohols eg, methanol, ethanol, propanol
  • the chelate ” ([1] Takeichi Sakaguchi / Keihei Ueno (1995 Nanoedo), [2] (1996), [3] (1997), etc.) can be mentioned.
  • water, carboxylic acid compounds and alcohols are preferable, and water and carboxylic acid compounds are more preferable.
  • examples of the “group that neutralizes the charge of Ma” represented by X 2 include a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, a carboxylic acid group, a phosphoric acid group, and a sulfonic acid group. From the viewpoint of production, a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, a carboxylic acid group, and a sulfonic acid group are preferable, and a hydroxyl group and a carboxylic acid group are more preferable.
  • X 1 and X 2 may be bonded to each other to form a 5-membered, 6-membered, or 7-membered ring together with Ma.
  • the 5-membered, 6-membered and 7-membered rings formed may be saturated or unsaturated.
  • the 5-membered, 6-membered, and 7-membered rings may be composed of only carbon atoms, and form a heterocycle having at least one atom selected from a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, and / or a sulfur atom. You may do it.
  • R 4 ⁇ R 9 the preferred embodiments described in the general formula (M) in the description of R 4 ⁇ R 9, R 10 is It is a preferred embodiment described in the description of R 10 in the general formula (M), Ma is Zn, Cu, Co, or V ⁇ O, X 1 is water or a carboxylic acid compound, X 2 is a hydroxyl group, Alternatively, it is a carboxylic acid group, and X 1 and X 2 may be bonded to each other to form a 5-membered or 6-membered ring.
  • the dipyrromethene metal complex compound represented by the general formula (8) One preferred embodiment of the dye structure in the cation having the dye structure is a dye structure derived from the dipyrromethene metal complex compound represented by the following general formula (8) It is.
  • the following compound forms a cation structure.
  • Ma in the general formula (8) can form a metal cation structure such as zinc.
  • R 11 and R 16 are each independently an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylamino group, an arylamino group, or a heterocyclic ring.
  • R 12 to R 15 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent
  • R 17 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group
  • Ma represents
  • X 2 and X 3 each independently represents NR (where R represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an acyl group, an alkylsulfonyl group, or an aryl group) a sulfonyl group.), a nitrogen atom
  • .Y 1 and Y 2 represents an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom
  • R c is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an Lumpur group, a heterocyclic group, an acyl group, an alkylsulfonyl group or an arylsulfonyl group,.
  • .R 11 and Y 1 representing
  • the site for introducing the dipyrromethene metal complex compound represented by the general formula (8) into the structural unit represented by the general formulas (A) to (D) is not particularly limited as long as the effects of the present invention are not impaired.
  • Any one of 11 to R 17 , X 1 , and Y 1 to Y 2 is preferable. Among these, it is preferably introduced at any one of R 11 to R 16 and X 1 in terms of synthesis compatibility, and more preferably any one of R 11 , R 13 , R 14 and R 16 . It is an embodiment inserted in one, and more preferably an embodiment inserted in any one of R 11 and R 16 .
  • the cation having a dye structure When the cation having a dye structure has an alkali-soluble group, it is alkali-soluble in any one or two or more substituents of R 11 to R 17 , X 1 and Y 1 to Y 2 in the general formula (8).
  • a method of providing a group can be used.
  • substituents any of R 11 to R 16 and X 1 is preferred, any of R 11 , R 13 , R 14 and R 16 is more preferred, and any of R 11 and R 16 is more preferred.
  • the dipyrromethene metal complex compound represented by the general formula (8) may have a functional group other than the alkali-soluble group as long as the effects of the present invention are not impaired.
  • R 12 to R 15 have the same meanings as R 5 to R 8 in the general formula (M), and preferred embodiments are also the same.
  • R 17 has the same meaning as R 10 in the general formula (M), and the preferred embodiment is also the same.
  • Ma is synonymous with Ma in the said General formula (7), and its preferable range is also the same.
  • R 12 and R 15 are each an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a carbamoyl group, an alkylsulfonyl group, an arylsulfonyl group, a nitrile Group, imide group, or carbamoylsulfonyl group is preferable, alkoxycarbonyl group, aryloxycarbonyl group, carbamoyl group, alkylsulfonyl group, nitrile group, imide group, carbamoylsulfonyl group are more preferable, alkoxycarbonyl group, aryloxycarbonyl group , A carbamoyl group, a nitrile group, an imide group, and a carbamoylsulfonyl group are more preferable, and an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, and a carbamoyl group are
  • R 13 and R 14 are preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group, a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group, more preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, substituted or unsubstituted.
  • a substituted aryl group preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, substituted or unsubstituted.
  • specific examples of more preferable alkyl groups, aryl groups, and heterocyclic groups can be the same as the specific examples listed in the above R 6 and R 7 of the general formula (M).
  • R 11 and R 16 are alkyl groups (preferably linear, branched or cyclic alkyl groups having 1 to 36 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 12 carbon atoms, such as methyl Group, ethyl group, propyl group, isopropyl group, butyl group, isobutyl group, tert-butyl group, hexyl group, 2-ethylhexyl group, dodecyl group, cyclopropyl group, cyclopentyl group, cyclohexyl group, 1-adamantyl group), alkenyl A group (preferably an alkenyl group having 2 to 24 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 12 carbon atoms, for example, a vinyl group, an allyl group, a 3-buten-1-yl group), an aryl group (preferably having a carbon number of 6 to 36, more preferably an aryl group having 6 to 18 carbon atoms, such as a phen
  • R 11 and R 16 are preferably an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkylamino group, an arylamino group, and a heterocyclic amino group, and an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group, a hetero group
  • a cyclic group is more preferable, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, and an aryl group are more preferable, and an alkyl group is particularly preferable.
  • the alkyl group, alkenyl group, aryl group, heterocyclic group, alkoxy group, aryloxy group, alkylamino group, arylamino group, or heterocyclic amino group represented by R 11 and R 16 is Further, in the case of a group that can be further substituted, it may be substituted with the substituent described in the section of the substituent group A to be described later, and when it is substituted with two or more substituents, The substituents may be the same or different.
  • X 2 and X 3 each independently represent NR, a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, or a sulfur atom.
  • R is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group (preferably a linear, branched or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 36 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 12 carbon atoms, such as a methyl group, an ethyl group, Propyl group, isopropyl group, butyl group, isobutyl group, tert-butyl group, hexyl group, 2-ethylhexyl group, dodecyl group, cyclopropyl group, cyclopentyl group, cyclohexyl group, 1-adamantyl group), alkenyl group (preferably carbon An alkenyl group having 2 to 24 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 12 carbon atoms, such as a vinyl group, allyl group, 3-buten-1-yl group), aryl group
  • Y 1 and Y 2 each independently represent NR C , a nitrogen atom, or a carbon atom, and R C has the same meaning as R in X 2 and X 3 above, and preferred embodiments are also included. It is the same.
  • R 11 and Y 1 are bonded to each other together with a carbon atom to form a 5-membered ring (eg, cyclopentane ring, pyrrolidine ring, tetrahydrofuran ring, dioxolane ring, tetrahydrothiophene ring, pyrrole ring, furan ring, Thiophene ring, indole ring, benzofuran ring, benzothiophene ring), 6-membered ring (for example, cyclohexane ring, piperidine ring, piperazine ring, morpholine ring, tetrahydropyran ring, dioxane ring, pentamethylene sulfide ring, dithiane ring, benzene ring, A piperidine ring, a piperazine ring, a pyridazine ring, a quinoline ring, a quinazoline
  • R 16 and Y 2 are bonded to each other to form a 5-membered ring with a carbon atom (for example, cyclopentane ring, pyrrolidine ring, tetrahydrofuran ring, dioxolane ring, tetrahydrothiophene ring, pyrrole ring, furan ring) , Thiophene ring, indole ring, benzofuran ring, benzothiophene ring), 6-membered ring (for example, cyclohexane ring, piperidine ring, piperazine ring, morpholine ring, tetrahydropyran ring, dioxane ring, pentamethylene sulfide ring, dithiane ring, benzene ring , A piperidine ring, a piperazine ring, a pyridazine ring, a quinoline ring, a quin
  • R 11 and R 16 are each independently preferably a monovalent substituent having a steric parameter —Es ′ value of 1.5 or more, and 2.0 or more. Is more preferably 3.5 or more, and particularly preferably 5.0 or more.
  • the steric parameter-Es' value is a parameter that represents the steric bulk of the substituent, and the literature (JAMacphee, et al, Tetrahedron, Vol.34, pp3553-3562, edited by Ikuo Fujita, Chemical Extension 107, Structure Activity Relationship) And the Drag Design, published on February 20, 1986 (Chemical Doujin)) -Es' value is used.
  • X 1 represents a group capable of binding to Ma, specifically, the same groups as X 1 in General Formula (7) can be mentioned, and preferred embodiments are also the same.
  • a represents 0, 1, or 2.
  • R 12 to R 15 are each independently a preferred embodiment described in the explanation of R 5 to R 8 in the general formula (M).
  • R 17 is a preferred embodiment described in the description of R 10 in the general formula (M)
  • Ma is Zn, Cu, Co, or V ⁇ O
  • X 2 is NR (R is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group) ), A nitrogen atom, or an oxygen atom
  • X 3 is NR (R is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group), or an oxygen atom
  • Y 1 is NR C (R C is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group), a nitrogen atom, Or a carbon atom
  • Y 2 is a nitrogen atom or a carbon atom
  • R 11 and R 16 are each independently an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkoxy group, or an alkylamino group
  • X 1 Is a group bonded through an oxygen atom, and a
  • R 12 to R 15 are each independently a preferred embodiment described in the description of R 5 to R 8 in the compound represented by the general formula (M).
  • R 17 is a preferred embodiment described in the description of R 10 in the general formula (M)
  • Ma is Zn
  • X 2 and X 3 are oxygen atoms
  • Y 1 is NH.
  • Y 2 is a nitrogen atom
  • R 11 and R 16 are each independently an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkoxy group, or an alkylamino group
  • X 1 is a group bonded through an oxygen atom.
  • a is 0 or 1.
  • R 11 and Y 1 may be bonded to each other to form a 5- or 6-membered ring, or R 16 and Y 2 may be bonded to each other to form a 5- or 6-membered ring.
  • the molar extinction coefficient of the dipyrromethene metal complex compound represented by the general formulas (7) and (8) is preferably as high as possible from the viewpoint of coloring power.
  • the maximum absorption wavelength ⁇ max is preferably 520 nm to 580 nm, more preferably 530 nm to 570 nm, from the viewpoint of improving color purity. By being in this region, a color filter with good color reproducibility can be produced using the colored composition of the present invention.
  • the dye having a dye structure derived from the dipyrromethene dye preferably has an absorbance at the maximum absorption wavelength ( ⁇ max) of 1,000 times or more, more preferably 10,000 times or more with respect to the absorbance at 450 nm. Preferably, it is 100,000 times or more.
  • ⁇ max the maximum absorption wavelength
  • a color filter with higher transmittance can be formed using the colored composition of the present invention, particularly when producing a blue color filter.
  • the maximum absorption wavelength and the molar extinction coefficient are measured with a spectrophotometer carry5 (manufactured by Varian).
  • the melting point of the dipyrromethene metal complex compound represented by the general formula (7) and the general formula (8) should not be too high from the viewpoint of solubility.
  • the dipyrromethene metal complex compounds represented by the above general formula (7) and general formula (8) are disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,774,339, 5,433,896, and JP-A-2001-240761. Gazette, 2002-155052 gazette, Japanese Patent No. 3614586 gazette, Aust. J. et al. Chem, 1965, 11, 1835-1845, J. Am. H. Boger et al, Heteroatom Chemistry, Vol. 1, No. 1 5,389 (1990) and the like. Specifically, the method described in paragraphs 0131 to 0157 of JP-A-2008-292970 can be applied.
  • dipyrromethene dye examples include a dipyrromethene dye, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
  • X represents an anion.
  • any hydrogen atom of the following dye structure is bonded to the polymer backbone.
  • (PM-8) and (PM-10) are particularly preferable from the viewpoint of color characteristics and heat resistance.
  • Carbonium Dye ⁇ Carbonium Dye >>> Of the carbonium dyes, triarylmethane dyes and xanthene dyes are preferable.
  • Triarylmethane Dye One of the embodiments of the dye structure according to the present invention has a partial structure derived from a triarylmethane dye (triarylmethane compound).
  • dye it has the partial structure derived from the compound (triarylmethane compound) represented by the following general formula (TP) as a pigment
  • Rtp 1 to Rtp 4 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group.
  • Rtp 5 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group or NRtp 9
  • Rtp 10 Rtp 10 9 and Rtp 10 represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group
  • Rtp 6 , Rtp 7 and Rtp 8 represent a substituent
  • a, b and c represent an integer of 0 to 4.
  • a , B and c are 2 or more
  • Rtp 6 , Rtp 7 and Rtp 8 may be linked to form a ring
  • X ⁇ represents an anion structure.
  • the introduction site in the case of introducing the compound represented by the general formula (TP) into the structural unit represented by the general formula (A) is not particularly limited, but at any one site of Rtp 1 to Rtp 10 It is preferably introduced.
  • a preferred embodiment of the dye structure in the present invention has a partial structure derived from a xanthene dye (xanthene compound).
  • xanthene compound As said pigment
  • R 81 , R 82 , R 83 and R 84 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent, and R 85 each independently represents a monovalent substituent.
  • M represents an integer of 0 to 5.
  • X ⁇ represents an anion, or X ⁇ does not exist, and at least one of R 81 , R 82 , R 83 , R 84 and R 85 contains an anion.
  • R 81 and R 82 , R 83 and R 84 , and R 85 in the case where m is 2 or more are each independently bonded to each other to form a 5-, 6-, or 7-membered saturation.
  • a ring or a 5-membered, 6-membered or 7-membered unsaturated ring may be formed.
  • the 5-membered, 6-membered or 7-membered ring formed is a further substitutable group, it may be substituted with the substituents described for R 81 to R 85 above, and two or more substituents may be substituted. When substituted with a group, the substituents may be the same or different.
  • R 81 and R 82 in the above general formula (J), R 83 and R 84 , and R 85 in the case where m is 2 or more are each independently bonded to each other, and have no substituent.
  • the unsaturated ring include pyrrole ring, furan ring, thiophene ring, pyrazole ring, imidazole ring, triazole ring, oxazole ring, thiazole ring, pyrrolidine ring, piperidine ring, cyclopentene ring, cyclohexene ring, benzene ring, pyridine A ring, a pyrazine ring, and a pyridazine ring are mentioned, Pre
  • R 82 and R 83 are preferably a hydrogen atom or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, and R 81 and R 84 are preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group or a phenyl group.
  • R 85 is preferably a halogen atom, a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, a sulfo group, a sulfonamide group, a carboxyl group, or an amide group. The sulfo group, the sulfonamide group, the carboxyl group, More preferred is an amide group.
  • R 85 is preferably bonded to the adjacent part of carbon linked to the xanthene ring.
  • the substituent that the phenyl group of R 81 and R 84 has is particularly preferably a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, a sulfo group, a sulfonamide group, or a carboxyl group.
  • the compound having a xanthene skeleton represented by the general formula (J) can be synthesized by a method described in the literature. Specifically, the methods described in Tetrahedron Letters, 2003, vol. 44, No. 23, pages 4355-4360, Tetrahedron, 2005, vol. 61, No. 12, pages 3097-3106, etc. Can be applied.
  • X ⁇ represents an anion
  • the description in the case where the counter anion described later is a different molecule can be referred to, X ⁇ does not exist, and at least one of R 81 , R 82 , R 83 , R 84 , and R 85 is
  • an anion is included, the description in the case where the counter anion is in the same repeating unit can be referred to.
  • R 81 and R 83 are a group represented by the following general formula (2), the other of R 81 and R 83 is a hydrogen atom, and the following general formula (2) ) Or an aryl group or an alkyl group other than the group represented by the general formula (2).
  • R 82 and R 84 may each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group.
  • R 1 and R 2 each independently represents an alkyl group having 3 or more carbon atoms, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group
  • X 1 to X 3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom Alternatively, it represents a monovalent substituent.
  • the dye compound represented by the general formula (1) has a counter anion inside and / or outside the molecule. By setting it as such a structure, the solvent solubility of a coloring composition improves more, As a result, it becomes possible to form the colored layer in which planar unevenness was suppressed more.
  • R 81 and R 83 are a group represented by general formula (2), and the other of R 81 and R 83 is a hydrogen atom, represented by the following general formula (2).
  • both of R 81 and R 83 may be a group represented by the general formula (2).
  • the groups represented by the two general formulas (2) may be the same or different.
  • R 1 and R 2 each independently represents an alkyl group having 3 or more carbon atoms, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group, and a secondary or tertiary alkyl group having 3 to 12 carbon atoms. Or an isopropyl group.
  • the alkyl group having 3 or more carbon atoms may be linear, branched or cyclic, may have 3 to 24 carbon atoms, may have 3 to 18 carbon atoms, The number may be 3 to 12.
  • propyl group isopropyl group, butyl group (for example, t-butyl group), pentyl group, hexyl group, heptyl group, octyl group, 2-ethylhexyl group, dodecyl group, hexadecyl group, cyclopropyl group, And cyclopentyl group, cyclohexyl group, 1-norbornyl group, 1-adamantyl group, propyl group, isopropyl group, butyl group, t-butyl group, pentyl group, hexyl group, heptyl group, octyl group, 2-ethylhexyl group, It may be a dodecyl group, a cyclopropyl group, a cyclopentyl group or a cyclohexyl group, and may be a propyl group, an isopropyl group, an isoprop
  • the aryl group includes a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group.
  • the substituted or unsubstituted aryl group may be an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, and examples thereof include a phenyl group and a naphthyl group. Examples of the substituent are the same as those of the substituent group A described later.
  • the heterocycle of the heterocycle group may be a 5-membered or 6-membered ring, and they may be further condensed or not condensed. Further, it may be an aromatic heterocycle or a non-aromatic heterocycle.
  • it may be an aromatic heterocyclic group, such as a pyridine ring, pyrazine ring, pyridazine ring, pyrazole ring, imidazole ring, benzimidazole ring, triazole ring, benzoxazole ring, thiazole ring, benzothiazole ring, isothiazole ring, Examples thereof include a benzisothiazole ring and a thiadiazole ring, and may be a pyrazole ring, an imidazole ring, a benzoxazole ring, a thiadiazole ring, a pyrazole ring, a thiadiazole ring (1,3,4-thiadiazole ring, 1,2,4- A thiadiazole ring).
  • aromatic heterocyclic group such as a pyridine ring, pyrazine ring, pyridazine ring, pyrazole ring, imidazole ring
  • R 1 and R 2 may be an alkyl group having 3 or more carbon atoms, or an alkyl group having 3 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • X 1 to X 3 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent.
  • substituent include the substituent group A described later.
  • X 1 to X 3 may be a halogen atom, an alkyl group, a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, an alkylthio group, a sulfonamide group, or a sulfamoyl group.
  • Examples of the aryl group other than the group represented by the general formula (2) include a phenyl group.
  • the phenyl group may or may not have a substituent.
  • Examples of the substituent include substituent group A described later, and may be an alkyl group or an aryl group.
  • R 82 and R 84 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group, and the alkyl group and the aryl group may or may not have a substituent.
  • the substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group may be an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • a substituent the same thing as the substituent group A mentioned later is mentioned.
  • the alkyl group include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group (t-butyl group), an n-octyl group, and a 2-ethylhexyl group.
  • the substituted or unsubstituted aryl group may be an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, and examples thereof include a phenyl group and a naphthyl group. Examples of the substituent are the same as those of the substituent group A described later.
  • R 82 and R 84 may be a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, and may be a hydrogen atom.
  • R 81 and R 83 may each independently be an aliphatic hydrocarbon group
  • R 82 and R 84 may each independently be an aromatic hydrocarbon group.
  • R 81 and R 83 each independently represents an aliphatic hydrocarbon group, which may be an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, a methyl group, It may be an ethyl group, a propyl group or a butyl group, and may be a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-propyl group, an iso-propyl group or an n-butyl group.
  • R 81 and R 83 may be different, but may be the same.
  • the alkyl group as R 81 and R 83 may have a substituent, but may have a substituent.
  • R 82 and R 84 are each independently an aromatic hydrocarbon group, and may be a phenyl group.
  • the aromatic hydrocarbon group as R 82 and R 84 may have a substituent, may be selected from the substituent group A described later, and may be an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms. , An ethyl group, a propyl group or a butyl group, or a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-propyl group or an n-butyl group.
  • At least one of R 81 and R 83 and R 82 and R 84 may be represented by the following general formula (A1-1-2).
  • R 23 to R 25 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, a carbonyl group, a carbonylamide group, a sulfonyl group.
  • R 22 and R 26 each independently represents an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
  • R 23 to R 25 may be a hydrogen atom or a halogen atom.
  • R 22 and R 26 may each independently be an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms may be a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, or a butyl group, and is a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-propyl group, an iso-propyl group, or an n-butyl group. Also good.
  • Each R 85 may independently be a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a carbonyl group, a nitro group, an amino group, an alkylamino group, an arylamino group, or a sulfonyl group.
  • the halogen atom include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, and a bromine atom, and may be a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom.
  • the aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be an aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms. Examples of the aliphatic hydrocarbon group include an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, and an alkenyl group, and may be an alkyl group.
  • the aromatic hydrocarbon group may be an aryl group or a phenyl group.
  • any hydrogen atom of the following dye structure is bonded to the polymer backbone.
  • azo dye a known azo dye (for example, substituted azobenzene (specifically described later (AZ-4) to (AZ-6) and the like)) can be appropriately selected and applied.
  • azo dyes known as magenta dyes and yellow dyes can be used, and among them, the following general formula (d), general formula (e), general formula (g), general formula (I-1) ), Azo dyes represented by general formula (I-2) and general formula (V) are preferred.
  • azo dyes represented by the following general formula (d) that are magenta dyes.
  • R 1 to R 4 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an acyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a carbamoyl group, an alkyl A represents a sulfonyl group or an arylsulfonyl group, A represents an aryl group or an aromatic heterocyclic group, and Z 1 to Z 3 each independently represents —C (R 5 ) ⁇ , or —N ⁇ .
  • R 5 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • R 1 to R 4 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group (preferably a straight chain, branched chain, or cyclic group having 1 to 36 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 12 carbon atoms).
  • Alkyl groups such as methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl, isobutyl, t-butyl, hexyl, 2-ethylhexyl, dodecyl, cyclopropyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, 1-adamantyl), alkenyl groups (preferably having a carbon number)
  • a bicyclic group such as 2-thienyl, 4-pyridyl, 2-furyl, 2-pyrimidinyl, 1-pyridyl, 2-benzothiazolyl, 1-imidazolyl, 1-pyrazolyl, benzotriazol-1-yl), acyl group ( Preferably an acyl group having 1 to 24 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 18 carbon atoms, such as acetyl, pivaloyl, 2-ethylhexyl, benzoyl, cyclohexanoyl), an alkoxycarbonyl group (preferably having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, More preferably, it is an alkoxycarbonyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, such as methoxycarbonyl or ethoxycarbonyl), an aryloxycarbonyl group (preferably an aryloxycarbonyl group having 6 to 15 carbon atoms, more preferably an aryloxycarbonyl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms).
  • phenoxycarbonyl a carbamoyl group (preferably A carbamoyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms, such as dimethylcarbamoyl), an alkylsulfonyl group (preferably an alkylsulfonyl group having 1 to 24 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 18 carbon atoms).
  • An arylsulfonyl group preferably an arylsulfonyl group having 6 to 24 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 18 carbon atoms, such as phenylsulfonyl, naphthylsulfonyl).
  • R 1 and R 3 are preferably each independently an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group.
  • R 2 and R 4 are preferably each independently a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group.
  • R 1 to R 4 are substitutable groups, for example, they may be substituted with the substituents described in the above-mentioned Substituent group A section, and in the case of having two or more substituents These substituents may be the same or different.
  • Z 1 to Z 3 each independently represents —C (R 5 ) ⁇ or —N ⁇ , and R 5 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • R 5 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • the substituent for R 5 include the substituents described in the above-mentioned substituent section.
  • R 5 When the substituent of R 5 is a further substitutable group, for example, it may be substituted with the substituent described in the above-mentioned Substituent group A, and may be substituted with two or more substituents. In some cases, the substituents may be the same or different.
  • Z 1 is preferably —N ⁇
  • Z 3 is —C (R 5 ) ⁇ . is there. More preferably, Z 1 is —N ⁇ and Z 2 and Z 3 are —C (R 5 ) ⁇ .
  • A represents an aryl group or an aromatic heterocyclic group.
  • the aryl group of A and the aromatic heterocyclic group may further have, for example, the substituent described in the above-mentioned substituent section, and when it is substituted with two or more substituents These substituents may be the same or different.
  • A is preferably an aromatic heterocyclic group. More preferably, an imidazole ring, pyrazole ring, triazole ring, thiazole ring, oxazole ring, 1,2,4-thiadiazole ring, 1,3,4-thiadiazole ring, pyridine ring, pyrimidine ring, pyrazine ring, benzopyrazole ring, Examples include a benzothiazole ring.
  • sites polymerizable group participate in multimerization is introduced is not particularly limited, in view of synthesis suitability, R 1, R It is preferably introduced into any one or more of 2 and A, more preferably R 1 and / or A.
  • the azo dye represented by the general formula (d) is more preferably an azo dye represented by the following general formula (d ′).
  • R 1 ⁇ R 4 has the same meaning as R 1 ⁇ R 4 in the general formula (d), and preferred ranges are also the same.
  • Ra represents an electron-withdrawing group having a Hammett's substituent constant ⁇ p value of 0.2 or more
  • Rb represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent.
  • Rc represents an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an acyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, a carbamoyl group, an alkylsulfonyl group, or an arylsulfonyl group.
  • Examples of the substituent represented by Rb include the substituents described in the section of the substituent group A.
  • an azo dye represented by the following general formula (e) which is a magenta dye is also preferably exemplified.
  • R 11 to R 16 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent.
  • R 11 and R 12 , and R 15 and R 16 may be independently bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • R 11 to R 16 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent.
  • the monovalent substituent include a halogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms (here, a saturated aliphatic group including a cycloalkyl group and a bicycloalkyl group), and an alkenyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • a group (which means a cycloalkenyl group or an unsaturated aliphatic group having a double bond including a bicycloalkenyl group), an alkynyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, a carbon number A heterocyclic group having 3 to 30 carbon atoms, a cyano group, an aliphatic oxy group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, an aryloxy group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, an acyloxy group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, and a carbamoyloxy group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms
  • An aliphatic oxycarbonyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, a carbamoyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and 3 to 3 carbon atoms 0 aryl or heterocyclic azo group, and imide group, each group may further have a substituent.
  • R 11 and R 12 are preferably each independently a hydrogen atom, a heterocyclic group or a cyano group, more preferably a cyano group.
  • R 13 and R 14 are preferably each independently a hydrogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group, and more preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group.
  • R 15 and R 16 are preferably each independently a hydrogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group, and more preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group.
  • R 13 R in terms of synthesis compatibility. It is preferably introduced into any one or more of 15 and R 16 , more preferably R 13 and / or R 15 , and still more preferably R 13 .
  • the azo dye represented by the general formula (e) is more preferable.
  • azo dye examples include yellow dyes represented by the following general formula (g), general formula (I-1), general formula (I-2), and general formula (V) (their tautomers). (Including the body).
  • R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent
  • R 35 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an acyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, or a carbamoyl group.
  • Z 30 and Z 31 each independently represent —C (R 36 ) ⁇ or —N ⁇
  • R 36 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • a 31 represents an aryl group or an aromatic heterocyclic group.
  • R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent, and examples thereof include the substituents described in the above-mentioned Substituent Group A section, preferably an aryl group and a heterocyclic group, and more preferably a phenyl group.
  • R 35 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group (preferably a linear, branched or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 36 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 12 carbon atoms, such as methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl , Butyl, isobutyl, t-butyl, hexyl, 2-ethylhexyl, dodecyl, cyclopropyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, 1-adamantyl), an alkenyl group (preferably having 2 to 24 carbon atoms, more preferably alkenyl having 2 to 12 carbon atoms) Groups such as vinyl, allyl, 3-buten-1-yl), aryl groups (preferably aryl groups having 6 to 36 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 18 carbon atoms such as phenyl, naphthyl), hetero A cyclic group (preferably a heterocyclic group having 1 to 24 carbon
  • a methoxycarbonyl group for example, a methoxycarbonyl group, an ethoxycarbonyl group), or a carbamoyl group (preferably a carbamoyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms, for example, N, N-dimethylcarbamoyl).
  • a carbamoyl group preferably a carbamoyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms, for example, N, N-dimethylcarbamoyl.
  • Z 30 and Z 31 each independently represent —C (R 36 ) ⁇ or —N ⁇ , and R 36 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • R 36 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • the substituent for R 36 include the substituents described in the above-mentioned Substituent group A section.
  • R 36 is a further substitutable group, for example, it may be substituted with the substituent described in the above-mentioned Substituent group A, and may be substituted with two or more substituents. In some cases, the substituents may be the same or different.
  • Z 30 and Z 31 Z 30 is preferably —N ⁇ and Z 31 is —C (R 36 ) ⁇ .
  • a 31 has the same meaning as A in the general formula (d), and the preferred embodiment is also the same.
  • Ri 1 , Ri 2 and Ri 3 each independently represent a monovalent substituent.
  • a represents an integer of 0 to 5. When a is 2 or more, they may be connected by two adjacent Ri 1 to form a condensed ring.
  • b and c each independently represents an integer of 0 to 4. When b and c are 1 or more, they may be connected by two adjacent Ri 1 to form a condensed ring.
  • a 32 represents the following general formula (IA), general formula (IB), or general formula (IC).
  • R42 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group.
  • R 43 represents a monovalent substituent.
  • R 44 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group.
  • R 44 and R 45 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group.
  • T represents an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom.
  • R 46 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group.
  • R 47 represents a monovalent substituent.
  • Examples of the monovalent substituent represented by Ri 1 , Ri 2 and Ri 3 in the general formula (I-1) and the general formula (I-2) include the substituents mentioned in the section of the substituent group A. More specifically, the monovalent substituent is an alkyl group (preferably a linear, branched or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 5 carbon atoms such as methyl, Ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl, isobutyl, t-butyl, hexyl, 2-ethylhexyl, dodecyl, cyclopropyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, 1-adamantyl), aryl group (preferably having 6 to 36 carbon atoms, more preferably carbon number) 6-18 aryl groups, for example, phenyl, naphthyl, sulfonamido groups), alkenyl groups (straight chain, branched chain
  • R 42 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group, and particularly preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms and a phenyl group.
  • Examples of the monovalent substituent represented by R 43 include the substituents mentioned in the above-mentioned Substituent group A, and particularly preferred are a cyano group and a carbamoyl group.
  • R 44 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group, and particularly preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms and a phenyl group.
  • T represents an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom, and an oxygen atom is preferable.
  • R 44 and R 45 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group, and particularly preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms and a phenyl group.
  • R 46 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group, and particularly preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms and a phenyl group.
  • Examples of the monovalent substituent represented by R 47 include the substituents mentioned in the above-mentioned Substituent Group A section, preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group and an aryl group, particularly an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms and a phenyl group. Groups are preferred.
  • Mv represents Cr or Co.
  • Rv 1 represents an oxygen atom or —COO—.
  • Rv 2 and Rv 3 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group.
  • v represents an integer of 0 to 4.
  • Rv 4 represents a monovalent substituent. When v is 2 or more, adjacent Rv 4 may be connected to each other to form a ring.
  • Rv 2 and Rv 3 are particularly preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms or a phenyl group.
  • Examples of the monovalent substituent represented by Rv 4 include the substituents mentioned in the above-mentioned Substituent Group A section, particularly preferably an alkyl group, an aryl group, a nitro group, a sulfamoyl group, and a sulfo group. Most preferred are 5 alkyl groups, phenyl groups, and nitro groups.
  • the azo dyes represented by the general formula (I-1), the general formula (I-2), and the general formula (V) are preferable as the yellow dye.
  • cyanine dye a partial structure derived from a cyanine dye (cyanine compound). Details of these can be referred to the descriptions in paragraph numbers 0191 to 0201 of JP 2013-28764 A, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
  • Subphthalocyanine Dye One embodiment of the cation having a dye structure according to the present invention is one having a subphthalocyanine dye structure. Details of these can be referred to the description of paragraph numbers 0242 to 0250 in JP 2013-28764 A, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
  • the cation having a dye structure used in the present invention may have a squarylium dye structure. Details of these can be referred to the descriptions in paragraph numbers 0202 to 0223 of JP2013-28764A, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • a hydrogen atom in the dye structure may be substituted with a substituent selected from the following substituent group A unless departing from the spirit of the present invention.
  • substituent group A examples of the substituent that the dye may have include a halogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, a cycloalkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a cyano group, a hydroxyl group, a nitro group, and a carboxyl group.
  • a halogen atom for example, a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, an iodine atom
  • a linear or branched alkyl group a linear or branched substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms
  • a cycloalkyl group preferably substituted with 3 to 30 carbon atoms or Examples thereof include unsubstituted cycloalkyl groups such as cyclohexyl and cyclopentyl, and polycycloalkyl groups such as bicycloalkyl groups (preferably substituted or unsubstituted bicycloalkyl groups having 5 to 30 carbon atoms
  • Linear or branched alkenyl group (straight or branched substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group, preferably an alkenyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, such as vinyl, allyl, prenyl, geranyl, oleyl), cycloalkenyl A group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkenyl group having 3 to 30 carbon atoms such as 2-cyclopenten-1-yl and 2-cyclohexen-1-yl, and a polycycloalkenyl group such as bicyclo An alkenyl group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted bicycloalkenyl group having 5 to 30 carbon atoms such as bicyclo [2,2,1] hept-2-en-1-yl, bicyclo [2,2,2] Octo-2-en-4-yl) and tricycloalkenyl groups, with monocyclic cycloalkenyl groups being particularly preferred.
  • Cycloalkenyl group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, e.g., ethynyl, propargyl, trimethylsilylethynyl group),
  • An aryl group preferably a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, such as phenyl, p-tolyl, naphthyl, m-chlorophenyl, o-hexadecanoylaminophenyl
  • a heterocyclic group preferably 5 to 7-membered substituted or unsubstituted, saturated or unsaturated, aromatic or non-aromatic, monocyclic or condensed heterocyclic group, more preferably the ring-constituting atom is selected from carbon atom, nitrogen atom and sulfur atom
  • a heterocyclic group having at least one hetero atom of any one of a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom and a sulfur atom more preferably a 5- or 6-membered aromatic heterocyclic group having 3 to 30 carbon atoms
  • alkoxy group preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms such as methoxy, ethoxy, isopropoxy, tert-butoxy, n-octyloxy, 2-methoxyethoxy
  • aryloxy group preferably Is a substituted or unsubstituted aryloxy group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, such as phenoxy, 2-methylphenoxy, 2,4-di-tert-amylphenoxy, 4-tert-butylphenoxy, 3-nitrophenoxy, 2-tetradecanoylaminophenoxy
  • silyloxy group preferably a silyloxy group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, such as trimethylsilyloxy, tert-butyldimethylsilyloxy
  • a heterocyclic oxy group preferably having a carbon number of 2 to 30 substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic oxy groups , Heterocyclic portion is preferably described
  • An acyloxy group (preferably a formyloxy group, a substituted or unsubstituted alkylcarbonyloxy group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted arylcarbonyloxy group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, such as formyloxy, acetyloxy , Pivaloyloxy, stearoyloxy, benzoyloxy, p-methoxyphenylcarbonyloxy), a carbamoyloxy group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted carbamoyloxy group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms such as N, N-dimethylcarbamoyloxy, N, N-diethylcarbamoyloxy, morpholinocarbonyloxy, N, N-di-n-octylaminocarbonyloxy, Nn-octylcarbamoyloxy), an alkoxycarbonyloxy group (preferably a substituent having 2
  • amino group preferably an amino group, a substituted or unsubstituted alkylamino group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted arylamino group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, or a heterocyclic amino group having 0 to 30 carbon atoms
  • amino, methylamino, dimethylamino, anilino, N-methyl-anilino, diphenylamino, N-1,3,5-triazin-2-ylamino acylamino group (preferably formylamino group, carbon number A substituted or unsubstituted alkylcarbonylamino group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted arylcarbonylamino group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, such as formylamino, acetylamino, pivaloylamino, lauroylamino, benzoylamino, 3, 4,5-tri-n-oc
  • Aryloxycarbonylamino group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted aryloxycarbonylamino group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms, such as phenoxycarbonylamino, p-chlorophenoxycarbonylamino, mn-octyloxyphenoxycarbonylamino)
  • Sulfamoylamino group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted sulfamoylamino group having 0 to 30 carbon atoms such as sulfamoylamino, N, N-dimethylaminosulfonylamino, Nn-octylamino Sulfonylamino), alkyl or arylsulfonylamino group (preferably substituted or unsubstituted alkylsulfonylamino group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted arylsulfonylamino group having 6 to 30 carbon atom
  • alkylthio group preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkylthio group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms such as methylthio, ethylthio, n-hexadecylthio
  • arylthio group preferably a substituted or unsubstituted arylthio group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms
  • the heterocyclic portion described in the above is preferably, for example, 2-benzothiazolylthio, 1-phenyltetrazol-5-ylthio), a sulfamoyl group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted sulfamoyl group having 0 to 30 carbon atoms, N-ethylsulfamoyl, N- (3-dodecyloxypropyl) sulfur Moil, N, N- dimethylsulfamoyl, N- acetyl sulfamoyl, N- benzoylsulfamoyl, N- (
  • alkyl or arylsulfinyl group preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkylsulfinyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted arylsulfinyl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, such as methylsulfinyl, ethylsulfinyl, phenylsulfinyl, p-methylphenylsulfinyl
  • an alkyl or arylsulfonyl group preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkylsulfonyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted arylsulfonyl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, such as methylsulfonyl , Ethylsulfonyl, phenylsulfonyl, p-methylphenylsulfonyl
  • alkoxycarbonyl group preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkoxycarbonyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms such as methoxycarbonyl, ethoxycarbonyl, tert-butoxycarbonyl, n-octadecyloxycarbonyl
  • a carbamoyl group preferably having a carbon number 1-30 substituted or unsubstituted carbamoyl such as carbamoyl, N-methylcarbamoyl, N, N-dimethylcarbamoyl, N, N-di-n-octylcarbamoyl, N- (methylsulfonyl) carbamoyl), aryl or hetero
  • a ring azo group preferably a substituted or unsubstituted arylazo group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic azo group having 3 to 30 carbon atoms (the heterocycle portion is the heterocycle
  • a phosphinyloxy group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted phosphinyloxy group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, such as diphenoxyphosphinyloxy, dioctyloxyphosphinyloxy), a phosphinylamino group ( Preferably, it is a substituted or unsubstituted phosphinylamino group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, for example, dimethoxyphosphinylamino, dimethylaminophosphinylamino), a silyl group (preferably a substitution having 3 to 30 carbon atoms) Or, an unsubstituted silyl group, for example, trimethylsilyl, tert-butyldimethylsilyl, phenyldimethylsilyl).
  • those having a hydrogen atom may have a hydrogen atom portion in the functional group substituted with any of the above groups.
  • functional groups that can be introduced as a substituent include an alkylcarbonylaminosulfonyl group, an arylcarbonylaminosulfonyl group, an alkylsulfonylaminocarbonyl group, and an arylsulfonylaminocarbonyl group.
  • methylsulfonylaminocarbonyl examples thereof include p-methylphenylsulfonylaminocarbonyl, acetylaminosulfonyl and benzoylaminosulfonyl groups.
  • the counter anion may be in the same repeating unit of the dye multimer or outside the same repeating unit.
  • the counter anion is in the same repeating unit refers to a case where a cation and an anion are bonded via a covalent bond in a repeating unit having a dye structure.
  • “outside the same repeating unit” means a case other than the above. For example, it refers to the case where the cation and the anion are not bonded via a covalent bond and exist as separate compounds, or the case where the cation and the anion are contained as independent repeating units of the dye multimer.
  • the anion in the present invention is preferably a non-nucleophilic anion.
  • the non-nucleophilic anion may be an organic anion or an inorganic anion, and an organic anion is preferred.
  • Examples of the counter anion used in the present invention include known non-nucleophilic anions described in paragraph No. 0075 of JP-A-2007-310315, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • the non-nucleophilic property means a property that does not nucleophilic attack the dye by heating.
  • the first embodiment of the anion in the present invention is a case in which the counter anion is in the same repeating unit. Specifically, in the repeating unit having a dye structure, And an anion are bonded via a covalent bond.
  • the anion moiety is at least selected from —SO 3 ⁇ , —COO ⁇ , —PO 4 ⁇ , a structure represented by the following general formula (A1), and a structure represented by the following general formula (A2).
  • 1 type is preferable and at least 1 sort (s) selected from the structure represented by the following general formula (A1) and the structure represented by the following general formula (A2) is more preferable.
  • the general formula (A1) is more preferably represented by the following general formula (A1-1).
  • Formula (A1-1) (In General Formula (A1-1), R 1 and R 2 each independently represent —SO 2 — or —CO—, and X 1 and X 2 each independently represent an alkylene group or an arylene group. )
  • R 1 and R 2 of the general formula (A1) in the same meaning as R 1 and R 2, and preferred ranges are also the same.
  • X 1 represents an alkylene group
  • the alkylene group preferably has 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • X 1 represents an arylene group
  • the number of carbon atoms in the arylene group is preferably 6 to 18, more preferably 6 to 12, and still more preferably 6.
  • X 1 has a substituent, it is preferably substituted with a fluorine atom.
  • X 2 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, and an alkyl group is preferable.
  • the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 8 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 6, more preferably 1 to 3, and particularly preferably 1.
  • X 2 has a substituent, it is preferably substituted with a fluorine atom.
  • R 3 represents —SO 2 — or —CO—.
  • R 4 and R 5 each independently represents —SO 2 —, —CO— or —CN.
  • Preferably representing the at least two R 3 ⁇ R 5 is -SO 2 - - In formula (A2), at least one of R 3 ⁇ R 5 -SO 2 more preferably represents.
  • a part of L 1 includes a portion represented by the general formula (A1).
  • the case is given as a preferred example. Specific examples in this case include (a-xt-1), (a-xt-5), and (a-xt-6) among examples of repeating units having a dye structure described later.
  • the case where the skeleton of the dye multimer used in the present invention includes the structural unit represented by the general formula (B) is also given as an example. Specific examples of this case include (B-dp-1), (B-mp-1), (B-xt-1), (B-xt-) among the examples of repeating units having a dye structure described later. 2) is exemplified.
  • the second embodiment of the anion in the present invention is a case where the counter anion is outside the same repeating unit, and the cation and the anion do not bind via a covalent bond and exist as separate molecules.
  • the anion in this case include a fluorine anion, a chlorine anion, a bromine anion, an iodine anion, a cyanide ion, a perchlorate anion, and a non-nucleophilic anion, and a non-nucleophilic anion is preferable.
  • the non-nucleophilic counter anion may be an organic anion or an inorganic anion, and an organic anion is preferred.
  • Examples of the counter anion used in the present invention include known non-nucleophilic anions described in paragraph No. 0075 of JP-A-2007-310315, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • 4-n1 R a is an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms or carbon number Represents an aryl group of 6 to 10, n1 represents 1 to 4)
  • PF n2 R P (6-n2) ⁇ R P represents a fluorinated alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and n2 represents 1 to 6
  • AN-1 a structure represented by the following general formula (AN-1) is preferable.
  • X 1 and X 2 each independently represents a fluorine atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms having a fluorine atom.
  • X 1 and X 2 are bonded to each other to form a ring. It may be formed.
  • X 1 and X 2 each independently represent a fluorine atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms having a fluorine atom, preferably a fluorine atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms having a fluorine atom, More preferred is a perfluoroalkyl group of ⁇ 10, more preferred is a perfluoroalkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and a trifluoromethyl group is particularly preferred.
  • a structure represented by the following general formula (AN-2) is preferable.
  • X 3 , X 4 and X 5 each independently represents a fluorine atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • X 3 , X 4 and X 5 are each independently the same as X 1 and X 2 , and the preferred range is also the same.
  • the tetraarylborate anion which is a non-nucleophilic counter anion, is preferably a compound represented by the following general formula ((AN-5)).
  • AN-5 Ar 1 , Ar 2 , Ar 3 and Ar 4 each independently represents an aryl group.
  • Ar 1 , Ar 2 , Ar 3 and Ar 4 are each independently preferably an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably an aryl group having 6 to 14 carbon atoms, and further an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms preferable.
  • the aryl group represented by Ar 1 , Ar 2 , Ar 3 and Ar 4 may have a substituent.
  • a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, a carbonyl group, a carbonyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, a sulfo group, a sulfonamide group, a nitro group and the like can be mentioned, and a halogen atom and an alkyl group are preferable, A fluorine atom and an alkyl group are more preferred, and a fluorine atom and a C 1-4 perfluoroalkyl group are more preferred.
  • Ar 1 , Ar 2 , Ar 3 and Ar 4 are each independently more preferably a phenyl group having a halogen atom and / or an alkyl group having a halogen atom, and a phenyl group having a fluorine atom and / or an alkyl group having fluorine. Is more preferable.
  • the non-nucleophilic counter anion is also —B (CN) n1 (OR a ) 4-n1 (R a represents an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms or an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms, and n1 represents It is preferably an integer of 1 to 4.
  • Ra as the alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • R a as the aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms is preferably a phenyl group or a naphthyl group.
  • n1 is preferably 1 to 3, and more preferably 1 to 2.
  • the non-nucleophilic counter anion is further —PF 6 R P (6-n2) ⁇ (R P represents a fluorinated alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and n2 represents an integer of 1 to 6) It is preferable that R P is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and further preferably a perfluoroalkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms. n2 is preferably an integer of 1 to 4, and more preferably 1 or 2.
  • the mass per molecule of the non-nucleophilic counter anion used in the present invention is preferably 100 to 1,000, and more preferably 200 to 500.
  • the dye multimer of the present invention may contain only one kind of non-nucleophilic counter anion, or may contain two or more kinds.
  • non-nucleophilic counter anion used in the present invention are shown below, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
  • the anion may be a multimer.
  • the multimer in this case include a multimer containing a repeating unit containing an anion and not containing a repeating unit derived from a dye structure containing a cation.
  • the repeating unit containing an anion can mention the repeating unit containing the anion described in 3rd embodiment mentioned later as a preferable example.
  • the multimer containing an anion may have a repeating unit other than the repeating unit containing an anion. As such a repeating unit, other repeating units that may be contained in the dye multimer used in the present invention to be described later are exemplified as preferred examples.
  • the anion may be present in the side chain of the dye multimer, may be present in the main chain, or has a counter anion in both the main chain and the side chain. Also good. Preferably, it is a side chain.
  • the repeating unit containing an anion include a repeating unit represented by the general formula (C) and a repeating unit represented by the general formula (D).
  • X 1 represents the main chain of the repeating unit.
  • L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • Anion represents a counter anion.
  • X 1 represents the main chain of the repeating unit, and usually represents a linking group formed by a polymerization reaction, and is preferably (meth) acrylic, styrene, vinyl, etc. More preferred are (meth) acrylic and styrene, and (meth) acrylic is more preferred.
  • Two sites represented by * are repeating units.
  • L 1 represents a divalent linking group
  • an alkylene group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms (methylene group, ethylene group, trimethylene group, propylene group, butylene group, etc.), an arylene group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms (phenylene group, Naphthalene group, etc.), heterocyclic linking group, —CH ⁇ CH—, —O—, —S—, —C ( ⁇ O) —, —CO—, —NR—, —CONR—, —OC—, —SO —, —SO 2 — and a linking group obtained by combining two or more thereof are preferred.
  • R represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group each independently.
  • L 1 is a single bond, an alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms (preferably — (CH 2 ) n— (n is an integer of 5 to 10), an arylene group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms (preferably phenylene group, naphthalene group) is, - NH -, - CO 2 -, - O- and -SO 2 - is a divalent linking group formed by combining two or more preferred.
  • Formula (D) (In general formula (D), L 2 and L 3 each independently represent a single bond or a divalent linking group. Anion represents the counter anion.)
  • L 2 and L 3 represent a divalent linking group, an alkylene group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, an arylene group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, a heterocyclic linking group, —CH ⁇ CH— , —O—, —S—, —C ( ⁇ O) —, —CO 2 —, —NR—, —CONR—, —O 2 C—, —SO—, —SO 2 — and combinations of two or more thereof
  • the linking group is preferred.
  • R represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group each independently.
  • L 2 is preferably an arylene group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms (particularly a phenylene group).
  • the arylene group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms is preferably substituted with a fluorine atom.
  • L 3 is preferably a group composed of a combination of an arylene group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms (particularly a phenylene group) and —O—, and at least one arylene group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms is substituted with a fluorine atom. It is preferable.
  • the anion portion described in the case where the counter anion is in the same repeating unit is exemplified as a preferable anion.
  • repeating units having a dye structure that are preferably used in the present invention are shown below. Needless to say, the present invention is not limited to these examples.
  • X ⁇ represents a counter anion. Moreover, although a part of X is shown in a state where the anion structure is not dissociated, it goes without saying that the dissociated state is also included in the present invention.
  • the dye multimer of the present invention may have another functional group in the dye structure portion of the dye multimer described above. Examples of other functional groups include polymerizable groups and alkali-soluble groups.
  • the dye multimer of the present invention may contain other repeating units in addition to the repeating unit containing the dye structure described above. Other repeating units may have a functional group.
  • the repeating unit containing at least 1 sort (s) of a polymeric group and an alkali-soluble group (preferably acid group) is illustrated. That is, the dye multimer of the present invention may have other repeating units in addition to the repeating units represented by the general formulas (A) to (C).
  • One type of other repeating unit may be included in one dye multimer, or two or more types may be included.
  • the dye multimer of the present invention may have other functional groups in the dye multimer represented by the general formulas (A) to (D). Details of these will be described below.
  • the dye multimer of the present invention preferably contains a polymerizable group.
  • One type of polymerizable group may be included, or two or more types may be included.
  • the dye structure may contain a polymerizable group, or may contain other parts.
  • the dye structure preferably includes a polymerizable group. By adopting such a configuration, the heat resistance tends to be improved.
  • dye structure contain a polymeric group is also preferable.
  • the polymerizable group a known polymerizable group that can be crosslinked by a radical, acid, or heat can be used.
  • a group containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond a cyclic ether group (epoxy group, oxetane group),
  • a methylol group and the like can be mentioned, a group containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond is particularly preferred, a (meth) acryloyl group is more preferred, glycidyl (meth) acrylate and 3,4-epoxycyclohexylmethyl (meth) acrylate ( More preferred is a (meth) acryloyl group.
  • the polymerizable group is preferably contained as a repeating unit having a polymerizable group in the dye multimer, and more preferably as a repeating unit having an ethylenically unsaturated bond. That is, an example of a preferred embodiment of the dye multimer of the present invention is an embodiment in which the dye multimer contains a repeating unit containing a dye monomer and a repeating unit having a polymerizable group, and the repeating contains a dye monomer. More preferably, the unit contains a repeating unit having an ethylenically unsaturated bond.
  • a method for introducing a polymerizable group (1) a method in which a dye multimer is modified and introduced with a polymerizable group-containing compound, and (2) a method in which a dye monomer and a polymerizable group-containing compound are copolymerized and introduced. Etc. Details will be described below.
  • a method of introducing a dye multimer after modifying it with a polymerizable group-containing compound As a method for introducing the dye multimer by modifying with a polymerizable group-containing compound, a known method can be used without any particular limitation. For example, (a) a method of reacting a carboxylic acid contained in a dye multimer with an unsaturated bond-containing epoxy compound, and (b) a method of reacting a hydroxyl group or amino group of the dye multimer with an unsaturated bond-containing isocyanate compound. (C) A method of reacting an epoxy compound contained in the dye multimer with an unsaturated bond-containing carboxylic acid compound is preferable from the viewpoint of production.
  • Examples of the unsaturated bond-containing epoxy compound in the method of reacting the carboxylic acid of the dye multimer with the unsaturated bond-containing epoxy compound include glycidyl methacrylate, glycidyl acrylate, allyl glycidyl ether, and 3,4-epoxy. Examples thereof include cyclohexylmethyl acrylate and 3,4-epoxy-cyclohexylmethyl methacrylate, and glycidyl methacrylate and 3,4-epoxycyclohexylmethyl methacrylate are particularly preferable because of excellent crosslinkability and storage stability.
  • Known conditions can be used as the reaction conditions.
  • the unsaturated bond-containing isocyanate compound in the method of reacting the hydroxyl group or amino group of the dye multimer with the unsaturated bond-containing isocyanate compound 2-isocyanatoethyl methacrylate, 2-isocyanatoethyl atacrylate 1,1-bis (acryloyloxymethyl) ethyl isocyanate and the like, and 2-isocyanatoethyl methacrylate is preferred because of its excellent crosslinkability and storage stability.
  • Known conditions can be used as the reaction conditions.
  • any carboxylic acid compound having a known (meth) acryloyloxy group may be used. Although it can be used without particular limitation, methacrylic acid and acrylic acid are preferred, and methacrylic acid is particularly preferred because of excellent crosslinkability and storage stability. Known conditions can be used as the reaction conditions.
  • a method in which a dye monomer and a polymerizable group-containing compound are copolymerized and introduced (2) As a method for copolymerizing and introducing a dye monomer and a polymerizable group-containing compound, known methods can be used without any particular limitation.
  • D A radically polymerizable dye monomer and a radical can be used.
  • a method of copolymerizing a polymerizable group-containing compound that can be polymerized, and a method (e) a method of copolymerizing a dye monomer capable of polyaddition and a polymerizable group-containing compound capable of polyaddition are preferred.
  • a radically polymerizable polymerizable group-containing compound in a method of copolymerizing a radically polymerizable dye monomer and a radically polymerizable polymerizable group-containing compound an allyl group-containing compound (for example, (meth)) Allyl acrylate), epoxy group-containing compounds (for example, glycidyl (meth) acrylate, 3,4-epoxy-cyclohexylmethyl (meth) acrylate, etc.), oxetane group-containing compounds (for example, 3-methyl-3-oxetanylmethyl (meth) ) Acrylate, etc.) and methylol group-containing compounds (for example, N- (hydroxymethyl) acrylamide etc.), and epoxy compounds and oxetane compounds are particularly preferred.
  • Known conditions can be used as the reaction conditions.
  • a method for introducing a polymerizable group a method of reacting a carboxylic acid possessed by a dye multimer, a carboxylic acid possessed by a dye multimer, and an unsaturated bond-containing epoxy compound is particularly preferable.
  • the amount of polymerizable group possessed by the dye multimer is preferably 0.1 to 2.0 mmol, more preferably 0.2 to 1.5 mmol, and more preferably 0.3 to 1. Particularly preferred is 0 mmol.
  • the ratio of the repeating unit containing a repeating unit having a polymerizable group in the dye multimer is, for example, preferably 5 to 50 mol, and more preferably 10 to 20 mol with respect to 100 mol of all repeating units.
  • the method for introducing the polymerizable group a method in which the carboxylic acid contained in the dye multimer, the carboxylic acid contained in the dye multimer, and the unsaturated bond-containing epoxy compound is particularly preferred.
  • repeating unit having a polymerizable group examples include the following. However, the present invention is not limited to these.
  • a dye monomer having an ethylenically unsaturated bond is preferable, among which a methacryloyl group, an acryloyl group, a styryl group, or a vinyloxy group is preferable, and a methacryloyl group.
  • An acryloyl group is more preferable, and a methacryloyl group is more preferable.
  • Alkali-soluble group of dye multimer An example of the alkali-soluble group that the dye multimer in the present invention may have is an acid group, and examples of the acid group include a carboxylic acid group, a sulfonic acid group, and a phosphoric acid group.
  • the alkali-soluble group (preferably an acid group) is preferably contained in the dye multimer as a repeating unit having an alkali-soluble group (acid group).
  • the acid value of the dye multimer of the present invention is preferably 0.5 to 1.50 mmol / g, preferably 0.5 to 1.0 mmol / g. More preferably.
  • the acid value of the dye multimer can be calculated from the average content of acid groups in the dye multimer, for example.
  • the resin which has a desired acid value can be obtained by changing content of the monomer unit containing the acid group which comprises a pigment
  • a method for introducing an alkali-soluble group into a dye multimer a method in which an alkali-soluble group is introduced into a dye monomer in advance, and a monomer other than a dye monomer having an alkali-soluble group ((meth) acrylic acid, acrylic Modified product of caprolactone of acid, modified product of succinic anhydride of 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate, modified product of phthalic anhydride of 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate, 1,2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate 2-cyclohexanedicarboxylic acid anhydride modified product, carboxylic acid-containing monomer such as styrene carboxylic acid, itaconic acid, maleic acid, norbornene carboxylic acid, phosphoric acid-containing monomer such as acid phosphooxyethyl methacrylate, vinyl phosphonic acid, vinyl sulfonic acid, Such as 2-acrylamido-2-methylsulf
  • the amount of the alkali-soluble group contained in the dye multimer is preferably from 0.3 mmol to 2.0 mmol, more preferably from 0.4 mmol to 1.5 mmol, more preferably from 0.5 mmol to 1. Particularly preferred is 0 mmol.
  • the dye multimer used in the present invention has a repeating unit having 2 to 20 unsubstituted alkyleneoxy chains in the side chain as a repeating unit containing an alkali-soluble group (hereinafter referred to as “(b) repeating unit”. May be included).
  • the number of repeating alkyleneoxy chains in the repeating single (b) position is preferably 2 to 10, more preferably 2 to 15, and even more preferably 2 to 10.
  • One alkyleneoxy chain is represented by — (CH 2 ) n O—, where n is an integer, n is preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 5, and even more preferably 2 or 3.
  • the group consisting of repeating 2 to 20 unsubstituted alkyleneoxy chains may contain only one kind of alkyleneoxy chain, or may contain two or more kinds.
  • the repeating unit (b) is preferably represented by the following general formula (P).
  • General formula (P) (In general formula (P), X 1 represents a linking group formed by polymerization, L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. P represents a group containing a group consisting of repeating alkyleneoxy chains. .)
  • X 1 and L 1 in the general formula (P) have the same meanings as X 1 and L 1 in formula (A), and preferred ranges are also the same.
  • P represents a group containing a group consisting of repeating alkyleneoxy chains, more preferably a group consisting of repeating alkyleneoxy chains-terminal atom or terminal group.
  • the terminal atom or terminal group is preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group or a hydroxyl group, more preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, a phenyl group or a hydroxyl group, a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, a phenyl group and A hydroxyl group is more preferred, and a hydrogen atom is particularly preferred.
  • the ratio of the repeating unit having a group composed of repeating 2 to 20 unsubstituted alkyleneoxy chains in the side chain is 2 to 20 mol% of all repeating units constituting the dye multimer. Preferably, 5 to 15 mol% is more preferable. Examples of the repeating unit (b) that can be used in the present invention are shown below, but it goes without saying that the present invention is not limited thereto.
  • the dye multimer used in the present invention may have at least one of the structures represented by the formulas (1) to (5) in the same molecule.
  • the structures represented by the formulas (1) to (5) function as a light stabilizer, thereby contributing to an improvement in exposure sensitivity and light resistance.
  • adhesiveness can be improved.
  • the generation of development residues can be suppressed.
  • the dye structure and the formula (1) are obtained by using a dye multimer having at least one of the dye structure and the structures represented by the formulas (1) to (5) in the same molecule.
  • the distance from the structure represented by (5) becomes closer. As a result, it is considered that exposure sensitivity and light resistance can be improved more effectively.
  • the structure represented by the formula (1) is generically called a hindered amine system.
  • the structure represented by the formula (2) is generically called a hindered phenol type.
  • the structure represented by the formula (3) is generically called a benzotriazole type.
  • the structure represented by the formula (4) is generically referred to as a hydroxybenzophenone series.
  • the structure represented by the formula (5) is generically called a triazine type.
  • R 1 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, an aryl group, or an oxy radical.
  • R 2 and R 3 each independently represents an alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms.
  • R 2 and R 3 may be bonded to each other to represent an aliphatic ring having 4 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • “*” Represents a bond between the structure represented by the formula (1) and the polymer skeleton.
  • R 1 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, an aryl group or an oxy radical, preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms may be linear, branched or cyclic, but is preferably linear.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms is preferably 1 to 12, more preferably 1 to 8, still more preferably 1 to 3, and particularly preferably 1 or 2.
  • the alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms is preferably a methyl group or an ethyl group, and more preferably a methyl group.
  • the aryl group may have 6 to 18 carbon atoms, 6 to 12 carbon atoms, or 6 to 6 carbon atoms. Specific examples include a phenyl group.
  • R 1 in Formula (1) represents an alkyl group or aryl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms
  • the alkyl group or aryl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms may have a substituent or unsubstituted It may be.
  • the substituent which may have include a substituent selected from the substituent group A described above.
  • R 2 and R 3 each independently represent a methyl group or an ethyl group, and a methyl group is preferred.
  • R 2 and R 3 may be bonded to each other to represent an aliphatic ring having 4 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • “*” represents a bond between the structure represented by formula (1) and the polymer skeleton.
  • the bond may be bonded to the polymer backbone directly or via a linking group, or may be bonded to the above-described dye structure directly or via a linking group.
  • “*” in formula (1) is preferably bonded to the polymer backbone directly or via a linking group.
  • “*” represents a bond between the structure represented by the formula (2) and the polymer skeleton.
  • R 4 represents the following formula (2A), an alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms or an aryl group.
  • R 5 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms.
  • “*” Represents a bond between the structure represented by the formula (2) and the polymer skeleton.
  • R 4 represents the above formula (2A), an alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms or an aryl group, and is preferably represented by formula (2A).
  • the alkyl group and aryl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms have the same meaning as the alkyl group and aryl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms described for R 1 in formula (1).
  • “*” Is synonymous with the bond described in the formula (1).
  • each R 6 independently represents an alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms.
  • “*” Represents a bond between the structure represented by the formula (2A) and the structure represented by the formula (2).
  • R 6 has the same meaning as the alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms explained for R 1 in the formula (1).
  • “*” Is synonymous with the bond described in the formula (1).
  • the specific example of the structure represented by Formula (2) is shown, it is not limited to these.
  • “*” represents a bond between the structure represented by the formula (2) and the polymer skeleton.
  • R 7 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms; n1 represents an integer of 0 to 3. When n1 is 2 or 3, each R 7 may be the same or different.
  • “*” Represents a bond between the structure represented by the formula (3) and the polymer skeleton.
  • R 7 has the same meaning as the alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms explained for R 1 in the formula (1).
  • n1 represents an integer of 0 to 3, preferably an integer of 0 to 2, and preferably 0 or 1.
  • “*” is synonymous with the bond described in formula (1).
  • “*” represents a bond between the structure represented by the formula (3) and the polymer skeleton.
  • R 8 and R 9 each independently represents an alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms.
  • n2 represents an integer of 0 to 3.
  • n3 represents an integer of 0 to 4.
  • each R 8 may be the same or different.
  • n3 represents an integer of 2 to 4, each R 9 may be the same or different.
  • “*” Represents a bond between the structure represented by the formula (4) and the polymer skeleton.
  • R 8 and R 9 have the same meaning as the alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms explained for R 1 in the formula (1).
  • n2 represents an integer of 0 to 3, preferably an integer of 0 to 2, and preferably 0 or 1.
  • n3 represents an integer of 0 to 4, preferably an integer of 0 to 2, and preferably 0 or 1.
  • “*” is synonymous with the bond described in formula (1).
  • the specific example of the structure represented by Formula (4) is shown, it is not limited to these.
  • “*” represents a bond between the structure represented by the formula (4) and the polymer skeleton.
  • R 10 to R 12 each independently represents an alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms or an alkoxy group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms.
  • n4 to n6 each independently represents an integer of 0 to 5.
  • n7 to n9 each independently represents 0 or 1, and at least one of n7 to n9 represents 1.
  • “*” Represents a bond between the structure represented by the formula (5) and the polymer skeleton.
  • R 10 in formula (5) represents an alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, it is synonymous with the alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms described for R 1 in formula (1), and has 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group is preferably a methyl group.
  • R 10 represents an alkoxy group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, the alkoxy group preferably has 1 to 6 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 5 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • R 10 in Formula (5) may further have a substituent. Examples of the substituent which may have include a substituent selected from the substituent group A described above.
  • N4 in the formula (5) represents an integer of 0 to 5, preferably an integer of 1 to 4, and preferably 2 or 3.
  • R 10 may be the same or different.
  • R 11 in formula (5) has the same meaning as R 10 in formula (5), and the preferred range is also the same.
  • N5 in the formula (5) represents an integer of 0 to 5, preferably an integer of 1 to 3, and preferably 1 or 2.
  • R 12 in formula (5) has the same meaning as R 10 in formula (5), and the preferred range is also the same.
  • N6 in the formula (5) represents an integer of 0 to 5, preferably an integer of 0 to 3, and preferably 0 or 1.
  • each R 12 may be the same or different.
  • n7 to n9 each independently represents 0 or 1, and at least one of n7 to n9 represents 1. In particular, it is preferable that only n7 represents 1, only n8 and n9 represent 1, or only one of n7, n8 and n9 represents 1.
  • “*” is synonymous with the bond described in formula (1).
  • the specific example of the structure represented by Formula (5) is shown, it is not limited to these. In the following structure, “*” represents a bond between the structure represented by the formula (5) and the polymer skeleton.
  • the structural unit having at least one of the structures represented by formulas (1) to (5) possessed by the dye multimer used in the present invention is preferably represented by the following formula (E).
  • X 3 has the same meaning as X 1 in general formula (A).
  • L 4 has the same meaning as L 1 in formula (A).
  • Z 1 represents a structure represented by the above formulas (1) to (5). Specific examples of structural units having at least one of the structures represented by formulas (1) to (5) are shown below, but the present invention is not limited to these.
  • the dye multimer may not have a structural unit having at least one of the structures represented by the formulas (1) to (5), but if it has, 100 masses of all the structural units in the dye multimer. %,
  • the content of the structural unit having at least one of the structures represented by formulas (1) to (5) is preferably 0.5 to 20% by mass, and 1 to 10% by mass More preferably, the content is 1 to 5% by mass.
  • Other functional groups possessed by the dye multimer include development accelerators such as lactones, acid anhydrides, amides, —COCH 2 CO—, cyano groups, long chain and cyclic alkyl groups, aralkyl groups, aryl groups, polyalkylene oxide groups And an affinity adjusting group such as a hydroxyl group, a maleimide group, and an amino group, and the like, which can be appropriately introduced.
  • the introduction method include a method of introducing the dye monomer in advance and a method of copolymerizing the monomer having the functional group.
  • repeating unit having an alkali-soluble group or other functional group that the dye multimer may have are shown below, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the dye multimer is preferably 3,000 to 30,000, and more preferably 5,000 to 25,000. Further, the ratio [(Mw) / (Mn)] of the weight average molecular weight (Mw) to the number average molecular weight (Mn) of the dye multimer is preferably 1.0 to 2.0, preferably 1.1 to 2.0. The ratio is more preferably 1.8, and particularly preferably 1.1 to 1.5.
  • the glass transition temperature (Tg) of the dye multimer according to the present invention is preferably 50 ° C. or higher, and more preferably 100 ° C. or higher. Further, the 5% weight loss temperature by thermogravimetric analysis (TGA measurement) is preferably 120 ° C. or higher, more preferably 150 ° C. or higher, and further preferably 200 ° C. or higher. By being in this region, when applying the colored composition of the present invention to the production of a color filter or the like, it becomes possible to reduce the concentration change caused by the heating process.
  • the dye multimer used in the present invention contains a repeating unit having a dye structure and another repeating unit, it is preferably a random polymer of a polymerizable compound containing a dye and another polymerizable compound.
  • a random polymer By using a random polymer, the dye structure is present randomly in the dye multimer, and the effects of the present invention are more effectively exhibited.
  • the molar extinction coefficient of the dye multimer used in the colored composition of the present invention is preferably as high as possible from the viewpoint of coloring power.
  • the reduced viscosity of the dye multimer used in the colored composition of the present invention is preferably 4.0 to 10.0, more preferably 5.0 to 9.0, from the viewpoint of color transfer, More preferably, it is 0.0 to 7.0.
  • the reduced viscosity can be measured using, for example, an Ubbelohde viscometer. 1.0-1.8
  • the dye multimer according to the present invention is preferably a compound that is soluble in the following organic solvents.
  • the organic solvent include esters (eg, methyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl lactate, butyl acetate, methyl 3-methoxypropionate), ethers (eg, methyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl cellosolve acetate).
  • the dye multimer may be used alone or in combination of two or more. When using 2 or more types, it is preferable that the total amount corresponds to content mentioned later.
  • the content of the dye multimer in the colored composition of the present invention is set in consideration of the content ratio with the pigment described later.
  • the mass ratio of the dye multimer to the pigment is preferably 0.1 to 5, more preferably 0.2 to 2, and still more preferably 0.3 to 1.
  • the colored composition of the present invention is preferably used for forming a colored layer of a color filter.
  • the coloring composition used in the present invention contains a polymerizable compound, and may further contain a photopolymerization initiator and a pigment.
  • the colored composition of the present invention is preferably a composition containing the dye multimer of the present invention, a polymerizable compound, an alkali-soluble resin, a photopolymerization initiator and a pigment.
  • components such as a surfactant and a solvent may be included.
  • dye multimer of this invention a polymeric compound, a photoinitiator, and a pigment is preferable. Furthermore, components such as a surfactant and a solvent may be included. Details of these will be described below.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention contains a polymerizable compound.
  • a polymerizable compound that can be cross-linked by radicals, acids, and heat can be used, and examples thereof include polymerizable compounds containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond, cyclic ether (epoxy, oxetane), methylol and the like.
  • the polymerizable compound is suitably selected from compounds having at least one terminal ethylenically unsaturated bond, preferably two or more, from the viewpoint of sensitivity. Among them, a polyfunctional polymerizable compound having 4 or more functional groups is preferable, and a polyfunctional polymerizable compound having 5 or more functional groups is more preferable.
  • Such compound groups are widely known in the industrial field, and these can be used without particular limitation in the present invention. These may be in any chemical form such as, for example, monomers, prepolymers, ie dimers, trimers and oligomers or mixtures thereof and multimers thereof.
  • the polymeric compound in this invention may be used individually by 1 type, and may use 2 or more types together.
  • examples of monomers and prepolymers thereof include unsaturated carboxylic acids (for example, acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, isocrotonic acid, maleic acid, etc.), esters thereof, amides, And multimers thereof, preferably esters of unsaturated carboxylic acids and aliphatic polyhydric alcohol compounds, amides of unsaturated carboxylic acids and aliphatic polyhydric amine compounds, and multimers thereof. is there.
  • unsaturated carboxylic acids for example, acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, isocrotonic acid, maleic acid, etc.
  • esters thereof for example, acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, isocrotonic acid, maleic acid, etc.
  • esters thereof for example, acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, isocrotonic acid, maleic acid, etc.
  • a dehydration condensation reaction product with a functional carboxylic acid is also preferably used.
  • an addition reaction product of an unsaturated carboxylic acid ester or amide having an electrophilic substituent such as an isocyanate group or an epoxy group with a monofunctional or polyfunctional alcohol, amine, or thiol, and a halogen group A substitution reaction product of an unsaturated carboxylic acid ester or amide having a detachable substituent such as a tosyloxy group and a monofunctional or polyfunctional alcohol, amine or thiol is also suitable.
  • compounds described in paragraphs [0095] to [0108] of JP-A-2009-288705 can be preferably used in the present invention.
  • a compound having an ethylenically unsaturated group having a boiling point of 100 ° C. or higher under normal pressure and having at least one addition-polymerizable ethylene group is also preferable.
  • examples include monofunctional acrylates and methacrylates such as polyethylene glycol mono (meth) acrylate, polypropylene glycol mono (meth) acrylate, and phenoxyethyl (meth) acrylate; polyethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, trimethylolethanetri ( (Meth) acrylate, neopentyl glycol di (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol tri (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol tetra (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate, hexanedio
  • polyfunctional acrylates and methacrylates such as epoxy acrylates which are reaction products of epoxy resin and (meth) acrylic acid, and mixtures thereof.
  • a polyfunctional (meth) acrylate obtained by reacting a polyfunctional carboxylic acid with a compound having a cyclic ether group such as glycidyl (meth) acrylate and an ethylenically unsaturated group can also be used.
  • fluorene rings described in JP 2010-160418 A, JP 2010-129825 A, JP 4364216 A, etc., and ethylenically unsaturated groups.
  • a compound having two or more functions, a cardo resin can also be used.
  • radically polymerizable monomers represented by the following general formulas (MO-1) to (MO-5) can also be suitably used.
  • T is an oxyalkylene group
  • the terminal on the carbon atom side is bonded to R.
  • n is 0 to 14, and m is 1 to 8.
  • a plurality of R and T present in one molecule may be the same or different.
  • at least one of a plurality of R is —OC ( ⁇ O) CH ⁇ CH 2 or —OC A group represented by ( ⁇ O) C (CH 3 ) ⁇ CH 2 is represented.
  • Specific examples of the polymerizable compounds represented by the above general formulas (MO-1) to (MO-5) include the compounds described in paragraph numbers 0248 to 0251 of JP-A-2007-2699779. It can be suitably used in the invention.
  • dipentaerythritol triacrylate (KAYARAD D-330; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) and dipentaerythritol tetraacrylate (KAYARAD D-320 as commercially available products) are available as polymerizable compounds.
  • dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate commercially available KAYARAD D-310; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.
  • dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate commercially available product KAYARAD DPHA; Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.
  • Ethyleneoxy-modified dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate commercially available product is A-DPH-12E; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.
  • oligomer types can also be used.
  • the polymerizable compound is a polyfunctional monomer and may have an acid group such as a carboxyl group, a sulfonic acid group, or a phosphoric acid group. If the ethylenic compound has an unreacted carboxyl group as in the case of a mixture as described above, this can be used as it is. Non-aromatic carboxylic acid anhydrides may be reacted to introduce acid groups.
  • non-aromatic carboxylic acid anhydride examples include tetrahydrophthalic anhydride, alkylated tetrahydrophthalic anhydride, hexahydrophthalic anhydride, alkylated hexahydrophthalic anhydride, succinic anhydride, anhydrous Maleic acid is mentioned.
  • the monomer having an acid group is an ester of an aliphatic polyhydroxy compound and an unsaturated carboxylic acid, and a non-aromatic carboxylic acid anhydride is reacted with an unreacted hydroxyl group of the aliphatic polyhydroxy compound.
  • a polyfunctional monomer having an acid group is preferable, and in this ester, the aliphatic polyhydroxy compound is pentaerythritol and / or dipentaerythritol.
  • Examples of commercially available products include M-510 and M-520 as polybasic acid-modified acrylic oligomers manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.
  • a preferable acid value of the polyfunctional monomer having an acid group is 0.1 mgKOH / g to 40 mgKOH / g, and particularly preferably 5 mgKOH / g to 30 mgKOH / g.
  • the acid value of the polyfunctional monomer is too low, the developing dissolution properties are lowered, and if it is too high, the production and handling are difficult, the photopolymerization performance is lowered, and the curability such as the surface smoothness of the pixel is deteriorated. Therefore, when two or more polyfunctional monomers having different acid groups are used in combination, or when a polyfunctional monomer having no acid group is used in combination, the acid groups as the entire polyfunctional monomer should be adjusted to fall within the above range. Is preferred.
  • polyfunctional monomer which has a caprolactone structure is not particularly limited as long as it has a caprolactone structure in the molecule.
  • R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • m represents a number of 1 or 2
  • “*” represents a bond
  • R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and “*” represents a bond.
  • the polyfunctional monomer which has a caprolactone structure can be used individually or in mixture of 2 or more types.
  • the specific monomer in the present invention is preferably at least one selected from the group of compounds represented by the following general formula (Z-4) or (Z-5).
  • each E is independently — ((CH 2 ) yCH 2 O) — or — ((CH 2 ) yCH (CH 3 ) O) —.
  • Each represents independently an integer of 0 to 10
  • each X independently represents an acryloyl group, a methacryloyl group, a hydrogen atom, or a carboxyl group.
  • the total number of acryloyl groups and methacryloyl groups is 3 or 4
  • each m independently represents an integer of 0 to 10
  • the total of each m is an integer of 0 to 40. is there. However, when the total of each m is 0, any one of X is a carboxyl group.
  • the total number of acryloyl groups and methacryloyl groups is 5 or 6, each n independently represents an integer of 0 to 10, and the total of each n is an integer of 0 to 60. However, when the total of each n is 0, any one of X is a carboxyl group.
  • m is preferably an integer of 0 to 6, and more preferably an integer of 0 to 4.
  • the total of each m is preferably an integer of 2 to 40, more preferably an integer of 2 to 16, and particularly preferably an integer of 4 to 8.
  • n is preferably an integer of 0 to 6, and more preferably an integer of 0 to 4.
  • the total of each n is preferably an integer of 3 to 60, more preferably an integer of 3 to 24, and particularly preferably an integer of 6 to 12.
  • — ((CH 2 ) yCH 2 O) — or — ((CH 2 ) yCH (CH 3 ) O) — represents an oxygen atom side.
  • a form in which the terminal of X is bonded to X is preferred.
  • the compounds represented by the general formula (Z-4) or the general formula (Z-5) may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • a form in which all six Xs are acryloyl groups is preferable.
  • the total content of the compound represented by the general formula (Z-4) or the general formula (Z-5) in the polymerizable compound is preferably 20% by mass or more, and more preferably 50% by mass or more.
  • the compound represented by the general formula (Z-4) or the general formula (Z-5) is a conventionally known process, in which ethylene oxide or propylene oxide is ring-opened to pentaerythritol or dipentaerythritol. It can be synthesized from a step of bonding a ring-opening skeleton by an addition reaction and a step of introducing a (meth) acryloyl group by reacting, for example, (meth) acryloyl chloride with a terminal hydroxyl group of the ring-opening skeleton. Each step is a well-known step, and a person skilled in the art can easily synthesize a compound represented by the general formula (i) or (ii).
  • pentaerythritol derivatives and / or dipentaerythritol derivatives are more preferable.
  • Specific examples include compounds represented by the following formulas (a) to (f) (hereinafter also referred to as “exemplary compounds (a) to (f)”).
  • exemplary compounds (a), (f) b), (e) and (f) are preferred.
  • Examples of commercially available polymerizable compounds represented by the general formulas (Z-4) and (Z-5) include SR-494, a tetrafunctional acrylate having four ethyleneoxy chains manufactured by Sartomer, Nippon Kayaku Examples thereof include DPCA-60, which is a hexafunctional acrylate having six pentyleneoxy chains, and TPA-330, which is a trifunctional acrylate having three isobutyleneoxy chains.
  • polymerizable compound examples include urethane acrylates as described in JP-B-48-41708, JP-A-51-37193, JP-B-2-32293, and JP-B-2-16765. Also suitable are urethane compounds having an ethylene oxide skeleton as described in JP-B-58-49860, JP-B-56-17654, JP-B-62-39417, and JP-B-62-39418. Furthermore, addition polymerizable compounds having an amino structure or a sulfide structure in the molecule described in JP-A-63-277653, JP-A-63-260909, and JP-A-1-105238 are described as polymerizable compounds.
  • polymerizable compounds include urethane oligomers UAS-10, UAB-140 (Sanyo Kokusaku Pulp Co., Ltd.), UA-7200 (Shin Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd., DPHA-40H (Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), UA- 306H, UA-306T, UA-306I, AH-600, T-600, AI-600 (manufactured by Kyoeisha) and the like.
  • cyclic ether examples include those having an epoxy group such as bisphenol A type epoxy resin, JER-827, JER-828, JER-834, JER-1001, JER-1002, JER-1003.
  • JER-1055, JER-1007, JER-1009, JER-1010 manufactured by Japan Epoxy Resin Co., Ltd.
  • EPICLON 860, EPICLON 1050, EPICLON 1051, EPICLON 1055 manufactured by DIC Corporation
  • bisphenol F As type epoxy resins, JER-806, JER-807, JER-4004, JER-4005, JER-4007, JER-4010 (above, manufactured by Japan Epoxy Resins Co., Ltd.), EPICLON83 EPICLON 835 (above, manufactured by DIC Corporation), LCE-21, RE-602S (above, manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), etc., and phenol novolac type epoxy resins such as JER-152, JER-154, JER -157S70, JER-157S65 (above, manufactured by Japan Epoxy Resin Co., Ltd.), EPICLONICN-740, EPICLON N-740,
  • the details of usage methods can be arbitrarily set according to the final performance design of a coloring composition.
  • a structure having a high unsaturated group content per molecule is preferable, and in many cases, a bifunctional or higher functionality is preferable.
  • those having three or more functional groups are preferable, and further, different numbers of functional groups / different polymerizable groups (for example, acrylic acid ester, methacrylic acid ester, styrenic compound, A method of adjusting both sensitivity and strength by using a combination of vinyl ether compounds) is also effective.
  • a tri- or higher functional polymerizable compound having a different ethylene oxide chain length in that the developability of the colored composition can be adjusted and an excellent pattern forming ability can be obtained.
  • the compatibility and dispersibility with other components (for example, photopolymerization initiators, dispersions, alkali-soluble resins, etc.) contained in the colored composition are also selected and used as a polymerizable compound. This is an important factor. For example, compatibility may be improved by using a low-purity compound or using two or more kinds in combination.
  • a specific structure may be selected from the viewpoint of improving adhesion to a hard surface such as a support.
  • the content of the polymerizable compound in the colored composition of the present invention is preferably 0.1% by mass to 90% by mass, and 1.0% by mass to 60% by mass with respect to the total solid content in the colored composition. % By mass is more preferable, and 2.0% by mass to 40% by mass is particularly preferable.
  • the composition of the present invention may contain only one type of polymerizable compound or two or more types. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may contain a polyfunctional thiol compound having two or more mercapto groups in the molecule for the purpose of promoting the reaction of the polymerizable compound.
  • the polyfunctional thiol compound is preferably a secondary alkanethiol, and particularly preferably a compound having a structure represented by the following general formula (I).
  • Formula (I) (In the formula, n represents an integer of 2 to 4, and L represents a divalent to tetravalent linking group.)
  • the linking group L is preferably an aliphatic group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms, particularly preferably n is 2 and L is an alkylene group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • Specific examples of the polyfunctional thiol compound include compounds represented by the following structural formulas (II) to (IV), and a compound represented by (II) is particularly preferable. These polyfunctional thiols can be used alone or in combination.
  • the polyfunctional thiol content in the composition of the present invention is in the range of 0.3 to 8.9% by weight, more preferably 0.8 to 6.4% by weight, based on the total solid content excluding the solvent. It is desirable to add at. Polyfunctional thiols may be added for the purpose of improving stability, odor, resolution, developability, adhesion and the like.
  • the colored composition of the present invention preferably contains a photopolymerization initiator from the viewpoint of further improving sensitivity.
  • the photopolymerization initiator is not particularly limited as long as it has the ability to initiate polymerization of the polymerizable compound, and can be appropriately selected from known photopolymerization initiators. For example, those having photosensitivity to visible light from the ultraviolet region are preferable. Further, it may be an activator that generates some action with a photoexcited sensitizer and generates an active radical, or may be an initiator that initiates cationic polymerization according to the type of monomer.
  • the photopolymerization initiator preferably contains at least one compound having a molecular extinction coefficient of at least about 50 within a range of about 300 nm to 800 nm (more preferably 330 nm to 500 nm).
  • Examples of the photopolymerization initiator include halogenated hydrocarbon derivatives (for example, those having a triazine skeleton, those having an oxadiazole skeleton, etc.), acylphosphine compounds such as acylphosphine oxide, hexaarylbiimidazole, oxime.
  • Examples include oxime compounds such as derivatives, organic peroxides, thio compounds, ketone compounds, aromatic onium salts, ketoxime ethers, aminoacetophenone compounds, hydroxyacetophenone, and the like, with oxime compounds being preferred.
  • trihalomethyltriazine compounds trihalomethyltriazine compounds, benzyldimethylketal compounds, ⁇ -hydroxyketone compounds, ⁇ -aminoketone compounds, acylphosphine compounds, phosphine oxide compounds, metallocene compounds, oxime compounds, triallylimidazole dimers, oniums
  • compounds selected from the group consisting of compounds, benzothiazole compounds, benzophenone compounds, acetophenone compounds and derivatives thereof, cyclopentadiene-benzene-iron complexes and salts thereof, halomethyloxadiazole compounds, and 3-aryl substituted coumarin compounds are preferred.
  • trihalomethyltriazine compounds More preferred are trihalomethyltriazine compounds, ⁇ -aminoketone compounds, acylphosphine compounds, phosphine oxide compounds, oxime compounds, triallylimidazole dimers, triarylimidazole compounds, benzimidazole compounds, onium compounds, benzophenone compounds, and acetophenone compounds.
  • At least one compound selected from the group consisting of a trihalomethyltriazine compound, an ⁇ -aminoketone compound, an oxime compound, a triallylimidazole compound, a benzophenone compound, a triarylimidazole compound, and a benzimidazole compound is particularly preferable.
  • the triarylimidazole compound may be a mixture with benzimidazole.
  • examples of the trihalomethyltriazine compound include the following compounds. Note that Ph is a phenyl group.
  • Examples of the triarylimidazole compound and the benzimidazole compound include the following compounds.
  • a commercially available product can be used as the trihalomethyltriazine compound, for example, TAZ-107 (manufactured by Midori Chemical Co., Ltd.) can also be used.
  • TAZ-107 manufactured by Midori Chemical Co., Ltd.
  • TAZ-107 manufactured by Midori Chemical Co., Ltd.
  • stepper exposure is used for curing exposure, but this exposure machine may be damaged by halogen, and it is necessary to keep the addition amount of a polymerization initiator low.
  • an oxime compound as a photopolymerization initiator for forming a fine pattern such as a solid-state imaging device.
  • halogenated hydrocarbon compound having a triazine skeleton examples include those described in Wakabayashi et al., Bull. Chem. Soc. Japan, 42, 2924 (1969), a compound described in British Patent No. 1388492, a compound described in JP-A-53-133428, a compound described in German Patent No. 3333724, F.I. C. J. Schaefer et al. Org. Chem. 29, 1527 (1964), compound described in JP-A-62-258241, compound described in JP-A-5-281728, compound described in JP-A-5-34920, US Pat. No. 4,221,976 And the compounds described in paragraph No. 0075 of JP2013-077009A, and the like.
  • acridine derivatives are exemplified as photopolymerization initiators other than those described above.
  • Specific examples include the compounds described in paragraph No. 0076 of JP2013-077009A, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
  • Examples of the ketone compounds include compounds described in paragraph No. 0077 of JP2013-077009A, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
  • hydroxyacetophenone compounds As the photopolymerization initiator, hydroxyacetophenone compounds, aminoacetophenone compounds, and acylphosphine compounds can also be suitably used. More specifically, for example, aminoacetophenone initiators described in JP-A-10-291969 and acylphosphine oxide initiators described in Japanese Patent No. 4225898 can also be used.
  • hydroxyacetophenone-based initiator IRGACURE-184, DAROCUR-1173, IRGACURE-500, IRGACURE-2959, IRGACURE-127 (trade names: all manufactured by BASF) can be used.
  • aminoacetophenone-based initiator commercially available products IRGACURE-907, IRGACURE-369, and IRGACURE-379 (trade names: all manufactured by BASF) can be used.
  • aminoacetophenone-based initiator compounds described in JP-A-2009-191179 whose absorption wavelength is matched with a long wave light source of 365 nm or 405 nm can also be used.
  • acylphosphine initiator commercially available products such as IRGACURE-819 and DAROCUR-TPO (trade names: both manufactured by BASF) can be used.
  • More preferable examples of the photopolymerization initiator include oxime compounds.
  • Specific examples of the oxime compound include compounds described in JP-A No. 2001-233842, compounds described in JP-A No. 2000-80068, and compounds described in JP-A No. 2006-342166.
  • oxime compounds include J.M. C. S. Perkin II (1979) pp. 1653-1660), J.M. C. S. Perkin II (1979) pp. 156-162, Journal of Photopolymer Science and Technology (1995) pp. 202-232, compounds described in JP-A No. 2000-66385, compounds described in JP-A Nos. 2000-80068, JP-T 2004-534797, JP-A No. 2006-342166, and the like.
  • IRGACURE-OXE01 manufactured by BASF
  • IRGACURE-OXE02 manufactured by BASF
  • TR-PBG-304 manufactured by Changzhou Strong Electronic New Materials Co., Ltd.
  • oxime compounds other than those described above compounds described in JP-A-2009-519904 in which an oxime is linked to the carbazole N-position, compounds described in US Pat. No. 7,626,957 in which a hetero substituent is introduced into the benzophenone moiety, Compounds described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-15025 and US Patent Publication No. 2009-292039, in which a nitro group is introduced into the dye moiety, a ketoxime compound described in International Patent Publication No. 2009-131189, a triazine skeleton and an oxime skeleton in the same molecule
  • a compound described in US Pat. No. 7,556,910 contained therein a compound described in JP-A-2009-221114 having an absorption maximum at 405 nm and good sensitivity to a g-line light source, and the like may be used.
  • cyclic oxime compounds described in JP-A-2007-231000 and JP-A-2007-322744 can also be suitably used for the cyclic oxime compounds described in JP-A-2007-231000 and JP-A-2007-322744.
  • cyclic oxime compounds in particular, cyclic oxime compounds fused to carbazole dyes described in JP2010-32985A and JP2010-185072A have high light absorptivity and high sensitivity. preferable.
  • the compounds described in JP-A-2009-242469 having an unsaturated bond at a specific site of the oxime compound can be preferably used because high sensitivity can be achieved by regenerating the active radical from the polymerization inert radical. it can.
  • oxime compounds having a specific substituent as disclosed in JP 2007-26997A and oxime compounds having a thioaryl group as disclosed in JP 2009-191061 A are particularly preferred.
  • the oxime compound that is a photopolymerization initiator is preferably a compound represented by the following general formula (OX-1).
  • the oxime N—O bond may be an (E) oxime compound, a (Z) oxime compound, or a mixture of (E) and (Z) isomers. .
  • R and B each independently represent a monovalent substituent
  • A represents a divalent organic group
  • Ar represents an aryl group.
  • the monovalent substituent represented by R is preferably a monovalent nonmetallic atomic group.
  • the monovalent nonmetallic atomic group include an alkyl group, an aryl group, an acyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkylthiocarbonyl group, and an arylthiocarbonyl group.
  • these groups may have one or more substituents.
  • the substituent mentioned above may be further substituted by another substituent.
  • substituents examples include a halogen atom, an aryloxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group or an aryloxycarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, an acyl group, an alkyl group, and an aryl group.
  • the oxime compound has a maximum absorption wavelength in a wavelength region of 350 nm to 500 nm, preferably has an absorption wavelength in a wavelength region of 360 nm to 480 nm, and particularly preferably has a high absorbance at 365 nm and 455 nm.
  • the molar extinction coefficient at 365 nm or 405 nm of the oxime compound is preferably 1,000 to 300,000, more preferably 2,000 to 300,000, more preferably 5,000 to 200, from the viewpoint of sensitivity. Is particularly preferred.
  • a known method can be used for the molar extinction coefficient of the compound. Specifically, for example, 0.01 g of an ultraviolet-visible spectrophotometer (Varian Inc., Carry-5 spctrophotometer) is used with an ethyl acetate solvent. It is preferable to measure at a concentration of / L.
  • the content of the photopolymerization initiator is preferably 0.1% by mass or more and 50% by mass or less based on the total solid content of the color composition, More preferably, they are 0.5 mass% or more and 30 mass% or less, More preferably, they are 1 mass% or more and 20 mass% or less. Within this range, better sensitivity and pattern formability can be obtained.
  • the composition of the present invention may contain only one type of photopolymerization initiator, or may contain two or more types. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
  • the colored composition of the present invention may further contain a colorant other than the above-mentioned dye multimer. Specifically, it is preferable to contain a pigment.
  • a pigment As the pigment used in the present invention, various conventionally known inorganic pigments or organic pigments can be used, and organic pigments are preferably used.
  • the pigment preferably has a high transmittance.
  • inorganic pigments include metal compounds represented by metal oxides, metal complex salts, and the like. Specifically, iron, cobalt, aluminum, cadmium, lead, copper, titanium, magnesium, chromium, zinc, antimony, etc. And metal oxides of the above metals.
  • organic pigment for example, C. I. Pigment yellow 11,24,31,53,83,93,99,108,109,110,138,139,147,150,151,154,155,167,180,185,199; C. I. Pigment orange 36, 38, 43, 71; C. I. Pigment red 81,105,122,149,150,155,171,175,176,177,209,220,224,242,254,255,264,270; C. I. Pigment violet 19, 23, 32, 39; C. I. Pigment Blue 1, 2, 15, 15: 1, 15: 3, 15: 6, 16, 22, 60, 66; C. I. Pigment green 7, 36, 37, 58; C. I. Pigment brown 25, 28; C. I. Pigment black 1, 7; Etc.
  • organic pigments can be used alone or in various combinations in order to adjust the spectrum and increase the color purity. Specific examples of the above combinations are shown below.
  • a red pigment an anthraquinone pigment, a perylene pigment, a diketopyrrolopyrrole pigment alone or at least one of them, a disazo yellow pigment, an isoindoline yellow pigment, a quinophthalone yellow pigment or a perylene red pigment , Etc.
  • an anthraquinone pigment C.I. I. Pigment red 177
  • perylene pigments include C.I. I. Pigment red 155, C.I. I.
  • Pigment Red 224, and diketopyrrolopyrrole pigments include C.I. I. Pigment Red 254, and C.I. I. Mixing with Pigment Yellow 139 is preferred.
  • the mass ratio of the red pigment to the yellow pigment is preferably 100: 5 to 100: 50. When the ratio is 100: 4 or less, it is difficult to suppress the light transmittance from 400 nm to 500 nm. When the ratio is 100: 51 or more, the main wavelength tends to be closer to the short wavelength, and the color resolution may not be improved. In particular, the mass ratio is optimally in the range of 100: 10 to 100: 30. In the case of a combination of red pigments, it can be adjusted in accordance with the required spectrum.
  • a halogenated phthalocyanine pigment can be used alone, or a mixture thereof with a disazo yellow pigment, a quinophthalone yellow pigment, an azomethine yellow pigment, or an isoindoline yellow pigment can be used.
  • a disazo yellow pigment e.g., a quinophthalone yellow pigment, an azomethine yellow pigment, or an isoindoline yellow pigment
  • C.I. I. Pigment Green 7, 36, 37 and C.I. I. Pigment yellow 83 e. I. Pigment yellow 138, C.I. I. Pigment yellow 139, C.I. I. Pigment yellow 150, C.I. I. Pigment yellow 180 or C.I. I. Mixing with Pigment Yellow 185 is preferred.
  • the mass ratio of green pigment to yellow pigment is preferably 100: 5 to 100: 150.
  • the mass ratio is particularly preferably in the range of 100: 30 to 100: 120.
  • a phthalocyanine pigment can be used alone, or a mixture of this with a dioxazine purple pigment can be used.
  • C.I. I. Pigment blue 15: 6 and C.I. I. Mixing with pigment violet 23 is preferred.
  • the mass ratio of the blue pigment to the violet pigment is preferably 100: 0 to 100: 100, more preferably 100: 10 or less.
  • the pigment for the black matrix carbon, titanium black, iron oxide, titanium oxide alone or a mixture thereof is used, and a combination of carbon and titanium black is preferable.
  • the mass ratio of carbon to titanium black is preferably in the range of 100: 0 to 100: 60.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention preferably contains a pigment other than black, and is suitable for a blue pigment.
  • the primary particle size of the pigment is preferably 100 nm or less from the viewpoint of color unevenness and contrast, and is preferably 5 nm or more from the viewpoint of dispersion stability.
  • the primary particle size of the pigment is more preferably 5 to 75 nm, further preferably 5 to 55 nm, and particularly preferably 5 to 35 nm.
  • the primary particle size of the pigment can be measured by a known method such as an electron microscope.
  • the pigment is preferably a pigment selected from anthraquinone pigments, diketopyrrolopyrrole pigments, phthalocyanine pigments, quinophthalone pigments, isoindoline pigments, azomethine pigments, and dioxazine pigments.
  • C.I. I. Pigment red 177 anthraquinone pigment
  • C.I. I. Pigment red 254 diketopyrrolopyrrole pigment
  • C.I. I. Pigment green 7, 36, 58 C.I. I. Pigment Blue 15: 6 (phthalocyanine pigment
  • C.I. I. Pigment yellow 138 quinophthalone pigment
  • C.I. I. Pigment yellow 139,185 isoindoline pigment
  • C.I. I. Pigment yellow 150 azomethine pigment
  • C.I. I. Pigment violet 23 dioxazine pigment
  • the content of the pigment is preferably 10% by mass to 70% by mass, more preferably 20% by mass to 60% by mass, and still more preferably 25%, based on all components excluding the solvent contained in the coloring composition. % By mass to 50% by mass.
  • the composition of the present invention may contain only one type of pigment or two or more types of pigment. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
  • dyes other than the above-mentioned dye multimers and pigments other than those described above may be included.
  • the chemical structure uses dyes such as pyrazole azo, anilino azo, triphenylmethane, anthraquinone, benzylidene, oxonol, pyrazolotriazole azo, pyridone azo, cyanine, phenothiazine, pyrrolopyrazole azomethine. it can.
  • dyes such as pyrazole azo, anilino azo, triphenylmethane, anthraquinone, benzylidene, oxonol, pyrazolotriazole azo, pyridone azo, cyanine, phenothiazine, pyrrolopyrazole azomethine. it can.
  • a pigment dispersant can be used in combination as desired.
  • pigment dispersants include polymer dispersants [for example, polyamidoamines and salts thereof, polycarboxylic acids and salts thereof, high molecular weight unsaturated acid esters, modified polyurethanes, modified polyesters, and modified poly (meth) acrylates. , (Meth) acrylic copolymers, naphthalenesulfonic acid formalin condensates], and surfactants such as polyoxyethylene alkyl phosphate esters, polyoxyethylene alkyl amines, alkanol amines, and pigment derivatives, etc. Can do.
  • the polymer dispersant can be further classified into a linear polymer, a terminal-modified polymer, a graft polymer, and a block polymer according to the structure.
  • Examples of the terminal-modified polymer having an anchor site to the pigment surface include a polymer having a phosphate group at the terminal described in JP-A-3-112992, JP-A-2003-533455, and the like. Examples thereof include polymers having a sulfonic acid group at the terminal end described in JP-A-273191 and the like, and polymers having a partial skeleton of an organic dye and a heterocyclic ring described in JP-A-9-77994. In addition, polymers having two or more pigment surface anchor sites (acid groups, basic groups, organic dye partial skeletons, heterocycles, etc.) introduced at the polymer ends described in JP-A-2007-277514 are also available. It is preferable because of excellent dispersion stability.
  • Examples of the graft polymer having an anchor site to the pigment surface include a polyester-based dispersant, and specific examples thereof include JP-A-54-37082, JP-A-8-507960, Reaction products of poly (lower alkyleneimine) and polyester described in JP-A-2009-258668, etc., reaction products of polyallylamine and polyester described in JP-A-9-169821, etc., JP-A-10-339949 A copolymer of a macromonomer and a nitrogen atom monomer described in JP-A-2004-37986, International Publication Pamphlet WO 2010/110491, JP-A-2003-238837, JP-A-2008-9426, JP-A Graphs having partial skeletons and heterocyclic rings of organic dyes described in JP-A-2008-81732 Type polymer, and a copolymer of a macromonomer and acid group-containing monomers described in JP 2010-106268 Publication.
  • amphoteric dispersion resin having a basic group and an acidic group described in JP-A-2009-203462 has the dispersibility and dispersion stability of the pigment dispersion and the developability exhibited by the color composition using the pigment dispersion. From the viewpoint of
  • Macromonomer AA-6 (terminal) manufactured by Toa Gosei Co., Ltd. Polymethyl methacrylate having a methacryloyl group), AS-6 (polystyrene having a methacryloyl group at the end group), AN-6S (a copolymer of styrene and acrylonitrile having a methacryloyl group at the end group), AB-6 ( Polybutyl acrylate whose end group is a methacryloyl group), Plaxel FM5 manufactured by Daicel Chemical Industries, Ltd.
  • JP-A-2-27 examples thereof include a polyester-based macromonomer described in the 2009 publication.
  • a polyester-based macromonomer that is particularly excellent in flexibility and solvophilicity is particularly preferable from the viewpoint of dispersibility of the pigment dispersion, dispersion stability, and developability exhibited by the coloring composition using the pigment dispersion
  • a polyester macromonomer represented by a polyester macromonomer described in JP-A-2-272009 is particularly preferable.
  • block polymers having an anchor site to the pigment surface block polymers described in JP-A Nos. 2003-49110 and 2009-52010 are preferable.
  • the pigment dispersant that can be used in the present invention is also available as a commercial product. Specific examples thereof include “DA-7301” manufactured by Kashiwagi Kasei Co., Ltd., “Disperbyk-101 (polyamidoamine phosphate) manufactured by BYK Chemie.
  • Oligomer “Polflow No. 50E, No. 300 (acrylic copolymer) ”,“ Disparon KS-860, 873SN, 874, # 2150 (aliphatic polycarboxylic acid), # 7004 (manufactured by Enomoto Kasei Co., Ltd.) Polyether ester), DA-703-50, DA-705, DA-725 "," Demol RN, N (Naphthalenesulfonic acid formalin polycondensate), MS, C, SN-B (aromatic sulfonic acid) "manufactured by Kao Corporation Formalin polycondensate) ”,“ homogenol L-18 (polymer polycal) Acid "),” Emulgen 920, 930, 935, 985 (polyoxyethylene nonylphenyl ether) "," Acetamine 86 (stearylamine acetate) ",” Solsperse 5000 (phthalocyanine derivative) "manufactured by Nippon Lubri
  • pigment dispersants may be used alone or in combination of two or more. In the present invention, it is particularly preferable to use a combination of a pigment derivative and a polymer dispersant.
  • the pigment dispersant may be used in combination with an alkali-soluble resin together with the terminal-modified polymer, graft polymer, or block polymer having an anchor site to the pigment surface.
  • Alkali-soluble resins include (meth) acrylic acid copolymer, itaconic acid copolymer, crotonic acid copolymer, maleic acid copolymer, partially esterified maleic acid copolymer, etc., and carboxylic acid in the side chain. Examples thereof include acidic cellulose derivatives, and (meth) acrylic acid copolymers are particularly preferable.
  • An alkali-soluble resin containing is also preferred. Specifically, an alkali-soluble resin: benzyl methacrylate / methacrylic acid / methacrylic acid-2-hydroxyethyl copolymer is exemplified.
  • the total content of the pigment dispersant is preferably 1 part by weight to 80 parts by weight with respect to 100 parts by weight of the pigment, and 5 parts by weight to 70 parts by weight. More preferred is 10 parts by mass to 60 parts by mass.
  • the specific dispersion resin is preferably 50% by mass or more, more preferably 60% by mass or more, and still more preferably 70% by mass or more, among the dispersant components contained in the coloring composition.
  • the composition of the present invention may contain only one type of pigment dispersant, or two or more types of pigment dispersants. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
  • the amount used is preferably in the range of 5 to 100 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the pigment, and 10 to 80 parts by mass. More preferred is the range of parts.
  • the amount of the pigment derivative used is preferably in the range of 1 to 30 parts by mass in terms of mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the pigment. The range is more preferable, and the range of 5 to 15 parts by mass is particularly preferable.
  • the total content of the coloring agent and the dispersing agent component is 50% by mass or more and 90% by mass or less with respect to the total solid content constituting the coloring composition. Is more preferable, 55 mass% or more and 85 mass% or less is more preferable, and 60 mass% or more and 80 mass% or less is further more preferable.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention preferably further contains an alkali-soluble resin.
  • the molecular weight of the alkali-soluble resin is not particularly defined, but it is preferable that Mw is 5000 to 100,000. Further, Mn is preferably 1000 to 20,000.
  • the alkali-soluble resin is a linear organic polymer, and promotes at least one alkali-solubility in a molecule (preferably a molecule having an acrylic copolymer or a styrene copolymer as a main chain). It can be suitably selected from alkali-soluble resins having a group. From the viewpoint of heat resistance, polyhydroxystyrene resins, polysiloxane resins, acrylic resins, acrylamide resins, and acryl / acrylamide copolymer resins are preferable. From the viewpoint of development control, acrylic resins and acrylamide resins are preferable. Resins and acrylic / acrylamide copolymer resins are preferred.
  • Examples of the group that promotes alkali solubility include a carboxyl group, a phosphoric acid group, a sulfonic acid group, and a phenolic hydroxyl group.
  • the group is soluble in an organic solvent and developed with a weak alkaline aqueous solution. Possible are preferable, and (meth) acrylic acid is particularly preferable.
  • These acid groups may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • Examples of the monomer capable of imparting an acid group after the polymerization include, for example, a monomer having a hydroxyl group such as 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate, a monomer having an epoxy group such as glycidyl (meth) acrylate, and 2-isocyanatoethyl (methacrylate). ) Monomers having an isocyanate group such as acrylate. These monomers for introducing an acid group may be only one type or two or more types.
  • a monomer having an acid group and / or a monomer capable of imparting an acid group after polymerization (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “monomer for introducing an acid group”) .) May be polymerized as a monomer component.
  • a treatment for imparting an acid group as described later is required after the polymerization.
  • a known radical polymerization method can be applied.
  • Polymerization conditions such as temperature, pressure, type and amount of radical initiator, type of solvent, etc. when producing an alkali-soluble resin by radical polymerization can be easily set by those skilled in the art, and the conditions are determined experimentally. It can also be done.
  • a polymer having a carboxylic acid in the side chain is preferable, such as a methacrylic acid copolymer, an acrylic acid copolymer, an itaconic acid copolymer, and a crotonic acid copolymer.
  • a copolymer of (meth) acrylic acid and another monomer copolymerizable therewith is suitable as the alkali-soluble resin.
  • examples of other monomers copolymerizable with (meth) acrylic acid include alkyl (meth) acrylates, aryl (meth) acrylates, and vinyl compounds.
  • alkyl (meth) acrylate and aryl (meth) acrylate methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, propyl (meth) acrylate, butyl (meth) acrylate, isobutyl (meth) acrylate, pentyl (meth) acrylate,
  • vinyl compounds such as hexyl (meth) acrylate, octyl (meth) acrylate, phenyl (meth) acrylate, benzyl (meth) acrylate, tolyl (meth) acrylate, naphthyl (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, styrene, ⁇ -methylstyrene, vinyltoluene, glycidyl methacrylate, acrylonitrile, vinyl acetate, N-vinylpyrrolidone, tetrahydrofurfury
  • ether dimers a compound represented by the following general formula (ED) and / or a compound represented by the following general formula (ED2) (hereinafter, these compounds may be referred to as “ether dimers”) are essential. It is also preferable to include a polymer (a) obtained by polymerizing the monomer component.
  • R 1 and R 2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 25 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
  • General formula (ED2) In general formula (ED2), R represents a hydrogen atom or an organic group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms. As a specific example of the general formula (ED2), the description in JP 2010-168539 A can be referred to.
  • the coloring composition of this invention can form the cured coating film which was very excellent also in transparency with heat resistance.
  • the hydrocarbon group having 1 to 25 carbon atoms which may have a substituent represented by R 1 and R 2 is not particularly limited.
  • Linear or branched alkyl groups such as methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, isobutyl, tert-butyl, tert-amyl, stearyl, lauryl, 2-ethylhexyl; aryl groups such as phenyl; Alicyclic groups such as cyclohexyl, tert-butylcyclohexyl, dicyclopentadienyl, tricyclodecanyl, isobornyl, adamantyl, 2-methyl-2-adamantyl; substituted with alkoxy such as 1-methoxyethyl, 1-ethoxyethyl An alkyl group substituted with an aryl group such as benzyl; and the like.
  • an acid such as methyl, ethyl, cyclohexyl, benzyl or the like, or a primary or secondary carbon substituent which is
  • ether dimer examples include dimethyl-2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, diethyl-2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, (N-propyl) -2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, di (isopropyl) -2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, di (n-butyl) ) -2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, di (isobutyl) -2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, di (tert-butyl) -2, 2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, di (tert-butyl) -2, 2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, di (tert-butyl)
  • dimethyl-2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, diethyl-2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, dicyclohexyl-2,2′- [Oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate and dibenzyl-2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate are preferred.
  • These ether dimers may be only one kind or two or more kinds.
  • the structure derived from the compound represented by the general formula (ED) may be copolymerized with other monomers.
  • alkali-soluble resin may contain the structural unit derived from the ethylenically unsaturated monomer shown by following formula (X).
  • Formula (X) (In Formula (X), R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, R 2 represents an alkylene group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms, and R 3 represents a hydrogen atom or a benzene ring which may contain a benzene ring. And represents an alkyl group of 20. n represents an integer of 1 to 15.)
  • the alkylene group of R 2 preferably has 2 to 3 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group of R 3 has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 10, and the alkyl group of R 3 may contain a benzene ring.
  • Examples of the alkyl group containing a benzene ring represented by R 3 include a benzyl group and a 2-phenyl (iso) propyl group.
  • an alkali-soluble resin having a polymerizable group In order to improve the crosslinking efficiency of the colored composition in the present invention, it is preferable to use an alkali-soluble resin having a polymerizable group.
  • an alkali-soluble resin having a polymerizable group an alkali-soluble resin containing an allyl group, a (meth) acryl group, an allyloxyalkyl group or the like in the side chain is useful.
  • Examples of the above-described polymer containing a polymerizable group include a dial NR series (manufactured by Mitsubishi Rayon Co., Ltd.), Photomer 6173 (COOH-containing polyurethane acrylic oligomer. Diamond Shamrock Co.Ltd.), Biscote R-264, KS resist 106 (all manufactured by Osaka Organic Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), Cyclomer P series, Plaxel CF200 series (all manufactured by Daicel Chemical Industries, Ltd.), Ebecryl 3800 (manufactured by Daicel UCB Co., Ltd.), and the like.
  • an alkali-soluble resin containing these polymerizable groups an isocyanate group and an OH group are reacted in advance to leave one unreacted isocyanate group and a compound containing a (meth) acryloyl group and an acrylic resin containing a carboxyl group; Urethane-modified polymerizable double bond-containing acrylic resin obtained by the above reaction, unsaturated group-containing acrylic obtained by reaction of an acrylic resin containing a carboxyl group and a compound having both an epoxy group and a polymerizable double bond in the molecule Resin, acid pendant type epoxy acrylate resin, OH group-containing acrylic resin and polymerizable double bond-containing acrylic resin obtained by reacting a polymerizable double bond, OH group-containing acrylic resin and isocyanate Resin obtained by reacting compound having polymerizable group, JP 2002-229207 A Resin obtained by basic treatment of a resin having an ester group having a leaving group such as a halogen atom or a sulf
  • alkali-soluble resin in particular, a benzyl (meth) acrylate / (meth) acrylic acid copolymer or a multi-component copolymer composed of benzyl (meth) acrylate / (meth) acrylic acid / other monomers is suitable. .
  • benzyl (meth) acrylate / (meth) acrylic acid / (meth) acrylic acid-2-hydroxyethyl copolymer copolymerized with 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate 2 described in JP-A-7-140654 -Hydroxypropyl (meth) acrylate / polystyrene macromonomer / benzyl methacrylate / methacrylic acid copolymer, 2-hydroxy-3-phenoxypropyl acrylate / polymethyl methacrylate macromonomer / benzyl methacrylate / methacrylic acid copolymer, 2-hydroxyethyl Methacrylate / polystyrene macromonomer / methyl methacrylate / methacrylic acid copolymer, 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate / polystyrene macromonomer / benzyl methacrylate / methacrylic acid copolymer, etc.
  • the acid value of the alkali-soluble resin is preferably 30 mgKOH / g to 200 mgKOH / g, more preferably 50 mgKOH / g to 150 mgKOH / g, and particularly preferably 70 mgKOH / g to 120 mgKOH / g.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the alkali-soluble resin is preferably 2,000 to 50,000, more preferably 5,000 to 30,000, and particularly preferably 7,000 to 20,000.
  • the content of the alkali-soluble resin is preferably 1% by mass to 15% by mass, more preferably 2% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the coloring composition. It is ⁇ 12% by mass, and particularly preferably 3% by mass to 10% by mass.
  • the composition of the present invention may contain only one kind of alkali-soluble resin, or may contain two or more kinds. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention is within the range that does not impair the effects of the present invention, and further includes an organic solvent, a crosslinking agent, a polymerization inhibitor, a surfactant, an organic carboxylic acid, and an organic carboxylic acid anhydride. It may contain other components such as products.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may contain an organic solvent.
  • the organic solvent is basically not particularly limited as long as the solubility of each component and the coating property of the coloring composition are satisfied, but in particular, the solubility, coating property, and safety of ultraviolet absorbers, alkali-soluble resins and dispersants, etc. It is preferable to select in consideration of the properties. Moreover, when preparing the coloring composition in this invention, it is preferable that at least 2 type of organic solvent is included.
  • organic solvents examples include esters such as ethyl acetate, n-butyl acetate, isobutyl acetate, amyl formate, isoamyl acetate, isobutyl acetate, butyl propionate, isopropyl butyrate, ethyl butyrate, butyl butyrate, methyl lactate, and ethyl lactate.
  • Alkyl oxyacetates eg, methyl oxyacetate, ethyl oxyacetate, butyl oxyacetate (eg, methyl methoxyacetate, ethyl methoxyacetate, butyl methoxyacetate, methyl ethoxyacetate, ethyl ethoxyacetate)
  • alkyl 3-oxypropionate Esters eg, methyl 3-oxypropionate, ethyl 3-oxypropionate, etc.
  • Oxypropionic acid alkyl esters eg, methyl 2-oxypropionate, ethyl 2-oxypropionate, propyl 2-oxypropionate, etc.
  • ethers For example, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, ethylene glycol monoethyl ether, methyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl cellosolve acetate, diethylene glycol monomethyl ether, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether, diethylene glycol monobutyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether Acetate, propylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate, propylene glycol monopropyl ether acetate and the like, and ketones such as methyl ethyl ketone, cyclohexanone, 2-heptanone and 3-heptanone, and aromatic hydrocarbons such as Tolue And xylene are preferable.
  • ketones such as methyl ethyl ketone, cyclohexanone, 2-heptanone and 3-heptanone, and aromatic hydrocarbons
  • organic solvents are preferably mixed in two or more types from the viewpoints of solubility of the ultraviolet absorber and the alkali-soluble resin, improvement of the coated surface, and the like.
  • It is a mixed solution composed of two or more selected from carbitol acetate, butyl carbitol acetate, propylene glycol methyl ether, and propylene glycol methyl ether acetate.
  • the content of the organic solvent in the colored composition is preferably such that the total solid content of the composition is 5% by mass to 80% by mass from the viewpoint of applicability, and 5% by mass to 60% by mass. More preferred is 10% by mass to 50% by mass.
  • the composition of the present invention may contain only one type of organic solvent or two or more types of organic solvents. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
  • Crosslinking agent is not particularly limited as long as the film can be cured by a crosslinking reaction.
  • the crosslinking agent is not particularly limited as long as the film can be cured by a crosslinking reaction.
  • the blending amount of the crosslinking agent is not particularly defined, but is preferably 2 to 30% by mass, and preferably 3 to 20% by mass based on the total solid content of the composition. More preferred.
  • the composition of the present invention may contain only one type of cross-linking agent, or may contain two or more types. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
  • ⁇ Polymerization inhibitor In the colored composition of the present invention, it is desirable to add a small amount of a polymerization inhibitor in order to prevent unnecessary thermal polymerization of the polymerizable compound during the production or storage of the colored composition.
  • the polymerization inhibitor that can be used in the present invention include hydroquinone, p-methoxyphenol, di-tert-butyl-p-cresol, pyrogallol, tert-butylcatechol, benzoquinone, 4,4′-thiobis (3-methyl-6- tert-butylphenol), 2,2′-methylenebis (4-methyl-6-tert-butylphenol), N-nitrosophenylhydroxyamine primary cerium salt and the like.
  • the addition amount of the polymerization inhibitor is preferably about 0.01% by mass to about 5% by mass with respect to the mass of the whole composition.
  • the composition of the present invention may contain only one type of polymerization inhibitor, or may contain two or more types. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
  • surfactant Various surfactants may be added to the colored composition of the present invention from the viewpoint of further improving coatability.
  • various surfactants such as a fluorine-based surfactant, a nonionic surfactant, a cationic surfactant, an anionic surfactant, and a silicone-based surfactant can be used.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention contains a fluorosurfactant, so that liquid properties (particularly fluidity) when prepared as a coating solution are further improved.
  • Liquidity can be further improved. That is, in the case of forming a film using a coating liquid to which a coloring composition containing a fluorosurfactant is applied, wetting the coated surface by reducing the interfacial tension between the coated surface and the coating liquid. The coating property is improved and the coating property to the coated surface is improved. For this reason, even when a thin film of about several ⁇ m is formed with a small amount of liquid, it is effective in that it is possible to more suitably form a film having a uniform thickness with small thickness unevenness.
  • the fluorine content in the fluorosurfactant is preferably 3% by mass to 40% by mass, more preferably 5% by mass to 30% by mass, and particularly preferably 7% by mass to 25% by mass.
  • a fluorine-based surfactant having a fluorine content within this range is effective in terms of uniformity of coating film thickness and liquid-saving properties, and has good solubility in a colored composition.
  • fluorosurfactant examples include Megafac F171, F172, F173, F176, F176, F177, F141, F142, F143, F144, R30, F437, F475, F479, F482, F554, F780, F780, F781 (above DIC Corporation), Florard FC430, FC431, FC171 (above, Sumitomo 3M Limited), Surflon S-382, SC-101, SC-103, SC-104, SC-105, SC1068, SC-381, SC-383, S393, KH-40 (above, manufactured by Asahi Glass Co., Ltd.) and the like.
  • nonionic surfactant examples include glycerol, trimethylolpropane, trimethylolethane, and ethoxylates and propoxylates thereof (for example, glycerol propoxylate, glycerol ethoxylate, etc.), polyoxyethylene lauryl ether, polyoxyethylene Stearyl ether, polyoxyethylene oleyl ether, polyoxyethylene octylphenyl ether, polyoxyethylene nonylphenyl ether, polyethylene glycol dilaurate, polyethylene glycol distearate, sorbitan fatty acid ester (Pluronic L10, L31, L61, L62 manufactured by BASF, 10R5, 17R2, 25R2, Tetronic 304, 701, 704, 901, 904, 150R1) Solsperse 20000 (Lubrizol Japan Co., Ltd.), and the like.
  • cationic surfactant examples include phthalocyanine derivatives (trade name: EFKA-745, manufactured by Morishita Sangyo Co., Ltd.), organosiloxane polymer KP341 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), (meth) acrylic acid ( Co) polymer polyflow no. 75, no. 90, no. 95 (manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.) and W001 (manufactured by Yusho Co., Ltd.).
  • phthalocyanine derivatives trade name: EFKA-745, manufactured by Morishita Sangyo Co., Ltd.
  • organosiloxane polymer KP341 manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.
  • (meth) acrylic acid ( Co) polymer polyflow no. 75, no. 90, no. 95 manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.
  • W001 manufactured by Yusho Co., Ltd.
  • anionic surfactants include W004, W005, W017 (manufactured by Yusho Co., Ltd.) and the like.
  • silicone surfactant examples include “Toray Silicone DC3PA”, “Toray Silicone SH7PA”, “Toray Silicone DC11PA”, “Tore Silicone SH21PA”, “Tore Silicone SH28PA”, “Toray Silicone” manufactured by Toray Dow Corning Co., Ltd.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention contains a surfactant
  • the addition amount of the surfactant is preferably 0.001% by mass to 2.0% by mass with respect to the total mass of the coloring composition, more preferably 0.005% by mass to 1.0% by mass.
  • the composition of the present invention may contain only one type of surfactant or two or more types of surfactant. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
  • Organic carboxylic acid, organic carboxylic anhydride may contain an organic carboxylic acid having a molecular weight of 1000 or less and / or an organic carboxylic acid anhydride.
  • organic carboxylic acid compound include aliphatic carboxylic acids and aromatic carboxylic acids.
  • aliphatic carboxylic acids include monocarboxylic acids such as formic acid, acetic acid, propionic acid, butyric acid, valeric acid, pivalic acid, caproic acid, glycolic acid, acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, oxalic acid, malonic acid, succinic acid, Examples thereof include dicarboxylic acids such as glutaric acid, adipic acid, pimelic acid, cyclohexanedicarboxylic acid, cyclohexenedicarboxylic acid, itaconic acid, citraconic acid, maleic acid and fumaric acid, and tricarboxylic acids such as tricarbaryl acid and aconitic acid.
  • monocarboxylic acids such as formic acid, acetic acid, propionic acid, butyric acid, valeric acid, pivalic acid, caproic acid, glycolic acid, acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, oxalic acid, malonic acid, succinic acid
  • aromatic carboxylic acid examples include carboxylic acids in which a carboxyl group is directly bonded to a phenyl group such as benzoic acid and phthalic acid, and carboxylic acids in which a carboxyl group is bonded to the phenyl group through a carbon bond.
  • carboxylic acids in which a carboxyl group is directly bonded to a phenyl group such as benzoic acid and phthalic acid
  • carboxylic acids in which a carboxyl group is bonded to the phenyl group through a carbon bond examples of the aromatic carboxylic acid.
  • those having a molecular weight of 600 or less, particularly those having a molecular weight of 50 to 500 specifically maleic acid, malonic acid, succinic acid, and itaconic acid are preferred.
  • organic carboxylic acid anhydrides include aliphatic carboxylic acid anhydrides and aromatic carboxylic acid anhydrides. Specific examples include acetic anhydride, trichloroacetic anhydride, trifluoroacetic anhydride, and tetrahydrophthalic anhydride. Succinic anhydride, maleic anhydride, citraconic anhydride, itaconic anhydride, glutaric anhydride, 1,2-cyclohexene dicarboxylic anhydride, n-octadecyl succinic anhydride, 5-norbornene-2,3-dicarboxylic anhydride, etc. An aliphatic carboxylic acid anhydride is mentioned.
  • aromatic carboxylic acid anhydride examples include phthalic anhydride, trimellitic anhydride, pyromellitic anhydride, and naphthalic anhydride. Of these, those having a molecular weight of 600 or less, particularly those having a molecular weight of 50 to 500, specifically maleic anhydride, succinic anhydride, citraconic anhydride, and itaconic anhydride are preferred.
  • the amount of the organic carboxylic acid and / or organic carboxylic acid anhydride is usually 0.01 to 10% by weight based on the total solid content.
  • the range is preferably 0.03 to 5% by weight, more preferably 0.05 to 3% by weight.
  • the composition of the present invention may contain only one type of organic carboxylic acid and / or organic carboxylic acid anhydride, or may contain two or more types. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
  • various additives such as fillers, adhesion promoters, antioxidants, ultraviolet absorbers, anti-aggregation agents and the like can be blended with the coloring composition as necessary.
  • these additives include those described in JP-A No. 2004-295116, paragraphs 0155 to 0156, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may contain a sensitizer and a light stabilizer described in paragraph 0078 of JP-A No. 2004-295116 and a thermal polymerization inhibitor described in paragraph 0081 of the same publication.
  • the composition of the present invention may contain only one type of the above components, or may contain two or more types. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention is prepared by mixing the aforementioned components.
  • the components constituting the colored composition may be mixed together, or may be sequentially added after each component is dissolved and dispersed in a solvent.
  • the composition may be prepared by dissolving and dispersing all components in a solvent at the same time. If necessary, each component may be suitably used as two or more solutions / dispersions at the time of use (at the time of application). ) May be mixed to prepare a composition.
  • the colored composition prepared as described above is preferably used after being filtered using a filter having a pore size of 0.01 ⁇ m to 3.0 ⁇ m, more preferably a pore size of about 0.05 ⁇ m to 0.5 ⁇ m. Can be provided.
  • the colored composition of the present invention is preferably used for forming a colored layer of a color filter. More specifically, since the colored composition of the present invention can form a cured film having excellent heat resistance and color characteristics, it is suitably used for forming a colored pattern (colored layer) of a color filter. .
  • the colored composition of the present invention is used for forming a colored pattern such as a solid-state imaging device (for example, CCD, CMOS, etc.), a color filter used in an image display device such as a liquid crystal display device (LCD) or an organic EL display device. Can be suitably used. Furthermore, it can be suitably used as a production application for printing ink, inkjet ink, paint, and the like. In particular, a color filter for a solid-state imaging device such as a CCD and a CMOS can be suitably used as a production application.
  • the cured film of the present invention is formed by curing the colored composition of the present invention.
  • Such a cured film is preferably used for a color filter.
  • the colored composition of the present invention is applied onto a support to form a colored composition layer, and unnecessary portions are removed to form a colored pattern.
  • the pattern forming method of the present invention can be suitably applied to the formation of a colored pattern (pixel) included in a color filter.
  • the composition of the present invention may produce a color filter by pattern formation by a so-called photolithography method, or may form a pattern by dry etching.
  • a method for producing a color filter including a step of developing and removing an unexposed portion to form a colored pattern is exemplified.
  • a step of applying a colored composition on a support to form a colored composition layer and curing to form a colored layer a photo on the colored layer
  • Production of a color filter comprising a step of forming a resist layer, a step of patterning the photoresist layer by exposure and development to obtain a resist pattern, and a step of dry etching the colored layer using the resist pattern as an etching mask A method is illustrated.
  • Step of Forming Colored Composition Layer In the step of forming the colored composition layer, the colored composition layer forming step is formed on the support by applying the colored composition of the present invention.
  • a solid-state imaging in which an imaging element (light receiving element) such as a CCD (Charge Coupled Device) or a CMOS (Complementary Metal-Oxide Semiconductor) is provided on a substrate (for example, a silicon substrate).
  • An element substrate can be used.
  • the colored pattern in the present invention may be formed on the imaging element forming surface side (front surface) of the solid-state imaging element substrate, or may be formed on the imaging element non-forming surface side (back surface).
  • a light shielding film may be provided between the colored patterns in the solid-state image sensor or on the back surface of the substrate for the solid-state image sensor.
  • an undercoat layer may be provided on the support for improving adhesion with the upper layer, preventing diffusion of substances, or flattening the substrate surface.
  • a solvent, an alkali-soluble resin, a polymerizable compound, a polymerization inhibitor, a surfactant, a photopolymerization initiator, and the like can be blended, and each of these components is derived from the components blended in the above-described composition of the present invention. It is preferable to select appropriately.
  • various coating methods such as slit coating, ink jet method, spin coating, cast coating, roll coating, and screen printing can be applied.
  • the drying (pre-baking) of the colored composition layer coated on the support can be performed at a temperature of 50 ° C. to 140 ° C. for 10 seconds to 300 seconds using a hot plate, oven or the like.
  • Exposure Step the colored composition layer formed in the colored composition layer forming step is subjected to pattern exposure through a mask having a predetermined mask pattern, for example, using an exposure apparatus such as a stepper. Thereby, a cured film is obtained.
  • radiation light
  • ultraviolet rays such as g-line and i-line are particularly preferable (particularly preferably i-line).
  • Irradiation dose is more preferably 30mJ / cm 2 ⁇ 1500mJ / cm 2 is preferably 50mJ / cm 2 ⁇ 1000mJ / cm 2, 80mJ / cm 2 ⁇ 500mJ / cm 2 is particularly preferred.
  • the thickness of the cured film (colored film) is preferably 1.0 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 0.1 ⁇ m to 0.9 ⁇ m, and further preferably 0.2 ⁇ m to 0.8 ⁇ m. It is preferable to set the film thickness to 1.0 ⁇ m or less because high resolution and high adhesion can be obtained.
  • a cured film having a thin film thickness of 0.7 ⁇ m or less can also be suitably formed, and the obtained cured film is developed in a pattern forming process described later, thereby forming a thin film.
  • the coloring pattern excellent in developability, surface roughness suppression, and pattern shape can be obtained.
  • the developer is preferably an organic alkali developer that does not cause damage to the underlying image sensor or circuit.
  • the development temperature is usually 20 ° C. to 30 ° C., and the development time is conventionally 20 seconds to 90 seconds. In order to remove the residue more, in recent years, it may be carried out for 120 seconds to 180 seconds. Furthermore, in order to further improve residue removability, the process of shaking off the developer every 60 seconds and further supplying a new developer may be repeated several times.
  • alkaline agent used in the developer examples include ammonia water, ethylamine, diethylamine, dimethylethanolamine, tetramethylammonium hydroxide, tetraethylammonium hydroxide, tetrapropylammonium hydroxide, tetrabutylammonium hydroxide, benzyltrimethylammonium hydroxide.
  • Organic alkaline compounds such as choline, pyrrole, piperidine, 1,8-diazabicyclo- [5,4,0] -7-undecene, and the concentration of these alkaline agents is 0.001 to 10% by mass
  • An alkaline aqueous solution diluted with pure water so as to be preferably 0.01% by mass to 1% by mass is preferably used as the developer.
  • an inorganic alkali may be used for the developer, and as the inorganic alkali, for example, sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, sodium hydrogencarbonate, sodium oxalate, sodium metaoxalate and the like are preferable.
  • a developer composed of such an alkaline aqueous solution it is generally washed (rinsed) with pure water after development.
  • post-bake heat treatment after drying. If a multicolor coloring pattern is to be formed, a cured film can be produced by sequentially repeating the above steps for each color. Thereby, a color filter is obtained.
  • the post-baking is a heat treatment after development for complete curing, and a heat curing treatment is usually performed at 100 ° C. to 240 ° C., preferably 200 ° C. to 240 ° C.
  • This post-bake treatment is performed continuously or batchwise using a heating means such as a hot plate, a convection oven (hot air circulation dryer), a high-frequency heater, or the like so that the coating film after development is in the above-described condition. be able to.
  • the manufacturing method of this invention may have a well-known process as a manufacturing method of the color filter for solid-state image sensors as a process other than the above as needed.
  • a curing step of curing the formed colored pattern by heating and / or exposure may be included as necessary.
  • the colored composition according to the present invention when used, for example, clogging of the nozzle of the coating device discharge section or the piping section, contamination due to adhesion, sedimentation, or drying of the colored composition or pigment in the coating machine may occur. is there. Therefore, in order to efficiently clean the contamination caused by the colored composition of the present invention, it is preferable to use the solvent relating to the present composition described above as a cleaning liquid.
  • the cleaning liquids described in JP-A-2007-2101, JP-A-2007-2102, JP-A-2007-281523 and the like can also be suitably used for cleaning and removing the colored composition according to the present invention.
  • alkylene glycol monoalkyl ether carboxylates and alkylene glycol monoalkyl ethers are preferred. These solvents may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the mass ratio of the solvent having a hydroxyl group and the solvent having no hydroxyl group is from 1/99 to 99/1, preferably from 10/90 to 90/10, more preferably from 20/80 to 80/20.
  • a mixed solvent of propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA) and propylene glycol monomethyl ether (PGME) the ratio is particularly preferably 60/40.
  • a surfactant related to the present composition described above may be added to the cleaning liquid.
  • the color filter of the present invention uses the colored composition of the present invention, the color filter of the present invention can be exposed with an excellent exposure margin, and the formed colored pattern (colored pixel) is excellent in pattern shape, and the surface of the pattern is not rough. Since the residue in the developing part is suppressed, the color characteristics are excellent.
  • the color filter of the present invention can be suitably used for a solid-state imaging device such as a CCD or CMOS, and is particularly suitable for a CCD or CMOS having a high resolution exceeding 1 million pixels.
  • the color filter for a solid-state imaging device of the present invention can be used as a color filter disposed between, for example, a light receiving portion of each pixel constituting a CCD or CMOS and a microlens for condensing light.
  • the size (pattern width) of the colored pattern (colored pixel) is preferably 2.5 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 2.0 ⁇ m or less, and particularly preferably 1.7 ⁇ m or less.
  • the solid-state imaging device of the present invention includes the above-described color filter of the present invention.
  • the configuration of the solid-state imaging device of the present invention is a configuration provided with the color filter in the present invention, and is not particularly limited as long as it is a configuration that functions as a solid-state imaging device. .
  • a transfer electrode made of a plurality of photodiodes and polysilicon constituting a light receiving area of a solid-state imaging device (CCD image sensor, CMOS image sensor, etc.) is provided on a support, and the photodiode and the transfer electrode are provided on the support.
  • light collecting means for example, a microlens, etc., the same shall apply hereinafter
  • the color filter of the present invention can be used not only for the solid-state imaging device but also for image display devices such as liquid crystal display devices and organic EL display devices, and is particularly suitable for use in liquid crystal display devices.
  • the liquid crystal display device provided with the color filter of the present invention can display a high-quality image with a good display image color and excellent display characteristics.
  • display devices For the definition of display devices and details of each display device, refer to, for example, “Electronic Display Device (Akio Sasaki, Kogyo Kenkyukai, 1990)”, “Display Device (Junsho Ibuki, Industrial Books Co., Ltd.) Issued in the first year).
  • the liquid crystal display device is described, for example, in “Next-generation liquid crystal display technology (edited by Tatsuo Uchida, Industrial Research Co., Ltd., published in 1994)”.
  • the liquid crystal display device to which the present invention can be applied is not particularly limited, and can be applied to, for example, various types of liquid crystal display devices described in the “next generation liquid crystal display technology”.
  • the color filter of the present invention may be used in a color TFT liquid crystal display device.
  • the color TFT liquid crystal display device is described in, for example, “Color TFT liquid crystal display (issued in 1996 by Kyoritsu Publishing Co., Ltd.)”.
  • the present invention is applied to a liquid crystal display device with a wide viewing angle, such as a horizontal electric field driving method such as IPS and a pixel division method such as MVA, STN, TN, VA, OCS, FFS, and R-OCB. it can.
  • the color filter in the present invention can be used for a bright and high-definition COA (Color-filter On Array) system.
  • COA Color-filter On Array
  • the required characteristics for the color filter layer require the required characteristics for the interlayer insulating film, that is, the low dielectric constant and the resistance to the stripping solution, in addition to the normal required characteristics as described above.
  • the color filter of the present invention since a dye multimer excellent in hue is used, the color purity, light transmittance, etc. are good and the color pattern (pixel) is excellent in color, so the resolution is high and the long-term durability is excellent.
  • a COA type liquid crystal display device can be provided.
  • a resin film may be provided on the color filter layer.
  • the liquid crystal display device provided with the color filter of the present invention includes various members such as an electrode substrate, a polarizing film, a retardation film, a backlight, a spacer, and a viewing angle guarantee film.
  • the color filter of the present invention can be applied to a liquid crystal display device composed of these known members.
  • these components for example, “'94 Liquid Crystal Display Peripheral Materials / Chemicals Market (Kentaro Shima CMC 1994)”, “2003 Liquid Crystal Related Markets Current Status and Future Prospects (Volume 2)” Fuji Chimera Research Institute, Ltd., published in 2003) ”.
  • backlighting SID meeting Digest 1380 (2005) (A. Konno et.al), Monthly Display December 2005, pages 18-24 (Yasuhiro Shima), pages 25-30 (Takaaki Yagi), etc. Are listed.
  • the color filter according to the present invention When the color filter according to the present invention is used in a liquid crystal display device, a high contrast can be realized when combined with a conventionally known three-wavelength tube of a cold cathode tube, and further, red, green and blue LED light sources (RGB-LED).
  • RGB-LED red, green and blue LED light sources
  • Monomer (a-1) 8.0 g, methacrylic acid 2.0 g, and 2-cyano-2-propyldodecyltrithiocarbonate 0.5 g were dissolved in cyclohexanone 20.0 g and heated to 80 ° C. in a nitrogen stream. To this, 0.1 g of 2,2′-azobis (methyl 2-methylpropionate) was added and stirred with heating for 2 hours. Further, 0.1 g of 2,2′-azobis (methyl 2-methylpropionate) was added and heated for 2 hours, and then heated at 90 ° C. for 2 hours.
  • Monomer (a-2) 8.0 g, styrene carboxylic acid 2.0 g, 2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine-1-oxyl 0.5 g free radical was dissolved in cyclohexanone 8.0 g, and a nitrogen stream 140 Heated to ° C.
  • the benzoyl peroxide 0.1g was added here, and it heat-stirred for 2 hours. Further, 0.1 g of benzoyl peroxide was added and heated for 2 hours.
  • 1.0 g of glycidyl methacrylate and 0.010 g of tetrabutylammonium bromide were added and heated at 100 ° C. for 10 hours.
  • the reaction solution was dropped into a mixed solution of 100 mL of methanol and 100 mL of water, and the precipitated solid was filtered and dried to obtain 8.5 g of (A-13).
  • Pigment Blue 15: 6 Pigment Dispersion Blue Pigment Dispersion 1 was prepared as follows.
  • dispersion treatment was further performed at a flow rate of 500 g / min under a pressure of 2000 kg / cm 3 using a high-pressure disperser NANO-3000-10 (manufactured by Nippon BEE Co., Ltd.) with a decompression mechanism.
  • This dispersion treatment was repeated 10 times to obtain a blue pigment dispersion 1 (CI Pigment Blue 15: 6 dispersion, pigment concentration 13%) used in the coloring compositions of Examples and Comparative Examples.
  • the particle size of the pigment was measured by a dynamic light scattering method (Microtrac Nanotrac UPA-EX150 (manufactured by Nikkiso Co., Ltd.)) and found to be 24 nm.
  • Pigment dispersion containing pigment described in the following table (pigment concentration: 13.0%) 0.615 parts ⁇ Polymerizable compound (dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate, KAYARAD DPHA, manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) 0.070 parts ⁇ Glycerol propoxylate (1% cyclohexane solution) 0.048 parts
  • i-line stepper exposure apparatus FPA-3000i5 + manufactured by Canon Inc.
  • exposure was performed at various exposure doses of 50 to 1200 mJ / cm 2 through an Island pattern mask having a pattern of 1.0 ⁇ m square at a wavelength of 365 nm.
  • the silicon wafer substrate on which the irradiated coating film is formed is placed on a horizontal rotary table of a spin shower developing machine (DW-30 type, manufactured by Chemitronics Co., Ltd.), and CD-2000 (Fuji Film).
  • Paddle development was performed at 23 ° C. for 60 seconds using Electronics Materials Co., Ltd. to form a colored pattern on the silicon wafer substrate.
  • the silicon wafer on which the colored pattern is formed is fixed to the horizontal rotary table by a vacuum chuck method, and the silicon wafer substrate is rotated at a rotation speed of 50 r. p. m. While being rotated, pure water was supplied from the upper part of the rotation center in the form of a shower through a spray nozzle, followed by rinsing treatment, and then spray drying. As described above, a monochromatic color filter having a colored pattern formed by the colored composition of the example or the comparative example was produced. Thereafter, the size of the colored pattern was measured using a length measuring SEM “S-9260A” (manufactured by Hitachi High-Technologies Corporation). The exposure amount at which the pattern size was 1.0 ⁇ m was determined as the optimum exposure amount.
  • Performance evaluation 5-1 Light resistance-Fabrication of monochromatic color filters and evaluation of light resistance- Each colored curable composition obtained above was applied on a glass substrate using a spin coater so that the film thickness after drying was 0.6 ⁇ m, prebaked at 100 ° C. for 120 seconds, and evaluated for light resistance. A monochromatic color filter was obtained. The obtained monochromatic color filter for light resistance evaluation was irradiated with a xenon lamp at 100,000 lux for 20 hours (equivalent to 2 million lux ⁇ h). The color difference ( ⁇ E * ab value) of the monochromatic color filter before and after the xenon lamp irradiation was measured and used as an index of light resistance. Note that the smaller the ⁇ E * ab value, the better the light resistance.
  • Coating property The coating property at the time of coating each colored composition was evaluated by the following method. That is, each colored composition was applied with a spin coater so that the film thickness after drying was 0.6 ⁇ m, and observed with an optical microscope to evaluate the coating property.
  • the evaluation criteria are as follows. -Evaluation criteria- A: Application unevenness was not confirmed at all. B: Some coating unevenness was confirmed. C: Many coating unevenness was confirmed.
  • Patterned Coloring Composition Applying Dry Etching Method The following components were mixed and dissolved to obtain colored compositions of Examples 37 to 72 and Comparative Examples 3 to 4.
  • -Cyclohexanone 1.133 parts-Dye multimer (compound described in the following table) 0.040 parts as solid content-Blue pigment dispersion liquid (pigment concentration 13.0%) 0.615 parts-Polymerizable compound (EHPE -3150 (Daicel Chemical Industries, 2,2-bis (hydroxymethyl) -1-butanol 1,2-epoxy-4- (2-oxiranyl) cyclohexane adduct)) 0.070 parts glycerol propoxylate (1% cyclohexane solution) 0.048 parts
  • each colored composition was evaluated by the following method. That is, each colored composition was applied with a spin coater so that the film thickness after drying was 0.6 ⁇ m, and observed with an optical microscope to evaluate the coating property.
  • the evaluation criteria are as follows. -Evaluation criteria- A: Application unevenness was not confirmed at all. B: Some coating unevenness was confirmed. C: Many coating unevenness was confirmed.
  • Example 45 In Example 1, the polymerizable compound was changed to the same mass of A-DPH-12E (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., ethyleneoxy-modified dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate), and other tests were performed in the same manner as in Example 1. As a result, the same preferable results as in Example 1 were obtained.
  • A-DPH-12E manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., ethyleneoxy-modified dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Materials Engineering (AREA)
  • Wood Science & Technology (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)
  • Nonlinear Science (AREA)
  • Materials For Photolithography (AREA)
  • Optical Filters (AREA)
  • Crystallography & Structural Chemistry (AREA)
  • Mathematical Physics (AREA)
  • Spectroscopy & Molecular Physics (AREA)
  • Addition Polymer Or Copolymer, Post-Treatments, Or Chemical Modifications (AREA)
  • Liquid Crystal (AREA)
  • Polymerisation Methods In General (AREA)
  • Compositions Of Macromolecular Compounds (AREA)

Abstract

To provide a coloring composition having excellent solvent resistance and light fastness, and to provide a pattern formation method, a color filter manufacturing method, a color filter, a solid-state imaging element, and an image display device which use the coloring composition, and a method for manufacturing the coloring composition. A coloring composition including a polymerizable compound, and a pigment multimer having a pigment structure and a group represented by formula (1) at a main chain terminal thereof; In general formula (I), Z represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent; * represents the position of bonding with the main chain terminal; In general formula (II), A and B each independently represent a monovalent substituent; A and B may be linked to each other and form a ring; * represents the position of bonding with the main chain terminal.

Description

着色組成物、パターン形成方法、カラーフィルタの製造方法、カラーフィルタ、固体撮像素子、画像表示装置および着色組成物の製造方法Coloring composition, pattern forming method, color filter manufacturing method, color filter, solid-state imaging device, image display device, and coloring composition manufacturing method
　本発明は、着色組成物に関する。また、パターン形成方法、カラーフィルタの製造方法、カラーフィルタ、固体撮像素子および画像表示装置に関する。また、着色組成物の製造方法に関する。 The present invention relates to a coloring composition. The present invention also relates to a pattern forming method, a color filter manufacturing method, a color filter, a solid-state imaging device, and an image display device. Moreover, it is related with the manufacturing method of a coloring composition.
　液晶表示装置等の画像表示装置や固体撮像素子等に用いられるカラーフィルタを製造する方法の１つに、顔料分散法があり、この顔料分散法としては、顔料を種々の感光性樹脂組成物に分散させた着色感光性樹脂組成物を用い、フォトリソ法によってカラーフィルタを製造する方法である。すなわち、感光性樹脂組成物を基板上にスピンコーターやロールコーター等を用いて塗布し、乾燥させて塗布膜を形成し、上記塗布膜をパターン露光し現像することによって、着色された画素を得る。この操作を所望の色相分だけ繰り返すことで、カラーフィルタを作製する。
　上記の方法は、顔料を用いることから光や熱に対して安定であると共に、フォトリソ法によってパターニングを行うことから位置精度が充分に確保され、カラーディスプレー用カラーフィルタ等の製造に好適な方法として広く利用されてきた。 One of the methods for producing a color filter used for an image display device such as a liquid crystal display device or a solid-state imaging device is a pigment dispersion method. This is a method for producing a color filter by a photolithography method using a dispersed colored photosensitive resin composition. That is, a photosensitive resin composition is applied onto a substrate using a spin coater, a roll coater, or the like, dried to form a coating film, and the coating film is subjected to pattern exposure and development to obtain a colored pixel. . By repeating this operation for a desired hue, a color filter is produced.
The method described above is stable against light and heat because it uses a pigment, and the positional accuracy is sufficiently secured because patterning is performed by a photolithographic method, and it is suitable as a method for manufacturing a color filter for a color display. It has been widely used.
　一方、近年、カラーフィルタの微細化・薄膜化に伴い、従来は問題とならなかった耐溶剤性が問題となりつつある。
　ここで、カラーフィルタ用感光性樹脂組成物としては、特許文献１および特許文献２が知られている。特許文献１にはカラーレジスト特性を改良するために特定の連鎖移動剤で製造したアルカリ可溶性樹脂の報告がある。特許文献２には染料と光安定化剤のブロック共重合体により耐光性が向上することが開示されている。 On the other hand, with recent miniaturization and thinning of color filters, solvent resistance, which has not been a problem in the past, is becoming a problem.
Here, Patent Document 1 and Patent Document 2 are known as photosensitive resin compositions for color filters. Patent Document 1 reports an alkali-soluble resin produced with a specific chain transfer agent in order to improve color resist characteristics. Patent Document 2 discloses that light resistance is improved by a block copolymer of a dye and a light stabilizer.
国際公開弟２００７／０２９８７１号パンフレットPamphlet of International Publication No. 2007/029871 特開２００３－３４２４９４号公報JP 2003-342494 A
　本願発明者が特許文献１および特許文献２を検討したところ、耐光性が劣ることが分かった。
　本発明はかかる課題を解決するものであって、耐溶剤性および耐光性に優れた着色組成物を提供することを目的とする。さらに、上記着色組成物を利用した、パターン形成方法、カラーフィルタの製造方法、カラーフィルタ、固体撮像素子および画像表示装置に関する。また、着色組成物の製造方法に関する。 When this inventor examined patent document 1 and patent document 2, it turned out that light resistance is inferior.
This invention solves this subject, and it aims at providing the coloring composition excellent in solvent resistance and light resistance. Furthermore, it is related with the pattern formation method using the said coloring composition, the manufacturing method of a color filter, a color filter, a solid-state image sensor, and an image display apparatus. Moreover, it is related with the manufacturing method of a coloring composition.
　本発明者らは詳細に検討した結果、主鎖末端に特定の置換基を有する色素多量体を用いることにより上記課題を解決しうることを見出した。
　具体的には、下記手段＜１＞により、好ましくは、＜２＞～＜１９＞により、上記課題は解決された。
＜１＞色素構造を有し、かつ、一般式（Ｉ）で表される基または一般式（ＩＩ）で表される基を主鎖末端に有する色素多量体、ならびに、重合性化合物を含む着色組成物；
一般式（Ｉ）
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
 一般式（Ｉ）中、Ｚは水素原子または１価の置換基を表す；＊は、主鎖末端との結合位置を示す；
一般式（ＩＩ）
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
 一般式（ＩＩ）中、ＡおよびＢは、それぞれ独立に、１価の置換基を表す；ＡとＢは互いに連結して環を形成しても良い；＊は、主鎖末端との結合位置を示す。
＜２＞さらに光重合開始剤を含む、＜１＞に記載の着色組成物。
＜３＞さらに顔料を含む、＜１＞または＜２＞に記載の着色組成物。
＜４＞色素多量体の分散度であるＭｗ／Ｍｎが１．０～１．８である、＜１＞～＜３＞のいずれかに記載の着色組成物。
＜５＞さらにアルカリ可溶性樹脂を含む、＜１＞～＜４＞のいずれかに記載の着色組成物。
＜６＞色素多量体が、色素を含む重合性化合物と他の重合性化合物のランダム重合体である、＜１＞～＜５＞のいずれかに記載の着色組成物。
＜７＞色素多量体が、ジピロメテン色素、トリアリールメタン色素、キサンテン色素、アゾ色素、シアニン色素及びスクアリリウム色素の少なくとも１種を含む、＜１＞～＜６＞のいずれかに記載の着色組成物。
＜８＞色素多量体の少なくとも１種が、スチレン系樹脂または（メタ）アクリル系樹脂である、＜１＞～＜７＞のいずれかに記載の着色組成物。
＜９＞一般式（Ｉ）におけるＺが、－ＳＲ1、アリール基、ヘテロアリール基、アルキル基および／またはアリール基で置換されたアミノ基、アルコキシ基、ならびに、アリールオキシ基から選択されるか、一般式（ＩＩ）におけるＡおよびＢが、それぞれ独立に、炭素数１～３０のアルキル基または炭素数６～３０のアリール基である、＜１＞～＜８＞のいずれかに記載の着色組成物；但し、Ｒ1は、炭素数１～３０のアルキル基、炭素数２～３０のアルケニル基、炭素数６～３０の１価の芳香族炭化水素基または炭素原子と異項原子との合計原子数３～３０の１価の複素環基を表し、ＡとＢは互いに連結して環を形成しても良い。
＜１０＞一般式（Ｉ）におけるＺが、－ＳＲ1またはアリール基であるか、一般式（ＩＩ）におけるＡおよびＢが、それぞれ独立に、炭素数１～３０の二級または三級アルキル基である、＜９＞に記載の着色組成物；但し、ＡとＢは互いに結合して環を形成していてもよい。
＜１１＞カラーフィルタ用である＜１＞～＜１０＞のいずれかに記載の着色組成物。
＜１２＞＜１＞～＜１１＞のいずれかに記載の着色組成物を支持体上に適用して着色組成物層を形成する工程と、着色組成物層をパターン状に露光する工程と、未露光部を現像除去して着色パターンを形成する工程とを含むパターン形成方法。
＜１３＞＜１２＞に記載のパターン形成方法を含む、カラーフィルタの製造方法。
＜１４＞＜１＞～＜１１＞のいずれかに記載の着色組成物を用いて作成されたカラーフィルタまたは＜１３＞に記載のカラーフィルタの製造方法により製造されたカラーフィルタ。
＜１５＞＜１４＞に記載のカラーフィルタを有する固体撮像素子。
＜１６＞＜１４＞に記載のカラーフィルタを有する画像表示装置。
＜１７＞色素構造を有する重合性化合物をリビングラジカル重合した後、重合性化合物を配合することを含む、着色組成物の製造方法。
＜１８＞一般式（Ｉａ）で表される化合物、一般式（ＩＩａ）で表される化合物、および、一般式（ＩＩｂ）で表されるラジカルの少なくとも１種の存在下で、色素構造を有する重合性化合物と他の重合性化合物をラジカル重合することを含む、＜１７＞に記載の着色組成物の製造方法；
一般式（Ｉａ）
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
 一般式（Ｉａ）中、Ｚは一般式（Ｉ）と同義である。Ｃは一価の有機基を表す；
一般式（ＩＩａ）
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
 一般式（ＩＩａ）中、Ｚは一般式（ＩＩ）と同義である。Ｄは一価の有機基を表す；
一般式（ＩＩｂ）
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
 一般式（ＩＩｂ）中、ＡおよびＢは一般式（ＩＩ）と同義である。
＜１９＞着色組成物が、＜１＞～＜１１＞のいずれかに記載の着色組成物である、＜１７＞または＜１８＞に記載の着色組成物の製造方法。 As a result of detailed studies, the present inventors have found that the above problem can be solved by using a dye multimer having a specific substituent at the end of the main chain.
Specifically, the above problem has been solved by the following means <1>, preferably <2> to <19>.
<1> A dye multimer having a dye structure and having a group represented by the general formula (I) or a group represented by the general formula (II) at the end of the main chain, and a color containing a polymerizable compound Composition;
Formula (I)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
 In the general formula (I), Z represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent; * represents a bonding position with the main chain end;
Formula (II)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
 In general formula (II), A and B each independently represent a monovalent substituent; A and B may be linked to each other to form a ring; * represents the position of bonding to the end of the main chain Indicates.
<2> The colored composition according to <1>, further including a photopolymerization initiator.
<3> The colored composition according to <1> or <2>, further including a pigment.
<4> The colored composition according to any one of <1> to <3>, wherein Mw / Mn, which is the degree of dispersion of the dye multimer, is 1.0 to 1.8.
<5> The colored composition according to any one of <1> to <4>, further comprising an alkali-soluble resin.
<6> The colored composition according to any one of <1> to <5>, wherein the dye multimer is a random polymer of a polymerizable compound containing a dye and another polymerizable compound.
<7> The colored composition according to any one of <1> to <6>, wherein the dye multimer contains at least one of dipyrromethene dye, triarylmethane dye, xanthene dye, azo dye, cyanine dye, and squarylium dye .
<8> The colored composition according to any one of <1> to <7>, wherein at least one of the dye multimers is a styrene resin or a (meth) acrylic resin.
<9> Is Z in the general formula (I) selected from —SR 1 , an aryl group, a heteroaryl group, an amino group substituted with an alkyl group and / or an aryl group, an alkoxy group, and an aryloxy group? The coloring according to any one of <1> to <8>, wherein A and B in the general formula (II) are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms or an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms A composition; provided that R 1 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, an alkenyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, a monovalent aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, or a carbon atom and a hetero atom; It represents a monovalent heterocyclic group having 3 to 30 atoms in total, and A and B may be connected to each other to form a ring.
<10> Z in the general formula (I) is —SR 1 or an aryl group, or A and B in the general formula (II) are each independently a secondary or tertiary alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms. <9>, wherein A and B may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
<11> The colored composition according to any one of <1> to <10>, which is used for a color filter.
<12> a step of applying the colored composition according to any one of <1> to <11> on a support to form a colored composition layer, a step of exposing the colored composition layer in a pattern, Forming a colored pattern by developing and removing an unexposed portion.
<13> A method for producing a color filter, comprising the pattern forming method according to <12>.
<14> A color filter produced using the colored composition according to any one of <1> to <11> or a color filter produced by the method for producing a color filter according to <13>.
<15> A solid-state imaging device having the color filter according to <14>.
<16> An image display device having the color filter according to <14>.
<17> A method for producing a colored composition, which comprises blending a polymerizable compound after living radical polymerization of a polymerizable compound having a dye structure.
<18> having a dye structure in the presence of at least one of a compound represented by general formula (Ia), a compound represented by general formula (IIa), and a radical represented by general formula (IIb) The method for producing a colored composition according to <17>, comprising radical polymerization of a polymerizable compound and another polymerizable compound;
Formula (Ia)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
 In general formula (Ia), Z has the same meaning as in general formula (I). C represents a monovalent organic group;
Formula (IIa)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
 In general formula (IIa), Z is synonymous with general formula (II). D represents a monovalent organic group;
Formula (IIb)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
 In general formula (IIb), A and B are synonymous with general formula (II).
<19> The method for producing a colored composition according to <17> or <18>, wherein the colored composition is the colored composition according to any one of <1> to <11>.
　本発明により、耐溶剤性および耐光性に優れた着色組成物を提供可能になった。さらに、上記着色組成物を利用した、パターン形成方法、カラーフィルタの製造方法、カラーフィルタ、固体撮像素子および画像表示装置を提供可能になった。また、着色組成物の製造方法を提供可能になった。 According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a colored composition having excellent solvent resistance and light resistance. Furthermore, it has become possible to provide a pattern forming method, a color filter manufacturing method, a color filter, a solid-state imaging device, and an image display device using the colored composition. In addition, a method for producing a colored composition can be provided.
　以下に、本発明の着色組成物、パターン形成方法、カラーフィルタの製造方法、カラーフィルタ、固体撮像素子および画像表示装置について詳述する。また、着色組成物の製造方法を説明する。 Hereinafter, the coloring composition, the pattern forming method, the color filter manufacturing method, the color filter, the solid-state imaging device, and the image display device of the present invention will be described in detail. Moreover, the manufacturing method of a coloring composition is demonstrated.
　以下に記載する本発明における構成要素の説明は、本発明の代表的な実施態様に基づいてなされることがあるが、本発明はそのような実施態様に限定されるものではない。 The description of the components in the present invention described below may be made based on typical embodiments of the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to such embodiments.
　本明細書における基（原子団）の表記に於いて、置換および無置換を記していない表記は、置換基を有さないものと共に置換基を有するものをも包含するものである。例えば、「アルキル基」とは、置換基を有さないアルキル基（無置換アルキル基）のみならず、置換基を有するアルキル基（置換アルキル基）をも包含するものである。
　また、本明細書中における「放射線」とは、例えば、水銀灯の輝線スペクトル、エキシマレーザーに代表される遠紫外線、極紫外線（ＥＵＶ光）、Ｘ線、電子線等を意味する。また、本発明において光とは、活性光線または放射線を意味する。本明細書中における「露光」とは、特に断らない限り、水銀灯、エキシマレーザーに代表される遠紫外線、Ｘ線、ＥＵＶ光などによる露光のみならず、電子線、イオンビーム等の粒子線による描画も露光に含める。 In the description of the group (atomic group) in this specification, the description which does not describe substitution and unsubstituted includes the thing which has a substituent with the thing which does not have a substituent. For example, the “alkyl group” includes not only an alkyl group having no substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
In addition, “radiation” in the present specification means, for example, an emission line spectrum of a mercury lamp, far ultraviolet rays represented by excimer laser, extreme ultraviolet rays (EUV light), X-rays, electron beams, and the like. In the present invention, light means actinic rays or radiation. Unless otherwise specified, “exposure” in this specification is not only exposure with far-ultraviolet rays such as mercury lamps and excimer lasers, X-rays, EUV light, but also drawing with particle beams such as electron beams and ion beams. Are also included in the exposure.
　本明細書において「～」を用いて表される数値範囲は、「～」の前後に記載される数値を下限値および上限値として含む範囲を意味する。
　本明細書において、全固形分とは、着色組成物の全組成から溶剤を除いた成分の総質量をいう。
　本明細書における固形分濃度とは、２５℃における固形分の濃度をいう。 In this specification, a numerical range expressed using “to” means a range including numerical values described before and after “to” as a lower limit value and an upper limit value.
In this specification, the total solid content refers to the total mass of components excluding the solvent from the total composition of the colored composition.
The solid content concentration in this specification refers to the solid content concentration at 25 ° C.
　また、本明細書において、“（メタ）アクリレート”はアクリレートおよびメタクリレートの双方、または、いずれかを表し、“（メタ）アクリル”はアクリルおよびメタクリルの双方、または、いずれかを表し、“（メタ）アクリロイル”はアクリロイルおよびメタクリロイルの双方、または、いずれかを表す。
　また、本明細書において、“単量体”と“モノマー”とは同義である。本明細書における単量体は、オリゴマーおよびポリマーと区別され、重量平均分子量が２，０００以下の化合物をいう。本明細書において、重合性化合物とは、重合性官能基を有する化合物のことをいい、単量体であっても、ポリマーであってもよい。重合性官能基とは、重合反応に関与する基を言う。 In this specification, “(meth) acrylate” represents both and / or acrylate and methacrylate, “(meth) acryl” represents both and / or acryl and “(meth) acrylic” ) "Acryloyl" represents both and / or acryloyl and methacryloyl.
In the present specification, “monomer” and “monomer” are synonymous. The monomer in this specification is distinguished from an oligomer and a polymer, and refers to a compound having a weight average molecular weight of 2,000 or less. In the present specification, the polymerizable compound means a compound having a polymerizable functional group, and may be a monomer or a polymer. The polymerizable functional group refers to a group that participates in a polymerization reaction.
　本明細書において「工程」との語は、独立した工程だけではなく、他の工程と明確に区別できない場合であってもその工程の所期の作用が達成されれば、本用語に含まれる。
　本発明は、上記の状況に鑑みてなされたものであり、色特性に優れたな着色組成物を提供することを目的とする。 In this specification, the term “process” is not limited to an independent process, and is included in the term if the intended action of the process is achieved even when it cannot be clearly distinguished from other processes. .
The present invention has been made in view of the above situation, and an object thereof is to provide a coloring composition having excellent color characteristics.
　本明細書において、重量平均分子量および数平均分子量は、ＧＰＣ測定によるポリスチレン換算値として定義される。本明細書において、重量平均分子量（Ｍｗ）及び数平均分子量（Ｍｎ）は、例えば、ＨＬＣ－８２２０（東ソー（株）製）を用い、カラムとしてＴＳＫｇｅｌ Ｓｕｐｅｒ　ＡＷＭ―Ｈ（東ソー（株）製、６．０ｍｍＩＤ×１５．０ｃｍを、溶離液として１０ｍｍｏｌ／Ｌ　リチウムブロミドＮＭＰ(Ｎ－メチルピロリジノン)溶液を用いることによって求めることができる。 In this specification, the weight average molecular weight and the number average molecular weight are defined as polystyrene converted values by GPC measurement. In this specification, the weight average molecular weight (Mw) and the number average molecular weight (Mn) are, for example, HLC-8220 (manufactured by Tosoh Corporation) and TSKgelｇSuper AWM-H (manufactured by Tosoh Corporation, 6) as a column. 0.0 mm ID × 15.0 cm can be determined by using a 10 mmol / L lithium bromide NMP (N-methylpyrrolidinone) solution as an eluent.
　本明細書において、メチル基をＭｅ、エチル基をＥｔ、プロピル基をＰｒ、フェニル基をＰＨまたはＰｈと示すことがある。 In this specification, the methyl group may be indicated as Me, the ethyl group as Et, the propyl group as Pr, and the phenyl group as PH or Ph.
　本発明の着色組成物（以下、単に、「本発明の組成物」ということがある）は、色素構造を有し、かつ、一般式（Ｉ）で表される基または一般式（ＩＩ）で表される基を主鎖末端に有する色素多量体、ならびに、重合性化合物を含むことを特徴とする。
一般式（Ｉ）
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
 一般式（Ｉ）中、Ｚは水素原子または１価の置換基を表す。＊は、主鎖末端との結合位置を示す。
一般式（ＩＩ）
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
 一般式（ＩＩ）中、ＡおよびＢは、それぞれ独立に、１価の置換基を表す。ＡとＢは互いに連結して環を形成しても良い。＊は、主鎖末端との結合位置を示す。 The coloring composition of the present invention (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “the composition of the present invention”) has a dye structure and is represented by the group represented by the general formula (I) or the general formula (II). It includes a dye multimer having a group represented by a main chain terminal and a polymerizable compound.
Formula (I)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
 In general formula (I), Z represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent. * Indicates the binding position to the end of the main chain.
Formula (II)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
 In general formula (II), A and B each independently represent a monovalent substituent. A and B may be connected to each other to form a ring. * Indicates the binding position to the end of the main chain.
　このような構成とすることにより、耐溶剤性および耐光性を付与することができる。また、本発明で用いる色素多量体は、例えば、リビング重合で合成されるため、色素多量体の分散度（Ｍｗ／Ｍｎ）を小さくできる。すなわち、色素多量体であって、高分子量成分の割合を少なめにすることにより、耐光性をより向上させることができ、低分子量成分の割合を少なめにすることにより、耐溶剤性を向上させることができる。さらに、耐熱性、塗布性、現像性をより向上させることができる。
　また、カラーフィルタの分光改良を目的に、顔料に代えて染料を適用することがある。しかし、染料は顔料と比較して耐光性や耐熱性が悪いため、染料を適用したカラーフィルタは耐久性が低い場合がある。本発明では、色素として染料を用いた場合にもこれらの効果を効果的に向上させることができる。 By setting it as such a structure, solvent resistance and light resistance can be provided. In addition, since the dye multimer used in the present invention is synthesized by living polymerization, for example, the dispersity (Mw / Mn) of the dye multimer can be reduced. That is, it is a dye multimer, and the light resistance can be further improved by reducing the proportion of the high molecular weight component, and the solvent resistance can be improved by reducing the proportion of the low molecular weight component. Can do. Furthermore, heat resistance, applicability, and developability can be further improved.
In addition, dyes may be applied in place of pigments for the purpose of spectral improvement of color filters. However, since dyes have poor light resistance and heat resistance compared to pigments, color filters to which dyes are applied may have low durability. In the present invention, even when a dye is used as the pigment, these effects can be effectively improved.
　本発明の着色組成物は、さらに、光重合開始剤および／または顔料を含むことが好ましく、必要に応じて、架橋剤など他の成分を含んでもよい。 The colored composition of the present invention preferably further contains a photopolymerization initiator and / or a pigment, and may contain other components such as a crosslinking agent as necessary.
　以下、本発明の詳細について説明する。 Hereinafter, details of the present invention will be described.
＜色素構造を有し、かつ、一般式（Ｉ）で表される基または一般式（ＩＩ）で表される基を主鎖末端に有する色素多量体＞
　本発明の着色組成物は、色素構造を有し、主鎖末端に一般式（Ｉ）で表される基または一般式（ＩＩ）で表される基を有する色素多量体（以下、単に「色素多量体」ということがある。）の少なくとも１種を含有する。色素多量体は２種類以上含んでいても良い。 <Dye multimer having a dye structure and having a group represented by general formula (I) or a group represented by general formula (II) at the end of the main chain>
The coloring composition of the present invention has a dye structure and has a dye multimer (hereinafter simply referred to as “dye”) having a group represented by the general formula (I) or a group represented by the general formula (II) at the end of the main chain. At least one kind of “multimer”). Two or more dye multimers may be included.
　色素多量体は、通常、その分子構造中に、最大吸収波長が４００ｎｍ～７８０ｎｍの範囲に存在する色素に由来する部分構造を有する多量体である。本発明の色素多量体は、色素単量体を含む繰り返し単位を含むことがより好ましく、色素単量体を含む繰り返し単位と重合性基を有する繰り返し単位を含むことがより好ましく、色素単量体を含む繰り返し単位と重合性基を有する繰り返し単位と酸基を有する繰り返し単位を含むことがさらに好ましい。また、本発明は色素構造がカチオン部位を有することが好ましい。
　色素多量体は、本発明の着色組成物において、例えば着色剤として機能する。
　また、本発明の色素多量体は、最大吸収波長が４２０～７００ｎｍであることが好ましく、４５０～６５０ｎｍであることがより好ましい。
　本発明では、色素に由来する構造を含む繰り返し単位が合計繰り返し単位を１００モル％としたとき、本発明の色素多量体中、１０～１００モル％であることが好ましく、５０～１００モル％であることがさらに好ましく、６０～１００モル％であることが特に好ましい。
　以下、色素多量体における一般式（Ｉ）で表される基または一般式（ＩＩ）で表される基（以下、「特定末端基」ということがある）、および色素に由来する部分構造、色素構造を有する繰り返し単位以外の繰り返し単位について説明する。 A dye multimer is usually a multimer having a partial structure derived from a dye having a maximum absorption wavelength in the range of 400 nm to 780 nm in its molecular structure. The dye multimer of the present invention preferably contains a repeating unit containing a dye monomer, more preferably contains a repeating unit containing a dye monomer and a repeating unit having a polymerizable group. More preferably, it contains a repeating unit containing a repeating unit having a polymerizable group and a repeating unit having an acid group. In the present invention, the dye structure preferably has a cation moiety.
The dye multimer functions as, for example, a colorant in the coloring composition of the present invention.
In addition, the dye multimer of the present invention preferably has a maximum absorption wavelength of 420 to 700 nm, and more preferably 450 to 650 nm.
In the present invention, the repeating unit containing a structure derived from a dye is preferably 10 to 100 mol%, preferably 50 to 100 mol% in the dye multimer of the present invention when the total repeating unit is 100 mol%. More preferably, it is 60 to 100 mol%.
Hereinafter, a group represented by the general formula (I) or a group represented by the general formula (II) in the dye multimer (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “specific end group”), and a partial structure derived from the dye, the dye A repeating unit other than the repeating unit having a structure will be described.
＜＜特定末端基＞＞
　特定末端基は一般式（Ｉ）または（ＩＩ）で表わされる。
一般式（Ｉ）
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
 一般式（Ｉ）中、Ｚは水素原子または１価の置換基を表す。＊は、主鎖末端との結合位置を示す； << Specific end group >>
The specific terminal group is represented by the general formula (I) or (II).
Formula (I)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
 In general formula (I), Z represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent. * Indicates the position of binding to the end of the main chain;
　一般式（Ｉ）中、Ｚは１価の置換基を表す。Ｚは、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、カルボキシル基、シアノ基、炭素数１～３０のアルキル基、炭素数６～３０の１価の芳香族炭化水素基、炭素原子と異項原子との合計原子数３～３０の１価の複素環基、－ＯＲ1、－ＳＲ1、－ＯＣ（＝Ｏ）Ｒ1、－Ｎ（Ｒ1）（Ｒ2）、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）ＯＲ1、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）Ｎ（Ｒ1）（Ｒ2）、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（ＯＲ1）2、－Ｐ（＝Ｏ）（Ｒ1）2または重合体鎖を有する１価の基が好ましく、－ＳＲ1、アリール基、ヘテロアリール基、アルキル基および／またはアリール基で置換されたアミノ基、アルコキシ基、および、アリールオキシ基から選択されることが好ましく、－ＳＲ1（好ましくは、アルキルチオ基、アリールチオ基）、アリール基から選択されることがより好ましく、アルキルチオ基またはアリール基であることがさらに好ましく、アルキルチオ基であることが特に好ましい。
　Ｚとしてのアリール基は、フェニル基またはナフチル基が好ましい。Ｚとしてのヘテロアリール基は、含窒素５員環または６員環化合物が好ましい。Ｚとしてのアルキル基および／またはアリール基で置換されたアミノ基は、炭素数１～５のアルキル基またはフェニル基で置換されたアミノ基が好ましい。Ｚとしてのアルコキシ基は、炭素数２～５のアルコキシ基が好ましい。Ｚとしてのアリールオキシ基は、フェノキシ基が好ましい。 In general formula (I), Z represents a monovalent substituent. Z is a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a carboxyl group, a cyano group, an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, a monovalent aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, or the total number of atoms of carbon atoms and hetero atoms 3 to 30 monovalent heterocyclic groups, —OR 1 , —SR 1 , —OC (═O) R 1 , —N (R 1 ) (R 2 ), —C (═O) OR 1 , —C (═O) N (R 1 ) (R 2 ), —P (═O) (OR 1 ) 2 , —P (═O) (R 1 ) 2 or a monovalent group having a polymer chain is preferred, It is preferably selected from —SR 1 , an aryl group, a heteroaryl group, an amino group substituted with an alkyl group and / or an aryl group, an alkoxy group, and an aryloxy group, —SR 1 (preferably an alkylthio group) , Arylthio group) or aryl group, more preferably an alkylthio group. More preferably an aryl group is particularly preferably an alkylthio group.
The aryl group as Z is preferably a phenyl group or a naphthyl group. The heteroaryl group as Z is preferably a nitrogen-containing 5-membered ring or 6-membered ring compound. The amino group substituted with an alkyl group and / or aryl group as Z is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms or an amino group substituted with a phenyl group. The alkoxy group as Z is preferably an alkoxy group having 2 to 5 carbon atoms. The aryloxy group as Z is preferably a phenoxy group.
　Ｒ1およびＲ2は、それぞれ独立に、炭素数１～３０のアルキル基、炭素数２～３０のアルケニル基、炭素数６～３０の１価の芳香族炭化水素基または炭素原子と異項原子との合計原子数３～３０の１価の複素環基を示し、上記炭素数１～３０のアルキル基、炭素数６～３０の１価の芳香族炭化水素基、炭素原子と異項原子との合計原子数３～３０の１価の複素環基、Ｒ1およびＲ2は、いずれも置換されていてもよいし、置換されていなくてもよい。置換されている場合の置換基としては、アルキル基、アリール基等が例示される。
　Ｒ1およびＲ2は、それぞれ独立に、炭素数１～２０のアルキル基または炭素数６～３０の１価の芳香族炭化水素基が好ましく、炭素数１～１５のアルキル基またはフェニル基がより好ましい。 R 1 and R 2 are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, an alkenyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, a monovalent aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, or a carbon atom and a hetero atom. And a monovalent heterocyclic group having 3 to 30 atoms in total, the above alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, a monovalent aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, a carbon atom and a hetero atom. These monovalent heterocyclic groups having a total of 3 to 30 atoms, R 1 and R 2 , may be either substituted or unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent when substituted include an alkyl group and an aryl group.
R 1 and R 2 are each independently preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or a monovalent aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 15 carbon atoms or a phenyl group. preferable.
一般式（ＩＩ）
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
 一般式（ＩＩ）中、ＡおよびＢは、それぞれ独立に、１価の置換基を表す。ＡとＢは互いに連結して環を形成しても良い。＊は、主鎖末端との結合位置を示す。 Formula (II)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
 In general formula (II), A and B each independently represent a monovalent substituent. A and B may be connected to each other to form a ring. * Indicates the binding position to the end of the main chain.
　ＡおよびＢが表わす１価の置換基は、それぞれ独立に、炭素数１～３０のアルキル基、炭素数６～３０のアリール基が好ましい。炭素数１～３０のアルキル基は、炭素数３～１０であることがより好ましい。
　特に、ＡおよびＢの一方は、炭素数１～３０の二級または三級のアルキル基であり、他方は、炭素数１～３０のアルキル基または炭素数６～３０のアリール基であることが好ましく、ＡおよびＢの一方は、炭素数１～３０の三級アルキルであり、ＡおよびＢの他方は、炭素数１～３０のアルキル基であることがさらに好ましく、ＡおよびＢの一方が、炭素数１～３０の三級アルキルで、他方が炭素数１～３０の二級または三級のアルキル基（より好ましくは炭素数１～３０二級アルキル基）であることが特に好ましい。
　炭素数１～３０のアルキル基が有していても良い置換基としては、アリール基が好ましく、フェニル基がより好ましい。アリール基が有していても良い置換基としては、アリール基が好ましい。さらに、これらの基が他の置換基で置換されていてもよい。ＡとＢは互いに結合して環を形成していてもよい。 The monovalent substituents represented by A and B are each independently preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms or an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms. More preferably, the alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms has 3 to 10 carbon atoms.
In particular, one of A and B is a secondary or tertiary alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and the other is an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms or an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms. Preferably, one of A and B is tertiary alkyl having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, the other of A and B is more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and one of A and B is Particularly preferably, it is a tertiary alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and the other is a secondary or tertiary alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms (more preferably a secondary alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms).
As the substituent that the alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms may have, an aryl group is preferable, and a phenyl group is more preferable. As the substituent that the aryl group may have, an aryl group is preferable. Furthermore, these groups may be substituted with other substituents. A and B may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
　本発明では特に、一般式（Ｉ）におけるＺが、－ＳＲ1またはアリール基であり、一般式（ＩＩ）におけるＡおよびＢが、それそれ、炭素数１～３０の二級または三級アルキル基であることが好ましい（但し、ＡとＢは互いに結合して環を形成していてもよい）。 Particularly in the present invention, Z in the general formula (I) is —SR 1 or an aryl group, and A and B in the general formula (II) are each a secondary or tertiary alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms. (However, A and B may be bonded to each other to form a ring).
　末端基の具体例を示すが、本発明はこれに限定されない。 Specific examples of terminal groups are shown, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
　一般式（Ｉ）または（ＩＩ）で表わされる末端基を、ポリマー主鎖を導入する方法としては、一般式（Ｉａ）で表される化合物、一般式（ＩＩａ）で表される化合物、および、一般式（ＩＩｂ）で表されるラジカルの少なくとも１種の存在下で、色素構造を有する重合性化合物をラジカル重合する方法が好ましい。
一般式（Ｉａ）
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
 一般式（Ｉａ）中、Ｚは一般式（Ｉ）と同義である。Ｃは一価の有機基を表す。 As a method of introducing the polymer main chain into the terminal group represented by the general formula (I) or (II), a compound represented by the general formula (Ia), a compound represented by the general formula (IIa), and A method in which a polymerizable compound having a dye structure is radically polymerized in the presence of at least one radical represented by the general formula (IIb) is preferred.
Formula (Ia)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
 In general formula (Ia), Z has the same meaning as in general formula (I). C represents a monovalent organic group.
一般式（ＩＩａ）
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
 一般式（ＩＩａ）中、Ｚは一般式（ＩＩ）と同義である。Ｄは一価の有機基を表す。 Formula (IIa)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
 In general formula (IIa), Z is synonymous with general formula (II). D represents a monovalent organic group.
一般式（ＩＩｂ）
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
 一般式（ＩＩｂ）中、ＡおよびＢは一般式（ＩＩ）と同義である。
　この様な添加剤を配合することで、ラジカル重合する際の末端の活性不活性化が平衡化状態となり、見かけ上ラジカルが失活しない状態になる。このようなリビングラジカル重合で重合することにより、分散度が小さい多量体が得られる。本発明では、また、色素多量体が（メタ）アクリル系樹脂および／またはスチレン系樹脂であることが好ましい。ここで、（メタ）アクリル系樹脂は、原料となる重合性化合物の５０モル％以上が（メタ）アクリレートである樹脂をいい、スチレン系樹脂とは、原料となる重合性化合物の５０モル％以上がスチレンである樹脂をいう。
　本発明では特に、一般式（Ｉａ）で表される化合物を用いる際は、（メタ）アクリル系樹脂および／またはスチレン系樹脂が好ましく、一般式（ＩＩａ）または一般式（ＩＩｂ）で表される化合物を用いる際は、（メタ）アクリル系樹脂が好ましい。 Formula (IIb)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
 In general formula (IIb), A and B are synonymous with general formula (II).
By blending such an additive, the terminal inactivation at the time of radical polymerization is in an equilibrium state, and the radical is not apparently deactivated. By polymerizing by such living radical polymerization, a multimer having a low degree of dispersion can be obtained. In the present invention, the dye multimer is preferably a (meth) acrylic resin and / or a styrene resin. Here, the (meth) acrylic resin refers to a resin in which 50 mol% or more of the raw material polymerizable compound is (meth) acrylate, and the styrene resin refers to 50 mol% or more of the raw material polymerizable compound. Refers to a resin in which is styrene.
In the present invention, in particular, when the compound represented by the general formula (Ia) is used, a (meth) acrylic resin and / or a styrene resin is preferable, and is represented by the general formula (IIa) or the general formula (IIb). When the compound is used, a (meth) acrylic resin is preferable.
＜＜色素構造を有する繰り返し単位＞＞
　本発明の着色組成物に用いる色素多量体が有する色素構造を有する繰り返し単位は、特に定めるものではないが、特開２０１３－２８７６４号の段落番号０２７６～０３０４に示される、一般式（Ａ）、一般式（Ｂ）、および、一般式（Ｃ）で表される構成単位の少なくとも一つを骨格とすることが好ましい。特開２０１３－２８７６４号の段落番号０２７６～０３０４の記載は、本願明細書に組み込まれる。
　本発明では、下記一般式（Ａ）で表される繰り返し単位を含むことが好ましい。
　色素構造を有する繰り返し単位の割合は、上記色素多量体を構成する全繰り返し単位の１０～３５モル％であることが好ましく、１５～３０モル％であることがより好ましい。 << Repeating unit having a dye structure >>
The repeating unit having a dye structure included in the dye multimer used in the coloring composition of the present invention is not particularly defined, but is represented by general formula (A) shown in paragraphs 0276 to 0304 of JP-A-2013-28764, It is preferable that at least one of the structural units represented by the general formula (B) and the general formula (C) is a skeleton. The description of paragraph numbers 0276 to 0304 in JP 2013-28764 is incorporated in the present specification.
In this invention, it is preferable that the repeating unit represented by the following general formula (A) is included.
The ratio of the repeating unit having a dye structure is preferably 10 to 35 mol%, more preferably 15 to 30 mol%, based on all repeating units constituting the dye multimer.
＜＜＜一般式（Ａ）で表される構成単位＞＞＞
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
 （一般式（Ａ）中、Ｘ1は重合によって形成される連結基を表し、Ｌ1は単結合または２価の連結基を表す。ＤｙｅＩは色素構造を表す。）
　以下、一般式（Ａ）について詳細に説明する。 <<< Structural Unit Represented by Formula (A) >>>
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
 (In general formula (A), X 1 represents a linking group formed by polymerization, L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and Dye I represents a dye structure.)
Hereinafter, the general formula (A) will be described in detail.
　一般式（Ａ）中、Ｘ1は重合によって形成される連結基を表す。すなわち重合反応で形成される主鎖に相当する繰り返し単位を形成する部分を指す。なお、２つの＊で表された部位が繰り返し単位となる。Ｘ1としては、公知の重合可能なモノマーから形成される連結基であれば得に制限ないが、特に下記（ＸＸ－１）～（Ｘ－２４）で表される連結基が好ましく、（ＸＸ－１）および（ＸＸ－２）で表される（メタ）アクリル系連結鎖、（ＸＸ－１０）～（ＸＸ－１７）で表されるスチレン系連結鎖、（ＸＸ－１８）および（ＸＸ－１９）、並びに、（ＸＸ－２４）で表されるビニル系連結鎖から選択されることがより好ましく、（ＸＸ－１）および（ＸＸ－２）で表される（メタ）アクリル系連結鎖、（ＸＸ－１０）～（ＸＸ－１７）で表されるスチレン系連結鎖、（ＸＸ－２４）で表されるビニル系連結鎖から選択されることがより好ましく、（ＸＸ－１）および（ＸＸ－２）で表される（メタ）アクリル系連結鎖および（ＸＸ－１１）で表されるスチレン系連結鎖がより好ましい。
　（ＸＸ－１）～（Ｘ－２４）中、＊で示された部位でＬ1と連結していることを表す。Ｍｅはメチル基を表す。また、（ＸＸ－１８）および（ＸＸ－１９）中のＲは、水素原子、炭素数１～５のアルキル基またはフェニル基を表す。 In general formula (A), X 1 represents a linking group formed by polymerization. That is, it refers to a portion that forms a repeating unit corresponding to the main chain formed by the polymerization reaction. Two sites represented by * are repeating units. X 1 is not particularly limited as long as it is a linking group formed from a known polymerizable monomer, but in particular, linking groups represented by the following (XX-1) to (X-24) are preferred, and (XX -1) and (XX-2) (meth) acrylic linking chains, (XX-10) to (XX-17) styrenic linking chains, (XX-18) and (XX- 19), and more preferably selected from vinyl-based linking chains represented by (XX-24), (meth) acrylic linking chains represented by (XX-1) and (XX-2), More preferably, it is selected from styrenic linking chains represented by (XX-10) to (XX-17) and vinyl linking chains represented by (XX-24), and (XX-1) and (XX -2) and a (meth) acrylic linking chain represented by (XX-11) Styrene connecting chains are more preferred.
In (XX-1) to (X-24), it is linked to L 1 at the site indicated by *. Me represents a methyl group. R in (XX-18) and (XX-19) represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, or a phenyl group.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
　一般式（Ａ）中、Ｌ1は単結合または２価の連結基を表す。Ｌ1が２価の連結基を表す場合の該２価の連結基としては、炭素数１～３０の置換もしくは無置換のアルキレン基（例えば、メチレン基、エチレン基、トリメチレン基、プロピレン基、ブチレン基など）、炭素数６～３０の置換もしくは無置換のアリーレン基（例えば、フェニレン基、ナフタレン基等）、置換もしくは無置換のヘテロ環連結基、－ＣＨ＝ＣＨ－、－Ｏ－、－Ｓ－、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）－、－ＣＯ2－、－ＮＲ－、－ＣＯＮＲ－、－Ｏ2Ｃ－、－ＳＯ－、－ＳＯ2－およびこれらを２個以上連結して形成される連結基を表す。また、Ｌ1がアニオンを含む構成も好ましい。Ｌ1は、単結合またはアルキレン基がより好ましく、単結合または－（ＣＨ2）ｎ－（ｎは１～５の整数）がより好ましい。ここで、Ｒは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基、またはヘテロ環基を表す。Ｌ1がアニオンを含む場合の例については、後述する。 In general formula (A), L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. When L 1 represents a divalent linking group, the divalent linking group includes a substituted or unsubstituted alkylene group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms (eg, methylene group, ethylene group, trimethylene group, propylene group, butylene). Group), a substituted or unsubstituted arylene group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms (eg, phenylene group, naphthalene group, etc.), substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic linking group, —CH═CH—, —O—, —S —, —C (═O) —, —CO 2 —, —NR—, —CONR—, —O 2 C—, —SO—, —SO 2 — and a linkage formed by linking two or more thereof. Represents a group. Further, L 1 is preferably also configured to include an anion. L 1 is more preferably a single bond or an alkylene group, and more preferably a single bond or — (CH 2 ) n— (n is an integer of 1 to 5). Here, R represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group each independently. An example of the case where L 1 contains an anion will be described later.
　一般式（Ａ）中、ＤｙｅＩは後述する色素化合物に由来する色素構造を表す。 In general formula (A), DyeI represents a dye structure derived from a dye compound described later.
　一般式（Ａ）で表される構成単位を有する色素多量体は、（１）色素残基を有するモノマーを付加重合により合成する方法、（２）イソシアネート基、酸無水物基またはエポキシ基等の高反応性官能基を有するポリマーと、高反応性基と反応可能な官能基（ヒドロキシル基、一級または二級アミノ基、カルボキシル基等）を有する色素とを反応させる方法により合成できる。
　付加重合には公知の付加重合（ラジカル重合、アニオン重合、カチオン重合）が適用できるが、このうち、特にラジカル重合により合成することが反応条件を穏和化でき、色素構造を分解させないため好ましい。ラジカル重合には、公知の反応条件を適用することができる。すなわち、本発明で用いる色素多量体は、付加重合体であることが好ましい。
　中でも、本発明における一般式（Ａ）で表される構成単位を有する色素多量体は、耐熱性の観点から、エチレン性不飽和結合を有する色素単量体を用いてラジカル重合して得られたラジカル重合体であることが好ましい。 The dye multimer having the structural unit represented by the general formula (A) includes (1) a method of synthesizing a monomer having a dye residue by addition polymerization, (2) an isocyanate group, an acid anhydride group or an epoxy group. It can be synthesized by a method in which a polymer having a highly reactive functional group is reacted with a dye having a functional group (hydroxyl group, primary or secondary amino group, carboxyl group, etc.) capable of reacting with the highly reactive group.
Known addition polymerizations (radical polymerization, anionic polymerization, cationic polymerization) can be applied to the addition polymerization, but among these, synthesis by radical polymerization is particularly preferable because the reaction conditions can be moderated and the dye structure is not decomposed. Known reaction conditions can be applied to the radical polymerization. That is, the dye multimer used in the present invention is preferably an addition polymer.
Among them, the dye multimer having the structural unit represented by the general formula (A) in the present invention was obtained by radical polymerization using a dye monomer having an ethylenically unsaturated bond from the viewpoint of heat resistance. A radical polymer is preferred.
＜＜色素構造＞＞
　本発明で用いる色素構造は、特に定めるものではなく、公知の色素構造を採用できる。本発明で用いられる色素構造は、通常、分子内にカチオン部位を含む色素構造が好ましい。
　具体的には、ジピロメテン色素、カルボニウム色素（ジフェニルメタン色素、トリアリールメタン色素、キサンテン色素、アクリジン色素など）、アゾ色素、ポリメチン色素（オキソノール色素、メロシアニン色素、アリーリデン色素、スチリル色素、シアニン色素、スクアリリウム色素、クロコニウム色素など）、サブフタロシアニン色素、およびそれらの金属錯体色素から選ばれる色素に由来する色素構造などを挙げることができる。 << Dye structure >>
The dye structure used in the present invention is not particularly defined, and a known dye structure can be adopted. The dye structure used in the present invention is usually preferably a dye structure containing a cation moiety in the molecule.
Specifically, dipyrromethene dye, carbonium dye (diphenylmethane dye, triarylmethane dye, xanthene dye, acridine dye, etc.), azo dye, polymethine dye (oxonol dye, merocyanine dye, arylidene dye, styryl dye, cyanine dye, squarylium dye And a dye structure derived from a dye selected from a subphthalocyanine dye and a metal complex dye thereof.
　これらの色素構造の中でも、色特性の観点から、ジピロメテン色素、カルボニウム色素、およびポリメチン色素から選ばれる色素に由来する色素構造が好ましく、ジピロメテン色素、トリアリールメタン色素、キサンテン色素、シアニン色素、スクアリリウム色素から選ばれる色素に由来する色素構造がより好ましく、ジピロメテン色素、トリアリールメタン色素、アゾ色素、キサンテン色素から選ばれる色素に由来する色素構造がさらに好ましく、ジピロメテン色素、アゾ色素、およびキサンテン色素から選ばれる色素に由来する色素構造がよりさらに好ましく、アゾ色素およびキサンテン色素に由来する色素構造が特に好ましく、キサンテン色素が最も好ましい。このような色素構造を有するカチオンを用いると耐熱性および耐光性がより向上する傾向にある。 Among these dye structures, a dye structure derived from a dye selected from dipyrromethene dyes, carbonium dyes, and polymethine dyes is preferable from the viewpoint of color characteristics, and dipyrromethene dyes, triarylmethane dyes, xanthene dyes, cyanine dyes, squarylium dyes. More preferred is a dye structure derived from a dye selected from dipyrromethene dyes, triarylmethane dyes, azo dyes, xanthene dyes, and more preferred is a dye structure derived from dipyrromethene dyes, azo dyes, and xanthene dyes. The dye structure derived from the dye is more preferable, the dye structure derived from the azo dye and the xanthene dye is particularly preferable, and the xanthene dye is most preferable. When a cation having such a dye structure is used, heat resistance and light resistance tend to be further improved.
　色素構造を形成しうる具体的な色素化合物については「新版染料便覧」（有機合成化学協会編；丸善、1970）、「カラーインデックス」（The Society of Dyers and colourists）、「色素ハンドブック」（大河原他編；講談社、1986）などに記載されている。 For specific pigment compounds that can form pigment structures, see "New Edition Handbook of Dye" (edited by the Society of Synthetic Organic Chemistry; Maruzen, 1970), "Color Index" (The Society of Dyers and colourists), "Dye Handbook" (Okawara et al.) Ed., Kodansha, 1986).
　本発明では、色素構造がカチオンを有することが好ましい。以下、本発明で好ましく用いられる色素構造について具体的に説明する。 In the present invention, the dye structure preferably has a cation. Hereinafter, the dye structure preferably used in the present invention will be described in detail.
＜＜＜ジピロメテン色素＞＞＞
　本発明に係る色素構造の態様の一つは、下記に示すジピロメテン色素構造である。
　本発明におけるジピロメテン色素としては、ジピロメテン化合物、および、ジピロメテン化合物と金属または金属化合物とから得られるジピロメテン金属錯体化合物が好ましい。これらのジピロメテン色素構造の１つの箇所で、ポリマーと結合している。
　なお、本発明では、ジピロメテン構造を含む化合物をジピロメテン化合物と称し、ジピロメテン構造を含む化合物に金属または金属化合物に配位した錯体をジピロメテン金属錯体化合物と称する。 <<< dipyrromethene dye >>>
One embodiment of the dye structure according to the present invention is a dipyrromethene dye structure shown below.
The dipyrromethene dye in the present invention is preferably a dipyrromethene compound and a dipyrromethene metal complex compound obtained from a dipyrromethene compound and a metal or a metal compound. At one point in these dipyrromethene dye structures, it is attached to the polymer.
In the present invention, a compound having a dipyrromethene structure is referred to as a dipyrromethene compound, and a metal or a complex coordinated to a metal compound is referred to as a dipyrromethene metal complex compound.
　ジピロメテン金属錯体化合物としては、下記一般式（Ｍ）で表されるジピロメテン化合物と金属または金属化合物とから得られるジピロメテン金属錯体化合物およびその互変異性体が好ましく、なかでも、好ましい態様として下記一般式（７）で表されるジピロメテン金属錯体化合物、または、下記一般式（８）で表されるジピロメテン金属錯体化合物が挙げられ、一般式（８）で表されるジピロメテン金属錯体化合物がより好ましい。 The dipyrromethene metal complex compound is preferably a dipyrromethene metal complex compound obtained from a dipyrromethene compound represented by the following general formula (M) and a metal or a metal compound, and a tautomer thereof. The dipyrromethene metal complex compound represented by (7) or the dipyrromethene metal complex compound represented by the following general formula (8) may be mentioned, and the dipyrromethene metal complex compound represented by the general formula (8) is more preferable.
一般式（Ｍ）で表されるジピロメテン化合物と金属または金属化合物とから得られるジピロメテン金属錯体化合物、およびその互変異性体
　色素構造の好ましい態様の一つは、下記一般式（Ｍ）で表される化合物（ジピロメテン化合物）またはその互変異性体が、金属または金属化合物に配位した錯体（以下、適宜「特定錯体」と称する。）を含む色素構造である。本発明では、下記化合物がカチオン構造を形成するが、例えば、一般式（Ｍ）の窒素原子に結合している亜鉛等の金属がカチオン構造を形成しうる。 A dipyrromethene metal complex compound obtained from a dipyrromethene compound represented by the general formula (M) and a metal or a metal compound, and a tautomer thereof. One preferred embodiment of the dye structure is represented by the following general formula (M). The compound (dipyrromethene compound) or a tautomer thereof has a dye structure including a metal or a complex coordinated to a metal compound (hereinafter referred to as “specific complex” as appropriate). In the present invention, the following compound forms a cation structure. For example, a metal such as zinc bonded to the nitrogen atom of the general formula (M) can form a cation structure.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
 （一般式（Ｍ）において、Ｒ4～Ｒ10は、各々独立に、水素原子または１価の置換基を表す。但し、Ｒ4とＲ9とが互いに結合して環を形成することはない。）
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
 (In the general formula (M), R 4 to R 10 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent, provided that R 4 and R 9 are not bonded to each other to form a ring. .)
　一般式（Ｍ）で表される化合物を、上記一般式（Ａ）～（Ｄ）で表される構造単位に導入する場合の導入部位は、特に制限はないが、合成適合性の点で、Ｒ4～Ｒ9のいずれか１つの部位で導入されることが好ましく、Ｒ4、Ｒ6、Ｒ7およびＲ9のいずれか１つにおいて導入されることがより好ましく、Ｒ4およびＲ9のいずれか１つにおいて導入されることがさらに好ましい。 The introduction site in the case of introducing the compound represented by the general formula (M) into the structural units represented by the general formulas (A) to (D) is not particularly limited, but in terms of synthesis compatibility, it is preferable that introduced at any one site R 4 ~ R 9, R 4, R 6, it is more preferable that introduced at any one of R 7 and R 9, R 4 and R 9 More preferably, it is introduced in any one of them.
　一般式（Ｍ）におけるＲ4～Ｒ9が１価の置換基を表す場合の１価の置換基としては、後述する置換基群Ａの項で挙げた置換基が挙げられる。 Examples of the monovalent substituent in the case where R 4 to R 9 in the general formula (M) represent a monovalent substituent include the substituents mentioned in the section of the substituent group A described later.
　一般式（Ｍ）中のＲ4～Ｒ9で示される１価の置換基が、さらに置換可能な基である場合には、Ｒ4～Ｒ9で説明した置換基をさらに有していてもよく、２個以上の置換基を有している場合には、それらの置換基は同一であっても異なっていてもよい。 When the monovalent substituents represented by R 4 to R 9 in the general formula (M) are further substitutable groups, they may further have the substituents described for R 4 to R 9. In the case of having two or more substituents, these substituents may be the same or different.
　一般式（Ｍ）中のＲ4とＲ5、Ｒ5とＲ6、Ｒ7とＲ8、および、Ｒ8とＲ9は、それぞれ独立に、互いに結合して５員、６員、または７員の飽和環、または不飽和環を形成していてもよい。但し、Ｒ4とＲ9とが互いに結合して環を形成することはない。形成される５員、６員、および７員の環が、さらに置換可能な基である場合には、上記Ｒ4～Ｒ9で説明した置換基で置換されていてもよく、２個以上の置換基で置換されている場合には、それらの置換基は同一であっても異なっていてもよい。 R 4 and R 5 , R 5 and R 6 , R 7 and R 8 , and R 8 and R 9 in the general formula (M) are each independently bonded to each other to form a 5-membered, 6-membered, or 7-membered compound. A membered saturated ring or an unsaturated ring may be formed. However, R 4 and R 9 are not bonded to each other to form a ring. When the 5-membered, 6-membered, and 7-membered rings formed are further substitutable groups, they may be substituted with the substituents described for R 4 to R 9 above, and two or more When substituted with a substituent, these substituents may be the same or different.
　一般式（Ｍ）中のＲ4とＲ5、Ｒ5とＲ6、Ｒ7とＲ8、および、Ｒ8とＲ9が、各々独立に、互いに結合して、置換基を有しない５員、６員、または７員の飽和環、または不飽和環を形成する場合、置換基を有しない５員、６員、または７員の飽和環、または不飽和環としては、例えば、ピロール環、フラン環、チオフェン環、ピラゾール環、イミダゾール環、トリアゾール環、オキサゾール環、チアゾール環、ピロリジン環、ピペリジン環、シクロペンテン環、シクロヘキセン環、ベンゼン環、ピリジン環、ピラジン環、およびピリダジン環が挙げられ、好ましくはベンゼン環またはピリジン環が挙げられる。 R 4 and R 5 , R 5 and R 6 , R 7 and R 8 , and R 8 and R 9 in general formula (M) are each independently bonded to each other and have no substituent. , 6-membered, or 7-membered saturated ring, or unsaturated ring, a 5-membered, 6-membered, or 7-membered saturated ring or unsaturated ring having no substituent includes, for example, a pyrrole ring, Furan ring, thiophene ring, pyrazole ring, imidazole ring, triazole ring, oxazole ring, thiazole ring, pyrrolidine ring, piperidine ring, cyclopentene ring, cyclohexene ring, benzene ring, pyridine ring, pyrazine ring, and pyridazine ring are preferable. Includes a benzene ring or a pyridine ring.
　一般式（Ｍ）におけるＲ10は、好ましくは、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アリール基、またはヘテロ環基を表す。上記ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アリール基、およびヘテロ環基としては、後述する置換基群Ａのハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アリール基、およびヘテロ環基とそれぞれ同義であり、その好ましい範囲も同様である。
　Ｒ10がアルキル基、アリール基、または、ヘテロ環基を表す場合の、アルキル基、アリール基、および、ヘテロ環基が、さらに置換可能な基である場合には、後述する置換基群Ａの項において説明した置換基で置換されていてもよく、２個以上の置換基で置換されている場合には、それらの置換基は同一であっても異なっていてもよい。 R 10 in formula (M) preferably represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group. The halogen atom, alkyl group, aryl group, and heterocyclic group have the same definitions as the halogen atom, alkyl group, aryl group, and heterocyclic group of Substituent Group A described later, and the preferred ranges thereof are also the same. .
When R 10 represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group, and the alkyl group, aryl group, and heterocyclic group are groups that can be further substituted, In the case of being substituted with two or more substituents, those substituents may be the same or different.
～金属または金属化合物～
　本発明における特定錯体は、既述の一般式（Ｍ）で表されるジピロメテン化合物またはその互変異性体が金属または金属化合物に配位した錯体である。
　ここで、金属または金属化合物としては、錯体を形成可能な金属または金属化合物であればいずれであってもよく、２価の金属原子、２価の金属酸化物、２価の金属水酸化物、または２価の金属塩化物が含まれる。金属または金属化合物としては、例えば、Ｚｎ、Ｍｇ、Ｓｉ、Ｓｎ、Ｒｈ、Ｐｔ、Ｐｄ、Ｍｏ、Ｍｎ、Ｐｂ、Ｃｕ、Ｎｉ、Ｃｏ、Ｆｅ等の金属の他に、ＡｌＣｌ、ＩｎＣｌ、ＦｅＣｌ、ＴｉＣｌ2、ＳｎＣｌ2、ＳｉＣｌ2、ＧｅＣｌ2などの金属塩化物、ＴｉＯ、ＶＯ等の金属酸化物、Ｓｉ（ＯＨ）2等の金属水酸化物も含まれる。
　これらの中でも、錯体の安定性、分光特性、耐熱、耐光性、および製造適性等の観点から、Ｆｅ、Ｚｎ、Ｍｇ、Ｓｉ、Ｐｔ、Ｐｄ、Ｍｏ、Ｍｎ、Ｃｕ、Ｎｉ、Ｃｏ、ＴｉＯ、またはＶＯが好ましく、Ｚｎ、Ｍｇ、Ｓｉ、Ｐｔ、Ｐｄ、Ｃｕ、Ｎｉ、Ｃｏ、またはＶＯがさらに好ましく、Ｚｎが特に好ましい。 ~ Metal or metal compound ~
The specific complex in the present invention is a complex in which a dipyrromethene compound represented by the general formula (M) or a tautomer thereof is coordinated to a metal or a metal compound.
Here, the metal or metal compound may be any metal or metal compound capable of forming a complex, and may be any divalent metal atom, divalent metal oxide, divalent metal hydroxide, Or a bivalent metal chloride is contained. Examples of the metal or metal compound include ZnCl, Mg, Si, Sn, Rh, Pt, Pd, Mo, Mn, Pb, Cu, Ni, Co, Fe, and other metals, as well as AlCl, InCl, FeCl, and TiCl. 2 , metal chlorides such as SnCl 2 , SiCl 2 and GeCl 2 , metal oxides such as TiO and VO, and metal hydroxides such as Si (OH) 2 are also included.
Among these, Fe, Zn, Mg, Si, Pt, Pd, Mo, Mn, Cu, Ni, Co, TiO, or from the viewpoint of the stability, spectral characteristics, heat resistance, light resistance, and production suitability of the complex VO is preferable, Zn, Mg, Si, Pt, Pd, Cu, Ni, Co, or VO is more preferable, and Zn is particularly preferable.
　次に、一般式（Ｍ）で表される化合物の本発明における特定錯体のさらに好ましい範囲について説明する。 Next, a more preferable range of the specific complex in the present invention of the compound represented by the general formula (M) will be described.
　本発明における特定錯体の好ましい範囲は、一般式（Ｍ）において、Ｒ4およびＲ9が、各々独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アリール基、ヘテロ環基、シリル基、ヒドロキシル基、シアノ基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、ヘテロ環オキシ基、アシル基、アルコキシカルボニル基、カルバモイル基、アミノ基、アニリノ基、ヘテロ環アミノ基、カルボンアミド基、ウレイド基、イミド基、アルコキシカルボニルアミノ基、アリールオキシカルボニルアミノ基、スルホンアミド基、アゾ基、アルキルチオ基、アリールチオ基、ヘテロ環チオ基、アルキルスルホニル基、アリールスルホニル基、またはホスフィノイルアミノ基であり；Ｒ5およびＲ8が、各々独立に、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アリール基、ヘテロ環基、ヒドロキシル基、シアノ基、ニトロ基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、ヘテロ環オキシ基、アシル基、アルコキシカルボニル基、アリールオキシカルボニル基、カルバモイル基、イミド基、アルコキシカルボニルアミノ基、スルホンアミド基、アゾ基、アルキルチオ基、アリールチオ基、ヘテロ環チオ基、アルキルスルホニル基、アリールスルホニル基、またはスルファモイル基であり；Ｒ6およびＲ7が、各々独立に、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アリール基、ヘテロ環基、シリル基、ヒドロキシル基、シアノ基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、ヘテロ環オキシ基、アシル基、アルコキシカルボニル基、カルバモイル基、アニリノ基、カルボンアミド基、ウレイド基、イミド基、アルコキシカルボニルアミノ基、スルホンアミド基、アゾ基、アルキルチオ基、アリールチオ基、ヘテロ環チオ基、アルキルスルホニル基、アリールスルホニル基、スルファモイル基、またはホスフィノイルアミノ基であり；Ｒ10が、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アリール基、またはヘテロ環基であり；金属または金属化合物が、Ｚｎ、Ｍｇ、Ｓｉ、Ｐｔ、Ｐｄ、Ｍｏ、Ｍｎ、Ｃｕ、Ｎｉ、Ｃｏ、ＴｉＯ、またはＶ＝Ｏである範囲である。 The preferred range of the specific complex in the present invention is that in general formula (M), R 4 and R 9 are each independently a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a silyl group, a hydroxyl group, Cyano group, alkoxy group, aryloxy group, heterocyclic oxy group, acyl group, alkoxycarbonyl group, carbamoyl group, amino group, anilino group, heterocyclic amino group, carbonamido group, ureido group, imide group, alkoxycarbonylamino group , Aryloxycarbonylamino group, sulfonamido group, azo group, alkylthio group, arylthio group, heterocyclic thio group, alkylsulfonyl group, arylsulfonyl group, or phosphinoylamino group; R 5 and R 8 are each Independently, a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an Group, heterocyclic group, hydroxyl group, cyano group, nitro group, alkoxy group, aryloxy group, heterocyclic oxy group, acyl group, alkoxycarbonyl group, aryloxycarbonyl group, carbamoyl group, imide group, alkoxycarbonylamino Group, sulfonamido group, azo group, alkylthio group, arylthio group, heterocyclic thio group, alkylsulfonyl group, arylsulfonyl group, or sulfamoyl group; R 6 and R 7 are each independently a hydrogen atom, halogen atom , Alkyl group, alkenyl group, aryl group, heterocyclic group, silyl group, hydroxyl group, cyano group, alkoxy group, aryloxy group, heterocyclic oxy group, acyl group, alkoxycarbonyl group, carbamoyl group, anilino group, carbonamide Group, ureido group, imide group, Job aryloxycarbonyl amino group, a sulfonamido group, an azo group, an alkylthio group, an arylthio group, a heterocyclic thio group, an alkylsulfonyl group, an arylsulfonyl group, a sulfamoyl group, or be a phosphinoylamino group,; R 10 is a hydrogen atom A halogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group; the metal or metal compound is Zn, Mg, Si, Pt, Pd, Mo, Mn, Cu, Ni, Co, TiO, or V = O It is a certain range.
　本発明における特定錯体のより好ましい範囲は、一般式（Ｍ）において、Ｒ4およびＲ9が、各々独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アリール基、ヘテロ環基、シアノ基、アシル基、アルコキシカルボニル基、カルバモイル基、アミノ基、ヘテロ環アミノ基、カルボンアミド基、ウレイド基、イミド基、アルコキシカルボニルアミノ基、アリールオキシカルボニルアミノ基、スルホンアミド基、アゾ基、アルキルスルホニル基、アリールスルホニル基、またはホスフィノイルアミノ基であり；Ｒ5およびＲ8が、各々独立に、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アリール基、ヘテロ環基、シアノ基、ニトロ基、アシル基、アルコキシカルボニル基、アリールオキシカルボニル基、カルバモイル基、イミド基、アルキルスルホニル基、アリールスルホニル基、またはスルファモイル基であり；Ｒ6およびＲ7が、各々独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アリール基、ヘテロ環基、シアノ基、アシル基、アルコキシカルボニル基、カルバモイル基、カルボンアミド基、ウレイド基、イミド基、アルコキシカルボニルアミノ基、スルホンアミド基、アルキルチオ基、アリールチオ基、ヘテロ環チオ基、アルキルスルホニル基、アリールスルホニル基、またはスルファモイル基であり；Ｒ10が、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アリール基、またはヘテロ環基であり；金属または金属化合物が、Ｚｎ、Ｍｇ、Ｓｉ、Ｐｔ、Ｐｄ、Ｃｕ、Ｎｉ、Ｃｏ、またはＶ＝Ｏである範囲である。 A more preferable range of the specific complex in the present invention is that in the general formula (M), R 4 and R 9 are each independently a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a cyano group, or an acyl group. , Alkoxycarbonyl group, carbamoyl group, amino group, heterocyclic amino group, carbonamido group, ureido group, imide group, alkoxycarbonylamino group, aryloxycarbonylamino group, sulfonamido group, azo group, alkylsulfonyl group, arylsulfonyl R 5 and R 8 are each independently an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a cyano group, a nitro group, an acyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxy group, or a phosphinoylamino group Carbonyl group, carbamoyl group, imide group, alkylsulfonyl group, ant Rusuruhoniru group or be a sulfamoyl group,; R 6 and R 7 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a cyano group, an acyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, a carbamoyl group, A carbonamido group, a ureido group, an imide group, an alkoxycarbonylamino group, a sulfonamido group, an alkylthio group, an arylthio group, a heterocyclic thio group, an alkylsulfonyl group, an arylsulfonyl group, or a sulfamoyl group; R 10 is a hydrogen atom , A halogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group; in the range where the metal or metal compound is Zn, Mg, Si, Pt, Pd, Cu, Ni, Co, or V = O.
　本発明における特定錯体の特に好ましい範囲は、一般式（Ｍ）において、Ｒ4およびＲ9が、各々独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基、ヘテロ環基、アミノ基、ヘテロ環アミノ基、カルボンアミド基、ウレイド基、イミド基、アルコキシカルボニルアミノ基、スルホンアミド基、アゾ基、アルキルスルホニル基、アリールスルホニル基、またはホスフィノイルアミノ基であり；Ｒ5およびＲ8が、各々独立に、アルキル基、アリール基、ヘテロ環基、シアノ基、アシル基、アルコキシカルボニル基、カルバモイル基、アルキルスルホニル基、またはアリールスルホニル基であり；Ｒ6およびＲ7が、各々独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基、またはヘテロ環基であり；Ｒ10が、水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基、またはヘテロ環基であり；金属または金属化合物が、Ｚｎ、Ｃｕ、Ｃｏ、またはＶ＝Ｏである範囲である。 The particularly preferred range of the specific complex in the present invention is that in general formula (M), R 4 and R 9 are each independently a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an amino group, a heterocyclic amino group, A carbonamido group, a ureido group, an imide group, an alkoxycarbonylamino group, a sulfonamido group, an azo group, an alkylsulfonyl group, an arylsulfonyl group, or a phosphinoylamino group; R 5 and R 8 are each independently An alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a cyano group, an acyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, a carbamoyl group, an alkylsulfonyl group, or an arylsulfonyl group; R 6 and R 7 are each independently a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group; , an aryl group or heteroaryl ring group,; R 10 is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heteroaryl, A group; metal or metal compound is in the range is Zn, Cu, Co or V = O,.
　さらに、以下に詳述する一般式（７）または一般式（８）で表されるジピロメテン金属錯体化合物も、ジピロメテン色素の特に好ましい様態である。 Furthermore, the dipyrromethene metal complex compound represented by the general formula (7) or the general formula (8) described in detail below is also a particularly preferable embodiment of the dipyrromethene dye.
一般式（７）で表されるジピロメテン金属錯体化合物
　色素構造を有するカチオンにおける色素構造の好適な態様の一つは、下記一般式（７）で表されるジピロメテン金属錯体化合物に由来する色素構造である。本発明では、下記化合物がカチオン構造を形成することが好ましいが、例えば、一般式（７）のＭａが亜鉛等の金属カチオン構造を形成しうる。 The dipyrromethene metal complex compound represented by the general formula (7) One of the preferred embodiments of the dye structure in the cation having the dye structure is a dye structure derived from the dipyrromethene metal complex compound represented by the following general formula (7). is there. In the present invention, the following compound preferably forms a cation structure. For example, Ma in the general formula (7) can form a metal cation structure such as zinc.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
 （一般式（７）中、Ｒ4～Ｒ9は、各々独立に、水素原子、または１価の置換基を表し、Ｒ10は、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アリール基、またはヘテロ環基を表す。Ｍａは、金属原子、または金属化合物を表す。Ｘ1は、Ｍａに結合可能な基を表し、Ｘ2は、Ｍａの電荷を中和する基を表し、Ｘ1とＸ2は、互いに結合してＭａと共に５員、６員、または７員の環を形成していてもよい。ただし、Ｒ4とＲ9とが互いに結合して環を形成することはない。）
　なお、一般式（７）で表されるジピロメテン金属錯体化合物は、互変異性体を含む。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
 (In the general formula (7), R 4 to R 9 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent, and R 10 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic ring. Ma represents a metal atom or a metal compound, X 1 represents a group capable of binding to Ma, X 2 represents a group that neutralizes the charge of Ma, and X 1 and X 2 represent And may be bonded to each other to form a 5-membered, 6-membered or 7-membered ring together with Ma, provided that R 4 and R 9 are not bonded to each other to form a ring.)
In addition, the dipyrromethene metal complex compound represented by General formula (7) contains a tautomer.
　一般式（７）で表されるジピロメテン金属錯体化合物を、上記一般式（Ａ）～（Ｄ）で表される構造単位に導入する場合の導入部位は、特に制限はないが、合成適合性の点で、Ｒ4～Ｒ9のいずれか１つの部位で導入されることが好ましく、Ｒ4、Ｒ6、Ｒ7およびＲ9のいずれか１つにおいて導入されることがより好ましく、Ｒ4およびＲ9のいずれか１つにおいて導入されることがさらに好ましい。 There are no particular restrictions on the introduction site when the dipyrromethene metal complex compound represented by the general formula (7) is introduced into the structural units represented by the general formulas (A) to (D), but the synthesis compatibility is not limited. In this respect, it is preferably introduced at any one of R 4 to R 9 , more preferably introduced at any one of R 4 , R 6 , R 7 and R 9 , and R 4 and More preferably, it is introduced at any one of R 9 .
　色素構造が、アルカリ可溶性基を有する場合において、上記アルカリ可溶性基を導入する方法としては、上記一般式（７）におけるＲ4～Ｒ10、Ｘ1およびＸ2のいずれか１つまたは２つ以上の置換基に、アルカリ可溶性基を持たせる方法を用いることができる。これら置換基の中でも、Ｒ4～Ｒ9およびＸ1のいずれかが好ましく、Ｒ4、Ｒ6、Ｒ7およびＲ9のいずれかがより好ましく、Ｒ4およびＲ9のいずれかがさらに好ましい。 When the dye structure has an alkali-soluble group, a method for introducing the alkali-soluble group is any one or two or more of R 4 to R 10 , X 1 and X 2 in the general formula (7). A method in which an alkali-soluble group is added to the substituents of can be used. Among these substituents, any of R 4 to R 9 and X 1 is preferable, any of R 4 , R 6 , R 7 and R 9 is more preferable, and any of R 4 and R 9 is more preferable.
　一般式（７）で表されるジピロメテン金属錯体化合物は、本発明の効果を損なわない限りにおいて、アルカリ可溶性基以外の官能基を有していてもよい。
　一般式（７）における中のＲ4～Ｒ9は、上記一般式（Ｍ）におけるＲ4～Ｒ9と同義であり、好ましい態様も同様である。 The dipyrromethene metal complex compound represented by the general formula (7) may have a functional group other than the alkali-soluble group as long as the effects of the present invention are not impaired.
R 4 ~ R 9 medium in the general formula (7) has the same meaning as R 4 ~ R 9 in the general formula (M), preferable embodiments thereof are also the same.
　一般式（７）中、Ｍａは、金属原子または金属化合物を表す。金属原子または金属化合物としては、錯体を形成可能な金属原子または金属化合物であればいずれであってもよく、２価の金属原子、２価の金属酸化物、２価の金属水酸化物、または２価の金属塩化物が含まれる。
　例えば、Ｚｎ、Ｍｇ、Ｓｉ、Ｓｎ、Ｒｈ、Ｐｔ、Ｐｄ、Ｍｏ、Ｍｎ、Ｐｂ、Ｃｕ、Ｎｉ、Ｃｏ、Ｆｅ等、およびＡｌＣｌ、ＩｎＣｌ、ＦｅＣｌ、ＴｉＣｌ2、ＳｎＣｌ2、ＳｉＣｌ2、ＧｅＣｌ2などの金属塩化物、ＴｉＯ、Ｖ＝Ｏ等の金属酸化物、Ｓｉ（ＯＨ）2等の金属水酸化物が含まれる。 In general formula (7), Ma represents a metal atom or a metal compound. The metal atom or metal compound may be any metal atom or metal compound capable of forming a complex, may be any divalent metal atom, divalent metal oxide, divalent metal hydroxide, or Divalent metal chlorides are included.
For example, Zn, Mg, Si, Sn , Rh, Pt, Pd, Mo, Mn, Pb, Cu, Ni, Co, Fe , etc., and AlCl, InCl, FeCl, TiCl 2 , SnCl 2, SiCl 2, GeCl 2 , etc. Metal chlorides, TiO, metal oxides such as V = O, and metal hydroxides such as Si (OH) 2 .
　これらの中でも、錯体の安定性、分光特性、耐熱、耐光性、および製造適性等の観点から、金属原子または金属化合物として、Ｆｅ、Ｚｎ、Ｍｇ、Ｓｉ、Ｐｔ、Ｐｄ、Ｍｏ、Ｍｎ、Ｃｕ、Ｎｉ、Ｃｏ、ＴｉＯ、およびＶ＝Ｏが好ましく、Ｚｎ、Ｍｇ、Ｓｉ、Ｐｔ、Ｐｄ、Ｃｕ、Ｎｉ、Ｃｏ、およびＶ＝Ｏがより好ましく、Ｚｎ、Ｃｏ、Ｖ＝Ｏ、およびＣｕがさらに好ましく、Ｚｎが特に好ましい。 Among these, from the viewpoints of the stability, spectral characteristics, heat resistance, light resistance, and production suitability of the complex, Fe, Zn, Mg, Si, Pt, Pd, Mo, Mn, Cu, Ni, Co, TiO, and V = O are preferred, Zn, Mg, Si, Pt, Pd, Cu, Ni, Co, and V = O are more preferred, and Zn, Co, V = O, and Cu are more preferred Zn is particularly preferred.
　また、一般式（７）中、Ｒ10は、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アリール基、またはヘテロ環基を表し、好ましくは水素原子である。 In the general formula (7), R 10 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group, preferably a hydrogen atom.
　一般式（７）中、Ｘ1は、Ｍａに結合可能な基であればいずれであってもよく、具体的には、水、アルコール類（例えば、メタノール、エタノール、プロパノール）等、さらに「金属キレート」（［１］坂口武一・上野景平著（１９９５年　南江堂）、［２］（１９９６年）、［３］（１９９７年）等）に記載の化合物が挙げられる。中でも、製造の点で、水、カルボン酸化合物、アルコール類が好ましく、水、カルボン酸化合物がより好ましい。 In the general formula (7), X 1 may be any group as long as it is a group capable of binding to Ma. Specifically, water, alcohols (eg, methanol, ethanol, propanol), etc. The chelate ”([1] Takeichi Sakaguchi / Keihei Ueno (1995 Nanoedo), [2] (1996), [3] (1997), etc.) can be mentioned. Among these, from the viewpoint of production, water, carboxylic acid compounds and alcohols are preferable, and water and carboxylic acid compounds are more preferable.
　一般式（７）中、Ｘ2で表される「Ｍａの電荷を中和する基」としては、例えば、ハロゲン原子、水酸基、カルボン酸基、燐酸基、スルホン酸基等が挙げられ、中でも、製造の点で、ハロゲン原子、水酸基、カルボン酸基、スルホン酸基が好ましく、水酸基、カルボン酸基がより好ましい。 In the general formula (7), examples of the “group that neutralizes the charge of Ma” represented by X 2 include a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, a carboxylic acid group, a phosphoric acid group, and a sulfonic acid group. From the viewpoint of production, a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, a carboxylic acid group, and a sulfonic acid group are preferable, and a hydroxyl group and a carboxylic acid group are more preferable.
　一般式（７）中、Ｘ1とＸ2は、互いに結合して、Ｍａと共に５員、６員、または７員の環を形成してもよい。形成される５員、６員、および７員の環は、飽和環であっても不飽和環であってもよい。また、５員、６員、および７員の環は、炭素原子のみで構成されていてもよく、窒素原子、酸素原子、または／および硫黄原子から選ばれる原子を少なくとも１個有するヘテロ環を形成していてもよい。 In General Formula (7), X 1 and X 2 may be bonded to each other to form a 5-membered, 6-membered, or 7-membered ring together with Ma. The 5-membered, 6-membered and 7-membered rings formed may be saturated or unsaturated. The 5-membered, 6-membered, and 7-membered rings may be composed of only carbon atoms, and form a heterocycle having at least one atom selected from a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, and / or a sulfur atom. You may do it.
　一般式（７）で表される化合物の好ましい態様としては、Ｒ4～Ｒ9は各々独立に、一般式（Ｍ）におけるＲ4～Ｒ9の説明で記載した好ましい態様であり、Ｒ10は一般式（Ｍ）におけるＲ10の説明で記載した好ましい態様であり、ＭａはＺｎ、Ｃｕ、Ｃｏ、またはＶ＝Ｏであり、Ｘ1は水、またはカルボン酸化合物であり、Ｘ2は水酸基、またはカルボン酸基であり、Ｘ1とＸ2とが互いに結合して５員または６員環を形成していてもよい。 Preferred embodiments of the compound represented by the general formula (7), each independently R 4 ~ R 9, the preferred embodiments described in the general formula (M) in the description of R 4 ~ R 9, R 10 is It is a preferred embodiment described in the description of R 10 in the general formula (M), Ma is Zn, Cu, Co, or V═O, X 1 is water or a carboxylic acid compound, X 2 is a hydroxyl group, Alternatively, it is a carboxylic acid group, and X 1 and X 2 may be bonded to each other to form a 5-membered or 6-membered ring.
一般式（８）で表されるジピロメテン金属錯体化合物
　色素構造を有するカチオンにおける色素構造の好適な態様の一つは、下記の一般式（８）で表されるジピロメテン金属錯体化合物に由来する色素構造である。本発明では、下記化合物がカチオン構造を形成するが、例えば、一般式（８）のＭａが亜鉛等の金属カチオン構造を形成しうる。 The dipyrromethene metal complex compound represented by the general formula (8) One preferred embodiment of the dye structure in the cation having the dye structure is a dye structure derived from the dipyrromethene metal complex compound represented by the following general formula (8) It is. In the present invention, the following compound forms a cation structure. For example, Ma in the general formula (8) can form a metal cation structure such as zinc.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
 （一般式（８）中、Ｒ11およびＲ16は、各々独立に、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アリール基、ヘテロ環基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、アルキルアミノ基、アリールアミノ基、またはヘテロ環アミノ基を表す。Ｒ12～Ｒ15は、各々独立に、水素原子、または置換基を表す。Ｒ17は、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アリール基、またはヘテロ環基を表す。Ｍａは、金属原子、または金属化合物を表す。Ｘ2およびＸ3は、各々独立に、ＮＲ（Ｒは水素原子、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アリール基、ヘテロ環基、アシル基、アルキルスルホニル基、またはアリールスルホニル基を表す。）、窒素原子、酸素原子、または硫黄原子を表す。Ｙ1およびＹ2は、各々独立に、ＮＲc（Ｒcは水素原子、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アリール基、ヘテロ環基、アシル基、アルキルスルホニル基、またはアリールスルホニル基を表す。）、窒素原子または炭素原子を表す。Ｒ11とＹ1は、互いに結合して５員、６員、または７員の環を形成していてもよく、Ｒ16とＹ2は、互いに結合して５員、６員、または７員の環を形成していてもよい。Ｘ1はＭａと結合可能な基を表し、ａは０、１、または２を表す。）
　なお、一般式（８）で表されるジピロメテン金属錯体化合物は、互変異性体を含む。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
 (In the general formula (8), R 11 and R 16 are each independently an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylamino group, an arylamino group, or a heterocyclic ring. R 12 to R 15 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent, R 17 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group, Ma represents And X 2 and X 3 each independently represents NR (where R represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an acyl group, an alkylsulfonyl group, or an aryl group) a sulfonyl group.), a nitrogen atom, .Y 1 and Y 2 represents an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom, each independently, NR c (R c is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an Lumpur group, a heterocyclic group, an acyl group, an alkylsulfonyl group or an arylsulfonyl group,.), .R 11 and Y 1 representing a nitrogen atom or a carbon atom, 5-membered bonded to each other, 6-membered, or A 7-membered ring may be formed, and R 16 and Y 2 may be bonded to each other to form a 5-membered, 6-membered, or 7-membered ring, and X 1 can be bonded to Ma. And a represents 0, 1, or 2.)
In addition, the dipyrromethene metal complex compound represented by General formula (8) contains a tautomer.
　一般式（８）で表されるジピロメテン金属錯体化合物を上記一般式（Ａ）～（Ｄ）で表される構造単位に導入する部位は、本発明の効果を損なわなければ特に限定されないが、Ｒ11～Ｒ17、Ｘ1、Ｙ1～Ｙ2のいずれか１つであることが好ましい。これらの中でも、合成適合性の点で、Ｒ11～Ｒ16およびＸ1のいずれか１つにおいて導入されることが好ましく、より好ましくは、Ｒ11、Ｒ13、Ｒ14およびＲ16のいずれか１つにおいて挿入される態様であり、さらに好ましくは、Ｒ11およびＲ16のいずれか１つにおいて挿入される態様である。 The site for introducing the dipyrromethene metal complex compound represented by the general formula (8) into the structural unit represented by the general formulas (A) to (D) is not particularly limited as long as the effects of the present invention are not impaired. Any one of 11 to R 17 , X 1 , and Y 1 to Y 2 is preferable. Among these, it is preferably introduced at any one of R 11 to R 16 and X 1 in terms of synthesis compatibility, and more preferably any one of R 11 , R 13 , R 14 and R 16 . It is an embodiment inserted in one, and more preferably an embodiment inserted in any one of R 11 and R 16 .
　色素構造を有するカチオンが、アルカリ可溶性基を有する場合、上記一般式（８）におけるＲ11～Ｒ17、Ｘ1、Ｙ1～Ｙ2のいずれか１つまたは２つ以上の置換基にアルカリ可溶性基を持たせる方法を用いることができる。これら置換基の中でも、Ｒ11～Ｒ16およびＸ1のいずれかが好ましく、Ｒ11、Ｒ13、Ｒ14およびＲ16のいずれかがより好ましく、Ｒ11およびＲ16のいずれかがさらに好ましい。 When the cation having a dye structure has an alkali-soluble group, it is alkali-soluble in any one or two or more substituents of R 11 to R 17 , X 1 and Y 1 to Y 2 in the general formula (8). A method of providing a group can be used. Among these substituents, any of R 11 to R 16 and X 1 is preferred, any of R 11 , R 13 , R 14 and R 16 is more preferred, and any of R 11 and R 16 is more preferred.
　一般式（８）で表されるジピロメテン金属錯体化合物は、本発明の効果を損なわない限りにおいて、アルカリ可溶性基以外の官能基を有していてもよい。 The dipyrromethene metal complex compound represented by the general formula (8) may have a functional group other than the alkali-soluble group as long as the effects of the present invention are not impaired.
　一般式（８）において、Ｒ12～Ｒ15は、上記一般式（Ｍ）中のＲ5～Ｒ8と同義であり、好ましい態様も同様である。Ｒ17は、上記一般式（Ｍ）中のＲ10と同義であり、好ましい態様も同様である。Ｍａは、上記一般式（７）中のＭａと同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。 In the general formula (8), R 12 to R 15 have the same meanings as R 5 to R 8 in the general formula (M), and preferred embodiments are also the same. R 17 has the same meaning as R 10 in the general formula (M), and the preferred embodiment is also the same. Ma is synonymous with Ma in the said General formula (7), and its preferable range is also the same.
　より詳細には、上記一般式（８）におけるＲ12～Ｒ15のうち、上記Ｒ12およびＲ15としては、アルコキシカルボニル基、アリールオキシカルボニル基、カルバモイル基、アルキルスルホニル基、アリールスルホニル基、ニトリル基、イミド基、または、カルバモイルスルホニル基が好ましく、アルコキシカルボニル基、アリールオキシカルボニル基、カルバモイル基、アルキルスルホニル基、ニトリル基、イミド基、カルバモイルスルホニル基がより好ましく、アルコキシカルボニル基、アリールオキシカルボニル基、カルバモイル基、ニトリル基、イミド基、カルバモイルスルホニル基がさらに好ましく、アルコキシカルボニル基、アリールオキシカルボニル基、カルバモイル基が特に好ましい。
　上記Ｒ13およびＲ14としては、置換または無置換のアルキル基、置換または無置換のアリール基、置換または無置換のヘテロ環基が好ましく、さらに好ましくは置換または無置換のアルキル基、置換または無置換のアリール基である。ここで、より好ましいアルキル基、アリール基、およびヘテロ環基の具体例は、一般式（Ｍ）の上記Ｒ6およびＲ7において列記した具体例を同様に挙げることができる。 More specifically, among R 12 to R 15 in the general formula (8), R 12 and R 15 are each an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a carbamoyl group, an alkylsulfonyl group, an arylsulfonyl group, a nitrile Group, imide group, or carbamoylsulfonyl group is preferable, alkoxycarbonyl group, aryloxycarbonyl group, carbamoyl group, alkylsulfonyl group, nitrile group, imide group, carbamoylsulfonyl group are more preferable, alkoxycarbonyl group, aryloxycarbonyl group , A carbamoyl group, a nitrile group, an imide group, and a carbamoylsulfonyl group are more preferable, and an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, and a carbamoyl group are particularly preferable.
R 13 and R 14 are preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group, a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group, more preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, substituted or unsubstituted. A substituted aryl group. Here, specific examples of more preferable alkyl groups, aryl groups, and heterocyclic groups can be the same as the specific examples listed in the above R 6 and R 7 of the general formula (M).
　一般式（８）中、Ｒ11およびＲ16は、アルキル基（好ましくは炭素数１～３６、より好ましくは炭素数１～１２の直鎖、分岐鎖、または環状のアルキル基で、例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基、イソブチル基、ｔｅｒｔ－ブチル基、ヘキシル基、２－エチルヘキシル基、ドデシル基、シクロプロピル基、シクロペンチル基、シクロヘキシル基、１－アダマンチル基）、アルケニル基（好ましくは炭素数２～２４、より好ましくは炭素数２～１２のアルケニル基で、例えば、ビニル基、アリル基、３－ブテン－１－イル基）、アリール基（好ましくは炭素数６～３６、より好ましくは炭素数６～１８のアリール基で、例えば、フェニル基、ナフチル基）、ヘテロ環基（好ましくは炭素数１～２４、より好ましくは炭素数１～１２のヘテロ環基で、例えば、２－チエニル基、４－ピリジル基、２－フリル基、２－ピリミジニル基、２－ピリジル基、２－ベンゾチアゾリル基、１－イミダゾリル基、１－ピラゾリル基、ベンゾトリアゾール－１－イル基）、アルコキシ基（好ましくは炭素数１～３６、より好ましくは炭素数１～１８のアルコキシ基で、例えば、メトキシ基、エトキシ基、プロピルオキシ基、ブトキシ基、ヘキシルオキシ基、２－エチルヘキシルオキシ基、ドデシルオキシ基、シクロヘキシルオキシ基）、アリールオキシ基（好ましくは炭素数６～２４、より好ましくは炭素数１～１８のアリールオキシ基で、例えば、フェノキシ基、ナフチルオキシ基）、アルキルアミノ基（好ましくは炭素数１～３６、より好ましくは炭素数１～１８のアルキルアミノ基で、例えば、メチルアミノ基、エチルアミノ基、プロピルアミノ基、ブチルアミノ基、ヘキシルアミノ基、２－エチルヘキシルアミノ基、イソプロピルアミノ基、ｔｅｒｔ－ブチルアミノ基、ｔｅｒｔ－オクチルアミノ基、シクロヘキシルアミノ基、Ｎ，Ｎ－ジエチルアミノ基、Ｎ，Ｎ－ジプロピルアミノ基、Ｎ，Ｎ－ジブチルアミノ基、Ｎ－メチル－Ｎ－エチルアミノ基）、アリールアミノ基（好ましくは炭素数６～３６、より好ましくは炭素数６～１８のアリールアミノ基で、例えば、フェニルアミノ基、ナフチルアミノ基、Ｎ，Ｎ－ジフェニルアミノ基、Ｎ－エチル－Ｎ－フェニルアミノ基）、またはヘテロ環アミノ基（好ましくは炭素数１～２４、より好ましくは炭素数１～１２のヘテロ環アミノ基で、例えば、２－アミノピロール基、３－アミノピラゾール、２－アミノピリジン基、３－アミノピリジン基）を表す。 In the general formula (8), R 11 and R 16 are alkyl groups (preferably linear, branched or cyclic alkyl groups having 1 to 36 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 12 carbon atoms, such as methyl Group, ethyl group, propyl group, isopropyl group, butyl group, isobutyl group, tert-butyl group, hexyl group, 2-ethylhexyl group, dodecyl group, cyclopropyl group, cyclopentyl group, cyclohexyl group, 1-adamantyl group), alkenyl A group (preferably an alkenyl group having 2 to 24 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 12 carbon atoms, for example, a vinyl group, an allyl group, a 3-buten-1-yl group), an aryl group (preferably having a carbon number of 6 to 36, more preferably an aryl group having 6 to 18 carbon atoms, such as a phenyl group or a naphthyl group, or a heterocyclic group (preferably having 1 to 24 carbon atoms, more preferably Or a heterocyclic group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, such as 2-thienyl group, 4-pyridyl group, 2-furyl group, 2-pyrimidinyl group, 2-pyridyl group, 2-benzothiazolyl group, 1-imidazolyl group, 1-pyrazolyl group, benzotriazol-1-yl group), alkoxy group (preferably an alkoxy group having 1 to 36 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 18 carbon atoms, such as a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, a propyloxy group, A butoxy group, a hexyloxy group, a 2-ethylhexyloxy group, a dodecyloxy group, a cyclohexyloxy group), an aryloxy group (preferably an aryloxy group having 6 to 24 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 18 carbon atoms, Phenoxy group, naphthyloxy group), alkylamino group (preferably having 1 to 36 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 1 carbon atoms) An alkylamino group of, for example, methylamino group, ethylamino group, propylamino group, butylamino group, hexylamino group, 2-ethylhexylamino group, isopropylamino group, tert-butylamino group, tert-octylamino group, Cyclohexylamino group, N, N-diethylamino group, N, N-dipropylamino group, N, N-dibutylamino group, N-methyl-N-ethylamino group), arylamino group (preferably having 6 to 36 carbon atoms) More preferably an arylamino group having 6 to 18 carbon atoms, such as a phenylamino group, a naphthylamino group, an N, N-diphenylamino group, an N-ethyl-N-phenylamino group), or a heterocyclic amino group ( A heterocyclic amino group having preferably 1 to 24 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 12 carbon atoms, 2-aminopyrrole group, 3-aminopyrazole, 2-aminopyridine group, 3-aminopyridine group).
　Ｒ11およびＲ16としては、上記の中でも、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アリール基、ヘテロ環基、アルキルアミノ基、アリールアミノ基、ヘテロ環アミノ基が好ましく、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アリール基、ヘテロ環基、がより好ましく、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アリール基がさらに好ましく、アルキル基が特に好ましい。 Among these, R 11 and R 16 are preferably an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkylamino group, an arylamino group, and a heterocyclic amino group, and an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group, a hetero group A cyclic group is more preferable, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, and an aryl group are more preferable, and an alkyl group is particularly preferable.
　一般式（８）中、Ｒ11およびＲ16で表されるアルキル基、アルケニル基、アリール基、ヘテロ環基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、アルキルアミノ基、アリールアミノ基、またはヘテロ環アミノ基が、さらに置換可能な基である場合には、後述する置換基群Ａの項で説明した置換基で置換されていてもよく、２個以上の置換基で置換されている場合には、それらの置換基は同一であっても異なっていてもよい。 In general formula (8), the alkyl group, alkenyl group, aryl group, heterocyclic group, alkoxy group, aryloxy group, alkylamino group, arylamino group, or heterocyclic amino group represented by R 11 and R 16 is Further, in the case of a group that can be further substituted, it may be substituted with the substituent described in the section of the substituent group A to be described later, and when it is substituted with two or more substituents, The substituents may be the same or different.
　一般式（８）中、Ｘ2およびＸ3は、各々独立に、ＮＲ、窒素原子、酸素原子、または硫黄原子を表す。ここで、Ｒは、水素原子、アルキル基（好ましくは炭素数１～３６、より好ましくは炭素数１～１２の直鎖、分岐鎖、または環状のアルキル基で、例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基、イソブチル基、ｔｅｒｔ－ブチル基、ヘキシル基、２－エチルヘキシル基、ドデシル基、シクロプロピル基、シクロペンチル基、シクロヘキシル基、１－アダマンチル基）、アルケニル基（好ましくは炭素数２～２４、より好ましくは炭素数２～１２のアルケニル基で、例えば、ビニル基、アリル基、３－ブテン－１－イル基）、アリール基（好ましくは炭素数６～３６、より好ましくは炭素数６～１８のアリール基で、例えば、フェニル基、ナフチル基）、ヘテロ環基（好ましくは炭素数１～２４、より好ましくは炭素数１～１２のヘテロ環基で、例えば、２－チエニル基、４－ピリジル基、２－フリル基、２－ピリミジニル基、１－ピリジル基、２－ベンゾチアゾリル基、１－イミダゾリル基、１－ピラゾリル基、ベンゾトリアゾール－１－イル基）、アシル基（好ましくは炭素数１～２４、より好ましくは炭素数２～１８のアシル基で、例えば、アセチル基、ピバロイル基、２－エチルヘキシル基、ベンゾイル基、シクロヘキサノイル基）、アルキルスルホニル基（好ましくは炭素数１～２４、より好ましくは炭素数１～１８のアルキルスルホニル基で、例えば、メチルスルホニル基、エチルスルホニル基、イソプロピルスルホニル基、シクロヘキシルスルホニル基）、アリールスルホニル基（好ましくは炭素数６～２４、より好ましくは炭素数６～１８のアリールスルホニル基で、例えば、フェニルスルホニル基、ナフチルスルホニル基）を表す。 In General Formula (8), X 2 and X 3 each independently represent NR, a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, or a sulfur atom. Here, R is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group (preferably a linear, branched or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 36 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 12 carbon atoms, such as a methyl group, an ethyl group, Propyl group, isopropyl group, butyl group, isobutyl group, tert-butyl group, hexyl group, 2-ethylhexyl group, dodecyl group, cyclopropyl group, cyclopentyl group, cyclohexyl group, 1-adamantyl group), alkenyl group (preferably carbon An alkenyl group having 2 to 24 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 12 carbon atoms, such as a vinyl group, allyl group, 3-buten-1-yl group), aryl group (preferably having 6 to 36 carbon atoms, more preferably An aryl group having 6 to 18 carbon atoms, such as a phenyl group or a naphthyl group, or a heterocyclic group (preferably having 1 to 24 carbon atoms, more preferably carbon 1 to 12 heterocyclic groups, for example, 2-thienyl group, 4-pyridyl group, 2-furyl group, 2-pyrimidinyl group, 1-pyridyl group, 2-benzothiazolyl group, 1-imidazolyl group, 1-pyrazolyl group Benzotriazol-1-yl group), an acyl group (preferably an acyl group having 1 to 24 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 18 carbon atoms, such as an acetyl group, a pivaloyl group, a 2-ethylhexyl group, a benzoyl group, Cyclohexanoyl group), alkylsulfonyl group (preferably alkylsulfonyl group having 1 to 24 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 18 carbon atoms, such as methylsulfonyl group, ethylsulfonyl group, isopropylsulfonyl group, cyclohexylsulfonyl group) An arylsulfonyl group (preferably having 6 to 24 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 18 carbon atoms). Arylsulfonyl group represented, for example, a phenylsulfonyl group, a naphthylsulfonyl group).
　一般式（８）中、Ｙ1およびＹ2は、各々独立に、ＮＲC、窒素原子、または炭素原子を表し、ＲCは、上記Ｘ2およびＸ3のＲと同義であり、好ましい態様も同様である。 In General Formula (8), Y 1 and Y 2 each independently represent NR C , a nitrogen atom, or a carbon atom, and R C has the same meaning as R in X 2 and X 3 above, and preferred embodiments are also included. It is the same.
　一般式（８）中、Ｒ11とＹ1は、互いに結合して炭素原子と共に５員環（例えば、シクロペンタン環、ピロリジン環、テトラヒドロフラン環、ジオキソラン環、テトラヒドロチオフェン環、ピロール環、フラン環、チオフェン環、インドール環、ベンゾフラン環、ベンゾチオフェン環）、６員環（例えば、シクロヘキサン環、ピペリジン環、ピペラジン環、モルホリン環、テトラヒドロピラン環、ジオキサン環、ペンタメチレンスルフィド環、ジチアン環、ベンゼン環、ピペリジン環、ピペラジン環、ピリダジン環、キノリン環、キナゾリン環）、または７員環（例えば、シクロヘプタン環、ヘキサメチレンイミン環）を形成してもよい。 In the general formula (8), R 11 and Y 1 are bonded to each other together with a carbon atom to form a 5-membered ring (eg, cyclopentane ring, pyrrolidine ring, tetrahydrofuran ring, dioxolane ring, tetrahydrothiophene ring, pyrrole ring, furan ring, Thiophene ring, indole ring, benzofuran ring, benzothiophene ring), 6-membered ring (for example, cyclohexane ring, piperidine ring, piperazine ring, morpholine ring, tetrahydropyran ring, dioxane ring, pentamethylene sulfide ring, dithiane ring, benzene ring, A piperidine ring, a piperazine ring, a pyridazine ring, a quinoline ring, a quinazoline ring), or a seven-membered ring (for example, a cycloheptane ring, a hexamethyleneimine ring) may be formed.
　上記一般式（８）中、Ｒ16とＹ2は、互いに結合して炭素原子と共に５員環（例えば、シクロペンタン環、ピロリジン環、テトラヒドロフラン環、ジオキソラン環、テトラヒドロチオフェン環、ピロール環、フラン環、チオフェン環、インドール環、ベンゾフラン環、ベンゾチオフェン環）、６員環（例えば、シクロヘキサン環、ピペリジン環、ピペラジン環、モルホリン環、テトラヒドロピラン環、ジオキサン環、ペンタメチレンスルフィド環、ジチアン環、ベンゼン環、ピペリジン環、ピペラジン環、ピリダジン環、キノリン環、キナゾリン環）、または７員環（例えば、シクロヘプタン環、ヘキサメチレンイミン環）を形成してもよい。 In the general formula (8), R 16 and Y 2 are bonded to each other to form a 5-membered ring with a carbon atom (for example, cyclopentane ring, pyrrolidine ring, tetrahydrofuran ring, dioxolane ring, tetrahydrothiophene ring, pyrrole ring, furan ring) , Thiophene ring, indole ring, benzofuran ring, benzothiophene ring), 6-membered ring (for example, cyclohexane ring, piperidine ring, piperazine ring, morpholine ring, tetrahydropyran ring, dioxane ring, pentamethylene sulfide ring, dithiane ring, benzene ring , A piperidine ring, a piperazine ring, a pyridazine ring, a quinoline ring, a quinazoline ring), or a 7-membered ring (for example, a cycloheptane ring, a hexamethyleneimine ring).
　一般式（８）中、Ｒ11とＹ1、およびＲ16とＹ2が結合して形成される５員、６員、および７員の環が、置換可能な環である場合には、後述する置換基群Ａの項で説明した置換基で置換されていてもよく、２個以上の置換基で置換されている場合には、それらの置換基は同一であっても異なっていてもよい。 In the general formula (8), when the 5-membered, 6-membered, and 7-membered rings formed by combining R 11 and Y 1 and R 16 and Y 2 are substitutable rings, they will be described later. In the case of being substituted with two or more substituents, the substituents may be the same or different. .
　一般式（８）中、Ｒ11およびＲ16は、各々独立に、立体パラメータである－Ｅｓ'値が１．５以上の１価の置換基であることが好ましく、２．０以上であることがより好ましく、３．５以上であることがさらに好ましく、５．０以上であることが特に好ましい。
　ここで、立体パラメータ－Ｅｓ’値は、置換基の立体的嵩高さを表すパラメータであり、文献（J.A.Macphee,et al,Tetrahedron,Vol.34,pp3553～3562、藤田稔夫編　化学増刊107 構造活性相関とドラックデザイン、１９８６年２月２０日発行（化学同人））に示されている－Ｅｓ'値を用いる。 In the general formula (8), R 11 and R 16 are each independently preferably a monovalent substituent having a steric parameter —Es ′ value of 1.5 or more, and 2.0 or more. Is more preferably 3.5 or more, and particularly preferably 5.0 or more.
Here, the steric parameter-Es' value is a parameter that represents the steric bulk of the substituent, and the literature (JAMacphee, et al, Tetrahedron, Vol.34, pp3553-3562, edited by Ikuo Fujita, Chemical Extension 107, Structure Activity Relationship) And the Drag Design, published on February 20, 1986 (Chemical Doujin)) -Es' value is used.
　一般式（８）中、Ｘ1はＭａと結合可能な基を表し、具体的には、上記一般式（７）におけるＸ1と同様な基が挙げられ、好ましい態様も同様である。
　ａは０、１、または２を表す。 In General Formula (8), X 1 represents a group capable of binding to Ma, specifically, the same groups as X 1 in General Formula (7) can be mentioned, and preferred embodiments are also the same.
a represents 0, 1, or 2.
　一般式（８）で表される化合物の好ましい態様としては、Ｒ12～Ｒ15は、各々独立に、上記一般式（Ｍ）中のＲ5～Ｒ8の説明で記載した好ましい態様であり、Ｒ17は上記一般式（Ｍ）中のＲ10の説明で記載した好ましい態様であり、ＭａはＺｎ、Ｃｕ、Ｃｏ、またはＶ＝Ｏであり、Ｘ2はＮＲ（Ｒは水素原子、アルキル基）、窒素原子、または酸素原子であり、Ｘ3はＮＲ（Ｒは水素原子、アルキル基）、または酸素原子であり、Ｙ1はＮＲC（ＲCは水素原子、アルキル基）、窒素原子、または炭素原子であり、Ｙ2は窒素原子、または炭素原子であり、Ｒ11およびＲ16は各々独立に、アルキル基、アリール基、ヘテロ環基、アルコキシ基、またはアルキルアミノ基であり、Ｘ1は酸素原子を介して結合する基であり、ａは０または１である。Ｒ11とＹ1とが互いに結合して５員または６員環を形成、またはＲ16とＹ2とが互いに結合して５員、６員環を形成していてもよい。 As a preferred embodiment of the compound represented by the general formula (8), R 12 to R 15 are each independently a preferred embodiment described in the explanation of R 5 to R 8 in the general formula (M). R 17 is a preferred embodiment described in the description of R 10 in the general formula (M), Ma is Zn, Cu, Co, or V═O, X 2 is NR (R is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group) ), A nitrogen atom, or an oxygen atom, X 3 is NR (R is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group), or an oxygen atom, Y 1 is NR C (R C is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group), a nitrogen atom, Or a carbon atom, Y 2 is a nitrogen atom or a carbon atom, R 11 and R 16 are each independently an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkoxy group, or an alkylamino group, and X 1 Is a group bonded through an oxygen atom, and a is 0 or 1 R 11 and Y 1 may be bonded to each other to form a 5- or 6-membered ring, or R 16 and Y 2 may be bonded to each other to form a 5- or 6-membered ring.
　一般式（８）で表される化合物のさらに好ましい態様としては、Ｒ12～Ｒ15は各々独立に、一般式（Ｍ）で表される化合物におけるＲ5～Ｒ8の説明で記載した好ましい態様であり、Ｒ17は上記一般式（Ｍ）中のＲ10の説明で記載した好ましい態様であり、ＭａはＺｎであり、Ｘ2およびＸ3は、酸素原子であり、Ｙ1はＮＨであり、Ｙ2は窒素原子であり、Ｒ11およびＲ16は各々独立に、アルキル基、アリール基、ヘテロ環基、アルコキシ基、またはアルキルアミノ基であり、Ｘ1は酸素原子を介して結合する基であり、ａは０または１である。Ｒ11とＹ1とが互いに結合して５員または６員環を形成、またはＲ16とＹ2とが互いに結合して５員、６員環を形成していてもよい。 As a more preferred embodiment of the compound represented by the general formula (8), R 12 to R 15 are each independently a preferred embodiment described in the description of R 5 to R 8 in the compound represented by the general formula (M). R 17 is a preferred embodiment described in the description of R 10 in the general formula (M), Ma is Zn, X 2 and X 3 are oxygen atoms, and Y 1 is NH. Y 2 is a nitrogen atom, R 11 and R 16 are each independently an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkoxy group, or an alkylamino group, and X 1 is a group bonded through an oxygen atom. And a is 0 or 1. R 11 and Y 1 may be bonded to each other to form a 5- or 6-membered ring, or R 16 and Y 2 may be bonded to each other to form a 5- or 6-membered ring.
　上記一般式（７）および一般式（８）で表されるジピロメテン金属錯体化合物のモル吸光係数は、着色力の観点から、できるだけ高いほうが好ましい。また、最大吸収波長λｍａｘは、色純度向上の観点から、５２０ｎｍ～５８０ｎｍが好ましく、５３０ｎｍ～５７０ｎｍがさらに好ましい。この領域にあることで、本発明の着色組成物を用いて、色再現性の良好なカラーフィルタを作製することができる。 The molar extinction coefficient of the dipyrromethene metal complex compound represented by the general formulas (7) and (8) is preferably as high as possible from the viewpoint of coloring power. The maximum absorption wavelength λmax is preferably 520 nm to 580 nm, more preferably 530 nm to 570 nm, from the viewpoint of improving color purity. By being in this region, a color filter with good color reproducibility can be produced using the colored composition of the present invention.
　さらに、ジピロメテン色素に由来する色素構造を有する色素は、４５０ｎｍにおける吸光度に対し、最大吸収波長（λｍａｘ）の吸光度が１，０００倍以上であることが好ましく、１０，０００倍以上であることがより好ましく、１００，０００倍以上であることがさらに好ましい。この比率がこの範囲にあることで、本発明の着色組成物を用いて、特に青色カラーフィルタを作製する場合に、より透過率の高いカラーフィルタを形成することができる。なお、最大吸収波長、およびモル吸光係数は、分光光度計ｃａｒｙ５（バリアン社製）により測定されるものである。 Furthermore, the dye having a dye structure derived from the dipyrromethene dye preferably has an absorbance at the maximum absorption wavelength (λmax) of 1,000 times or more, more preferably 10,000 times or more with respect to the absorbance at 450 nm. Preferably, it is 100,000 times or more. When this ratio is within this range, a color filter with higher transmittance can be formed using the colored composition of the present invention, particularly when producing a blue color filter. The maximum absorption wavelength and the molar extinction coefficient are measured with a spectrophotometer carry5 (manufactured by Varian).
　上記一般式（７）および一般式（８）で表されるジピロメテン金属錯体化合物の融点は、溶解性の観点から、高すぎない方がよい。 The melting point of the dipyrromethene metal complex compound represented by the general formula (7) and the general formula (8) should not be too high from the viewpoint of solubility.
　上記一般式（７）および一般式（８）で表されるジピロメテン金属錯体化合物は、米国特許第４，７７４，３３９号明細書、同第５，４３３，８９６号明細書、特開２００１－２４０７６１号公報、同２００２－１５５０５２号公報、特許第３６１４５８６号公報、Ａｕｓｔ．Ｊ．Ｃｈｅｍ，１９６５，１１，１８３５－１８４５、Ｊ．Ｈ．Ｂｏｇｅｒ　ｅｔ　ａｌ，Ｈｅｔｅｒｏａｔｏｍ　Ｃｈｅｍｉｓｔｒｙ，Ｖｏｌ．１，Ｎｏ．５，３８９（１９９０）等に記載の方法で合成することができる。具体的には、特開２００８－２９２９７０号公報の段落０１３１～０１５７に記載の方法を適用することができる。 The dipyrromethene metal complex compounds represented by the above general formula (7) and general formula (8) are disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,774,339, 5,433,896, and JP-A-2001-240761. Gazette, 2002-155052 gazette, Japanese Patent No. 3614586 gazette, Aust. J. et al. Chem, 1965, 11, 1835-1845, J. Am. H. Boger et al, Heteroatom Chemistry, Vol. 1, No. 1 5,389 (1990) and the like. Specifically, the method described in paragraphs 0131 to 0157 of JP-A-2008-292970 can be applied.
　以下にジピロメテン色素の具体例を示すが、本発明はこれに限定されるものではない。なお、式中、Ｘは、アニオンを表す。本発明では、下記色素構造のいずれかの水素原子が、ポリマー骨格と結合する。 Specific examples of the dipyrromethene dye are shown below, but the present invention is not limited thereto. In the formula, X represents an anion. In the present invention, any hydrogen atom of the following dye structure is bonded to the polymer backbone.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000027
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000027
　上記具体例のうち、色特性および耐熱性の観点より、特に（ＰＭ－８）および（ＰＭ－１０）が好ましい。 Among the above specific examples, (PM-8) and (PM-10) are particularly preferable from the viewpoint of color characteristics and heat resistance.
＜＜＜カルボニウム色素＞＞＞
　カルボニウム色素の中でも、トリアリールメタン色素、キサンテン色素が好ましい。 <<< Carbonium Dye >>>
Of the carbonium dyes, triarylmethane dyes and xanthene dyes are preferable.
トリアリールメタン色素
　本発明に係る色素構造の態様の一つは、トリアリールメタン色素（トリアリールメタン化合物）に由来する部分構造を有するものである。上記色素としては、下記一般式（ＴＰ）で表される化合物（トリアリールメタン化合物）に由来する部分構造を、色素構造として有する。 Triarylmethane Dye One of the embodiments of the dye structure according to the present invention has a partial structure derived from a triarylmethane dye (triarylmethane compound). As said pigment | dye, it has the partial structure derived from the compound (triarylmethane compound) represented by the following general formula (TP) as a pigment | dye structure.
一般式（ＴＰ）
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
 （一般式（ＴＰ）中、Ｒｔｐ1～Ｒｔｐ4は、それぞれ独立して、水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基を表す。Ｒｔｐ5は、水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基またはＮＲｔｐ9Ｒｔｐ10（Ｒｔｐ9およびＲｔｐ10は水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基を表す）を表す。Ｒｔｐ6、Ｒｔｐ7およびＲｔｐ8は、置換基を表す。ａ、ｂおよびｃは、０～４の整数を表す。ａ、ｂおよびｃが２以上の場合、Ｒｔｐ6、Ｒｔｐ7およびＲｔｐ8は、それぞれ連結して環を形成してもよい。Ｘ-はアニオン構造を表す。） General formula (TP)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
 (In the general formula (TP), Rtp 1 to Rtp 4 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group. Rtp 5 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group or NRtp 9 Rtp 10 (Rtp 10 9 and Rtp 10 represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group) Rtp 6 , Rtp 7 and Rtp 8 represent a substituent, and a, b and c represent an integer of 0 to 4. a , B and c are 2 or more, Rtp 6 , Rtp 7 and Rtp 8 may be linked to form a ring, and X − represents an anion structure.)
　一般式（ＴＰ）で表される化合物の好ましい範囲および具体例については、特開２０１３－２８７６４号公報の段落番号０１７０～０１７８の記載を参酌でき、これらの内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。
　一般式（ＴＰ）で表される化合物を、一般式（Ａ）で表される構造単位に導入する場合の導入部位は、特に制限はないが、Ｒｔｐ1～Ｒｔｐ10のいずれか１つの部位で導入されることが好ましい。 Regarding the preferred range and specific examples of the compound represented by the general formula (TP), the description of paragraph numbers 0170 to 0178 in JP 2013-28764 A can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
The introduction site in the case of introducing the compound represented by the general formula (TP) into the structural unit represented by the general formula (A) is not particularly limited, but at any one site of Rtp 1 to Rtp 10 It is preferably introduced.
キサンテン色素
　本発明における色素構造の好ましい態様は、キサンテン色素（キサンテン化合物）に由来する部分構造を有するものである。上記色素としては、下記一般式（Ｊ）で表されるキサンテン化合物に由来する部分構造を、色素構造として有する。 Xanthene Dye A preferred embodiment of the dye structure in the present invention has a partial structure derived from a xanthene dye (xanthene compound). As said pigment | dye, it has the partial structure derived from the xanthene compound represented by the following general formula (J) as a pigment | dye structure.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000029
 （一般式（Ｊ）中、Ｒ81、Ｒ82、Ｒ83およびＲ84は、各々独立に、水素原子または１価の置換基を表し、Ｒ85は、各々独立に１価の置換基を表し、ｍは、０～５の整数を表す。Ｘ-は、アニオンを表すか、Ｘ-は存在せず、Ｒ81、Ｒ82、Ｒ83、Ｒ84およびＲ85の少なくとも１つがアニオンを含む。）
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000029
 (In the general formula (J), R 81 , R 82 , R 83 and R 84 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent, and R 85 each independently represents a monovalent substituent. , M represents an integer of 0 to 5. X − represents an anion, or X − does not exist, and at least one of R 81 , R 82 , R 83 , R 84 and R 85 contains an anion. )
　一般式（Ｊ）で表される化合物を、上記一般式（Ａ）～（Ｄ）で表される構造単位に導入する場合の導入部位は、特に制限はないが、Ｒ81～Ｒ85いずれか１つの部位で導入されることが好ましい。
　一般式（Ｊ）におけるＲ81～Ｒ84およびＲ85が取りうる置換基は、後述する置換基群Ａの項で挙げた置換基と同様である。 There are no particular restrictions on the site of introduction of the compound represented by formula (J) into the structural units represented by formulas (A) to (D), but any of R 81 to R 85 It is preferably introduced at one site.
The substituents that can be taken by R 81 to R 84 and R 85 in formula (J) are the same as the substituents mentioned in the section of substituent group A described later.
　一般式（Ｊ）中のＲ81とＲ82、Ｒ83とＲ84、およびｍが２以上の場合のＲ85同士は、各々独立に、互いに結合して５員、６員若しくは７員の飽和環、または５員、６員若しくは７員の不飽和環を形成していてもよい。形成される５員、６員または７員の環が、さらに置換可能な基である場合には、上記Ｒ81～Ｒ85で説明した置換基で置換されていてもよく、２個以上の置換基で置換されている場合には、それらの置換基は同一であっても異なっていてもよい。
　上記一般式（Ｊ）中のＲ81とＲ82、Ｒ83とＲ84、およびｍが２以上の場合のＲ85同士は、各々独立に、互いに結合して、置換基を有しない５員、６員並びに７員の飽和環または５員、６員並びに７員の不飽和環を形成する場合、置換基を有しない５員、６員並びに７員の飽和環または５員、６員並びに７員の不飽和環としては、例えば、ピロール環、フラン環、チオフェン環、ピラゾール環、イミダゾール環、トリアゾール環、オキサゾール環、チアゾール環、ピロリジン環、ピペリジン環、シクロペンテン環、シクロヘキセン環、ベンゼン環、ピリジン環、ピラジン環、ピリダジン環が挙げられ、好ましくは、ベンゼン環、ピリジン環が挙げられる。 In the general formula (J), R 81 and R 82 , R 83 and R 84 , and R 85 in the case where m is 2 or more are each independently bonded to each other to form a 5-, 6-, or 7-membered saturation. A ring or a 5-membered, 6-membered or 7-membered unsaturated ring may be formed. When the 5-membered, 6-membered or 7-membered ring formed is a further substitutable group, it may be substituted with the substituents described for R 81 to R 85 above, and two or more substituents may be substituted. When substituted with a group, the substituents may be the same or different.
R 81 and R 82 in the above general formula (J), R 83 and R 84 , and R 85 in the case where m is 2 or more are each independently bonded to each other, and have no substituent. When forming 6-membered and 7-membered saturated rings or 5-membered and 7-membered unsaturated rings, 5-membered, 6-membered and 7-membered saturated rings or 5-membered, 6-membered and 7-membered without substituents Examples of the unsaturated ring include pyrrole ring, furan ring, thiophene ring, pyrazole ring, imidazole ring, triazole ring, oxazole ring, thiazole ring, pyrrolidine ring, piperidine ring, cyclopentene ring, cyclohexene ring, benzene ring, pyridine A ring, a pyrazine ring, and a pyridazine ring are mentioned, Preferably, a benzene ring and a pyridine ring are mentioned.
　特に、Ｒ82およびＲ83は水素原子または置換または無置換のアルキル基であり、Ｒ81およびＲ84は置換または無置換のアルキル基またはフェニル基であることが好ましい。また、Ｒ85はハロゲン原子、炭素数１～５の直鎖または分岐のアルキル基、スルホ基、スルホンアミド基、カルボキシル基、アミド基であることが好ましく、スルホ基、スルホンアミド基、カルボキシル基、アミド基であることがさらに好ましい。Ｒ85はキサンテン環と連結した炭素の隣接部に結合することが好ましい。Ｒ81およびＲ84のフェニル基が有する置換基は、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、炭素数１～５の直鎖または分岐のアルキル基、スルホ基、スルホンアミド基、カルボキシル基であることが特に好ましい。 In particular, R 82 and R 83 are preferably a hydrogen atom or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, and R 81 and R 84 are preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group or a phenyl group. R 85 is preferably a halogen atom, a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, a sulfo group, a sulfonamide group, a carboxyl group, or an amide group. The sulfo group, the sulfonamide group, the carboxyl group, More preferred is an amide group. R 85 is preferably bonded to the adjacent part of carbon linked to the xanthene ring. The substituent that the phenyl group of R 81 and R 84 has is particularly preferably a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, a sulfo group, a sulfonamide group, or a carboxyl group.
　一般式（Ｊ）で表されるキサンテン骨格を有する化合物は、文献記載の方法で合成することができる。具体的には、テトラへドロン　レターズ、２００３年、ｖｏｌ.４４,Ｎｏ.２３、４３５５～４３６０頁、テトラへドロン、２００５年、ｖｏｌ.６１,Ｎｏ.１２、３０９７～３１０６頁などに記載の方法を適用することができる。 The compound having a xanthene skeleton represented by the general formula (J) can be synthesized by a method described in the literature. Specifically, the methods described in Tetrahedron Letters, 2003, vol. 44, No. 23, pages 4355-4360, Tetrahedron, 2005, vol. 61, No. 12, pages 3097-3106, etc. Can be applied.
　Ｘ-が、アニオンを表す場合、後述の対アニオンが別分子の場合の記載を参酌でき、Ｘ-は存在せず、Ｒ81、Ｒ82、Ｒ83、Ｒ84、およびＲ85の少なくとも１つがアニオンを含む場合、対アニオンが同一繰り返し単位内にある場合の記載を参酌できる。 When X − represents an anion, the description in the case where the counter anion described later is a different molecule can be referred to, X − does not exist, and at least one of R 81 , R 82 , R 83 , R 84 , and R 85 is When an anion is included, the description in the case where the counter anion is in the same repeating unit can be referred to.
　以下、本発明で用いられる一般式（Ｊ）で表される化合物の具体的な態様（第１の態様、第２の態様）を述べるが本発明がこれらに限定されるものではない。
（一般式（Ｊ）で表される化合物の第１の態様）
　一般式（Ｊ）で表される化合物は、Ｒ81およびＲ83の一方が下記一般式（２）で表される基であり、Ｒ81およびＲ83の他方が水素原子、下記一般式（２）で表される基または一般式（２）で表される基以外のアリール基、アルキル基を表してもよい。また、Ｒ82およびＲ84は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、または、アリール基を表してもよい。
一般式（２）
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030
 　一般式（２）中、Ｒ1およびＲ2は、それぞれ独立に、炭素数３以上のアルキル基、アリール基、または、ヘテロ環基を表し、Ｘ1～Ｘ3は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子または１価の置換基を表す。一般式（１）で表される色素化合物は、分子内および／または分子外に対アニオンを有する。
　このような構成とすることにより、着色組成物の溶剤溶解性がより向上し、結果として、面状ムラがより抑制された着色層を形成可能になる。 Hereinafter, although the specific aspect (1st aspect, 2nd aspect) of the compound represented by general formula (J) used by this invention is described, this invention is not limited to these.
(First Aspect of Compound Represented by General Formula (J))
In the compound represented by the general formula (J), one of R 81 and R 83 is a group represented by the following general formula (2), the other of R 81 and R 83 is a hydrogen atom, and the following general formula (2) ) Or an aryl group or an alkyl group other than the group represented by the general formula (2). R 82 and R 84 may each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group.
General formula (2)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030
 In general formula (2), R 1 and R 2 each independently represents an alkyl group having 3 or more carbon atoms, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group, and X 1 to X 3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom Alternatively, it represents a monovalent substituent. The dye compound represented by the general formula (1) has a counter anion inside and / or outside the molecule.
By setting it as such a structure, the solvent solubility of a coloring composition improves more, As a result, it becomes possible to form the colored layer in which planar unevenness was suppressed more.
　一般式（１）中、Ｒ81およびＲ83の一方は、一般式（２）で表される基であり、Ｒ81およびＲ83の他方は、水素原子、下記一般式（２）で表される基または一般式（２）で表される基以外のアリール基、アルキル基を表し、一般式（２）で表される基または一般式（２）で表される基以外のアリール基であってもよい。また、Ｒ81およびＲ83の両方が一般式（２）で表される基であってもよい。Ｒ81およびＲ83の両方が一般式（２）で表される基である場合、２つの一般式（２）で表される基は同一であっても異なっていても良い。 In general formula (1), one of R 81 and R 83 is a group represented by general formula (2), and the other of R 81 and R 83 is a hydrogen atom, represented by the following general formula (2). An aryl group other than the group represented by formula (2) or an alkyl group, and an aryl group other than the group represented by formula (2) or the group represented by formula (2). May be. Further, both of R 81 and R 83 may be a group represented by the general formula (2). When both R 81 and R 83 are groups represented by the general formula (2), the groups represented by the two general formulas (2) may be the same or different.
　一般式（２）中、Ｒ1およびＲ2は、それぞれ独立に、炭素数３以上のアルキル基、アリール基、または、ヘテロ環基を表し、炭素数３～１２の２級または３級アルキル基であってもよく、イソプロピル基であってもよい。
　炭素数３以上のアルキル基としては、具体的には、直鎖、分岐鎖、又は環状いずれでも良く、炭素数３～２４であってもよく、炭素数３～１８であってもよく、炭素数３～１２であってもよい。具体的には、例えば、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基（例えばｔ－ブチル基）、ペンチル基、ヘキシル基、ヘプチル基、オクチル基、２－エチルヘキシル基、ドデシル基、ヘキサデシル基、シクロプロピル基、シクロペンチル基、シクロヘキシル基、１－ノルボルニル基、１－アダマンチル基が挙げられ、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基、ｔ－ブチル基、ペンチル基、ヘキシル基、ヘプチル基、オクチル基、２－エチルヘキシル基、ドデシル基、シクロプロピル基、シクロペンチル基、シクロヘキシル基であってもよく、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基（ｔ－ブチル基）、ペンチル基、ヘキシル基、ヘプチル基、オクチル基、２－エチルヘキシル基であってもよく、イソプロピル基、ｔ－ブチル基、２－エチルヘキシル基であってもよい。
　アリール基としては置換もしくは無置換のアリール基が含まれる。置換もしくは無置換のアリール基としては、炭素数６～３０のアリール基であってもよく、例えば、フェニル基、ナフチル基が挙げられる。置換基の例としては、後述する置換基群Ａと同じである。
　ヘテロ環基のヘテロ環としては、５員又は６員環であってもよく、それらは更に縮環していてもよいし、縮環していなくてもよい。また、芳香族ヘテロ環であっても非芳香族ヘテロ環であっても良い。例えば、ピリジン環、ピラジン環、ピリダジン環、キノリン環、イソキノリン環、キナゾリン環、シンノリン環、フタラジン環、キノキサリン環、ピロール環、インドール環、フラン環、ベンゾフラン環、チオフェン環、ベンゾチオフェン環、ピラゾール環、イミダゾール環、ベンズイミダゾール環、トリアゾール環、オキサゾール環、ベンズオキサゾール環、チアゾール環、ベンゾチアゾール環、イソチアゾール環、ベンズイソチアゾール環、チアジアゾール環、イソオキサゾール環、ベンズイソオキサゾール環、ピロリジン環、ピペリジン環、ピペラジン環、イミダゾリジン環、チアゾリン環などが挙げられる。中では芳香族ヘテロ環基であってもよく、ピリジン環、ピラジン環、ピリダジン環、ピラゾール環、イミダゾール環、ベンズイミダゾール環、トリアゾール環、ベンズオキサゾール環、チアゾール環、ベンゾチアゾール環、イソチアゾール環、ベンズイソチアゾール環、チアジアゾール環が挙げられ、ピラゾール環、イミダゾール環、ベンズオキサゾール環、チアジアゾール環であってもよく、ピラゾール環、チアジアゾール環（１，３，４－チアジアゾール環、１，２，４－チアジアゾール環）であってもよい。それらは置換基を有していても良く、置換基の例としては、後述するアリール基の置換基と同じである。
　Ｒ1およびＲ2は、炭素数３以上のアルキル基であってもよく、炭素数３～１２のアルキル基であってもよい。 In general formula (2), R 1 and R 2 each independently represents an alkyl group having 3 or more carbon atoms, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group, and a secondary or tertiary alkyl group having 3 to 12 carbon atoms. Or an isopropyl group.
Specifically, the alkyl group having 3 or more carbon atoms may be linear, branched or cyclic, may have 3 to 24 carbon atoms, may have 3 to 18 carbon atoms, The number may be 3 to 12. Specifically, for example, propyl group, isopropyl group, butyl group (for example, t-butyl group), pentyl group, hexyl group, heptyl group, octyl group, 2-ethylhexyl group, dodecyl group, hexadecyl group, cyclopropyl group, And cyclopentyl group, cyclohexyl group, 1-norbornyl group, 1-adamantyl group, propyl group, isopropyl group, butyl group, t-butyl group, pentyl group, hexyl group, heptyl group, octyl group, 2-ethylhexyl group, It may be a dodecyl group, a cyclopropyl group, a cyclopentyl group or a cyclohexyl group, and may be a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group (t-butyl group), a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group or a 2-ethylhexyl group. Isopropyl group, t-butyl group, 2-ethylhexyl It may be a le group.
The aryl group includes a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group. The substituted or unsubstituted aryl group may be an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, and examples thereof include a phenyl group and a naphthyl group. Examples of the substituent are the same as those of the substituent group A described later.
The heterocycle of the heterocycle group may be a 5-membered or 6-membered ring, and they may be further condensed or not condensed. Further, it may be an aromatic heterocycle or a non-aromatic heterocycle. For example, pyridine ring, pyrazine ring, pyridazine ring, quinoline ring, isoquinoline ring, quinazoline ring, cinnoline ring, phthalazine ring, quinoxaline ring, pyrrole ring, indole ring, furan ring, benzofuran ring, thiophene ring, benzothiophene ring, pyrazole ring , Imidazole ring, benzimidazole ring, triazole ring, oxazole ring, benzoxazole ring, thiazole ring, benzothiazole ring, isothiazole ring, benzisothiazole ring, thiadiazole ring, isoxazole ring, benzisoxazole ring, pyrrolidine ring, piperidine Ring, piperazine ring, imidazolidine ring, thiazoline ring and the like. Among them, it may be an aromatic heterocyclic group, such as a pyridine ring, pyrazine ring, pyridazine ring, pyrazole ring, imidazole ring, benzimidazole ring, triazole ring, benzoxazole ring, thiazole ring, benzothiazole ring, isothiazole ring, Examples thereof include a benzisothiazole ring and a thiadiazole ring, and may be a pyrazole ring, an imidazole ring, a benzoxazole ring, a thiadiazole ring, a pyrazole ring, a thiadiazole ring (1,3,4-thiadiazole ring, 1,2,4- A thiadiazole ring). They may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent are the same as those of the aryl group described later.
R 1 and R 2 may be an alkyl group having 3 or more carbon atoms, or an alkyl group having 3 to 12 carbon atoms.
　一般式（２）中、Ｘ1～Ｘ3は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子または１価の置換基を表す。置換基としては、後述する置換基群Ａが例示される。Ｘ1～Ｘ3は、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、ヒドロキシル基、アルコキシ基、アシル基、アシルオキシ基、アルキルチオ基、スルホンアミド基、スルファモイル基であってもよい。 In the general formula (2), X 1 to X 3 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent. Examples of the substituent include the substituent group A described later. X 1 to X 3 may be a halogen atom, an alkyl group, a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, an alkylthio group, a sulfonamide group, or a sulfamoyl group.
　一般式（２）で表される基以外のアリール基としては、フェニル基が挙げられる。フェニル基は置換基を有していても良いし、有していなくても良い。置換基としては、後述する置換基群Ａが例示され、アルキル基またはアリール基であってもよい。 Examples of the aryl group other than the group represented by the general formula (2) include a phenyl group. The phenyl group may or may not have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include substituent group A described later, and may be an alkyl group or an aryl group.
　Ｒ82およびＲ84は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、または、アリール基を表し、アルキル基およびアリール基は置換基を有していても良いし、有していなくても良い。
　置換又は無置換のアルキル基は、炭素原子数が１～３０のアルキル基であってもよい。置換基の例としては、後述する置換基群Ａと同じものが挙げられる。上記アルキル基の例には、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基（ｔ－ブチル基）、ｎ－オクチル基、２－エチルヘキシル基を挙げることができる。
　置換もしくは無置換のアリール基としては、炭素数６～３０のアリール基であってもよく、例えば、フェニル基、ナフチル基が挙げられる。置換基の例としては、後述する置換基群Ａと同じである。
　Ｒ82およびＲ84は、水素原子またはアルキル基であってもよく、水素原子であってもよい。 R 82 and R 84 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group, and the alkyl group and the aryl group may or may not have a substituent.
The substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group may be an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms. As an example of a substituent, the same thing as the substituent group A mentioned later is mentioned. Examples of the alkyl group include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group (t-butyl group), an n-octyl group, and a 2-ethylhexyl group.
The substituted or unsubstituted aryl group may be an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, and examples thereof include a phenyl group and a naphthyl group. Examples of the substituent are the same as those of the substituent group A described later.
R 82 and R 84 may be a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, and may be a hydrogen atom.
（一般式（Ｊ）で表される化合物の第２の態様）
　一般式（Ｊ）で表される化合物は、Ｒ81およびＲ83がそれぞれ独立に、脂肪族炭化水素基であり、Ｒ82およびＲ84がそれぞれ独立に、芳香族炭化水素基であってもよい。
　このような構成とすることにより、アルカリ現像時の分光変動がより抑制され、耐熱性により優れた硬化膜が得られる着色組成物が得られる。 (Second Aspect of Compound Represented by General Formula (J))
In the compound represented by the general formula (J), R 81 and R 83 may each independently be an aliphatic hydrocarbon group, and R 82 and R 84 may each independently be an aromatic hydrocarbon group. .
By setting it as such a structure, the coloring composition in which the spectral fluctuation at the time of alkali image development is suppressed more, and the cured film excellent in heat resistance is obtained is obtained.
　Ｒ81およびＲ83はそれぞれ独立に、脂肪族炭化水素基が挙げられ、炭素数１～１０のアルキル基であってもよく、炭素数１～５のアルキル基であってもよく、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、ブチル基であってもよく、メチル基、エチル基、ｎ－プロピル基、iso－プロピル基、ｎ－ブチル基であってもよい。Ｒ81およびＲ83は異なっていても良いが、同一であってもよい。Ｒ81およびＲ83としてのアルキル基は置換基を有していても良いが、置換基を有していてもよい。
　Ｒ82およびＲ84はそれぞれ独立に芳香族炭化水素基であり、フェニル基であってもよい。Ｒ82およびＲ84としての芳香族炭化水素基は、置換基を有していても良く、後述する置換基群Ａから選択され、炭素数１～５のアルキル基であってもよく、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、ブチル基であってもよく、メチル基、エチル基、ｎ－プロピル基、ｎ－ブチル基であってもよい。
　Ｒ81およびＲ83ならびにＲ82およびＲ84の少なくとも１つが、下記一般式（Ａ１－１－２）で表されてもよい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000031
 　一般式（Ａ１－１－２）において、Ｒ23～Ｒ25は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、水酸基、アルコキシ基、炭素数１～１２のアルキル基、カルボニル基、カルボニルアミド基、スルホニル基、スルホニルアミド基、ニトロ基、アミノ基、アミノカルボニル基、アミノスルホニル基、スルホニルイミド基またはカルボニルイミド基を表し、Ｒ22およびＲ26は、それぞれ独立に炭素数１～５のアルキル基を表す。
　一般式（Ａ１－１－２）において、Ｒ23～Ｒ25は、水素原子またはハロゲン原子であってもよい。
　一般式（Ａ１－１－２）において、Ｒ22およびＲ26は、それぞれ独立に炭素数１～５のアルキル基であってもよい。炭素数１～５のアルキル基は、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、ブチル基であってもよく、メチル基、エチル基、ｎ－プロピル基、iso－プロピル基、ｎ－ブチル基であってもよい。
　Ｒ85はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アリール基、カルボニル基、ニトロ基、アミノ基、アルキルアミノ基、アリールアミノ基、または、スルホニル基であってもよい。ハロゲン原子としては、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子が例示され、フッ素原子または塩素原子であってもよい。脂肪族炭化水素基は、炭素数１～１０の脂肪族炭化水素基であってもよい。また、脂肪族炭化水素基は、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アルケニル基が例示され、アルキル基であってもよい。芳香族炭化水素基は、アリール基であってもよく、フェニル基であってもよい。 R 81 and R 83 each independently represents an aliphatic hydrocarbon group, which may be an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, a methyl group, It may be an ethyl group, a propyl group or a butyl group, and may be a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-propyl group, an iso-propyl group or an n-butyl group. R 81 and R 83 may be different, but may be the same. The alkyl group as R 81 and R 83 may have a substituent, but may have a substituent.
R 82 and R 84 are each independently an aromatic hydrocarbon group, and may be a phenyl group. The aromatic hydrocarbon group as R 82 and R 84 may have a substituent, may be selected from the substituent group A described later, and may be an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms. , An ethyl group, a propyl group or a butyl group, or a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-propyl group or an n-butyl group.
At least one of R 81 and R 83 and R 82 and R 84 may be represented by the following general formula (A1-1-2).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000031
 In the general formula (A1-1-2), R 23 to R 25 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, a carbonyl group, a carbonylamide group, a sulfonyl group. Group, sulfonylamide group, nitro group, amino group, aminocarbonyl group, aminosulfonyl group, sulfonylimide group or carbonylimide group, R 22 and R 26 each independently represents an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms. .
In the general formula (A1-1-2), R 23 to R 25 may be a hydrogen atom or a halogen atom.
In general formula (A1-1-2), R 22 and R 26 may each independently be an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms. The alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms may be a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, or a butyl group, and is a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-propyl group, an iso-propyl group, or an n-butyl group. Also good.
Each R 85 may independently be a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a carbonyl group, a nitro group, an amino group, an alkylamino group, an arylamino group, or a sulfonyl group. Examples of the halogen atom include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, and a bromine atom, and may be a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom. The aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be an aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms. Examples of the aliphatic hydrocarbon group include an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, and an alkenyl group, and may be an alkyl group. The aromatic hydrocarbon group may be an aryl group or a phenyl group.
　以下にキサンテン化合物の具体例を示すが、本発明はこれに限定されるものではない。本発明では、下記色素構造のいずれかの水素原子が、ポリマー骨格と結合する。 Specific examples of xanthene compounds are shown below, but the present invention is not limited thereto. In the present invention, any hydrogen atom of the following dye structure is bonded to the polymer backbone.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000032
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000032
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000033
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000033
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000034
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000034
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000035
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000035
＜＜アゾ色素＞＞
　アゾ色素としては、公知のアゾ色素（例えば、置換アゾベンゼン（具体例として後述する（ＡＺ－４）～（ＡＺ－６）等））から適宜選択して適用することができる。
アゾ色素としては、マゼンタ色素及びイエロー色素として知られるアゾ色素が適用でき、それらの中でも、特に、下記一般式（ｄ）、一般式（ｅ）、一般式（ｇ）、一般式（Ｉ－１）、一般式（Ｉ－２）、及び一般式（Ｖ）で表されるアゾ色素が好ましい。 << Azo dye >>
As the azo dye, a known azo dye (for example, substituted azobenzene (specifically described later (AZ-4) to (AZ-6) and the like)) can be appropriately selected and applied.
As the azo dye, azo dyes known as magenta dyes and yellow dyes can be used, and among them, the following general formula (d), general formula (e), general formula (g), general formula (I-1) ), Azo dyes represented by general formula (I-2) and general formula (V) are preferred.
＜＜＜マゼンタ色素＞＞＞
　アゾ色素としては、マゼンタ色素である下記一般式（ｄ）で表されるアゾ色素が好適に挙げられる。 <<< Magenta dye >>>
Preferred examples of the azo dye include azo dyes represented by the following general formula (d) that are magenta dyes.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000036
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000036
一般式（ｄ）中、Ｒ1～Ｒ4は、各々独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アリール基、ヘテロ環基、アシル基、アルコキシカルボニル基、アリールオキシカルボニル基、カルバモイル基、アルキルスルホニル基、又はアリールスルホニル基を表し、Ａは、アリール基、又は芳香族へテロ環基を表し、Ｚ1～Ｚ3は、各々独立に、－Ｃ（Ｒ5）＝、又は－Ｎ＝を表し、Ｒ5は水素原子、又は置換基を表す。 In the general formula (d), R 1 to R 4 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an acyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a carbamoyl group, an alkyl A represents a sulfonyl group or an arylsulfonyl group, A represents an aryl group or an aromatic heterocyclic group, and Z 1 to Z 3 each independently represents —C (R 5 ) ═, or —N═. R 5 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
一般式（ｄ）における各置換基について詳しく説明する。
一般式（ｄ）中、Ｒ1～Ｒ4は、各々独立に、水素原子、又はアルキル基（好ましくは炭素数１～３６、より好ましくは炭素数１～１２の直鎖、分岐鎖、又は環状のアルキル基で、例えば、メチル、エチル、プロピル、イソプロピル、ブチル、イソブチル、ｔ－ブチル、ヘキシル、２－エチルヘキシル、ドデシル、シクロプロピル、シクロペンチル、シクロヘキシル、１－アダマンチル）、アルケニル基（好ましくは炭素数２～２４、より好ましくは炭素数２～１２のアルケニル基で、例えば、ビニル、アリル、３－ブテン－１－イル）、アリール基（好ましくは炭素数６～３６、より好ましくは炭素数６～１８のアリール基で、例えば、フェニル、ナフチル）、ヘテロ環基（好ましくは炭素数１～２４、より好ましくは炭素数１～１２のヘテロ環基で、例えば、２－チエニル、４－ピリジル、２－フリル、２－ピリミジニル、１－ピリジル、２－ベンゾチアゾリル、１－イミダゾリル、１－ピラゾリル、ベンゾトリアゾール－１－イル）、アシル基（好ましくは炭素数１～２４、より好ましくは炭素数２～１８のアシル基で、例えば、アセチル、ピバロイル、２－エチルヘキシル、ベンゾイル、シクロヘキサノイル）、アルコキシカルボニル基（好ましくは炭素数１～１０、より好ましくは炭素数１～６のアルコキシカルボニル基で、例えば、メトキシカルボニル、エトキシカルボニル）、アリールオキシカルボニル基（好ましくは炭素数６～１５、より好ましくは炭素数６～１０のアリールオキシカルボニル基で、例えば、フェノキシカルボニル）、カルバモイル基（好ましくは炭素数１～８、より好ましくは炭素数２～６のカルバモイル基で、例えば、ジメチルカルバモイル）、アルキルスルホニル基（好ましくは炭素数１～２４、より好ましくは炭素数１～１８のアルキルスルホニル基で、例えば、メチルスルホニル、エチルスルホニル、イソプロピルスルホニル、シクロヘキシルスルホニル）、又はアリールスルホニル基（好ましくは炭素数６～２４、より好ましくは炭素数６～１８のアリールスルホニル基で、例えば、フェニルスルホニル、ナフチルスルホニル）を表す。 Each substituent in the general formula (d) will be described in detail.
In general formula (d), R 1 to R 4 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group (preferably a straight chain, branched chain, or cyclic group having 1 to 36 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 12 carbon atoms). Alkyl groups such as methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl, isobutyl, t-butyl, hexyl, 2-ethylhexyl, dodecyl, cyclopropyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, 1-adamantyl), alkenyl groups (preferably having a carbon number) An alkenyl group having 2 to 24, more preferably 2 to 12 carbon atoms, such as vinyl, allyl, 3-buten-1-yl), an aryl group (preferably having 6 to 36 carbon atoms, more preferably having 6 to 6 carbon atoms) 18 aryl groups such as phenyl and naphthyl, and heterocyclic groups (preferably having 1 to 24 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 12 carbon atoms). A bicyclic group such as 2-thienyl, 4-pyridyl, 2-furyl, 2-pyrimidinyl, 1-pyridyl, 2-benzothiazolyl, 1-imidazolyl, 1-pyrazolyl, benzotriazol-1-yl), acyl group ( Preferably an acyl group having 1 to 24 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 18 carbon atoms, such as acetyl, pivaloyl, 2-ethylhexyl, benzoyl, cyclohexanoyl), an alkoxycarbonyl group (preferably having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, More preferably, it is an alkoxycarbonyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, such as methoxycarbonyl or ethoxycarbonyl), an aryloxycarbonyl group (preferably an aryloxycarbonyl group having 6 to 15 carbon atoms, more preferably an aryloxycarbonyl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms). , For example, phenoxycarbonyl), a carbamoyl group (preferably A carbamoyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms, such as dimethylcarbamoyl), an alkylsulfonyl group (preferably an alkylsulfonyl group having 1 to 24 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 18 carbon atoms). An arylsulfonyl group (preferably an arylsulfonyl group having 6 to 24 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 18 carbon atoms, such as phenylsulfonyl, naphthylsulfonyl). ).
　Ｒ1及びＲ3は、好ましくは、各々独立に、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アリール基、ヘテロ環基である。Ｒ2及びＲ4は、好ましくは、各々独立に、水素原子、アルキル基である。
Ｒ1～Ｒ4が、置換可能な基である場合には、例えば、上記置換基群Ａの項で説明した置換基で置換されていてもよく、２個以上の置換基を有する場合には、それらの置換基は同一であっても異なっていてもよい。 R 1 and R 3 are preferably each independently an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group. R 2 and R 4 are preferably each independently a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group.
In the case where R 1 to R 4 are substitutable groups, for example, they may be substituted with the substituents described in the above-mentioned Substituent group A section, and in the case of having two or more substituents These substituents may be the same or different.
　Ｒ1とＲ2、Ｒ1とＲ5（Ｚ1又はＺ2が－Ｃ（Ｒ5）＝のとき）、Ｒ3とＲ4、Ｒ3とＲ5（Ｚ1が－Ｃ（Ｒ5）＝のとき）とは、互いに結合して、５員、又は６員の環を形成していてもよい。 R 1 and R 2 , R 1 and R 5 (when Z 1 or Z 2 is —C (R 5 ) =), R 3 and R 4 , R 3 and R 5 (Z 1 is —C (R 5 )) May be bonded to each other to form a 5-membered or 6-membered ring.
　Ｚ1～Ｚ3は、各々独立に、－Ｃ（Ｒ5）＝、又は－Ｎ＝を表し、Ｒ5は水素原子、又は置換基を表す。Ｒ5の置換基としては、例えば、上記置換基の項で説明した置換基が挙げられる。Ｒ5の置換基が更に置換可能な基である場合には、例えば、上記置換基群Ａの項で説明した置換基で置換されていてもよく、２個以上の置換基で置換されている場合には、それらの置換基は、同一であっても異なっていてもよい。 Z 1 to Z 3 each independently represents —C (R 5 ) ═ or —N═, and R 5 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent. Examples of the substituent for R 5 include the substituents described in the above-mentioned substituent section. When the substituent of R 5 is a further substitutable group, for example, it may be substituted with the substituent described in the above-mentioned Substituent group A, and may be substituted with two or more substituents. In some cases, the substituents may be the same or different.
　Ｚ1～Ｚ3としては、好ましくは、Ｚ1は－Ｎ＝であって、Ｚ2は－Ｃ（Ｒ5）＝又は－Ｎ＝であって、Ｚ3は－Ｃ（Ｒ5）＝である。更に好ましくは、Ｚ1が－Ｎ＝であって、Ｚ2及びＺ3が－Ｃ（Ｒ5）＝である。 As Z 1 to Z 3 , Z 1 is preferably —N═, Z 2 is —C (R 5 ) ═ or —N =, and Z 3 is —C (R 5 ) ═. is there. More preferably, Z 1 is —N═ and Z 2 and Z 3 are —C (R 5 ) ═.
　Ａは、アリール基、又は芳香族へテロ環基を表す。Ａのアリール基、及び芳香族へテロ環基は、更に、例えば、上記置換基の項で説明した置換基を有していてもよく、２個以上の置換基で置換されている場合には、それらの置換基は同一であっても異なっていてもよい。
Ａは、好ましくは芳香族ヘテロ環基である。更に好ましくは、イミダゾール環、ピラゾール環、トリアゾール環、チアゾール環、オキサゾール環、１，２，４－チアジアゾール環、１，３，４－チアジアゾール環、ピリジン環、ピリミジン環、ピラジンン環、ベンゾピラゾール環、ベンゾチアゾール環等が挙げられる。 A represents an aryl group or an aromatic heterocyclic group. The aryl group of A and the aromatic heterocyclic group may further have, for example, the substituent described in the above-mentioned substituent section, and when it is substituted with two or more substituents These substituents may be the same or different.
A is preferably an aromatic heterocyclic group. More preferably, an imidazole ring, pyrazole ring, triazole ring, thiazole ring, oxazole ring, 1,2,4-thiadiazole ring, 1,3,4-thiadiazole ring, pyridine ring, pyrimidine ring, pyrazine ring, benzopyrazole ring, Examples include a benzothiazole ring.
　一般式（ｄ）において、多量体化（色素多量体（Ａ）の形成）に与る重合性基が導入される部位は、特に制限はないが、合成適合性の点で、Ｒ1、Ｒ2及びＡのいずれか１つ又は２つ以上に導入されることが好ましく、より好ましくは、Ｒ1及び／又はＡである。 In formula (d), sites polymerizable group participate in multimerization (formation of a dye multimer (A)) is introduced is not particularly limited, in view of synthesis suitability, R 1, R It is preferably introduced into any one or more of 2 and A, more preferably R 1 and / or A.
　一般式（ｄ）で表されるアゾ色素は、より好ましくは下記一般式（ｄ'）で表されるアゾ色素である。 The azo dye represented by the general formula (d) is more preferably an azo dye represented by the following general formula (d ′).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000037
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000037
　一般式（ｄ'）中、Ｒ1～Ｒ4は、上記一般式（ｄ）におけるＲ1～Ｒ4と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。Ｒａは、ハメットの置換基定数σｐ値が０．２以上の電子吸引性基を表し、Ｒｂは、水素原子、又は１価の置換基を表す。Ｒｃはアルキル基、アルケニル基、アリール基、ヘテロ環基、アシル基、アルコキシカルボニル基、カルバモイル基、アルキルスルホニル基、又はアリールスルホニル基を表す。
Ｒｂで表される置換基としては、例えば、上記置換基群Ａの項で説明した置換基が挙げられる。 In the general formula (d '), R 1 ~ R 4 has the same meaning as R 1 ~ R 4 in the general formula (d), and preferred ranges are also the same. Ra represents an electron-withdrawing group having a Hammett's substituent constant σp value of 0.2 or more, and Rb represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent. Rc represents an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an acyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, a carbamoyl group, an alkylsulfonyl group, or an arylsulfonyl group.
Examples of the substituent represented by Rb include the substituents described in the section of the substituent group A.
　アゾ色素としては、マゼンタ色素である下記一般式（ｅ）で表されるアゾ色素も好適に挙げられる。 As the azo dye, an azo dye represented by the following general formula (e) which is a magenta dye is also preferably exemplified.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000038
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000038
　一般式（ｅ）中、Ｒ11～Ｒ16は、各々独立に、水素原子、又は１価の置換基を表す。Ｒ11とＲ12、及びＲ15とＲ16は、各々独立に、互いに結合して環を形成していてもよい。 In general formula (e), R 11 to R 16 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent. R 11 and R 12 , and R 15 and R 16 may be independently bonded to each other to form a ring.
　一般式（ｅ）における各置換基について詳しく説明する。
　Ｒ11～Ｒ16は、各々独立に、水素原子又は１価の置換基を表す。１価の置換基としては、例えばハロゲン原子、炭素数１～３０のアルキル基（ここでは、シクロアルキル基、ビシクロアルキル基を含む飽和脂肪族基を意味する。）、炭素数２～３０のアルケニル基（ここでは、シクロアルケニル基、ビシクロアルケニル基を含む二重結合を有する不飽和脂肪族基を意味する。）、炭素数２～３０のアルキニル基、炭素数６～３０のアリール基、炭素数３～３０のヘテロ環基、シアノ基、炭素数１～３０の脂肪族オキシ基、炭素数６～３０のアリールオキシ基、炭素数２～３０のアシルオキシ基、炭素数１～３０のカルバモイルオキシ基、炭素数２～３０の脂肪族オキシカルボニルオキシ基、炭素数７～３０のアリールオキシカルボニルオキシ基、炭素数０～３０のアミノ基（アルキルアミノ基、アニリノ基及びヘテロ環アミノ基を含む。）、炭素数２～３０のアシルアミノ基、炭素数１～３０のアミノカルボニルアミノ基、炭素数２～３０の脂肪族オキシカルボニルアミノ基、炭素数７～３０のアリールオキシカルボニルアミノ基、炭素数０～３０のスルファモイルアミノ基、炭素数１～３０のアルキルもしくはアリールスルホニルアミノ基、炭素数１～３０のアルキルチオ基、炭素数６～３０のアリールチオ基、炭素数０～３０のスルファモイル基、炭素数１～３０のアルキルもしくはアリールスルフィニル基、炭素数１～３０のアルキルもしくはアリールスルホニル基、炭素数２～３０のアシル基、炭素数６～３０のアリールオキシカルボニル基、炭素数２～３０の脂肪族オキシカルボニル基、炭素数１～３０のカルバモイル基、炭素数３～３０のアリールもしくはヘテロ環アゾ基、イミド基が挙げられ、それぞれの基はさらに置換基を有していてもよい。 Each substituent in the general formula (e) will be described in detail.
R 11 to R 16 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent. Examples of the monovalent substituent include a halogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms (here, a saturated aliphatic group including a cycloalkyl group and a bicycloalkyl group), and an alkenyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms. A group (which means a cycloalkenyl group or an unsaturated aliphatic group having a double bond including a bicycloalkenyl group), an alkynyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, a carbon number A heterocyclic group having 3 to 30 carbon atoms, a cyano group, an aliphatic oxy group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, an aryloxy group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, an acyloxy group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, and a carbamoyloxy group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms An aliphatic oxycarbonyloxy group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, an aryloxycarbonyloxy group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms, an amino group having 0 to 30 carbon atoms (an alkylamino group, an anilino group) An amino group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, an aminocarbonylamino group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, an aliphatic oxycarbonylamino group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, and an aryl having 7 to 30 carbon atoms. Oxycarbonylamino group, sulfamoylamino group having 0 to 30 carbon atoms, alkyl or arylsulfonylamino group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, alkylthio group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, arylthio group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, carbon number 0-30 sulfamoyl group, alkyl group having 1-30 carbon atoms or arylsulfinyl group, alkyl group having 1-30 carbon atoms or arylsulfonyl group, acyl group having 2-30 carbon atoms, aryloxycarbonyl group having 6-30 carbon atoms An aliphatic oxycarbonyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, a carbamoyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and 3 to 3 carbon atoms 0 aryl or heterocyclic azo group, and imide group, each group may further have a substituent.
　Ｒ11及びＲ12は、好ましくは、各々独立に、水素原子、ヘテロ環基、シアノ基であり、より好ましくはシアノ基である。
　Ｒ13及びＲ14は、好ましくは、各々独立に、水素原子、置換もしくは無置換のアルキル基、置換もしくは無置換のアリール基であり、より好ましくは、置換もしくは無置換のアルキル基である。
　Ｒ15及びＲ16は、好ましくは、各々独立に、水素原子、置換もしくは無置換のアルキル基、置換もしくは無置換のアリール基であり、より好ましくは、置換もしくは無置換のアルキル基である。 R 11 and R 12 are preferably each independently a hydrogen atom, a heterocyclic group or a cyano group, more preferably a cyano group.
R 13 and R 14 are preferably each independently a hydrogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group, and more preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group.
R 15 and R 16 are preferably each independently a hydrogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group, and more preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group.
　一般式（ｅ）において、多量体化（色素多量体（Ａ）の形成）に与る重合性基が導入される部位は、特に制限はないが、合成適合性の点で、Ｒ13、Ｒ15、及びＲ16のいずれか１つ又は２つ以上に導入されることが好ましく、より好ましくは、Ｒ13及び／又はＲ15であり、更に好ましくはＲ13である。 In the general formula (e), there is no particular limitation on the site where a polymerizable group for multimerization (formation of the dye multimer (A)) is introduced, but R 13 , R in terms of synthesis compatibility. It is preferably introduced into any one or more of 15 and R 16 , more preferably R 13 and / or R 15 , and still more preferably R 13 .
　上記したアゾ色素の中でも、マゼンタ色素としては、一般式（ｅ）で表されるアゾ色素がより好ましい。 Among the azo dyes described above, as the magenta dye, the azo dye represented by the general formula (e) is more preferable.
－イエロー色素－
　アゾ色素としては、イエロー色素である下記一般式（ｇ）、一般式（Ｉ－１）、一般式（Ｉ－２）、及び一般式（Ｖ）で表されるアゾ色素（それらの互変異性体も含む）が、好適に挙げられる。 -Yellow dye-
Examples of the azo dye include yellow dyes represented by the following general formula (g), general formula (I-1), general formula (I-2), and general formula (V) (their tautomers). (Including the body).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000039
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000039
　一般式（ｇ）中、Ｒ34は水素原子、又は置換基を表し、Ｒ35は、水素原子、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アリール基、ヘテロ環基、アシル基、アルコキシカルボニル基、又はカルバモイル基を表す。Ｚ30及びＺ31は、各々独立に、－Ｃ（Ｒ36）＝、又は－Ｎ＝を表し、Ｒ36は水素原子、又は置換基を表す。Ａ31は、アリール基、又は芳香族ヘテロ環基を表す。 In general formula (g), R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and R 35 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an acyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, or a carbamoyl group. To express. Z 30 and Z 31 each independently represent —C (R 36 ) ═ or —N═, and R 36 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent. A 31 represents an aryl group or an aromatic heterocyclic group.
　一般式（ｇ）における各置換基について詳しく説明する。
　Ｒ34は、水素原子、又は１価の置換基を表し、上記置換基群Ａの項で説明した置換基が挙げられ、アリール基及びヘテロ環基が好ましく、フェニル基がより好ましい。 Each substituent in the general formula (g) will be described in detail.
R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent, and examples thereof include the substituents described in the above-mentioned Substituent Group A section, preferably an aryl group and a heterocyclic group, and more preferably a phenyl group.
　Ｒ35は、水素原子、アルキル基（（好ましくは炭素数１～３６、より好ましくは炭素数１～１２の直鎖、分岐鎖、又は環状のアルキル基で、例えば、メチル、エチル、プロピル、イソプロピル、ブチル、イソブチル、ｔ－ブチル、ヘキシル、２－エチルヘキシル、ドデシル、シクロプロピル、シクロペンチル、シクロヘキシル、１－アダマンチル）、アルケニル基（好ましくは炭素数２～２４、より好ましくは炭素数２～１２のアルケニル基で、例えば、ビニル、アリル、３－ブテン－１－イル）、アリール基（好ましくは炭素数６～３６、より好ましくは炭素数６～１８のアリール基で、例えば、フェニル、ナフチル）、ヘテロ環基（好ましくは炭素数１～２４、より好ましくは炭素数１～１２のヘテロ環基で、例えば、２－チエニル、４－ピリジル、２－フリル、２－ピリミジニル、１－ピリジル、２－ベンゾチアゾリル、１－イミダゾリル、１－ピラゾリル、ベンゾトリアゾール－１－イル）、アシル基（好ましくは炭素数１～２４、より好ましくは炭素数２～１８のアシル基で、例えば、アセチル、ピバロイル、２－エチルヘキシル、ベンゾイル、シクロヘキサノイル）、アルコキシカルボニル基（好ましくは炭素数１～１０、より好ましくは炭素数１～６のアルコキシカルボニル基で、例えば、メトキシカルボニル基、エトキシカルボニル基）、又はカルバモイル基（好ましくは炭素数１～１０、より好ましくは炭素数１～６のカルバモイル基で、例えば、Ｎ，Ｎ－ジメチルカルバモイル）を表す。 R 35 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group (preferably a linear, branched or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 36 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 12 carbon atoms, such as methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl , Butyl, isobutyl, t-butyl, hexyl, 2-ethylhexyl, dodecyl, cyclopropyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, 1-adamantyl), an alkenyl group (preferably having 2 to 24 carbon atoms, more preferably alkenyl having 2 to 12 carbon atoms) Groups such as vinyl, allyl, 3-buten-1-yl), aryl groups (preferably aryl groups having 6 to 36 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 18 carbon atoms such as phenyl, naphthyl), hetero A cyclic group (preferably a heterocyclic group having 1 to 24 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 12 carbon atoms, such as 2-thienyl, 4 Pyridyl, 2-furyl, 2-pyrimidinyl, 1-pyridyl, 2-benzothiazolyl, 1-imidazolyl, 1-pyrazolyl, benzotriazol-1-yl), acyl group (preferably having 1 to 24 carbon atoms, more preferably carbon number) An acyl group having 2 to 18, for example, acetyl, pivaloyl, 2-ethylhexyl, benzoyl, cyclohexanoyl), an alkoxycarbonyl group (preferably an alkoxycarbonyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms). For example, a methoxycarbonyl group, an ethoxycarbonyl group), or a carbamoyl group (preferably a carbamoyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms, for example, N, N-dimethylcarbamoyl).
　Ｚ30及びＺ31は、各々独立に、－Ｃ（Ｒ36）＝、又は－Ｎ＝を表し、Ｒ36は水素原子、又は置換基を表す。Ｒ36の置換基としては、例えば、上記置換基群Ａの項で説明した置換基が挙げられる。Ｒ36の置換基が更に置換可能な基である場合には、例えば、上記置換基群Ａの項で説明した置換基で置換されていてもよく、２個以上の置換基で置換されている場合には、それらの置換基は、同一であっても異なっていてもよい。
Ｚ30及びＺ31としては、好ましくは、Ｚ30が－Ｎ＝であって、Ｚ31が－Ｃ（Ｒ36）＝である。 Z 30 and Z 31 each independently represent —C (R 36 ) ═ or —N═, and R 36 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent. Examples of the substituent for R 36 include the substituents described in the above-mentioned Substituent group A section. When the substituent of R 36 is a further substitutable group, for example, it may be substituted with the substituent described in the above-mentioned Substituent group A, and may be substituted with two or more substituents. In some cases, the substituents may be the same or different.
As Z 30 and Z 31 , Z 30 is preferably —N═ and Z 31 is —C (R 36 ) ═.
　Ａ31は、上記一般式（ｄ）におけるＡと同義であり、好ましい態様も同様である。 A 31 has the same meaning as A in the general formula (d), and the preferred embodiment is also the same.
　一般式（ｇ）において、多量体化（色素多量体（Ａ）の形成）に与る重合性基が導入される部位は、特に制限はないが、合成適合性の点で、Ｒ34及び／又はＡ31が好ましい。 In the general formula (g), there is no particular limitation on the site where a polymerizable group for multimerization (formation of the dye multimer (A)) is introduced, but in terms of synthesis compatibility, R 34 and / or Or A31 is preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000040
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000040
　一般式（Ｉ－１）及び一般式（Ｉ－２）中、Ｒｉ1、Ｒｉ2及びＲｉ3は、それぞれ独立して１価の置換基を表す。ａは０～５の整数を表す。ａが２以上の場合、隣接する２つのＲｉ1で連結し縮環を形成してもよい。ｂ及びｃは、それぞれ独立して０～４の整数を表す。ｂ及びｃが１以上の場合、隣接する２つのＲｉ1で連結し縮環を形成してもよい。Ａ32は、下記一般式（ＩＡ）、一般式（ＩＢ）又は一般式（ＩＣ）を表す。 In general formula (I-1) and general formula (I-2), Ri 1 , Ri 2 and Ri 3 each independently represent a monovalent substituent. a represents an integer of 0 to 5. When a is 2 or more, they may be connected by two adjacent Ri 1 to form a condensed ring. b and c each independently represents an integer of 0 to 4. When b and c are 1 or more, they may be connected by two adjacent Ri 1 to form a condensed ring. A 32 represents the following general formula (IA), general formula (IB), or general formula (IC).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000041
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000041
　一般式（ＩＡ）中、Ｒ42は、水素原子、アルキル基、又はアリール基を表す。Ｒ43は、１価の置換基を表す。Ｒ44は、水素原子、アルキル基、又はアリール基を表す。 In general formula (IA), R42 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group. R 43 represents a monovalent substituent. R 44 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000042
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000042
　一般式（ＩＢ）中、Ｒ44及びＲ45は、それぞれ独立して水素原子、アルキル基、又はアリール基を表す。Ｔは、酸素原子又は硫黄原子を表す。 In general formula (IB), R 44 and R 45 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group. T represents an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000043
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000043
　一般式（ＩＣ）中、Ｒ46は、水素原子、アルキル基、又はアリール基を表す。Ｒ47は、１価の置換基を表す。 In the general formula (IC), R 46 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group. R 47 represents a monovalent substituent.
　一般式（Ｉ－１）及び一般式（Ｉ－２）におけるＲｉ1、Ｒｉ2及びＲｉ3が表す１価の置換基としては、上記置換基群Ａの項で挙げた置換基が挙げられる。該１価の置換基としてより具体的には、アルキル基（好ましくは炭素数１～１０、より好ましくは炭素数１～５の直鎖、分岐鎖、又は環状のアルキル基で、例えば、メチル、エチル、プロピル、イソプロピル、ブチル、イソブチル、ｔ－ブチル、ヘキシル、２－エチルヘキシル、ドデシル、シクロプロピル、シクロペンチル、シクロヘキシル、１－アダマンチル）、アリール基（好ましくは炭素数６～３６、より好ましくは炭素数６～１８のアリール基で、例えば、フェニル、ナフチル、スルホンアミド基）、アルケニル基（炭素数１～１０、より好ましくは炭素数１～５の直鎖、分岐鎖、又は環状のアルケニル基で、例えばビニル、アリル、プレニル、ゲラニル、オレイル）、スルホ基、スルファモイル基（炭素数１～１０のアルキルスルファモイル基が好ましい）が挙げられ、特に炭素数１～５のアルキル基及び炭素数１～１０のアルキルスルファモイル基が好ましい。ａは１～３が好ましい。ｂ及びｃは１～３が好ましい。 Examples of the monovalent substituent represented by Ri 1 , Ri 2 and Ri 3 in the general formula (I-1) and the general formula (I-2) include the substituents mentioned in the section of the substituent group A. More specifically, the monovalent substituent is an alkyl group (preferably a linear, branched or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 5 carbon atoms such as methyl, Ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl, isobutyl, t-butyl, hexyl, 2-ethylhexyl, dodecyl, cyclopropyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, 1-adamantyl), aryl group (preferably having 6 to 36 carbon atoms, more preferably carbon number) 6-18 aryl groups, for example, phenyl, naphthyl, sulfonamido groups), alkenyl groups (straight chain, branched chain, or cyclic alkenyl groups having 1-10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1-5 carbon atoms, For example, vinyl, allyl, prenyl, geranyl, oleyl), sulfo group, sulfamoyl group (alkylsulfone having 1 to 10 carbon atoms) Amoiru group is preferred), with particularly alkylsulfamoyl group of the alkyl group and having 1 to 10 carbon atoms having 1 to 5 carbon atoms preferred. a is preferably 1 to 3. b and c are preferably 1 to 3.
　一般式（ＩＡ）中、Ｒ42は、水素原子、アルキル基、又はアリール基を表し、特に炭素数１～５のアルキル基及びフェニル基が好ましい。Ｒ43で表される１価の置換基としては、上記置換基群Ａの項で挙げた置換基が挙げられ、特にシアノ基、カルバモイル基が好ましい。Ｒ44は、水素原子、アルキル基、又はアリール基を表し、特に炭素数１～５のアルキル基及びフェニル基が好ましい。 In the general formula (IA), R 42 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group, and particularly preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms and a phenyl group. Examples of the monovalent substituent represented by R 43 include the substituents mentioned in the above-mentioned Substituent group A, and particularly preferred are a cyano group and a carbamoyl group. R 44 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group, and particularly preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms and a phenyl group.
　一般式（ＩＢ）中、Ｔは酸素原子又は硫黄原子を表し、酸素原子が好ましい。Ｒ44及びＲ45は、それぞれ独立して、水素原子、アルキル基、又はアリール基を表し、特に炭素数１～５のアルキル基及びフェニル基が好ましい。 In general formula (IB), T represents an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom, and an oxygen atom is preferable. R 44 and R 45 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group, and particularly preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms and a phenyl group.
　一般式（ＩＣ）中、Ｒ46は、水素原子、アルキル基、又はアリール基を表し、特に炭素数１～５のアルキル基及びフェニル基が好ましい。Ｒ47が表す１価の置換基としては、上記置換基群Ａの項で挙げた置換基が挙げられ、水素原子、アルキル基及びアリール基が好ましく、特に炭素数１～５のアルキル基及びフェニル基が好ましい。 In the general formula (IC), R 46 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group, and particularly preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms and a phenyl group. Examples of the monovalent substituent represented by R 47 include the substituents mentioned in the above-mentioned Substituent Group A section, preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group and an aryl group, particularly an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms and a phenyl group. Groups are preferred.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000044
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000044
　一般式（Ｖ）中、ＭｖはＣｒ又はＣｏを表す。Ｒｖ1は酸素原子又は－ＣＯＯ－を表す。Ｒｖ2及びＲｖ3は、それぞれ独立して、水素原子、アルキル基又はアリール基を表す。ｖは０～４の整数を表す。Ｒｖ4は１価の置換基を表す。ｖが２以上である場合、隣接するＲｖ4同士が互いに連結して環を形成してもよい。 In general formula (V), Mv represents Cr or Co. Rv 1 represents an oxygen atom or —COO—. Rv 2 and Rv 3 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group. v represents an integer of 0 to 4. Rv 4 represents a monovalent substituent. When v is 2 or more, adjacent Rv 4 may be connected to each other to form a ring.
　Ｒｖ2及びＲｖ3としては、特に炭素数１～５のアルキル基又はフェニル基が好ましい。Ｒｖ4が表す１価の置換基としては、上記置換基群Ａの項で挙げた置換基が挙げられ、特にアルキル基、アリール基、ニトロ基、スルファモイル基及びスルホ基が好ましく、炭素数１～５のアルキル基、フェニル基、ニトロ基が最も好ましい。 Rv 2 and Rv 3 are particularly preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms or a phenyl group. Examples of the monovalent substituent represented by Rv 4 include the substituents mentioned in the above-mentioned Substituent Group A section, particularly preferably an alkyl group, an aryl group, a nitro group, a sulfamoyl group, and a sulfo group. Most preferred are 5 alkyl groups, phenyl groups, and nitro groups.
　上記したアゾ色素の中でも、イエロー色素としては、一般式（Ｉ－１）、一般式（Ｉ－２）及び一般式（Ｖ）で表されるアゾ色素が好ましい。 Among the azo dyes described above, the azo dyes represented by the general formula (I-1), the general formula (I-2), and the general formula (V) are preferable as the yellow dye.
　以下にアゾ色素の具体例を示すが、本発明はこれに限定されるものではない。 Specific examples of the azo dye are shown below, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000045
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000045
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000046
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000046
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000047
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000047
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000048
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000048
　上記具体例のうち色特性及び耐熱性の観点より、特に、（ＡＺ－７）、（ＡＺ－９）、（ＡＺ－１１）、（ＡＺ－１３）、（ＡＺ－１４）、（ＡＺ－１５）、（ＡＺ－１６）、（ＡＺ－１７）、（ＡＺ－１９）、（ＡＺ－２０）、（ＡＺ－２１）、及び（ＡＺ－２２）が好ましい。 Among the above specific examples, from the viewpoints of color characteristics and heat resistance, in particular, (AZ-7), (AZ-9), (AZ-11), (AZ-13), (AZ-14), (AZ-15) ), (AZ-16), (AZ-17), (AZ-19), (AZ-20), (AZ-21), and (AZ-22) are preferred.
＜＜＜シアニン色素＞＞＞
　本発明に係る色素構造を有するカチオンの態様の一つは、シアニン色素（シアニン化合物）に由来する部分構造を有するものである。これらの詳細は、特開２０１３－２８７６４号公報の段落番号０１９１～０２０１の記載を参酌でき、これらの内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。 <<< cyanine dye >>>
One of the embodiments of the cation having a dye structure according to the present invention has a partial structure derived from a cyanine dye (cyanine compound). Details of these can be referred to the descriptions in paragraph numbers 0191 to 0201 of JP 2013-28764 A, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
＜＜＜サブフタロシアニン色素＞＞＞
　本発明に係る色素構造を有するカチオンの態様の一つは、サブフタロシアニン色素構造を有するものである。これらの詳細は、特開２０１３－２８７６４号公報の段落番号０２４２～０２５０の記載を参酌でき、これらの内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。 <<< Subphthalocyanine Dye >>>
One embodiment of the cation having a dye structure according to the present invention is one having a subphthalocyanine dye structure. Details of these can be referred to the description of paragraph numbers 0242 to 0250 in JP 2013-28764 A, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
＜＜スクアリリウム色素＞＞
　本発明で用いる色素構造を有するカチオンは、スクアリリウム色素構造を有していてもよい。これらの詳細は、特開２０１３－２８７６４号公報の段落番号０２０２～０２２３の記載を参酌でき、これらの内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。 << Squarylium dye >>
The cation having a dye structure used in the present invention may have a squarylium dye structure. Details of these can be referred to the descriptions in paragraph numbers 0202 to 0223 of JP2013-28764A, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
　本発明に係る色素は、本発明の趣旨を逸脱しない限り、色素構造中の水素原子が下記置換基群Ａから選択された置換基により置換されていてもよい。
置換基群Ａ：
　色素が有してもよい置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アルケニル基、シクロアルケニル基、アルキニル基、アリール基、ヘテロ環基、シアノ基、ヒドロキシル基、ニトロ基、カルボキシル基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、シリルオキシ基、ヘテロ環オキシ基、アシルオキシ基、カルバモイルオキシ基、アミノ基（アルキルアミノ基、アニリノ基を含む）、アシルアミノ基、アミノカルボニルアミノ基、アルコキシカルボニルアミノ基、アリールオキシカルボニルアミノ基、スルファモイルアミノ基、アルキルまたはアリールスルホニルアミノ基、メルカプト基、アルキルチオ基、アリールチオ基、ヘテロ環チオ基、スルファモイル基、スルホ基、アルキルまたはアリールスルフィニル基、アルキルまたはアリールスルホニル基、アシル基、アリールオキシカルボニル基、アルコキシカルボニル基、カルバモイル基、アリールまたはヘテロ環アゾ基、イミド基、ホスフィノ基、ホスフィニル基、ホスフィニルオキシ基、ホスフィニルアミノ基、シリル基などが挙げられる。以下詳細に記述する。 In the dye according to the present invention, a hydrogen atom in the dye structure may be substituted with a substituent selected from the following substituent group A unless departing from the spirit of the present invention.
Substituent group A:
Examples of the substituent that the dye may have include a halogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, a cycloalkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a cyano group, a hydroxyl group, a nitro group, and a carboxyl group. , Alkoxy group, aryloxy group, silyloxy group, heterocyclic oxy group, acyloxy group, carbamoyloxy group, amino group (including alkylamino group and anilino group), acylamino group, aminocarbonylamino group, alkoxycarbonylamino group, aryl Oxycarbonylamino group, sulfamoylamino group, alkyl or arylsulfonylamino group, mercapto group, alkylthio group, arylthio group, heterocyclic thio group, sulfamoyl group, sulfo group, alkyl or arylsulfinyl group, alkyl or Arylsulfonyl group, acyl group, aryloxycarbonyl group, alkoxycarbonyl group, carbamoyl group, aryl or heterocyclic azo group, imide group, phosphino group, phosphinyl group, phosphinyloxy group, phosphinylamino group, silyl group, etc. Is mentioned. Details are described below.
　ハロゲン原子（例えば、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、ヨウ素原子）、直鎖もしくは分岐のアルキル基（直鎖または分岐の置換もしくは無置換のアルキル基で、好ましくは炭素数１～３０のアルキル基であり、例えばメチル、エチル、ｎ－プロピル、イソプロピル、ｔｅｒｔ－ブチル、ｎ－オクチル、２－クロロエチル、２－シアノエチル、２－エチルヘキシル）、シクロアルキル基（好ましくは、炭素数３～３０の置換または無置換のシクロアルキル基、例えば、シクロヘキシル、シクロペンチルが挙げられ、多シクロアルキル基、例えば、ビシクロアルキル基（好ましくは、炭素数５～３０の置換もしくは無置換のビシクロアルキル基で、例えば、ビシクロ［１，２，２］ヘプタン－２－イル、ビシクロ［２，２，２］オクタン－３－イル）やトリシクロアルキル基等の多環構造の基が挙げられる。好ましくは単環のシクロアルキル基、ビシクロアルキル基であり、単環のシクロアルキル基が特に好ましい。）、 A halogen atom (for example, a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, an iodine atom), a linear or branched alkyl group (a linear or branched substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms) For example, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, tert-butyl, n-octyl, 2-chloroethyl, 2-cyanoethyl, 2-ethylhexyl), a cycloalkyl group (preferably substituted with 3 to 30 carbon atoms or Examples thereof include unsubstituted cycloalkyl groups such as cyclohexyl and cyclopentyl, and polycycloalkyl groups such as bicycloalkyl groups (preferably substituted or unsubstituted bicycloalkyl groups having 5 to 30 carbon atoms such as bicyclo [ 1,2,2] heptan-2-yl, bicyclo [2,2,2] octane- - yl) or group of polycyclic structures such as tricycloalkyl groups is preferably a monocyclic cycloalkyl group, a bicycloalkyl group, a monocyclic cycloalkyl group is particularly preferred),..
　直鎖もしくは分岐のアルケニル基（直鎖または分岐の置換もしくは無置換のアルケニル基で、好ましくは炭素数２～３０のアルケニル基であり、例えば、ビニル、アリル、プレニル、ゲラニル、オレイル）、シクロアルケニル基（好ましくは、炭素数３～３０の置換もしくは無置換のシクロアルケニル基で、例えば、２－シクロペンテン－１－イル、２－シクロヘキセン－１－イルが挙げられ、多シクロアルケニル基、例えば、ビシクロアルケニル基（好ましくは、炭素数５～３０の置換もしくは無置換のビシクロアルケニル基で、例えば、ビシクロ［２，２，１］ヘプト－２－エン－１－イル、ビシクロ［２，２，２］オクト－２－エン－４－イル）やトリシクロアルケニル基であり、単環のシクロアルケニル基が特に好ましい。）アルキニル基（好ましくは、炭素数２～３０の置換または無置換のアルキニル基、例えば、エチニル、プロパルギル、トリメチルシリルエチニル基）、 Linear or branched alkenyl group (straight or branched substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group, preferably an alkenyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, such as vinyl, allyl, prenyl, geranyl, oleyl), cycloalkenyl A group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkenyl group having 3 to 30 carbon atoms such as 2-cyclopenten-1-yl and 2-cyclohexen-1-yl, and a polycycloalkenyl group such as bicyclo An alkenyl group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted bicycloalkenyl group having 5 to 30 carbon atoms such as bicyclo [2,2,1] hept-2-en-1-yl, bicyclo [2,2,2] Octo-2-en-4-yl) and tricycloalkenyl groups, with monocyclic cycloalkenyl groups being particularly preferred. Cycloalkenyl group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, e.g., ethynyl, propargyl, trimethylsilylethynyl group),
　アリール基（好ましくは炭素数６～３０の置換もしくは無置換のアリール基で、例えばフェニル、ｐ－トリル、ナフチル、ｍ－クロロフェニル、ｏ－ヘキサデカノイルアミノフェニル）、ヘテロ環基（好ましくは５～７員の置換もしくは無置換、飽和もしくは不飽和、芳香族もしくは非芳香族、単環もしくは縮環のヘテロ環基であり、より好ましくは、環構成原子が炭素原子、窒素原子および硫黄原子から選択され、かつ窒素原子、酸素原子および硫黄原子のいずれかのヘテロ原子を少なくとも一個有するヘテロ環基であり、さらに好ましくは、炭素数３～３０の５もしくは６員の芳香族のヘテロ環基である。例えば、２－フリル、２－チエニル、２－ピリジル、４－ピリジル、２－ピリミジニル、２－ベンゾチアゾリル）、シアノ基、ヒドロキシル基、ニトロ基、カルボキシル基、 An aryl group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, such as phenyl, p-tolyl, naphthyl, m-chlorophenyl, o-hexadecanoylaminophenyl), a heterocyclic group (preferably 5 to 7-membered substituted or unsubstituted, saturated or unsaturated, aromatic or non-aromatic, monocyclic or condensed heterocyclic group, more preferably the ring-constituting atom is selected from carbon atom, nitrogen atom and sulfur atom And a heterocyclic group having at least one hetero atom of any one of a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom and a sulfur atom, more preferably a 5- or 6-membered aromatic heterocyclic group having 3 to 30 carbon atoms For example, 2-furyl, 2-thienyl, 2-pyridyl, 4-pyridyl, 2-pyrimidinyl, 2-benzothiazolyl), cyano group, Rokishiru group, a nitro group, a carboxyl group,
　アルコキシ基（好ましくは、炭素数１～３０の置換もしくは無置換のアルコキシ基で、例えば、メトキシ、エトキシ、イソプロポキシ、ｔｅｒｔ－ブトキシ、ｎ－オクチルオキシ、２－メトキシエトキシ）、アリールオキシ基（好ましくは、炭素数６～３０の置換もしくは無置換のアリールオキシ基で、例えば、フェノキシ、２－メチルフェノキシ、２，４－ジ－ｔｅｒｔ－アミルフェノキシ、４－ｔｅｒｔ－ブチルフェノキシ、３－ニトロフェノキシ、２－テトラデカノイルアミノフェノキシ）、シリルオキシ基（好ましくは、炭素数３～２０のシリルオキシ基で、例えば、トリメチルシリルオキシ、ｔｅｒｔ－ブチルジメチルシリルオキシ）、ヘテロ環オキシ基（好ましくは、炭素数２～３０の置換もしくは無置換のヘテロ環オキシ基で、ヘテロ環部は前述のヘテロ環基で説明されたヘテロ環部が好ましく、例えば、１－フェニルテトラゾール－５－オキシ、２－テトラヒドロピラニルオキシ）、 An alkoxy group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms such as methoxy, ethoxy, isopropoxy, tert-butoxy, n-octyloxy, 2-methoxyethoxy), aryloxy group (preferably Is a substituted or unsubstituted aryloxy group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, such as phenoxy, 2-methylphenoxy, 2,4-di-tert-amylphenoxy, 4-tert-butylphenoxy, 3-nitrophenoxy, 2-tetradecanoylaminophenoxy), a silyloxy group (preferably a silyloxy group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, such as trimethylsilyloxy, tert-butyldimethylsilyloxy), a heterocyclic oxy group (preferably having a carbon number of 2 to 30 substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic oxy groups , Heterocyclic portion is preferably described in the heterocyclic portion described above heterocyclic group, e.g., 1-phenyl-5-oxy, 2-tetrahydropyranyloxy),
　アシルオキシ基（好ましくはホルミルオキシ基、炭素数２～３０の置換もしくは無置換のアルキルカルボニルオキシ基、炭素数６～３０の置換もしくは無置換のアリールカルボニルオキシ基であり、例えば、ホルミルオキシ、アセチルオキシ、ピバロイルオキシ、ステアロイルオキシ、ベンゾイルオキシ、ｐ－メトキシフェニルカルボニルオキシ）、カルバモイルオキシ基（好ましくは、炭素数１～３０の置換もしくは無置換のカルバモイルオキシ基で、例えば、Ｎ，Ｎ－ジメチルカルバモイルオキシ、Ｎ，Ｎ－ジエチルカルバモイルオキシ、モルホリノカルボニルオキシ、Ｎ，Ｎ－ジ－ｎ－オクチルアミノカルボニルオキシ、Ｎ－ｎ－オクチルカルバモイルオキシ）、アルコキシカルボニルオキシ基（好ましくは、炭素数２～３０の置換もしくは無置換アルコキシカルボニルオキシ基で、例えばメトキシカルボニルオキシ、エトキシカルボニルオキシ、ｔｅｒｔ－ブトキシカルボニルオキシ、ｎ－オクチルカルボニルオキシ）、アリールオキシカルボニルオキシ基（好ましくは、炭素数７～３０の置換もしくは無置換のアリールオキシカルボニルオキシ基で、例えば、フェノキシカルボニルオキシ、ｐ－メトキシフェノキシカルボニルオキシ、ｐ－ｎ－ヘキサデシルオキシフェノキシカルボニルオキシ）、 An acyloxy group (preferably a formyloxy group, a substituted or unsubstituted alkylcarbonyloxy group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted arylcarbonyloxy group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, such as formyloxy, acetyloxy , Pivaloyloxy, stearoyloxy, benzoyloxy, p-methoxyphenylcarbonyloxy), a carbamoyloxy group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted carbamoyloxy group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms such as N, N-dimethylcarbamoyloxy, N, N-diethylcarbamoyloxy, morpholinocarbonyloxy, N, N-di-n-octylaminocarbonyloxy, Nn-octylcarbamoyloxy), an alkoxycarbonyloxy group (preferably a substituent having 2 to 30 carbon atoms) Or an unsubstituted alkoxycarbonyloxy group such as methoxycarbonyloxy, ethoxycarbonyloxy, tert-butoxycarbonyloxy, n-octylcarbonyloxy), an aryloxycarbonyloxy group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms). Substituted aryloxycarbonyloxy groups such as phenoxycarbonyloxy, p-methoxyphenoxycarbonyloxy, pn-hexadecyloxyphenoxycarbonyloxy),
　アミノ基（好ましくは、アミノ基、炭素数１～３０の置換もしくは無置換のアルキルアミノ基、炭素数６～３０の置換もしくは無置換のアリールアミノ基、炭素数０～３０のヘテロ環アミノ基であり、例えば、アミノ、メチルアミノ、ジメチルアミノ、アニリノ、Ｎ－メチル－アニリノ、ジフェニルアミノ、Ｎ－１，３，５－トリアジン－２－イルアミノ）、アシルアミノ基（好ましくは、ホルミルアミノ基、炭素数１～３０の置換もしくは無置換のアルキルカルボニルアミノ基、炭素数６～３０の置換もしくは無置換のアリールカルボニルアミノ基であり、例えば、ホルミルアミノ、アセチルアミノ、ピバロイルアミノ、ラウロイルアミノ、ベンゾイルアミノ、３，４，５－トリ－ｎ－オクチルオキシフェニルカルボニルアミノ）、アミノカルボニルアミノ基（好ましくは、炭素数１～３０の置換もしくは無置換のアミノカルボニルアミノ基、例えば、カルバモイルアミノ、Ｎ，Ｎ－ジメチルアミノカルボニルアミノ、Ｎ，Ｎ－ジエチルアミノカルボニルアミノ、モルホリノカルボニルアミノ）、アルコキシカルボニルアミノ基（好ましくは炭素数２～３０の置換もしくは無置換アルコキシカルボニルアミノ基で、例えば、メトキシカルボニルアミノ、エトキシカルボニルアミノ、ｔｅｒｔ－ブトキシカルボニルアミノ、ｎ－オクタデシルオキシカルボニルアミノ、Ｎ－メチル－メトキシカルボニルアミノ）、 An amino group (preferably an amino group, a substituted or unsubstituted alkylamino group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted arylamino group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, or a heterocyclic amino group having 0 to 30 carbon atoms); For example, amino, methylamino, dimethylamino, anilino, N-methyl-anilino, diphenylamino, N-1,3,5-triazin-2-ylamino), acylamino group (preferably formylamino group, carbon number A substituted or unsubstituted alkylcarbonylamino group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted arylcarbonylamino group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, such as formylamino, acetylamino, pivaloylamino, lauroylamino, benzoylamino, 3, 4,5-tri-n-octyloxyphenylcarbonylamino), amino A carbonylamino group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted aminocarbonylamino group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, such as carbamoylamino, N, N-dimethylaminocarbonylamino, N, N-diethylaminocarbonylamino, morpholinocarbonylamino), An alkoxycarbonylamino group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkoxycarbonylamino group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms such as methoxycarbonylamino, ethoxycarbonylamino, tert-butoxycarbonylamino, n-octadecyloxycarbonylamino, N-methyl- Methoxycarbonylamino),
　アリールオキシカルボニルアミノ基（好ましくは、炭素数７～３０の置換もしくは無置換のアリールオキシカルボニルアミノ基で、例えば、フェノキシカルボニルアミノ、ｐ－クロロフェノキシカルボニルアミノ、ｍ－ｎ－オクチルオキシフェノキシカルボニルアミノ）、スルファモイルアミノ基（好ましくは、炭素数０～３０の置換もしくは無置換のスルファモイルアミノ基で、例えば、スルファモイルアミノ、Ｎ，Ｎ－ジメチルアミノスルホニルアミノ、Ｎ－ｎ－オクチルアミノスルホニルアミノ）、アルキルまたはアリールスルホニルアミノ基（好ましくは炭素数１～３０の置換もしくは無置換のアルキルスルホニルアミノ基、炭素数６～３０の置換もしくは無置換のアリールスルホニルアミノ基であり、例えば、メチルスルホニルアミノ、ブチルスルホニルアミノ、フェニルスルホニルアミノ、２，３，５－トリクロロフェニルスルホニルアミノ、ｐ－メチルフェニルスルホニルアミノ）、メルカプト基、 Aryloxycarbonylamino group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted aryloxycarbonylamino group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms, such as phenoxycarbonylamino, p-chlorophenoxycarbonylamino, mn-octyloxyphenoxycarbonylamino) Sulfamoylamino group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted sulfamoylamino group having 0 to 30 carbon atoms such as sulfamoylamino, N, N-dimethylaminosulfonylamino, Nn-octylamino Sulfonylamino), alkyl or arylsulfonylamino group (preferably substituted or unsubstituted alkylsulfonylamino group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted arylsulfonylamino group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, such as methyl Sulfonyl Mino, butyl sulfonylamino, phenylsulfonylamino, 2,3,5-trichlorophenyl sulfonylamino, p- methylphenyl sulfonylamino), a mercapto group,
　アルキルチオ基（好ましくは、炭素数１～３０の置換もしくは無置換のアルキルチオ基で、例えばメチルチオ、エチルチオ、ｎ－ヘキサデシルチオ）、アリールチオ基（好ましくは炭素数６～３０の置換もしくは無置換のアリールチオ基で、例えば、フェニルチオ、ｐ－クロロフェニルチオ、ｍ－メトキシフェニルチオ）、ヘテロ環チオ基（好ましくは炭素数２～３０の置換または無置換のヘテロ環チオ基で、ヘテロ環部は前述のヘテロ環基で説明されたヘテロ環部が好ましく、例えば、２－ベンゾチアゾリルチオ、１－フェニルテトラゾール－５－イルチオ）、スルファモイル基（好ましくは炭素数０～３０の置換もしくは無置換のスルファモイル基で、例えば、Ｎ－エチルスルファモイル、Ｎ－（３－ドデシルオキシプロピル）スルファモイル、Ｎ，Ｎ－ジメチルスルファモイル、Ｎ－アセチルスルファモイル、Ｎ－ベンゾイルスルファモイル、Ｎ－（Ｎ’－フェニルカルバモイル）スルファモイル）、スルホ基、 An alkylthio group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkylthio group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms such as methylthio, ethylthio, n-hexadecylthio), an arylthio group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted arylthio group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms). , For example, phenylthio, p-chlorophenylthio, m-methoxyphenylthio), a heterocyclic thio group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic thio group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, wherein the heterocyclic moiety is the aforementioned heterocyclic group The heterocyclic portion described in the above is preferably, for example, 2-benzothiazolylthio, 1-phenyltetrazol-5-ylthio), a sulfamoyl group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted sulfamoyl group having 0 to 30 carbon atoms, N-ethylsulfamoyl, N- (3-dodecyloxypropyl) sulfur Moil, N, N- dimethylsulfamoyl, N- acetyl sulfamoyl, N- benzoylsulfamoyl, N- (N'-phenylcarbamoyl) sulfamoyl), a sulfo group,
　アルキルまたはアリールスルフィニル基（好ましくは、炭素数１～３０の置換または無置換のアルキルスルフィニル基、６～３０の置換または無置換のアリールスルフィニル基であり、例えば、メチルスルフィニル、エチルスルフィニル、フェニルスルフィニル、ｐ－メチルフェニルスルフィニル）、アルキルまたはアリールスルホニル基（好ましくは、炭素数１～３０の置換または無置換のアルキルスルホニル基、６～３０の置換または無置換のアリールスルホニル基であり、例えば、メチルスルホニル、エチルスルホニル、フェニルスルホニル、ｐ－メチルフェニルスルホニル）、アシル基（好ましくはホルミル基、炭素数２～３０の置換または無置換のアルキルカルボニル基、炭素数７～３０の置換もしくは無置換のアリールカルボニル基であり、例えば、アセチル、ピバロイル、２－クロロアセチル、ステアロイル、ベンゾイル、ｐ－ｎ－オクチルオキシフェニルカルボニル）、アリールオキシカルボニル基（好ましくは、炭素数７～３０の置換もしくは無置換のアリールオキシカルボニル基で、例えば、フェノキシカルボニル、ｏ－クロロフェノキシカルボニル、ｍ－ニトロフェノキシカルボニル、ｐ－ｔｅｒｔ－ブチルフェノキシカルボニル）、 An alkyl or arylsulfinyl group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkylsulfinyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted arylsulfinyl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, such as methylsulfinyl, ethylsulfinyl, phenylsulfinyl, p-methylphenylsulfinyl), an alkyl or arylsulfonyl group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkylsulfonyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted arylsulfonyl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, such as methylsulfonyl , Ethylsulfonyl, phenylsulfonyl, p-methylphenylsulfonyl), acyl group (preferably formyl group, substituted or unsubstituted alkylcarbonyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted arylcarbocycle having 7 to 30 carbon atoms) For example, acetyl, pivaloyl, 2-chloroacetyl, stearoyl, benzoyl, pn-octyloxyphenylcarbonyl), an aryloxycarbonyl group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted aryl having 7 to 30 carbon atoms) An oxycarbonyl group, for example, phenoxycarbonyl, o-chlorophenoxycarbonyl, m-nitrophenoxycarbonyl, p-tert-butylphenoxycarbonyl),
　アルコキシカルボニル基（好ましくは、炭素数２～３０の置換もしくは無置換アルコキシカルボニル基で、例えば、メトキシカルボニル、エトキシカルボニル、ｔｅｒｔ－ブトキシカルボニル、ｎ－オクタデシルオキシカルボニル）、カルバモイル基（好ましくは、炭素数１～３０の置換もしくは無置換のカルバモイル、例えば、カルバモイル、Ｎ－メチルカルバモイル、Ｎ，Ｎ－ジメチルカルバモイル、Ｎ，Ｎ－ジ－ｎ－オクチルカルバモイル、Ｎ－（メチルスルホニル）カルバモイル）、アリールまたはヘテロ環アゾ基（好ましくは炭素数６～３０の置換もしくは無置換のアリールアゾ基、炭素数３～３０の置換もしくは無置換のヘテロ環アゾ基（ヘテロ環部は前述のヘテロ環基で説明されたヘテロ環部が好ましい）、例えば、フェニルアゾ、ｐ－クロロフェニルアゾ、５－エチルチオ－１，３，４－チアジアゾール－２－イルアゾ）、イミド基（好ましくは、炭素数２～３０の置換もしくは無置換のイミド基で、例えばＮ－スクシンイミド、Ｎ－フタルイミド）、ホスフィノ基（好ましくは、炭素数２～３０の置換もしくは無置換のホスフィノ基、例えば、ジメチルホスフィノ、ジフェニルホスフィノ、メチルフェノキシホスフィノ）、ホスフィニル基（好ましくは、炭素数２～３０の置換もしくは無置換のホスフィニル基で、例えば、ホスフィニル、ジオクチルオキシホスフィニル、ジエトキシホスフィニル）、 An alkoxycarbonyl group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkoxycarbonyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms such as methoxycarbonyl, ethoxycarbonyl, tert-butoxycarbonyl, n-octadecyloxycarbonyl), a carbamoyl group (preferably having a carbon number) 1-30 substituted or unsubstituted carbamoyl such as carbamoyl, N-methylcarbamoyl, N, N-dimethylcarbamoyl, N, N-di-n-octylcarbamoyl, N- (methylsulfonyl) carbamoyl), aryl or hetero A ring azo group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted arylazo group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic azo group having 3 to 30 carbon atoms (the heterocycle portion is the heterocycle described in the above heterocyclic group); Ring portion is preferred), for example, phenyl Azo, p-chlorophenylazo, 5-ethylthio-1,3,4-thiadiazol-2-ylazo), an imide group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted imide group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms such as N-succinimide, N-phthalimide), a phosphino group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted phosphino group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, such as dimethylphosphino, diphenylphosphino, methylphenoxyphosphino), a phosphinyl group (preferably having 2 carbon atoms) Up to 30 substituted or unsubstituted phosphinyl groups such as phosphinyl, dioctyloxyphosphinyl, diethoxyphosphinyl),
　ホスフィニルオキシ基（好ましくは、炭素数２～３０の置換もしくは無置換のホスフィニルオキシ基で、例えば、ジフェノキシホスフィニルオキシ、ジオクチルオキシホスフィニルオキシ）、ホスフィニルアミノ基（好ましくは、炭素数２～３０の置換もしくは無置換のホスフィニルアミノ基で、例えば、ジメトキシホスフィニルアミノ、ジメチルアミノホスフィニルアミノ）、シリル基（好ましくは、炭素数３～３０の置換もしくは無置換のシリル基で、例えば、トリメチルシリル、ｔｅｒｔ－ブチルジメチルシリル、フェニルジメチルシリル）が挙げられる。 A phosphinyloxy group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted phosphinyloxy group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, such as diphenoxyphosphinyloxy, dioctyloxyphosphinyloxy), a phosphinylamino group ( Preferably, it is a substituted or unsubstituted phosphinylamino group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, for example, dimethoxyphosphinylamino, dimethylaminophosphinylamino), a silyl group (preferably a substitution having 3 to 30 carbon atoms) Or, an unsubstituted silyl group, for example, trimethylsilyl, tert-butyldimethylsilyl, phenyldimethylsilyl).
　上記の官能基の中で、水素原子を有するものは、官能基中の水素原子の部分が、上記いずれかの基で置換されていてもよい。置換基として導入可能な官能基の例としては、アルキルカルボニルアミノスルホニル基、アリールカルボニルアミノスルホニル基、アルキルスルホニルアミノカルボニル基、アリールスルホニルアミノカルボニル基が挙げられ、具体的には、メチルスルホニルアミノカルボニル、ｐ－メチルフェニルスルホニルアミノカルボニル、アセチルアミノスルホニル、ベンゾイルアミノスルホニル基が挙げられる。 Among the above functional groups, those having a hydrogen atom may have a hydrogen atom portion in the functional group substituted with any of the above groups. Examples of functional groups that can be introduced as a substituent include an alkylcarbonylaminosulfonyl group, an arylcarbonylaminosulfonyl group, an alkylsulfonylaminocarbonyl group, and an arylsulfonylaminocarbonyl group. Specifically, methylsulfonylaminocarbonyl, Examples thereof include p-methylphenylsulfonylaminocarbonyl, acetylaminosulfonyl and benzoylaminosulfonyl groups.
＜＜＜対アニオン＞＞＞
　本発明で用いる色素構造がカチオン構造を有する場合の、対アニオンは、色素多量体の同一繰り返し単位内にあってもよいし、同一繰り返し単位外にあってもよい。対アニオンが同一繰り返し単位内にあるとは、色素構造を有する繰り返し単位内で、カチオンとアニオンが共有結合を介して結合している場合をいう。一方、同一繰り返し単位外とは、上記以外の場合をいう。例えば、カチオンとアニオンが共有結合を介して結合せず、別化合物として存在している場合や、カチオンとアニオンが色素多量体のそれぞれ独立の繰り返し単位として含まれる場合をいう。
　本発明におけるアニオンは、非求核性アニオンであることが好ましい非求核性のアニオンには、有機アニオンであっても、無機アニオンであってもよく、有機アニオンが好ましい。本発明で用いられる対アニオンの例として、特開２００７－３１０３１５号公報の段落番号００７５に記載の公知の非求核性アニオンが挙げられ、これらの内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。ここで、非求核性とは、加熱により色素を求核攻撃しない性質を意味する。 <<< Counter anion >>>
When the dye structure used in the present invention has a cation structure, the counter anion may be in the same repeating unit of the dye multimer or outside the same repeating unit. The counter anion is in the same repeating unit refers to a case where a cation and an anion are bonded via a covalent bond in a repeating unit having a dye structure. On the other hand, “outside the same repeating unit” means a case other than the above. For example, it refers to the case where the cation and the anion are not bonded via a covalent bond and exist as separate compounds, or the case where the cation and the anion are contained as independent repeating units of the dye multimer.
The anion in the present invention is preferably a non-nucleophilic anion. The non-nucleophilic anion may be an organic anion or an inorganic anion, and an organic anion is preferred. Examples of the counter anion used in the present invention include known non-nucleophilic anions described in paragraph No. 0075 of JP-A-2007-310315, the contents of which are incorporated herein. Here, the non-nucleophilic property means a property that does not nucleophilic attack the dye by heating.
対アニオンが同一繰り返し単位内にある場合
　本発明におけるアニオンの第一の実施形態は、対アニオンが同一繰り返し単位内にある場合であり、具体的には、色素構造を有する繰り返し単位内で、カチオンとアニオンが共有結合を介して結合している場合である。
　この場合のアニオン部としては、－ＳＯ3 -、－ＣＯＯ-、－ＰＯ4 -、下記一般式（Ａ１）で表される構造および下記一般式（Ａ２）で表される構造から選択される少なくとも１種が好ましく、下記一般式（Ａ１）で表される構造および下記一般式（Ａ２）で表される構造から選択される少なくとも１種がより好ましい。 In the case where the counter anion is in the same repeating unit The first embodiment of the anion in the present invention is a case in which the counter anion is in the same repeating unit. Specifically, in the repeating unit having a dye structure, And an anion are bonded via a covalent bond.
In this case, the anion moiety is at least selected from —SO 3 − , —COO − , —PO 4 − , a structure represented by the following general formula (A1), and a structure represented by the following general formula (A2). 1 type is preferable and at least 1 sort (s) selected from the structure represented by the following general formula (A1) and the structure represented by the following general formula (A2) is more preferable.
一般式（Ａ１）
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000049
 （一般式（Ａ１）中、Ｒ1およびＲ2はそれぞれ独立して－ＳＯ2－または－ＣＯ－を表す。）
　一般式（Ａ１）中、Ｒ1およびＲ2の少なくとも１つが－ＳＯ2－を表すことが好ましく、Ｒ1およびＲ2の両方が－ＳＯ2－を表すことがより好ましい。 General formula (A1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000049
 (In the general formula (A1), R 1 and R 2 each independently represents —SO 2 — or —CO—.)
In formula (A1), at least one of R 1 and R 2 -SO 2 - preferably represents an, both R 1 and R 2 are -SO 2 - and more preferably represents.
　上記一般式（Ａ１）は、下記一般式（Ａ１－１）で表されることがより好ましい。
一般式（Ａ１－１）
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000050
 （一般式（Ａ１－１）中、Ｒ1およびＲ2はそれぞれ独立して－ＳＯ2－または－ＣＯ－を表す。Ｘ1およびＸ2は、それぞれ独立してアルキレン基またはアリーレン基を表す。）
　一般式（Ａ１－１）中、Ｒ1およびＲ2は、一般式（Ａ１）中のＲ1およびＲ2と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。
　Ｘ1がアルキレン基を表す場合、アルキレン基の炭素数は、１～８が好ましく、１～６がより好ましい。Ｘ1がアリーレン基を表す場合、アリーレン基の炭素数は、６～１８が好ましく、６～１２がより好ましく、６がさらに好ましい。Ｘ1が置換基を有する場合、フッ素原子で置換されていることが好ましい。
　Ｘ2は、アルキル基またはアリール基を表し、アルキル基が好ましい。アルキル基の炭素数は、１～８が好ましく、１～６がより好ましく、１～３がさらに好ましく、１が特に好ましい。Ｘ2が置換基を有する場合、フッ素原子で置換されていることが好ましい。 The general formula (A1) is more preferably represented by the following general formula (A1-1).
Formula (A1-1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000050
 (In General Formula (A1-1), R 1 and R 2 each independently represent —SO 2 — or —CO—, and X 1 and X 2 each independently represent an alkylene group or an arylene group. )
In formula (A1-1), R 1 and R 2 of the general formula (A1) in the same meaning as R 1 and R 2, and preferred ranges are also the same.
When X 1 represents an alkylene group, the alkylene group preferably has 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms. When X 1 represents an arylene group, the number of carbon atoms in the arylene group is preferably 6 to 18, more preferably 6 to 12, and still more preferably 6. When X 1 has a substituent, it is preferably substituted with a fluorine atom.
X 2 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, and an alkyl group is preferable. The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 8 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 6, more preferably 1 to 3, and particularly preferably 1. When X 2 has a substituent, it is preferably substituted with a fluorine atom.
一般式（Ａ２）
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000051
 （一般式（Ａ２）中、Ｒ3は、－ＳＯ2－または－ＣＯ－を表す。Ｒ4およびＲ5はそれぞれ独立して－ＳＯ2－、－ＣＯ－または－ＣＮを表す。）
　一般式（Ａ２）中、Ｒ3～Ｒ5の少なくとも１つが－ＳＯ2－を表すことが好ましく、Ｒ3～Ｒ5の少なくとも２つが－ＳＯ2－を表すことがより好ましい。 General formula (A2)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000051
 (In the general formula (A2), R 3 represents —SO 2 — or —CO—. R 4 and R 5 each independently represents —SO 2 —, —CO— or —CN.)
Preferably representing the at least two R 3 ~ R 5 is -SO 2 - - In formula (A2), at least one of R 3 ~ R 5 -SO 2 more preferably represents.
　本実施形態では特に、色素多量体の骨格が、上記一般式（Ａ）で表される構成単位で表される場合において、Ｌ1の一部が一般式（Ａ１）で表される部分を含む場合が好ましい一例として挙げられる。この場合の具体例としては、後述する色素構造を有する繰り返し単位の例示のうち、（ａ－ｘｔ－１）、（ａ－ｘｔ－５）、（ａ－ｘｔ－６）が例示される。
　また、本実施形態では、本発明で用いる色素多量体の骨格が一般式（Ｂ）で表される構成単位を含む場合も、一例として挙げられる。この場合の具体例としては、後述する色素構造を有する繰り返し単位の例示のうち、（Ｂ－ｄｐ－１）、（Ｂ－ｍｐ－１）、（Ｂ－ｘｔ－１）、（Ｂ－ｘｔ－２）が例示される。 Particularly in the present embodiment, when the skeleton of the dye multimer is represented by the structural unit represented by the general formula (A), a part of L 1 includes a portion represented by the general formula (A1). The case is given as a preferred example. Specific examples in this case include (a-xt-1), (a-xt-5), and (a-xt-6) among examples of repeating units having a dye structure described later.
Moreover, in this embodiment, the case where the skeleton of the dye multimer used in the present invention includes the structural unit represented by the general formula (B) is also given as an example. Specific examples of this case include (B-dp-1), (B-mp-1), (B-xt-1), (B-xt-) among the examples of repeating units having a dye structure described later. 2) is exemplified.
対アニオンが別分子の場合
　本発明におけるアニオンの第二の実施形態は、対アニオンが同一繰り返し単位外にある場合であって、カチオンとアニオンが共有結合を介して結合せず、別分子として存在している場合である。
　この場合のアニオンとしては、フッ素アニオン、塩素アニオン、臭素アニオン、ヨウ素アニオン、シアン化物イオン、過塩素酸アニオン等や非求核性アニオンが例示され、非求核性アニオンが好ましい。
　非求核性の対アニオンは、有機アニオンであっても、無機アニオンであってもよく、有機アニオンが好ましい。本発明で用いられる対アニオンの例として、特開２００７－３１０３１５号公報の段落番号００７５に記載の公知の非求核性アニオンが挙げられ、これらの内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。
　好ましくは、ビス（スルホニル）イミドアニオン、トリス（スルホニル）メチルアニオン、テトラアリールボレートアニオン、Ｂ-（ＣＮ）n1（ＯＲa）4-n1（Ｒaは炭素数１～１０のアルキル基または炭素数６～１０のアリール基を表し、ｎ１は１～４を表す）およびＰＦn2ＲP (6-n2) -（ＲPは炭素数１～１０のフッ素化アルキル基を表し、ｎ２は１～６の整数を表す）が挙げられ、ビス（スルホニル）イミドアニオン、トリス（スルホニル）メチルアニオンおよびテトラアリールボレートアニオンから選択されることがより好ましく、ビス（スルホニル）イミドアニオンであることがさらに好ましい。このような非求核性の対アニオンを用いることにより、本発明の効果がより効果的に発揮される傾向にある。 In the case where the counter anion is a different molecule The second embodiment of the anion in the present invention is a case where the counter anion is outside the same repeating unit, and the cation and the anion do not bind via a covalent bond and exist as separate molecules. This is the case.
Examples of the anion in this case include a fluorine anion, a chlorine anion, a bromine anion, an iodine anion, a cyanide ion, a perchlorate anion, and a non-nucleophilic anion, and a non-nucleophilic anion is preferable.
The non-nucleophilic counter anion may be an organic anion or an inorganic anion, and an organic anion is preferred. Examples of the counter anion used in the present invention include known non-nucleophilic anions described in paragraph No. 0075 of JP-A-2007-310315, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
Preferably, bis (sulfonyl) imide anion, tris (sulfonyl) methyl anion, tetraarylborate anion, B − (CN) n1 (OR a ) 4-n1 (R a is an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms or carbon number Represents an aryl group of 6 to 10, n1 represents 1 to 4) and PF n2 R P (6-n2) − (R P represents a fluorinated alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and n2 represents 1 to 6 And is more preferably selected from a bis (sulfonyl) imide anion, a tris (sulfonyl) methyl anion and a tetraarylborate anion, and more preferably a bis (sulfonyl) imide anion. By using such a non-nucleophilic counter anion, the effects of the present invention tend to be exhibited more effectively.
　非求核性の対アニオンであるビス（スルホニル）イミドアニオンとしては、下記一般式（ＡＮ－１）で表される構造が好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000052
 （式（ＡＮ－１）中、Ｘ1およびＸ2は、それぞれ独立に、フッ素原子またはフッ素原子を有する炭素数１～１０のアルキル基を表す。Ｘ1およびＸ2は互いに結合して環を形成しても良い。） As the bis (sulfonyl) imide anion which is a non-nucleophilic counter anion, a structure represented by the following general formula (AN-1) is preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000052
 (In Formula (AN-1), X 1 and X 2 each independently represents a fluorine atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms having a fluorine atom. X 1 and X 2 are bonded to each other to form a ring. It may be formed.)
　Ｘ1およびＸ2は、それぞれ独立に、フッ素原子またはフッ素原子を有する炭素数１～１０のアルキル基を表し、フッ素原子またはフッ素原子を有する炭素数１～１０のアルキル基が好ましく、炭素数１～１０のペルフルオロアルキル基であることがより好ましく、炭素数１～４のペルフルオロアルキル基であることがさらに好ましく、トリフルオロメチル基が特に好ましい。 X 1 and X 2 each independently represent a fluorine atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms having a fluorine atom, preferably a fluorine atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms having a fluorine atom, More preferred is a perfluoroalkyl group of ˜10, more preferred is a perfluoroalkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and a trifluoromethyl group is particularly preferred.
　非求核性の対アニオンであるトリス（スルホニル）メチルアニオンとしては、下記一般式（ＡＮ－２）である構造が好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000053
 （式（ＡＮ－２）中、Ｘ3、Ｘ4およびＸ5はそれぞれ独立に、フッ素原子または炭素数１～１０のフッ素原子を有するアルキル基を表す。） As the tris (sulfonyl) methyl anion which is a non-nucleophilic counter anion, a structure represented by the following general formula (AN-2) is preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000053
 (In formula (AN-2), X 3 , X 4 and X 5 each independently represents a fluorine atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms.)
　Ｘ3、Ｘ4およびＸ5は、それぞれ独立に、Ｘ1およびＸ2と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同義である。 X 3 , X 4 and X 5 are each independently the same as X 1 and X 2 , and the preferred range is also the same.
　非求核性の対アニオンであるテトラアリールボレートアニオンとしては、下記一般式（（ＡＮ－５）で表される化合物であることが好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000054
 （式（ＡＮ－５）中、Ａｒ1、Ａｒ2、Ａｒ3およびＡｒ4は、それぞれ独立に、アリール基を表す。） The tetraarylborate anion, which is a non-nucleophilic counter anion, is preferably a compound represented by the following general formula ((AN-5)).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000054
 (In formula (AN-5), Ar 1 , Ar 2 , Ar 3 and Ar 4 each independently represents an aryl group.)
　Ａｒ1、Ａｒ2、Ａｒ3およびＡｒ4は、それぞれ独立に、炭素数６～２０のアリール基が好ましく、炭素数６～１４のアリール基がより好ましく、炭素数６～１０のアリール基がさらに好ましい。
　Ａｒ1、Ａｒ2、Ａｒ3およびＡｒ4が表わすアリール基は、置換基を有しても良い。置換基を有する場合、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アリール基、アルコキシ基、カルボニル基、カルボニルオキシ基、カルバモイル基、スルホ基、スルホンアミド基、ニトロ基等が挙げられ、ハロゲン原子およびアルキル基が好ましく、フッ素原子、アルキル基がより好ましく、フッ素原子、炭素数１～４のペルフルオロアルキル基がさらに好ましい。 Ar 1 , Ar 2 , Ar 3 and Ar 4 are each independently preferably an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably an aryl group having 6 to 14 carbon atoms, and further an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms preferable.
The aryl group represented by Ar 1 , Ar 2 , Ar 3 and Ar 4 may have a substituent. In the case of having a substituent, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, a carbonyl group, a carbonyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, a sulfo group, a sulfonamide group, a nitro group and the like can be mentioned, and a halogen atom and an alkyl group are preferable, A fluorine atom and an alkyl group are more preferred, and a fluorine atom and a C 1-4 perfluoroalkyl group are more preferred.
　Ａｒ1、Ａｒ2、Ａｒ3およびＡｒ4は、それぞれ独立に、ハロゲン原子および／またはハロゲン原子を有するアルキル基を有するフェニル基がより好ましく、フッ素原子および／またはフッ素を有するアルキル基を有するフェニル基がさらに好ましい。 Ar 1 , Ar 2 , Ar 3 and Ar 4 are each independently more preferably a phenyl group having a halogen atom and / or an alkyl group having a halogen atom, and a phenyl group having a fluorine atom and / or an alkyl group having fluorine. Is more preferable.
　非求核性の対アニオンは、また、－Ｂ（ＣＮ）n1（ＯＲa）4-n1（Ｒaは炭素数１～１０のアルキル基または炭素数６～１０のアリール基を表し、ｎ１は１～４の整数を表す）であることが好ましい。炭素数１～１０のアルキル基としてのＲaは、炭素数１～６のアルキル基が好ましく、炭素数１～４のアルキル基がより好ましい。炭素数６～１０のアリール基としてのＲaは、フェニル基、ナフチル基が好ましい。
　ｎ１は、１～３が好ましく、１～２がより好ましい。 The non-nucleophilic counter anion is also —B (CN) n1 (OR a ) 4-n1 (R a represents an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms or an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms, and n1 represents It is preferably an integer of 1 to 4. Ra as the alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms. R a as the aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms is preferably a phenyl group or a naphthyl group.
n1 is preferably 1 to 3, and more preferably 1 to 2.
　非求核性の対アニオンは、さらにまた、－ＰＦ6ＲP (6-n2) -（ＲPは炭素数１～１０のフッ素化アルキル基を表し、ｎ２は１～６の整数を表す）であることが好ましい。ＲPは、炭素数１～６のフッ素原子を有するアルキル基が好ましく、炭素数１～４のフッ素を有するアルキル基がより好ましく、炭素数１～３のペルフルオロアルキル基がさらに好ましい。
　ｎ２は、１～４の整数が好ましく、１または２がより好ましい。 The non-nucleophilic counter anion is further —PF 6 R P (6-n2) − (R P represents a fluorinated alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and n2 represents an integer of 1 to 6) It is preferable that R P is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and further preferably a perfluoroalkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
n2 is preferably an integer of 1 to 4, and more preferably 1 or 2.
　本発明で用いられる非求核性対アニオンの１分子あたりの質量は、１００～１，０００が好ましく、２００～５００がより好ましい。
　本発明の色素多量体は、非求核性対アニオンを１種類のみ含んでいても良いし、２種類以上を含んでいても良い。 The mass per molecule of the non-nucleophilic counter anion used in the present invention is preferably 100 to 1,000, and more preferably 200 to 500.
The dye multimer of the present invention may contain only one kind of non-nucleophilic counter anion, or may contain two or more kinds.
　以下に、本発明で用いられる非求核性の対アニオンの具体例を示すが本発明はこれに限定されるものではない。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000055
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000056
 Specific examples of the non-nucleophilic counter anion used in the present invention are shown below, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000055
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000056
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000057
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000057
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000058
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000058
　また、第二の実施形態では、アニオンが多量体であってもよい。この場合の多量体としては、アニオン含む繰り返し単位を含み、カチオンを含む色素構造由来の繰り返し単位を含まない多量体が例示される。ここで、アニオンを含む繰り返し単位は、後述する第三の実施形態で述べるアニオンを含む繰り返し単位を好ましい例として挙げることができる。さらに、アニオンを含む多量体は、アニオンを含む繰り返し単位以外の繰り返し単位を有していても良い。このような繰り返し単位としては、後述する本発明で用いる色素多量体が含んでいても良い他の繰り返し単が好ましい例として例示される。 In the second embodiment, the anion may be a multimer. Examples of the multimer in this case include a multimer containing a repeating unit containing an anion and not containing a repeating unit derived from a dye structure containing a cation. Here, the repeating unit containing an anion can mention the repeating unit containing the anion described in 3rd embodiment mentioned later as a preferable example. Furthermore, the multimer containing an anion may have a repeating unit other than the repeating unit containing an anion. As such a repeating unit, other repeating units that may be contained in the dye multimer used in the present invention to be described later are exemplified as preferred examples.
カチオンとアニオンが色素多量体の別々の繰り返し単位に含まれる場合
　本発明における第三の実施形態としては、カチオンとアニオンが色素多量体のそれぞれ独立の繰り返し単位に含まれる場合をいう。
　本実施形態の場合、アニオンは、色素多量体の側鎖に有していてもよいし、主鎖に有していても良いし、主鎖および側鎖の両方に対アニオンを有していてもよい。好ましくは、側鎖である。
　アニオンを含む繰り返し単位の好ましい例としては、一般式（Ｃ）で表される繰り返し単位および一般式（Ｄ）で表される繰り返し単位が例示される。 When Cation and Anion are Included in Separate Repeating Units of Dye Multimer As a third embodiment of the present invention, a case where a cation and an anion are contained in independent repeating units of the dye multimer is described.
In the case of this embodiment, the anion may be present in the side chain of the dye multimer, may be present in the main chain, or has a counter anion in both the main chain and the side chain. Also good. Preferably, it is a side chain.
Preferable examples of the repeating unit containing an anion include a repeating unit represented by the general formula (C) and a repeating unit represented by the general formula (D).
一般式（Ｃ）
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000059
 （一般式（Ｃ）中、Ｘ1は、繰り返し単位の主鎖を表す。Ｌ1は単結合または２価の連結基を表す。ａｎｉｏｎは、対アニオンを表す。） General formula (C)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000059
 (In general formula (C), X 1 represents the main chain of the repeating unit. L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. Anion represents a counter anion.)
　一般式（Ｃ）中、Ｘ1は、繰り返し単位の主鎖を表し、通常、重合反応で形成される連結基を表し、例えば、（メタ）アクリル系、スチレン系、ビニル系等が好ましく、（メタ）アクリル系、スチレン系がより好ましく、（メタ）アクリル系がさらに好ましい。なお、２つの＊で表された部位が繰り返し単位となる。 In general formula (C), X 1 represents the main chain of the repeating unit, and usually represents a linking group formed by a polymerization reaction, and is preferably (meth) acrylic, styrene, vinyl, etc. More preferred are (meth) acrylic and styrene, and (meth) acrylic is more preferred. Two sites represented by * are repeating units.
　Ｌ1が２価の連結基を表す場合、炭素数１～３０のアルキレン基（メチレン基、エチレン基、トリメチレン基、プロピレン基、ブチレン基など）、炭素数６～３０のアリーレン基（フェニレン基、ナフタレン基等）、ヘテロ環連結基、－ＣＨ＝ＣＨ－、－Ｏ－、－Ｓ－、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）－、－ＣＯ－、－ＮＲ－、－ＣＯＮＲ－、－ＯＣ－、－ＳＯ－、－ＳＯ2－およびこれらを２以上組み合わせた連結基が好ましい。ここで、Ｒは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基、またはヘテロ環基を表す。
　特に、Ｌ1は、単結合、または、炭素数１～１０のアルキレン基（好ましくは、－（ＣＨ2）ｎ－（ｎは５～１０の整数）、炭素数６～１２のアリーレン基（好ましくはフェニレン基、ナフタレン基）、－ＮＨ－、－ＣＯ2－、－Ｏ－および－ＳＯ2－を２以上組み合わせた２価の連結基が好ましい。 When L 1 represents a divalent linking group, an alkylene group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms (methylene group, ethylene group, trimethylene group, propylene group, butylene group, etc.), an arylene group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms (phenylene group, Naphthalene group, etc.), heterocyclic linking group, —CH═CH—, —O—, —S—, —C (═O) —, —CO—, —NR—, —CONR—, —OC—, —SO —, —SO 2 — and a linking group obtained by combining two or more thereof are preferred. Here, R represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group each independently.
In particular, L 1 is a single bond, an alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms (preferably — (CH 2 ) n— (n is an integer of 5 to 10), an arylene group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms (preferably phenylene group, naphthalene group) is, - NH -, - CO 2 -, - O- and -SO 2 - is a divalent linking group formed by combining two or more preferred.
　Ｘ1の具体例としては、上記一般式（Ａ）におけるＸ1の例が好ましい例として例示される。 Specific examples of X 1, examples of X 1 in formula (A) are exemplified as preferable examples.
一般式（Ｄ）
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000060
 （一般式（Ｄ）中、Ｌ2およびＬ3は、それぞれ独立して単結合または２価の連結基を表す。ａｎｉｏｎは、上記対アニオンを表す。） Formula (D)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000060
 (In general formula (D), L 2 and L 3 each independently represent a single bond or a divalent linking group. Anion represents the counter anion.)
　一般式（Ｄ）中、Ｌ2およびＬ3が２価の連結基を表す場合、炭素数１～３０のアルキレン基、炭素数６～３０のアリーレン基、ヘテロ環連結基、－ＣＨ＝ＣＨ－、－Ｏ－、－Ｓ－、－Ｃ（＝Ｏ）－、－ＣＯ2－、－ＮＲ－、－ＣＯＮＲ－、－Ｏ2Ｃ－、－ＳＯ－、－ＳＯ2－およびこれらを２以上組み合わせた連結基が好ましい。ここで、Ｒは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基、またはヘテロ環基を表す。
　Ｌ2は、炭素数６～１２のアリーレン基（特にフェニレン基）が好ましい。炭素数６～３０のアリーレン基は、フッ素原子で置換されていることが好ましい。
　Ｌ3は、炭素数６～１２のアリーレン基（特にフェニレン基）と－Ｏ－との組み合わせからなる基が好ましく、少なくとも１種の炭素数６～１２のアリーレン基がフッ素原子で置換されていることが好ましい。 In the general formula (D), when L 2 and L 3 represent a divalent linking group, an alkylene group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, an arylene group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, a heterocyclic linking group, —CH═CH— , —O—, —S—, —C (═O) —, —CO 2 —, —NR—, —CONR—, —O 2 C—, —SO—, —SO 2 — and combinations of two or more thereof The linking group is preferred. Here, R represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group each independently.
L 2 is preferably an arylene group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms (particularly a phenylene group). The arylene group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms is preferably substituted with a fluorine atom.
L 3 is preferably a group composed of a combination of an arylene group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms (particularly a phenylene group) and —O—, and at least one arylene group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms is substituted with a fluorine atom. It is preferable.
　対アニオンとしては、上記対アニオンが同一繰り返し単位内にある場合で述べたアニオン部が好ましいアニオンとして例示される。 As the counter anion, the anion portion described in the case where the counter anion is in the same repeating unit is exemplified as a preferable anion.
　本実施形態におけるアニオンを含む繰り返し単位の具体例を以下に示すが、本発明はこれらに限定されるものではない。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000061
 Although the specific example of the repeating unit containing an anion in this embodiment is shown below, this invention is not limited to these.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000061
　以下の具体例は、アニオン構造が解離していない状態を示しているが、アニオン構造が解離している状態も本発明の範囲内であることは言うまでもない。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000062
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000063
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000064
 The following specific examples show a state where the anion structure is not dissociated, but it goes without saying that the state where the anion structure is dissociated is also within the scope of the present invention.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000062
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000063
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000064
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000065
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000065
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000066
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000066
　以下に、本発明で好ましく用いられる色素構造を有する繰り返し単位の例を示す。本発明はこれらに限定されるものではないことは言うまでもない。Ｘ-は対アニオンを示す。また、一部のＸはアニオン構造が解離していない状態で示されているが、解離している状態も本発明に含まれることは言うまでもない。 Examples of repeating units having a dye structure that are preferably used in the present invention are shown below. Needless to say, the present invention is not limited to these examples. X − represents a counter anion. Moreover, although a part of X is shown in a state where the anion structure is not dissociated, it goes without saying that the dissociated state is also included in the present invention.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000067
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000067
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000068
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000068
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000069
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000069
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000070
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000070
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000071
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000071
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000072
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000072
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000073
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000073
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000074
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000074
＜＜他の官能基および繰り返し単位＞＞
　本発明の色素多量体は、上述した色素多量体の色素構造部分に他の官能基を有していても良い。他の官能基としては、重合性基、アルカリ可溶性基等が例示される。
　また、本発明の色素多量体は、上述した色素構造を含む繰り返し単位の他に、他の繰り返し単位を含んでいても良い。他の繰り返し単位は、官能基を有していても良い。
　また、他の繰り返し単位としては、重合性基、アルカリ可溶性基（好ましくは酸基）の少なくとも１種を含む繰り返し単位が例示される。
　すなわち、本発明の色素多量体は、上記一般式（Ａ）～（Ｃ）で表される繰り返し単位のほかに、他の繰り返し単位を有していてもよい。他の繰り返し単位は、１つの色素多量体中に、１種類のみ含まれていても良いし、２種類以上含まれていてもよい。
　また、本発明の色素多量体は、上記一般式（Ａ）～（Ｄ）で表される色素多量体中に、他の官能基を有していても良い。以下、これらの詳細について説明する。 << Other functional groups and repeating units >>
The dye multimer of the present invention may have another functional group in the dye structure portion of the dye multimer described above. Examples of other functional groups include polymerizable groups and alkali-soluble groups.
In addition, the dye multimer of the present invention may contain other repeating units in addition to the repeating unit containing the dye structure described above. Other repeating units may have a functional group.
Moreover, as another repeating unit, the repeating unit containing at least 1 sort (s) of a polymeric group and an alkali-soluble group (preferably acid group) is illustrated.
That is, the dye multimer of the present invention may have other repeating units in addition to the repeating units represented by the general formulas (A) to (C). One type of other repeating unit may be included in one dye multimer, or two or more types may be included.
The dye multimer of the present invention may have other functional groups in the dye multimer represented by the general formulas (A) to (D). Details of these will be described below.
＜＜＜色素多量体が有する重合性基＞＞＞＞
　本発明の色素多量体は重合性基を含むことが好ましい。重合性基は１種類のみ含んでいても良いし、２種類以上含んでいても良い。
　重合性基は、色素構造が重合性基を含んでいても良いし、他の部分が含んでいても良い。本発明では、色素構造が重合性基を含むことが好ましい。このような構成とすることにより耐熱性が向上する傾向にある。
　また、本発明では、色素構造以外の他の部分が重合性基を含む態様も好ましい。
　重合性基としては、ラジカル、酸、熱により架橋可能な公知の重合性基を用いることができ、例えば、エチレン性不飽和結合を含む基、環状エーテル基（エポキシ基、オキセタン基）、
メチロール基等が挙げられるが、特にエチレン性不飽和結合を含む基が好ましく、（メタ）アクリロイル基がさらに好ましく、（メタ）アクリル酸グリシジルおよび３，４－エポキシーシクロヘキシルメチル（メタ）アクリレート由来の（メタ）アクリロイル基がさらに好ましい。
　重合性基は、色素多量体中に、重合性基を有する繰り返し単位として含まれることが好ましく、エチレン性不飽和結合を有する繰り返し単位として含まれることがより好ましい。すなわち、本発明の色素多量体の好ましい実施形態の一例は、色素多量体が色素単量体を含む繰り返し単位と重合性基を有する繰り返し単位を含有する態様であり、色素単量体を含む繰り返し単位とエチレン性不飽和結合を有する繰り返し単位を含有することがより好ましい。 <<< Polymerizable group of dye multimer >>>
The dye multimer of the present invention preferably contains a polymerizable group. One type of polymerizable group may be included, or two or more types may be included.
As for the polymerizable group, the dye structure may contain a polymerizable group, or may contain other parts. In the present invention, the dye structure preferably includes a polymerizable group. By adopting such a configuration, the heat resistance tends to be improved.
Moreover, in this invention, the aspect in which other parts other than a pigment | dye structure contain a polymeric group is also preferable.
As the polymerizable group, a known polymerizable group that can be crosslinked by a radical, acid, or heat can be used. For example, a group containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond, a cyclic ether group (epoxy group, oxetane group),
Although a methylol group and the like can be mentioned, a group containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond is particularly preferred, a (meth) acryloyl group is more preferred, glycidyl (meth) acrylate and 3,4-epoxycyclohexylmethyl (meth) acrylate ( More preferred is a (meth) acryloyl group.
The polymerizable group is preferably contained as a repeating unit having a polymerizable group in the dye multimer, and more preferably as a repeating unit having an ethylenically unsaturated bond. That is, an example of a preferred embodiment of the dye multimer of the present invention is an embodiment in which the dye multimer contains a repeating unit containing a dye monomer and a repeating unit having a polymerizable group, and the repeating contains a dye monomer. More preferably, the unit contains a repeating unit having an ethylenically unsaturated bond.
　重合性基の導入方法としては、（１）色素多量体を重合性基含有化合物で変性して導入する方法、（２）色素単量体と重合性基含有化合物を共重合して導入する方法等がある。以下、詳細に述べる。 As a method for introducing a polymerizable group, (1) a method in which a dye multimer is modified and introduced with a polymerizable group-containing compound, and (2) a method in which a dye monomer and a polymerizable group-containing compound are copolymerized and introduced. Etc. Details will be described below.
（１）色素多量体を重合性基含有化合物で変性して導入する方法：
　色素多量体を重合性基含有化合物で変性して導入する方法としては、特に制限なく公知の方法を用いることができる。例えば、（ａ）色素多量体が有するカルボン酸と不飽和結合含有エポキシ化合物とを反応させる方法、（ｂ）色素多量体が有するヒドロキシル基またはアミノ基と不飽和結合含有イソシアネート化合物とを反応させる方法、（ｃ）色素多量体が有するエポキシ化合物と不飽和結合含有カルボン酸化合物とを反応させる方法が製造上の観点から好ましい。 (1) A method of introducing a dye multimer after modifying it with a polymerizable group-containing compound:
As a method for introducing the dye multimer by modifying with a polymerizable group-containing compound, a known method can be used without any particular limitation. For example, (a) a method of reacting a carboxylic acid contained in a dye multimer with an unsaturated bond-containing epoxy compound, and (b) a method of reacting a hydroxyl group or amino group of the dye multimer with an unsaturated bond-containing isocyanate compound. (C) A method of reacting an epoxy compound contained in the dye multimer with an unsaturated bond-containing carboxylic acid compound is preferable from the viewpoint of production.
　上記（ａ）色素多量体が有するカルボン酸と不飽和結合含有エポキシ化合物とを反応させる方法における不飽和結合含有エポキシ化合物としては、メタクリル酸グリシジル、アクリル酸グリシジル、アリルグリシジルエーテル、３，４－エポキシーシクロヘキシルメチルアクリレート、３，４－エポキシーシクロヘキシルメチルメタクリレート等が挙げられうるが、特にメタクリル酸グリシジルおよび３，４－エポキシーシクロヘキシルメチルメタクリレートが、架橋性および保存安定性に優れ好ましい。反応条件は公知の条件を用いることができる。 Examples of the unsaturated bond-containing epoxy compound in the method of reacting the carboxylic acid of the dye multimer with the unsaturated bond-containing epoxy compound include glycidyl methacrylate, glycidyl acrylate, allyl glycidyl ether, and 3,4-epoxy. Examples thereof include cyclohexylmethyl acrylate and 3,4-epoxy-cyclohexylmethyl methacrylate, and glycidyl methacrylate and 3,4-epoxycyclohexylmethyl methacrylate are particularly preferable because of excellent crosslinkability and storage stability. Known conditions can be used as the reaction conditions.
　上記（ｂ）色素多量体が有するヒドロキシル基またはアミノ基と不飽和結合含有イソシアネート化合物とを反応させる方法における不飽和結合含有イソシアネート化合物として、２－イソシアナトエチルメタクリレート、２－イソシアナトエチルアタクリレート、１，１－ビス（アクリロイルオキシメチル）エチルイソシアネート等が挙げられるが、２－イソシアナトエチルメタクリレートが、架橋性および保存安定性に優れ好ましい。反応条件は公知の条件を用いることができる。 As the unsaturated bond-containing isocyanate compound in the method of reacting the hydroxyl group or amino group of the dye multimer with the unsaturated bond-containing isocyanate compound, 2-isocyanatoethyl methacrylate, 2-isocyanatoethyl atacrylate 1,1-bis (acryloyloxymethyl) ethyl isocyanate and the like, and 2-isocyanatoethyl methacrylate is preferred because of its excellent crosslinkability and storage stability. Known conditions can be used as the reaction conditions.
　上記（ｃ）色素多量体が有するエポキシ化合物と不飽和結合含有カルボン酸化合物とを反応させる方法における不飽和結合含有カルボン酸化合物として、公知の（メタ）アクリロイルオキシ基を有するカルボン酸化合物であれば特に制限なく使用できるが、メタクリル酸およびアクリル酸が好ましく、特にメタクリル酸が架橋性および保存安定性に優れ好ましい。反応条件は公知の条件を用いることができる。 As the unsaturated bond-containing carboxylic acid compound in the method of reacting the epoxy compound contained in the (c) dye multimer and the unsaturated bond-containing carboxylic acid compound, any carboxylic acid compound having a known (meth) acryloyloxy group may be used. Although it can be used without particular limitation, methacrylic acid and acrylic acid are preferred, and methacrylic acid is particularly preferred because of excellent crosslinkability and storage stability. Known conditions can be used as the reaction conditions.
（２）色素モノマーと重合性基含有化合物を共重合して導入する方法：
　（２）色素単量体と重合性基含有化合物を共重合して導入する方法としては、特に制限なく公知の方法を用いることができるが、（ｄ）ラジカル重合可能な色素単量体とラジカル重合可能な重合性基含有化合物とを共重合する方法、（ｅ）重付加可能な色素単量体と重付加可能な重合性基含有化合物とを共重合する方法が好ましい。 (2) A method in which a dye monomer and a polymerizable group-containing compound are copolymerized and introduced:
(2) As a method for copolymerizing and introducing a dye monomer and a polymerizable group-containing compound, known methods can be used without any particular limitation. (D) A radically polymerizable dye monomer and a radical can be used. A method of copolymerizing a polymerizable group-containing compound that can be polymerized, and a method (e) a method of copolymerizing a dye monomer capable of polyaddition and a polymerizable group-containing compound capable of polyaddition are preferred.
　（ｄ）ラジカル重合可能な色素単量体とラジカル重合可能な重合性基含有化合物とを共重合する方法におけるラジカル重合可能な重合性基含有化合物として、特にアリル基含有化合物（例えば、（メタ）アクリル酸アリル等）、エポキシ基含有化合物（例えば、（メタ）アクリル酸グリシジル、３，４－エポキシーシクロヘキシルメチル（メタ）アクリレート等）、オキセタン基含有化合物（例えば、３－メチルー３－オキセタニルメチル（メタ）アクリレート等）、メチロール基含有化合物（例えば、Ｎ－（ヒドロキシメチル）アクリルアミド等）が挙げられ、特にエポキシ化合物、オキセタン化合物が好ましい。反応条件は公知の条件を用いることができる。 (D) As a radically polymerizable polymerizable group-containing compound in a method of copolymerizing a radically polymerizable dye monomer and a radically polymerizable polymerizable group-containing compound, an allyl group-containing compound (for example, (meth)) Allyl acrylate), epoxy group-containing compounds (for example, glycidyl (meth) acrylate, 3,4-epoxy-cyclohexylmethyl (meth) acrylate, etc.), oxetane group-containing compounds (for example, 3-methyl-3-oxetanylmethyl (meth) ) Acrylate, etc.) and methylol group-containing compounds (for example, N- (hydroxymethyl) acrylamide etc.), and epoxy compounds and oxetane compounds are particularly preferred. Known conditions can be used as the reaction conditions.
　（ｅ）重付加可能な色素単量体と重付加可能な重合性基含有化合物とを共重合する方法における重付加可能な重合性基含有化合物として、不飽和結合含有ジオール化合物（例えば、２，３－ジヒドロキシプロピル（メタ）アクリレート等）が挙げられる。反応条件は公知の条件を用いることができる。 (E) As a polymerizable group-containing compound capable of polyaddition in a method of copolymerizing a dye monomer capable of polyaddition and a polymerizable group-containing compound capable of polyaddition, an unsaturated bond-containing diol compound (for example, 2, 3-dihydroxypropyl (meth) acrylate). Known conditions can be used as the reaction conditions.
　重合性基の導入方法として、色素多量体が有するカルボン酸と色素多量体が有するカルボン酸と不飽和結合含有エポキシ化合物を反応させる方法が特に好ましい。 As a method for introducing a polymerizable group, a method of reacting a carboxylic acid possessed by a dye multimer, a carboxylic acid possessed by a dye multimer, and an unsaturated bond-containing epoxy compound is particularly preferable.
　色素多量体が有する重合性基量は、色素多量体１ｇに対し０．１～２．０ｍｍｏｌであることが好ましく、０．２～１．５ｍｍｏｌであることがさらに好ましく、０．３～１．０ｍｍｏｌであることが特に好ましい。
　また、色素多量体が重合性基を有する繰り返し単位を含有する繰り返し単位の割合は、全繰り返し単位１００モルに対し、例えば、５～５０モルが好ましく、１０～２０モルがより好ましい。 The amount of polymerizable group possessed by the dye multimer is preferably 0.1 to 2.0 mmol, more preferably 0.2 to 1.5 mmol, and more preferably 0.3 to 1. Particularly preferred is 0 mmol.
In addition, the ratio of the repeating unit containing a repeating unit having a polymerizable group in the dye multimer is, for example, preferably 5 to 50 mol, and more preferably 10 to 20 mol with respect to 100 mol of all repeating units.
　上記重合性基の導入方法として、色素多量体が有するカルボン酸と色素多量体が有するカルボン酸と不飽和結合含有エポキシ化合物を反応させる方法が特に好ましい。 As the method for introducing the polymerizable group, a method in which the carboxylic acid contained in the dye multimer, the carboxylic acid contained in the dye multimer, and the unsaturated bond-containing epoxy compound is particularly preferred.
　上記重合性基を有する繰り返し単位としては、以下のような具体例が挙げられる。ただし、本発明はこれらに限定されるものではない。 Specific examples of the repeating unit having a polymerizable group include the following. However, the present invention is not limited to these.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000075
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000075
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000076
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000076
　上記した具体例のうち、基板密着性および表面粗度の観点より、エチレン性不飽和結合を有する色素単量体が好ましく、中でもメタクリロイル基、アクリロイル基、スチリル基、またはビニルオキシ基が好ましく、メタクリロイル基、アクリロイル基がより好ましく、メタクリロイル基がさらに好ましい。 Among the specific examples described above, from the viewpoint of substrate adhesion and surface roughness, a dye monomer having an ethylenically unsaturated bond is preferable, among which a methacryloyl group, an acryloyl group, a styryl group, or a vinyloxy group is preferable, and a methacryloyl group. An acryloyl group is more preferable, and a methacryloyl group is more preferable.
＜＜＜色素多量体が有するアルカリ可溶性基＞＞＞＞
　本発明における色素多量体が有していてもよいアルカリ可溶性基の一例としては、酸基であり、酸基としては、カルボン酸基、スルホン酸基、リン酸基が例示される。
　本発明では好ましくは、アルカリ可溶性基（好ましくは酸基）は、アルカリ可溶性基（酸基）を有する繰り返し単位として、色素多量体中に含まれることが好ましい。
　本発明で用いる色素多量体が酸基を有する場合、本発明の色素多量体の酸価は、０．５～１．５０ｍｍｏｌ／ｇであることが好ましく、０．５～１．０ｍｍｏｌ／ｇであることがより好ましい。
　本発明において、色素多量体の酸価は、例えば、色素多量体中における酸基の平均含有量から算出することができる。また、色素多量体を構成する酸基を含有するモノマー単位の含有量を変化させることで所望の酸価を有する樹脂を得ることができる。 <<< Alkali-soluble group of dye multimer >>>
An example of the alkali-soluble group that the dye multimer in the present invention may have is an acid group, and examples of the acid group include a carboxylic acid group, a sulfonic acid group, and a phosphoric acid group.
In the present invention, the alkali-soluble group (preferably an acid group) is preferably contained in the dye multimer as a repeating unit having an alkali-soluble group (acid group).
When the dye multimer used in the present invention has an acid group, the acid value of the dye multimer of the present invention is preferably 0.5 to 1.50 mmol / g, preferably 0.5 to 1.0 mmol / g. More preferably.
In the present invention, the acid value of the dye multimer can be calculated from the average content of acid groups in the dye multimer, for example. Moreover, the resin which has a desired acid value can be obtained by changing content of the monomer unit containing the acid group which comprises a pigment | dye multimer.
　色素多量体へのアルカリ可溶性基の導入方法としては、色素単量体にあらかじめアルカリ可溶性基を導入しておく方法およびアルカリ可溶性基を有する色素単量体以外のモノマー（（メタ）アクリル酸、アクリル酸のカプロラクトン変性物、（メタ）アクリル酸２－ヒドロキシエチルの無水こはく酸変性物、（メタ）アクリル酸２－ヒドロキシエチルの無水フタル酸変性物、（メタ）アクリル酸２－ヒドロキシエチルの１，２－シクロヘキサンジカルボン酸無水物変性物、スチレンカルボン酸、イタコン酸、マレイン酸、ノルボルネンカルボン酸等のカルボン酸含有モノマー、アシッドホスホオキシエチルメタクリレート、ビニルホスホン酸等のリン酸含有モノマー、ビニルスルホン酸、２－アクリルアミド－２－メチルスルホン酸等のスルホン酸含有モノマー）を共重合する方法が挙げられるが、双方の方法を用いることがさらに好ましい。 As a method for introducing an alkali-soluble group into a dye multimer, a method in which an alkali-soluble group is introduced into a dye monomer in advance, and a monomer other than a dye monomer having an alkali-soluble group ((meth) acrylic acid, acrylic Modified product of caprolactone of acid, modified product of succinic anhydride of 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate, modified product of phthalic anhydride of 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate, 1,2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate 2-cyclohexanedicarboxylic acid anhydride modified product, carboxylic acid-containing monomer such as styrene carboxylic acid, itaconic acid, maleic acid, norbornene carboxylic acid, phosphoric acid-containing monomer such as acid phosphooxyethyl methacrylate, vinyl phosphonic acid, vinyl sulfonic acid, Such as 2-acrylamido-2-methylsulfonic acid A method of copolymerizing acid containing monomers) may be mentioned, more preferably to use both methods.
　色素多量体が有するアルカリ可溶性基量は、色素多量体１ｇに対し０．３ｍｍｏｌ～２．０ｍｍｏｌであることが好ましく、０．４ｍｍｏｌ～１．５ｍｍｏｌであることがさらに好ましく、０．５ｍｍｏｌ～１．０ｍｍｏｌであることが特に好ましい。 The amount of the alkali-soluble group contained in the dye multimer is preferably from 0.3 mmol to 2.0 mmol, more preferably from 0.4 mmol to 1.5 mmol, more preferably from 0.5 mmol to 1. Particularly preferred is 0 mmol.
　本発明で用いる色素多量体は、アルカリ可溶性基を含む繰り返し単位として、２～２０個の無置換のアルキレンオキシ鎖の繰り返しからなる基を側鎖に有する繰り返し単位（以下、「（ｂ）繰り返し単位」ということがある）を含んでいてもよい。
　繰り返し単（ｂ）位が有するアルキレンオキシ鎖の繰り返しの数は、２～１０個が好ましく、２～１５個がより好ましく、２～１０個がさらに好ましい。
　１つのアルキレンオキシ鎖は、－（ＣＨ2）nＯ－で表され、ｎは整数であるが、ｎは１～１０が好ましく、１～５がより好ましく、２または３がさらに好ましい。
　本発明における、２～２０個の無置換のアルキレンオキシ鎖の繰り返しからなる基は、アルキレンオキシ鎖が１種類のみが含まれていても良いし、２種類以上含まれていても良い。
　本発明では、（ｂ）繰り返し単位は、下記一般式（Ｐ）で表されることが好ましい。
一般式（Ｐ）
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000077
 （一般式（Ｐ）中、Ｘ1は重合によって形成される連結基を表し、Ｌ1は単結合または２価の連結基を表す。Ｐはアルキレンオキシ鎖の繰り返しからなる基を含む基を表す。）
　一般式（Ｐ）におけるＸ1およびＬ1はそれぞれ、一般式（Ａ）におけるＸ1およびＬ1と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。
　Ｐは、アルキレンオキシ鎖の繰り返しからなる基を含む基を表し、－アルキレンオキシ鎖の繰り返しからなる基－末端原子または末端基からなることがより好ましい。
　末端原子または末端基としては、水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基、水酸基が好ましく、水素原子、炭素数１～５のアルキル基、フェニル基、水酸基がより好ましく、水素原子、メチル基、フェニル基および水酸基がさらに好ましく、水素原子が特に好ましい。
　（ｂ）２～２０個の無置換のアルキレンオキシ鎖の繰り返しからなる基を側鎖に有する繰り返し単位の割合が、上記色素多量体を構成する全繰り返し単位の２～２０モル％であることが好ましく、５～１５モル％がより好ましい。
　以下、本発明で用いることができる（ｂ）繰り返し単位の例を示すが、本発明はこれらに限定されるものではないことは言うまでもない。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000078
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000079
 The dye multimer used in the present invention has a repeating unit having 2 to 20 unsubstituted alkyleneoxy chains in the side chain as a repeating unit containing an alkali-soluble group (hereinafter referred to as “(b) repeating unit”. May be included).
The number of repeating alkyleneoxy chains in the repeating single (b) position is preferably 2 to 10, more preferably 2 to 15, and even more preferably 2 to 10.
One alkyleneoxy chain is represented by — (CH 2 ) n O—, where n is an integer, n is preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 5, and even more preferably 2 or 3.
In the present invention, the group consisting of repeating 2 to 20 unsubstituted alkyleneoxy chains may contain only one kind of alkyleneoxy chain, or may contain two or more kinds.
In the present invention, the repeating unit (b) is preferably represented by the following general formula (P).
General formula (P)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000077
 (In general formula (P), X 1 represents a linking group formed by polymerization, L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. P represents a group containing a group consisting of repeating alkyleneoxy chains. .)
X 1 and L 1 in the general formula (P), have the same meanings as X 1 and L 1 in formula (A), and preferred ranges are also the same.
P represents a group containing a group consisting of repeating alkyleneoxy chains, more preferably a group consisting of repeating alkyleneoxy chains-terminal atom or terminal group.
The terminal atom or terminal group is preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group or a hydroxyl group, more preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, a phenyl group or a hydroxyl group, a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, a phenyl group and A hydroxyl group is more preferred, and a hydrogen atom is particularly preferred.
(B) The ratio of the repeating unit having a group composed of repeating 2 to 20 unsubstituted alkyleneoxy chains in the side chain is 2 to 20 mol% of all repeating units constituting the dye multimer. Preferably, 5 to 15 mol% is more preferable.
Examples of the repeating unit (b) that can be used in the present invention are shown below, but it goes without saying that the present invention is not limited thereto.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000078
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000079
＜＜＜式（１）～（５）で表される構造の少なくとも１つを有する構成単位＞＞＞
　本発明で用いられる色素多量体は、式（１）～（５）で表される構造の少なくとも１つを同一分子内に有してもよい。このような構成とすることにより、硬化膜を作製した場合、露光感度および耐光性を良好にすることができる。ここで、式（１）～（５）で表される構造は、光安定剤として機能することにより、露光感度および耐光性の向上に寄与する。また、密着性を向上させることができる。さらに、現像残渣の発生を抑制することができる。このメカニズムは推定であるが、色素構造と、式（１）～（５）で表される構造の少なくとも１種を同一分子内に有する色素多量体を用いることにより、色素構造と式（１）～（５）で表される構造との距離がより近くとなる。結果として、より効果的に露光感度および耐光性を向上させることができると考えられる。
　式（１）で表される構造はヒンダードアミン系と総称されるものである。式（２）で表される構造はヒンダードフェノール系と総称されるものである。式（３）で表される構造はベンゾトリアゾール系と総称されるものである。式（４）で表される構造はヒドロキシベンゾフェノン系と総称されるものである。式（５）で表される構造はトリアジン系と総称されるものである。 <<< Structural unit having at least one of structures represented by formulas (1) to (5) >>>
The dye multimer used in the present invention may have at least one of the structures represented by the formulas (1) to (5) in the same molecule. By setting it as such a structure, when a cured film is produced, exposure sensitivity and light resistance can be made favorable. Here, the structures represented by the formulas (1) to (5) function as a light stabilizer, thereby contributing to an improvement in exposure sensitivity and light resistance. Moreover, adhesiveness can be improved. Furthermore, the generation of development residues can be suppressed. Although this mechanism is presumed, the dye structure and the formula (1) are obtained by using a dye multimer having at least one of the dye structure and the structures represented by the formulas (1) to (5) in the same molecule. The distance from the structure represented by (5) becomes closer. As a result, it is considered that exposure sensitivity and light resistance can be improved more effectively.
The structure represented by the formula (1) is generically called a hindered amine system. The structure represented by the formula (2) is generically called a hindered phenol type. The structure represented by the formula (3) is generically called a benzotriazole type. The structure represented by the formula (4) is generically referred to as a hydroxybenzophenone series. The structure represented by the formula (5) is generically called a triazine type.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000080
 　式（１）中、Ｒ1は水素原子、炭素数１～１８のアルキル基、アリール基、オキシラジカルを表す。Ｒ2およびＲ3はそれぞれ独立に炭素数１～１８のアルキル基を表す。Ｒ2およびＲ3は互いに結合して炭素数４～１２の脂肪族環を表してもよい。「＊」は式（１）で表される構造とポリマー骨格との結合手を表す。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000080
 In the formula (1), R 1 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, an aryl group, or an oxy radical. R 2 and R 3 each independently represents an alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms. R 2 and R 3 may be bonded to each other to represent an aliphatic ring having 4 to 12 carbon atoms. “*” Represents a bond between the structure represented by the formula (1) and the polymer skeleton.
　式（１）中、Ｒ1は水素原子、炭素数１～１８のアルキル基、アリール基、オキシラジカルを表し、炭素数１～１８のアルキル基が好ましい。
　炭素数１～１８のアルキル基は、直鎖状、分岐鎖状または環状のいずれであってもよいが、直鎖状が好ましい。炭素数１～１８のアルキル基の炭素数は、１～１２が好ましく、１～８がより好ましく、１～３がさらに好ましく、１または２が特に好ましい。特に、炭素数１～１８のアルキル基は、メチル基またはエチル基が好ましく、メチル基がより好ましい。
　アリール基の炭素数は、６～１８であってもよいし、６～１２であってもよいし、６～６であってもよい。具体的には、フェニル基が挙げられる。
　式（１）中のＲ1が炭素数１～１８のアルキル基またはアリール基を表す場合、炭素数１～１８のアルキル基およびアリール基は、置換基を有していてもよいし、無置換であってもよい。有していてもよい置換基としては、上述した置換基群Ａから選択された置換基が挙げられる。
　式（１）中、Ｒ2およびＲ3はそれぞれ独立にメチル基またはエチル基を表し、メチル基が好ましい。Ｒ2およびＲ3は互いに結合して炭素数４～１２の脂肪族環を表してもよい。
　式（１）中、「＊」は式（１）で表される構造とポリマー骨格との結合手を表す。結合手は、ポリマー骨格と直接または連結基を介して結合していてもよいし、上述した色素構造に直接または連結基を介して結合していてもよい。特に、式（１）中の「＊」は、ポリマー骨格と直接または連結基を介して結合していていることが好ましい。
　以下、式（１）で表される構造の具体例を示すが、これらに限定されるものではない。下記構造中、「＊」は式（２）で表される構造とポリマー骨格との結合手を表す。 In the formula (1), R 1 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, an aryl group or an oxy radical, preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms.
The alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms may be linear, branched or cyclic, but is preferably linear. The number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms is preferably 1 to 12, more preferably 1 to 8, still more preferably 1 to 3, and particularly preferably 1 or 2. In particular, the alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms is preferably a methyl group or an ethyl group, and more preferably a methyl group.
The aryl group may have 6 to 18 carbon atoms, 6 to 12 carbon atoms, or 6 to 6 carbon atoms. Specific examples include a phenyl group.
When R 1 in Formula (1) represents an alkyl group or aryl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, the alkyl group or aryl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms may have a substituent or unsubstituted It may be. Examples of the substituent which may have include a substituent selected from the substituent group A described above.
In formula (1), R 2 and R 3 each independently represent a methyl group or an ethyl group, and a methyl group is preferred. R 2 and R 3 may be bonded to each other to represent an aliphatic ring having 4 to 12 carbon atoms.
In formula (1), “*” represents a bond between the structure represented by formula (1) and the polymer skeleton. The bond may be bonded to the polymer backbone directly or via a linking group, or may be bonded to the above-described dye structure directly or via a linking group. In particular, “*” in formula (1) is preferably bonded to the polymer backbone directly or via a linking group.
Hereinafter, although the specific example of the structure represented by Formula (1) is shown, it is not limited to these. In the following structure, “*” represents a bond between the structure represented by the formula (2) and the polymer skeleton.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000081
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000081
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000082
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000082
　式（２）中、Ｒ4は下記式（２Ａ）、炭素数１～１８のアルキル基またはアリール基を表す。Ｒ5はそれぞれ独立に水素原子または炭素数１～１８のアルキル基を表す。「＊」は式（２）で表される構造とポリマー骨格との結合手を表す。
　式（２）中、Ｒ4は上記式（２Ａ）、炭素数１～１８のアルキル基またはアリール基を表し、式（２Ａ）で表されることが好ましい。炭素数１～１８のアルキル基およびアリール基は、式（１）中のＲ1で説明した炭素数１～１８のアルキル基およびアリール基と同義である。また、「＊」は、式（１）中で説明した結合手と同義である。 In the formula (2), R 4 represents the following formula (2A), an alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms or an aryl group. R 5 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms. “*” Represents a bond between the structure represented by the formula (2) and the polymer skeleton.
In formula (2), R 4 represents the above formula (2A), an alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms or an aryl group, and is preferably represented by formula (2A). The alkyl group and aryl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms have the same meaning as the alkyl group and aryl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms described for R 1 in formula (1). “*” Is synonymous with the bond described in the formula (1).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000083
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000083
　式（２Ａ）中、Ｒ6はそれぞれ独立に炭素数１～１８のアルキル基を表す。「＊」は式（２Ａ）で表される構造と式（２）で表される構造との結合手を示す。
　式（２Ａ）中、Ｒ6は、式（１）中のＲ1で説明した炭素数１～１８のアルキル基と同義である。また、「＊」は、式（１）中で説明した結合手と同義である。
　以下、式（２）で表される構造の具体例を示すが、これらに限定されるものではない。下記構造中、「＊」は式（２）で表される構造とポリマー骨格との結合手を表す。 In formula (2A), each R 6 independently represents an alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms. “*” Represents a bond between the structure represented by the formula (2A) and the structure represented by the formula (2).
In the formula (2A), R 6 has the same meaning as the alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms explained for R 1 in the formula (1). “*” Is synonymous with the bond described in the formula (1).
Hereinafter, although the specific example of the structure represented by Formula (2) is shown, it is not limited to these. In the following structure, “*” represents a bond between the structure represented by the formula (2) and the polymer skeleton.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000084
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000084
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000085
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000085
　式（３）中、Ｒ7は炭素数１～１８のアルキル基を表す；ｎ１は０～３の整数を表す。ｎ１が２または３の場合、それぞれのＲ7は、同一であっても異なっていても良い。「＊」は式（３）で表される構造とポリマー骨格との結合手を示す。
　式（３）中、Ｒ7は、式（１）中のＲ1で説明した炭素数１～１８のアルキル基と同義である。
　式（３）中、ｎ１は０～３の整数を表し、０～２の整数が好ましく、０または１が好ましい。
　式（３）中、「＊」は式（１）中で説明した結合手と同義である。
　以下、式（３）で表される構造の具体例を示すが、これらに限定されるものではない。下記構造中、「＊」は式（３）で表される構造とポリマー骨格との結合手を表す。 In the formula (3), R 7 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms; n1 represents an integer of 0 to 3. When n1 is 2 or 3, each R 7 may be the same or different. “*” Represents a bond between the structure represented by the formula (3) and the polymer skeleton.
In the formula (3), R 7 has the same meaning as the alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms explained for R 1 in the formula (1).
In the formula (3), n1 represents an integer of 0 to 3, preferably an integer of 0 to 2, and preferably 0 or 1.
In formula (3), “*” is synonymous with the bond described in formula (1).
Hereinafter, although the specific example of the structure represented by Formula (3) is shown, it is not limited to these. In the following structure, “*” represents a bond between the structure represented by the formula (3) and the polymer skeleton.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000086
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000086
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000087
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000087
　式（４）中、Ｒ8およびＲ9はそれぞれ独立に炭素数１～１８のアルキル基を表す。ｎ２は０～３の整数を表す。ｎ３は０～４の整数を表す。ｎ２が２または３の場合、それぞれのＲ8は、同一であっても異なっていても良い。ｎ３が２～４の整数を表す場合、それぞれのＲ9は、同一であっても異なっていても良い。「＊」は式（４）で表される構造とポリマー骨格との結合手を示す。
　式（４）中、Ｒ8およびＲ9は、式（１）中のＲ1で説明した炭素数１～１８のアルキル基と同義である。
　式（４）中、ｎ２は０～３の整数を表し、０～２の整数が好ましく、０または１が好ましい。
　式（４）中、ｎ３は０～４の整数を表し、０～２の整数が好ましく、０または１が好ましい。
　式（４）中、「＊」は、式（１）中で説明した結合手と同義である。
　以下、式（４）で表される構造の具体例を示すが、これらに限定されるものではない。下記構造中、「＊」は式（４）で表される構造とポリマー骨格との結合手を表す。 In formula (4), R 8 and R 9 each independently represents an alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms. n2 represents an integer of 0 to 3. n3 represents an integer of 0 to 4. When n2 is 2 or 3, each R 8 may be the same or different. When n3 represents an integer of 2 to 4, each R 9 may be the same or different. “*” Represents a bond between the structure represented by the formula (4) and the polymer skeleton.
In the formula (4), R 8 and R 9 have the same meaning as the alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms explained for R 1 in the formula (1).
In the formula (4), n2 represents an integer of 0 to 3, preferably an integer of 0 to 2, and preferably 0 or 1.
In formula (4), n3 represents an integer of 0 to 4, preferably an integer of 0 to 2, and preferably 0 or 1.
In formula (4), “*” is synonymous with the bond described in formula (1).
Hereinafter, although the specific example of the structure represented by Formula (4) is shown, it is not limited to these. In the following structure, “*” represents a bond between the structure represented by the formula (4) and the polymer skeleton.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000088
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000088
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000089
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000089
式（５）中、Ｒ10～Ｒ12はそれぞれ独立に炭素数１～１８のアルキル基または炭素数１～８のアルコキシ基を表す。ｎ４～ｎ６はそれぞれ独立に０～５の整数を表す。ｎ７～ｎ９はそれぞれ独立に０または１を表し、ｎ７～ｎ９の少なくとも１つが１を表す。「＊」は式（５）で表される構造とポリマー骨格との結合手を示す。 In formula (5), R 10 to R 12 each independently represents an alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms or an alkoxy group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms. n4 to n6 each independently represents an integer of 0 to 5. n7 to n9 each independently represents 0 or 1, and at least one of n7 to n9 represents 1. “*” Represents a bond between the structure represented by the formula (5) and the polymer skeleton.
　式（５）中のＲ10が炭素数１～１８のアルキル基を表す場合、式（１）中のＲ1で説明した炭素数１～１８のアルキル基と同義であり、炭素数１～３のアルキル基が好ましく、メチル基がより好ましい。Ｒ10が炭素数１～８のアルコキシ基を表す場合、アルコキシ基の炭素数は、１～６が好ましく、１～５がより好ましく、１～４がさらに好ましい。
　式（５）中のＲ10は、置換基をさらに有していてもよい。有していてもよい置換基としては、上述した置換基群Ａから選択された置換基が挙げられる。
　式（５）中のｎ４は０～５の整数を表し、１～４の整数が好ましく、２または３が好ましい。ｎ４が２～５の整数を表す場合、それぞれのＲ10は、同一であっても異なっていても良い。
　式（５）中のＲ11は、式（５）中のＲ10と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。
　式（５）中のｎ５は０～５の整数を表し、１～３の整数が好ましく、１または２が好ましい。ｎ５が２～５の整数を表す場合、それぞれのＲ11は、同一であっても異なっていても良い。
　式（５）中のＲ12は、式（５）中のＲ10と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。
　式（５）中のｎ６は０～５の整数を表し、０～３の整数が好ましく、０または１が好ましい。ｎ６が２～５の整数を表す場合、それぞれのＲ12は、同一であっても異なっていても良い。
　式（５）中のｎ７～ｎ９はそれぞれ独立に０または１を表し、ｎ７～ｎ９の少なくとも１つが１を表す。特に、ｎ７のみが１を表すか、ｎ８およびｎ９のみが１を表すか、ｎ７とｎ８およびｎ９のいずれか一方のみが１を表すことが好ましい。
　式（５）中、「＊」は式（１）中で説明した結合手と同義である。
　以下、式（５）で表される構造の具体例を示すが、これらに限定されるものではない。下記構造中、「＊」は式（５）で表される構造とポリマー骨格との結合手を表す。 When R 10 in formula (5) represents an alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, it is synonymous with the alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms described for R 1 in formula (1), and has 1 to 3 carbon atoms. The alkyl group is preferably a methyl group. When R 10 represents an alkoxy group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, the alkoxy group preferably has 1 to 6 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 5 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
R 10 in Formula (5) may further have a substituent. Examples of the substituent which may have include a substituent selected from the substituent group A described above.
N4 in the formula (5) represents an integer of 0 to 5, preferably an integer of 1 to 4, and preferably 2 or 3. When n4 represents an integer of 2 to 5, each R 10 may be the same or different.
R 11 in formula (5) has the same meaning as R 10 in formula (5), and the preferred range is also the same.
N5 in the formula (5) represents an integer of 0 to 5, preferably an integer of 1 to 3, and preferably 1 or 2. When n5 represents an integer of 2 to 5, each R 11 may be the same or different.
R 12 in formula (5) has the same meaning as R 10 in formula (5), and the preferred range is also the same.
N6 in the formula (5) represents an integer of 0 to 5, preferably an integer of 0 to 3, and preferably 0 or 1. When n6 represents an integer of 2 to 5, each R 12 may be the same or different.
In formula (5), n7 to n9 each independently represents 0 or 1, and at least one of n7 to n9 represents 1. In particular, it is preferable that only n7 represents 1, only n8 and n9 represent 1, or only one of n7, n8 and n9 represents 1.
In formula (5), “*” is synonymous with the bond described in formula (1).
Hereinafter, although the specific example of the structure represented by Formula (5) is shown, it is not limited to these. In the following structure, “*” represents a bond between the structure represented by the formula (5) and the polymer skeleton.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000090
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000090
　本発明に用いる色素多量体が有する式（１）～（５）で表される構造の少なくとも１つを有する構成単位は、下記式（Ｅ）で表されることが好ましい。
式（Ｅ） The structural unit having at least one of the structures represented by formulas (1) to (5) possessed by the dye multimer used in the present invention is preferably represented by the following formula (E).
Formula (E)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000091
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000091
　一般式（Ｅ）中、Ｘ3は一般式（Ａ）中のＸ1と同義である。Ｌ4は一般式（Ａ）中のＬ1と同義である。Ｚ1は上述した式（１）～（５）で表される構造を表す。
　以下、式（１）～（５）で表される構造の少なくとも１つを有する構成単位の具体例を示すが、本発明はこれらに限定されるものではない。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000092
 In general formula (E), X 3 has the same meaning as X 1 in general formula (A). L 4 has the same meaning as L 1 in formula (A). Z 1 represents a structure represented by the above formulas (1) to (5).
Specific examples of structural units having at least one of the structures represented by formulas (1) to (5) are shown below, but the present invention is not limited to these.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000092
　色素多量体は、式（１）～（５）で表される構造の少なくとも１つを有する構成単位を有しなくてもよいが、有する場合は、色素多量体中の全構成単位を１００質量％としたとき、式（１）～（５）で表される構造の少なくとも１つを有する構成単位の含有量が０．５～２０質量％であることが好ましく、１～１０質量％であることがさらに好ましく、１～５質量％であることが特に好ましい。 The dye multimer may not have a structural unit having at least one of the structures represented by the formulas (1) to (5), but if it has, 100 masses of all the structural units in the dye multimer. %, The content of the structural unit having at least one of the structures represented by formulas (1) to (5) is preferably 0.5 to 20% by mass, and 1 to 10% by mass More preferably, the content is 1 to 5% by mass.
　色素多量体が有するその他の官能基として、ラクトン、酸無水物、アミド、－ＣＯＣＨ2ＣＯ－、シアノ基等の現像促進基、長鎖および環状アルキル基、アラルキル基、アリール基、ポリアルキレンオキシド基、ヒドロキシル基、マレイミド基、アミノ基等の親疏水性調整基等が挙げられ、適宜導入することができる。
　導入方法として、色素単量体にあらかじめ導入しておく方法、および上記官能基を有するモノマーを共重合する方法が挙げられる。 Other functional groups possessed by the dye multimer include development accelerators such as lactones, acid anhydrides, amides, —COCH 2 CO—, cyano groups, long chain and cyclic alkyl groups, aralkyl groups, aryl groups, polyalkylene oxide groups And an affinity adjusting group such as a hydroxyl group, a maleimide group, and an amino group, and the like, which can be appropriately introduced.
Examples of the introduction method include a method of introducing the dye monomer in advance and a method of copolymerizing the monomer having the functional group.
　色素多量体が有してもよいアルカリ可溶性基その他の官能基を有する繰り返し単位の具体例を示すが、本発明はこれに限定されるものではない。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000093
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000094
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000095
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000096
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000097
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000098
 Specific examples of the repeating unit having an alkali-soluble group or other functional group that the dye multimer may have are shown below, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000093
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000094
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000095
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000096
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000097
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000098
　色素多量体の重量平均分子量は、３，０００～３０，０００であることが好ましく、５，０００～２５，０００であることがさらに好ましい。
　また、色素多量体の重量平均分子量（Ｍｗ）と、数平均分子量（Ｍｎ）との比〔（Ｍｗ）／（Ｍｎ）〕は１．０～２．０であることが好ましく、１．１～１．８であることがさらに好ましく、１．１～１．５であることが特に好ましい。 The weight average molecular weight of the dye multimer is preferably 3,000 to 30,000, and more preferably 5,000 to 25,000.
Further, the ratio [(Mw) / (Mn)] of the weight average molecular weight (Mw) to the number average molecular weight (Mn) of the dye multimer is preferably 1.0 to 2.0, preferably 1.1 to 2.0. The ratio is more preferably 1.8, and particularly preferably 1.1 to 1.5.
　本発明に係る色素多量体のガラス転移温度（Ｔｇ）は、５０℃以上であることが好ましく、１００℃以上であることがより好ましい。また、熱重量分析（ＴＧＡ測定）による５％重量減少温度が、１２０℃以上であることが好ましく、１５０℃以上であることがより好ましく、２００℃以上であることがさらに好ましい。この領域にあることで、本発明の着色組成物をカラーフィルタ等の作製に適用する際に、加熱プロセスに起因する濃度変化を低減する事ができるようになる。 The glass transition temperature (Tg) of the dye multimer according to the present invention is preferably 50 ° C. or higher, and more preferably 100 ° C. or higher. Further, the 5% weight loss temperature by thermogravimetric analysis (TGA measurement) is preferably 120 ° C. or higher, more preferably 150 ° C. or higher, and further preferably 200 ° C. or higher. By being in this region, when applying the colored composition of the present invention to the production of a color filter or the like, it becomes possible to reduce the concentration change caused by the heating process.
　本発明で用いる色素多量体が、色素構造を有する繰り返し単位と、他の繰り返し単位を含む場合、色素を含む重合性化合物と他の重合性化合物のランダム重合体であることが好ましい。ランダム重合体とすることにより、色素構造が色素多量体にランダムに存在し、本発明の効果がより効果的に発揮される。 When the dye multimer used in the present invention contains a repeating unit having a dye structure and another repeating unit, it is preferably a random polymer of a polymerizable compound containing a dye and another polymerizable compound. By using a random polymer, the dye structure is present randomly in the dye multimer, and the effects of the present invention are more effectively exhibited.
　　また、本発明に係る色素多量体の単位重量あたりの吸光係数（以後ε’と記す。ε’＝ε／平均分子量、単位：Ｌ／ｇ・ｃｍ）が、３０以上であることが好ましく、６０以上であることがより好ましく、１００以上であることがさらに好ましい。この範囲にあることで、本発明の着色組成物を適用してカラーフィルタを作製する場合において、色再現性のよいカラーフィルタを作製することができる。 Further, the extinction coefficient per unit weight of the dye multimer according to the present invention (hereinafter referred to as ε ′; ε ′ = ε / average molecular weight, unit: L / g · cm) is preferably 30 or more, and 60 More preferably, it is more preferably 100 or more. By being in this range, when a color filter is produced by applying the colored composition of the present invention, a color filter with good color reproducibility can be produced.
　本発明の着色組成物に用いる色素多量体のモル吸光係数は、着色力の観点から、できるだけ高いほうが好ましい。
　本発明の着色組成物に用いる色素多量体の還元粘度は、色移りの観点から、４．０～１０．０であることが好ましく、５．０～９．０であることがより好ましく、６．０～７．０であることがさらに好ましい。還元粘度は、例えばウベローデ型粘度計を用いて測定することができる。
１．０～１．８ The molar extinction coefficient of the dye multimer used in the colored composition of the present invention is preferably as high as possible from the viewpoint of coloring power.
The reduced viscosity of the dye multimer used in the colored composition of the present invention is preferably 4.0 to 10.0, more preferably 5.0 to 9.0, from the viewpoint of color transfer, More preferably, it is 0.0 to 7.0. The reduced viscosity can be measured using, for example, an Ubbelohde viscometer.
1.0-1.8
　本発明に係る色素多量体は、以下の有機溶剤に溶解する化合物であることが好ましい。
　有機溶剤としては、エステル類（例えば、３－エトキシプロピオン酸メチル、３－エトキシプロピオン酸エチル、乳酸エチル、酢酸ブチル、３－メトキシプロピオン酸メチル等）、エーテル類（例えばメチルセロソルブアセテート、エチルセロソルブアセテート、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート等）、ケトン類（メチルエチルケトン、シクロヘキサノン、２－ヘプタノン、３－ヘプタノン等）、芳香族炭化水素類（例えば、トルエン、キシレン等）が挙げられ、これら溶剤に対し、１質量％以上５０質量％以下溶解することが好ましく、より好ましくは５質量％以上４０質量％以下、さらに好ましくは１０質量％以上３０質量％以下であることが好ましい。この領域にあることで、本発明の着色組成物をカラーフィルタ等の作製に適用する際に、好適な塗布面状や、他色塗布後の溶出による濃度低下を低減させることができるようになる。 The dye multimer according to the present invention is preferably a compound that is soluble in the following organic solvents.
Examples of the organic solvent include esters (eg, methyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl lactate, butyl acetate, methyl 3-methoxypropionate), ethers (eg, methyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl cellosolve acetate). , Propylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, etc.), ketones (methyl ethyl ketone, cyclohexanone, 2-heptanone, 3-heptanone, etc.), aromatic hydrocarbons (for example, toluene, xylene, etc.), and these solvents 1% by mass or more and 50% by mass or less is preferable, more preferably 5% by mass or more and 40% by mass or less, and further preferably 10% by mass or more and 30% by mass or less. By being in this region, when applying the colored composition of the present invention to the production of a color filter or the like, it becomes possible to reduce a suitable application surface shape and a decrease in density due to elution after application of other colors. .
　本発明の着色組成物においては、色素多量体を１種単独で用いてもよく、２種以上併用してもよい。２種以上用いる場合、その合計量が後述する含有量に相当することが好ましい。 In the colored composition of the present invention, the dye multimer may be used alone or in combination of two or more. When using 2 or more types, it is preferable that the total amount corresponds to content mentioned later.
　本発明の着色組成物中における色素多量体の含有量は、後述する顔料との含有比率を考慮した上で設定される。
　顔料に対する色素多量体の質量比（色素多量体／顔料）としては、０．１～５が好ましく、０．２～２がより好ましく、０．３～１がさらに好ましい。 The content of the dye multimer in the colored composition of the present invention is set in consideration of the content ratio with the pigment described later.
The mass ratio of the dye multimer to the pigment (dye multimer / pigment) is preferably 0.1 to 5, more preferably 0.2 to 2, and still more preferably 0.3 to 1.
＜着色組成物＞
　次に、本発明の着色組成物について説明する。本発明の着色組成物は、好ましくは、カラーフィルタの着色層の形成に用いられる。本発明で用いる着色組成物は、重合性化合物を含み、さらに、光重合開始剤や顔料を含んでいても良い。
　例えば、フォトレジストによって、着色層を形成する場合、本発明の着色組成物は、本発明の色素多量体、重合性化合物、アルカリ可溶性樹脂、光重合開始剤および顔料を含む組成物が好ましい。さらに、界面活性剤、溶剤等の成分を含んでいてもよい。
　また、ドライエッチングによって、着色層を形成する場合、本発明の色素多量体、重合性化合物、光重合開始剤および顔料を含む組成物が好ましい。さらに、界面活性剤、溶剤等の成分を含んでいてもよい。
　以下、これらの詳細について説明する。 <Coloring composition>
Next, the coloring composition of this invention is demonstrated. The colored composition of the present invention is preferably used for forming a colored layer of a color filter. The coloring composition used in the present invention contains a polymerizable compound, and may further contain a photopolymerization initiator and a pigment.
For example, when the colored layer is formed by a photoresist, the colored composition of the present invention is preferably a composition containing the dye multimer of the present invention, a polymerizable compound, an alkali-soluble resin, a photopolymerization initiator and a pigment. Furthermore, components such as a surfactant and a solvent may be included.
Moreover, when forming a colored layer by dry etching, the composition containing the pigment | dye multimer of this invention, a polymeric compound, a photoinitiator, and a pigment is preferable. Furthermore, components such as a surfactant and a solvent may be included.
Details of these will be described below.
＜重合性化合物＞
　本発明の着色組成物は、重合性化合物を含有する。
　ラジカル、酸、熱により架橋可能な公知の重合性化合物を用いることができ、例えば、エチレン性不飽和結合、環状エーテル（エポキシ、オキセタン）、メチロール等を含む重合性化合物が挙げられる。重合性化合物は、感度の観点から、末端エチレン性不飽和結合を少なくとも１個、好ましくは２個以上有する化合物から好適に選ばれる。中でも、４官能以上の多官能重合性化合物が好ましく、５官能以上の多官能重合性化合物がさらに好ましい。 <Polymerizable compound>
The coloring composition of the present invention contains a polymerizable compound.
Known polymerizable compounds that can be cross-linked by radicals, acids, and heat can be used, and examples thereof include polymerizable compounds containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond, cyclic ether (epoxy, oxetane), methylol and the like. The polymerizable compound is suitably selected from compounds having at least one terminal ethylenically unsaturated bond, preferably two or more, from the viewpoint of sensitivity. Among them, a polyfunctional polymerizable compound having 4 or more functional groups is preferable, and a polyfunctional polymerizable compound having 5 or more functional groups is more preferable.
　このような化合物群は当該産業分野において広く知られているものであり、本発明においてはこれらを特に限定なく用いることができる。これらは、例えば、モノマー、プレポリマー、すなわち２量体、３量体およびオリゴマーまたはそれらの混合物並びにそれらの多量体などの化学的形態のいずれであってもよい。本発明における重合性化合物は１種単独で用いてもよいし、２種以上を併用してもよい。 Such compound groups are widely known in the industrial field, and these can be used without particular limitation in the present invention. These may be in any chemical form such as, for example, monomers, prepolymers, ie dimers, trimers and oligomers or mixtures thereof and multimers thereof. The polymeric compound in this invention may be used individually by 1 type, and may use 2 or more types together.
　より具体的には、モノマーおよびそのプレポリマーの例としては、不飽和カルボン酸（例えば、アクリル酸、メタクリル酸、イタコン酸、クロトン酸、イソクロトン酸、マレイン酸など）やそのエステル類、アミド類、並びにこれらの多量体が挙げられ、好ましくは、不飽和カルボン酸と脂肪族多価アルコール化合物とのエステル、および不飽和カルボン酸と脂肪族多価アミン化合物とのアミド類、並びにこれらの多量体である。また、ヒドロキシル基やアミノ基、メルカプト基等の求核性置換基を有する不飽和カルボン酸エステル或いはアミド類と、単官能若しくは多官能イソシアネート類或いはエポキシ類との付加反応物や、単官能若しくは多官能のカルボン酸との脱水縮合反応物等も好適に使用される。また、イソシアネート基やエポキシ基等の親電子性置換基を有する不飽和カルボン酸エステル或いはアミド類と、単官能若しくは多官能のアルコール類、アミン類、チオール類との付加反応物、さらに、ハロゲン基やトシルオキシ基等の脱離性置換基を有する不飽和カルボン酸エステル或いはアミド類と、単官能若しくは多官能のアルコール類、アミン類、チオール類との置換反応物も好適である。また、別の例として、上記の不飽和カルボン酸の代わりに、不飽和ホスホン酸、スチレン等のビニルベンゼン誘導体、ビニルエーテル、アリルエーテル等に置き換えた化合物群を使用することも可能である。
　これらの具体的な化合物としては、特開２００９－２８８７０５号公報の段落番号〔００９５〕～〔０１０８〕に記載されている化合物を本発明においても好適に用いることができる。 More specifically, examples of monomers and prepolymers thereof include unsaturated carboxylic acids (for example, acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, isocrotonic acid, maleic acid, etc.), esters thereof, amides, And multimers thereof, preferably esters of unsaturated carboxylic acids and aliphatic polyhydric alcohol compounds, amides of unsaturated carboxylic acids and aliphatic polyhydric amine compounds, and multimers thereof. is there. Also, addition reaction products of monofunctional or polyfunctional isocyanates or epoxies with unsaturated carboxylic acid esters or amides having a nucleophilic substituent such as hydroxyl group, amino group, mercapto group, monofunctional or polyfunctional. A dehydration condensation reaction product with a functional carboxylic acid is also preferably used. In addition, an addition reaction product of an unsaturated carboxylic acid ester or amide having an electrophilic substituent such as an isocyanate group or an epoxy group with a monofunctional or polyfunctional alcohol, amine, or thiol, and a halogen group A substitution reaction product of an unsaturated carboxylic acid ester or amide having a detachable substituent such as a tosyloxy group and a monofunctional or polyfunctional alcohol, amine or thiol is also suitable. As another example, it is also possible to use a compound group in which an unsaturated phosphonic acid, a vinylbenzene derivative such as styrene, vinyl ether, allyl ether or the like is used instead of the unsaturated carboxylic acid.
As these specific compounds, compounds described in paragraphs [0095] to [0108] of JP-A-2009-288705 can be preferably used in the present invention.
　また、上記重合性化合物としては、少なくとも１個の付加重合可能なエチレン基を有する、常圧下で１００℃以上の沸点を持つエチレン性不飽和基を持つ化合物も好ましい。その例としては、ポリエチレングリコールモノ（メタ）アクリレート、ポリプロピレングリコールモノ（メタ）アクリレート、フェノキシエチル（メタ）アクリレート等の単官能のアクリレートやメタアクリレート；ポリエチレングリコールジ（メタ）アクリレート、トリメチロールエタントリ（メタ）アクリレート、ネオペンチルグリコールジ（メタ）アクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールトリ（メタ）アクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールテトラ（メタ）アクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールペンタ（メタ）アクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサ（メタ）アクリレート、ヘキサンジオール（メタ）アクリレート、トリメチロールプロパントリ（アクリロイルオキシプロピル）エーテル、トリ（アクリロイロキシエチル）イソシアヌレート、グリセリンやトリメチロールエタン等の多官能アルコールにエチレンオキサイドやプロピレンオキサイドを付加させた後（メタ）アクリレート化したもの、特公昭４８－４１７０８号公報、特公昭５０－６０３４号公報、特開昭５１－３７１９３号公報に記載されているようなウレタン（メタ）アクリレート類、特開昭４８－６４１８３号公報、特公昭４９－４３１９１号公報、特公昭５２－３０４９０号公報に記載されているポリエステルアクリレート類、エポキシ樹脂と（メタ）アクリル酸との反応生成物であるエポキシアクリレート類等の多官能のアクリレートやメタアクリレートおよびこれらの混合物を挙げることができる。
　多官能カルボン酸にグリシジル（メタ）アクリレート等の環状エーテル基とエチレン性不飽和基を有する化合物を反応させ得られる多官能（メタ）アクリレートなども挙げることができる。
　また、その他の好ましい重合性化合物として、特開２０１０－１６０４１８号公報、特開２０１０－１２９８２５号公報、特許第４３６４２１６号明細書等に記載される、フルオレン環を有し、エチレン性不飽和基を２官能以上有する化合物、カルド樹脂も使用することが可能である。 Further, as the polymerizable compound, a compound having an ethylenically unsaturated group having a boiling point of 100 ° C. or higher under normal pressure and having at least one addition-polymerizable ethylene group is also preferable. Examples include monofunctional acrylates and methacrylates such as polyethylene glycol mono (meth) acrylate, polypropylene glycol mono (meth) acrylate, and phenoxyethyl (meth) acrylate; polyethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, trimethylolethanetri ( (Meth) acrylate, neopentyl glycol di (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol tri (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol tetra (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate, hexanediol ( (Meth) acrylate, trimethylolpropane tri (acryloyloxypropyl) ether, tri (acryloyloxyethyl) iso Polyfunctional alcohols such as nurate, glycerin and trimethylolethane added with ethylene oxide or propylene oxide and then (meth) acrylated, Japanese Patent Publication No. 48-41708, Japanese Patent Publication No. 50-6034, JP Urethane (meth) acrylates as described in JP-A-51-37193, polyester acrylates described in JP-A-48-64183, JP-B-49-43191, JP-B-52-30490 And polyfunctional acrylates and methacrylates such as epoxy acrylates which are reaction products of epoxy resin and (meth) acrylic acid, and mixtures thereof.
A polyfunctional (meth) acrylate obtained by reacting a polyfunctional carboxylic acid with a compound having a cyclic ether group such as glycidyl (meth) acrylate and an ethylenically unsaturated group can also be used.
As other preferable polymerizable compounds, there are fluorene rings described in JP 2010-160418 A, JP 2010-129825 A, JP 4364216 A, etc., and ethylenically unsaturated groups. A compound having two or more functions, a cardo resin can also be used.
　また、常圧下で１００℃以上の沸点を有し、少なくとも１個の付加重合可能なエチレン性不飽和基を持つ化合物としては、特開２００８－２９２９７０号公報の段落番号［０２５４］～［０２５７］に記載の化合物も好適である。 As compounds having a boiling point of 100 ° C. or higher under normal pressure and having at least one addition-polymerizable ethylenically unsaturated group, paragraphs [0254] to [0257] of JP-A-2008-292970 are disclosed. Also suitable are the compounds described in.
　上記のほか、下記一般式（ＭＯ－１）～（ＭＯ－５）で表される、ラジカル重合性モノマーも好適に用いることができる。なお、式中、Ｔがオキシアルキレン基の場合には、炭素原子側の末端がＲに結合する。 In addition to the above, radically polymerizable monomers represented by the following general formulas (MO-1) to (MO-5) can also be suitably used. In the formula, when T is an oxyalkylene group, the terminal on the carbon atom side is bonded to R.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000099
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000099
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000100
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000100
　上記一般式において、ｎは０～１４であり、ｍは１～８である。一分子内に複数存在するＲ、Ｔ、は、各々同一であっても、異なっていてもよい。
　上記一般式（ＭＯ－１）～（ＭＯ－５）で表される重合性化合物の各々において、複数存在するＲの少なくとも１つは、－ＯＣ（＝Ｏ）ＣＨ＝ＣＨ2、または、－ＯＣ（＝Ｏ）Ｃ（ＣＨ3）＝ＣＨ2で表される基を表す。
　上記一般式（ＭＯ－１）～（ＭＯ－５）で表される重合性化合物の具体例としては、特開２００７－２６９７７９号公報の段落番号０２４８～段落番号０２５１に記載されている化合物を本発明においても好適に用いることができる。 In the above general formula, n is 0 to 14, and m is 1 to 8. A plurality of R and T present in one molecule may be the same or different.
In each of the polymerizable compounds represented by the general formulas (MO-1) to (MO-5), at least one of a plurality of R is —OC (═O) CH═CH 2 or —OC A group represented by (═O) C (CH 3 ) ═CH 2 is represented.
Specific examples of the polymerizable compounds represented by the above general formulas (MO-1) to (MO-5) include the compounds described in paragraph numbers 0248 to 0251 of JP-A-2007-2699779. It can be suitably used in the invention.
　また、特開平１０－６２９８６号公報において一般式（１）および（２）としてその具体例と共に記載の上記多官能アルコールにエチレンオキサイドやプロピレンオキサイドを付加させた後に（メタ）アクリレート化した化合物も、重合性化合物として用いることができる。 Further, compounds obtained by adding ethylene oxide or propylene oxide to the polyfunctional alcohol described in JP-A-10-62986 as general formulas (1) and (2) together with specific examples thereof and then (meth) acrylated are also provided. It can be used as a polymerizable compound.
　中でも、重合性化合物としては、ジペンタエリスリトールトリアクリレート（市販品としてはKAYARAD D-330；日本化薬株式会社製）、ジペンタエリスリトールテトラアクリレート（市販品としてはKAYARAD D-320；日本化薬株式会社製）ジペンタエリスリトールペンタ（メタ）アクリレート（市販品としてはKAYARAD D-310；日本化薬株式会社製）、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサ（メタ）アクリレート（市販品としてはKAYARAD DPHA；日本化薬株式会社製）、エチレンオキシ変性ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサアクリレート（市販品としてはＡ－ＤＰＨ－１２Ｅ；日本化薬株式会社製）およびこれらの（メタ）アクリロイル基がエチレングリコール、プロピレングリコール残基を介している構造が好ましい。これらのオリゴマータイプも使用できる。 Among them, dipentaerythritol triacrylate (KAYARAD D-330; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) and dipentaerythritol tetraacrylate (KAYARAD D-320 as commercially available products) are available as polymerizable compounds. Company-made) dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate (commercially available KAYARAD D-310; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate (commercially available product KAYARAD DPHA; Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) ), Ethyleneoxy-modified dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate (commercially available product is A-DPH-12E; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) and a structure in which these (meth) acryloyl groups are mediated by ethylene glycol and propylene glycol residues Is preferred. These oligomer types can also be used.
　重合性化合物としては、多官能モノマーであって、カルボキシル基、スルホン酸基、リン酸基等の酸基を有していてもよい。エチレン性化合物が、上記のように混合物である場合のように未反応のカルボキシル基を有するものであれば、これをそのまま利用することができるが、必要において、上述のエチレン性化合物のヒドロキシル基に非芳香族カルボン酸無水物を反応させて酸基を導入してもよい。この場合、使用される非芳香族カルボン酸無水物の具体例としては、無水テトラヒドロフタル酸、アルキル化無水テトラヒドロフタル酸、無水ヘキサヒドロフタル酸、アルキル化無水ヘキサヒドロフタル酸、無水コハク酸、無水マレイン酸が挙げられる。 The polymerizable compound is a polyfunctional monomer and may have an acid group such as a carboxyl group, a sulfonic acid group, or a phosphoric acid group. If the ethylenic compound has an unreacted carboxyl group as in the case of a mixture as described above, this can be used as it is. Non-aromatic carboxylic acid anhydrides may be reacted to introduce acid groups. In this case, specific examples of the non-aromatic carboxylic acid anhydride used include tetrahydrophthalic anhydride, alkylated tetrahydrophthalic anhydride, hexahydrophthalic anhydride, alkylated hexahydrophthalic anhydride, succinic anhydride, anhydrous Maleic acid is mentioned.
　本発明において、酸基を有するモノマーとしては、脂肪族ポリヒドロキシ化合物と不飽和カルボン酸とのエステルであり、脂肪族ポリヒドロキシ化合物の未反応のヒドロキシル基に非芳香族カルボン酸無水物を反応させて酸基を持たせた多官能モノマーが好ましく、特に好ましくは、このエステルにおいて、脂肪族ポリヒドロキシ化合物がペンタエリスリトールおよび／またはジペンタエリスリトールであるものである。市販品としては、例えば、東亞合成株式会社製の多塩基酸変性アクリルオリゴマーとして、Ｍ－５１０、Ｍ－５２０などが挙げられる。 In the present invention, the monomer having an acid group is an ester of an aliphatic polyhydroxy compound and an unsaturated carboxylic acid, and a non-aromatic carboxylic acid anhydride is reacted with an unreacted hydroxyl group of the aliphatic polyhydroxy compound. A polyfunctional monomer having an acid group is preferable, and in this ester, the aliphatic polyhydroxy compound is pentaerythritol and / or dipentaerythritol. Examples of commercially available products include M-510 and M-520 as polybasic acid-modified acrylic oligomers manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.
　これらのモノマーは１種を単独で用いてもよいが、製造上、単一の化合物を用いることは難しいことから、２種以上を混合して用いてもよい。また、必要に応じてモノマーとして酸基を有しない多官能モノマーと酸基を有する多官能モノマーを併用してもよい。
　酸基を有する多官能モノマーの好ましい酸価としては、０．１ｍｇＫＯＨ／ｇ～４０ｍｇＫＯＨ／ｇであり、特に好ましくは５ｍｇＫＯＨ／ｇ～３０ｍｇＫＯＨ／ｇである。多官能モノマーの酸価が低すぎると現像溶解特性が落ち、高すぎると製造や取扱いが困難になり光重合性能が落ち、画素の表面平滑性等の硬化性が劣るものとなる。従って、異なる酸基の多官能モノマーを２種以上併用する場合、或いは酸基を有しない多官能モノマーを併用する場合、全体の多官能モノマーとしての酸基が上記範囲に入るように調整することが好ましい。 These monomers may be used alone, but since it is difficult to use a single compound in production, two or more kinds may be mixed and used. Moreover, you may use together the polyfunctional monomer which does not have an acid group as a monomer, and the polyfunctional monomer which has an acid group as needed.
A preferable acid value of the polyfunctional monomer having an acid group is 0.1 mgKOH / g to 40 mgKOH / g, and particularly preferably 5 mgKOH / g to 30 mgKOH / g. If the acid value of the polyfunctional monomer is too low, the developing dissolution properties are lowered, and if it is too high, the production and handling are difficult, the photopolymerization performance is lowered, and the curability such as the surface smoothness of the pixel is deteriorated. Therefore, when two or more polyfunctional monomers having different acid groups are used in combination, or when a polyfunctional monomer having no acid group is used in combination, the acid groups as the entire polyfunctional monomer should be adjusted to fall within the above range. Is preferred.
　また、重合性化合物として、カプロラクトン構造を有する多官能性単量体を含有することも好ましい態様である。
　カプロラクトン構造を有する多官能性単量体としては、その分子内にカプロラクトン構造を有する限り特に限定されるものではないが、例えば、トリメチロールエタン、ジトリメチロールエタン、トリメチロールプロパン、ジトリメチロールプロパン、ペンタエリスリトール、ジペンタエリスリトール、トリペンタエリスリトール、グリセリン、ジグリセロール、トリメチロールメラミン等の多価アルコールと、（メタ）アクリル酸およびε－カプロラクトンをエステル化することにより得られる、ε－カプロラクトン変性多官能（メタ）アクリレートを挙げることができる。なかでも下記一般式（Ｚ－１）で表されるカプロラクトン構造を有する多官能性単量体が好ましい。 Moreover, it is also a preferable aspect to contain the polyfunctional monomer which has a caprolactone structure as a polymeric compound.
The polyfunctional monomer having a caprolactone structure is not particularly limited as long as it has a caprolactone structure in the molecule. For example, trimethylolethane, ditrimethylolethane, trimethylolpropane, ditrimethylolpropane, penta Ε-caprolactone-modified polyfunctionality obtained by esterifying polyhydric alcohols such as erythritol, dipentaerythritol, tripentaerythritol, glycerin, diglycerol, trimethylolmelamine, (meth) acrylic acid and ε-caprolactone ( Mention may be made of (meth) acrylates. Among these, a polyfunctional monomer having a caprolactone structure represented by the following general formula (Z-1) is preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000101
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000101
　一般式（Ｚ－１）中、６個のＲは全てが下記一般式（Ｚ－２）で表される基であるか、または６個のＲのうち１～５個が下記一般式（Ｚ－２）で表される基であり、残余が下記一般式（Ｚ－３）で表される基である。 In the general formula (Z-1), all six R are groups represented by the following general formula (Z-2), or 1 to 5 of the six R are represented by the following general formula (Z -2), and the remainder is a group represented by the following general formula (Z-3).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000102
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000102
　一般式（Ｚ－２）中、Ｒ1は水素原子またはメチル基を示し、ｍは１または２の数を示し、「＊」は結合手であることを示す。 In general formula (Z-2), R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, m represents a number of 1 or 2, and “*” represents a bond.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000103
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000103
　一般式（Ｚ－３）中、Ｒ1は水素原子またはメチル基を示し、「＊」は結合手であることを示す。） In general formula (Z-3), R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and “*” represents a bond. )
　このようなカプロラクトン構造を有する多官能性単量体は、例えば、日本化薬（株）からＫＡＹＡＲＡＤ　ＤＰＣＡシリーズとして市販されており、ＤＰＣＡ－２０（上記式（１）～（３）においてｍ＝１、式（２）で表される基の数＝２、Ｒ1が全て水素原子である化合物）、ＤＰＣＡ－３０（同式、ｍ＝１、式（２）で表される基の数＝３、Ｒ1が全て水素原子である化合物）、ＤＰＣＡ－６０（同式、ｍ＝１、式（２）で表される基の数＝６、Ｒ1が全て水素原子である化合物）、ＤＰＣＡ－１２０（同式においてｍ＝２、式（２）で表される基の数＝６、Ｒ1が全て水素原子である化合物）等を挙げることができる。
　本発明において、カプロラクトン構造を有する多官能性単量体は、単独でまたは２種以上を混合して使用することができる。 Such a polyfunctional monomer having a caprolactone structure is commercially available from Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd. as the KAYARAD DPCA series, and DPCA-20 (m = 1 in the above formulas (1) to (3)). , Number of groups represented by formula (2) = 2, a compound in which R 1 is all hydrogen atoms, DPCA-30 (same formula, m = 1, number of groups represented by formula (2) = 3 , Compounds in which R 1 is all hydrogen atoms), DPCA-60 (formula, m = 1, number of groups represented by formula (2) = 6, compounds in which R 1 is all hydrogen atoms), DPCA- 120 (a compound in which m = 2 in the same formula, the number of groups represented by formula (2) = 6, and all R 1 are hydrogen atoms).
In this invention, the polyfunctional monomer which has a caprolactone structure can be used individually or in mixture of 2 or more types.
　また、本発明における特定モノマーとしては、下記一般式（Ｚ－４）または（Ｚ－５）で表される化合物の群から選択される少なくとも１種であることも好ましい。 In addition, the specific monomer in the present invention is preferably at least one selected from the group of compounds represented by the following general formula (Z-4) or (Z-5).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000104
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000104
　上記一般式（Ｚ－４）および（Ｚ－５）中、Ｅは、各々独立に、－（（ＣＨ2）ｙＣＨ2Ｏ）－、または－（（ＣＨ2）ｙＣＨ（ＣＨ3）Ｏ）－を表し、ｙは、各々独立に０～１０の整数を表し、Ｘは、各々独立に、アクリロイル基、メタクリロイル基、水素原子、またはカルボキシル基を表す。
　上記一般式（Ｚ－４）中、アクリロイル基およびメタクリロイル基の合計は３個または４個であり、ｍは各々独立に０～１０の整数を表し、各ｍの合計は０～４０の整数である。但し、各ｍの合計が０の場合、Ｘのうちいずれか１つはカルボキシル基である。
　上記一般式（ii）中、アクリロイル基およびメタクリロイル基の合計は５個または６個であり、ｎは各々独立に０～１０の整数を表し、各ｎの合計は０～６０の整数である。但し、各ｎの合計が０の場合、Ｘのうちいずれか１つはカルボキシル基である。 In the general formulas (Z-4) and (Z-5), each E is independently — ((CH 2 ) yCH 2 O) — or — ((CH 2 ) yCH (CH 3 ) O) —. Each represents independently an integer of 0 to 10, and each X independently represents an acryloyl group, a methacryloyl group, a hydrogen atom, or a carboxyl group.
In the general formula (Z-4), the total number of acryloyl groups and methacryloyl groups is 3 or 4, each m independently represents an integer of 0 to 10, and the total of each m is an integer of 0 to 40. is there. However, when the total of each m is 0, any one of X is a carboxyl group.
In the general formula (ii), the total number of acryloyl groups and methacryloyl groups is 5 or 6, each n independently represents an integer of 0 to 10, and the total of each n is an integer of 0 to 60. However, when the total of each n is 0, any one of X is a carboxyl group.
　上記一般式（Ｚ－４）中、ｍは、０～６の整数が好ましく、０～４の整数がより好ましい。また、各ｍの合計は、２～４０の整数が好ましく、２～１６の整数がより好ましく、４～８の整数が特に好ましい。
　上記一般式（Ｚ－５）中、ｎは、０～６の整数が好ましく、０～４の整数がより好ましい。
　また、各ｎの合計は、３～６０の整数が好ましく、３～２４の整数がより好ましく、６～１２の整数が特に好ましい。
　また、一般式（Ｚ－４）または一般式（Ｚ－５）中の－（（ＣＨ2）ｙＣＨ2Ｏ）－または－（（ＣＨ2）ｙＣＨ（ＣＨ3）Ｏ）－は、酸素原子側の末端がＸに結合する形態が好ましい。 In the general formula (Z-4), m is preferably an integer of 0 to 6, and more preferably an integer of 0 to 4. The total of each m is preferably an integer of 2 to 40, more preferably an integer of 2 to 16, and particularly preferably an integer of 4 to 8.
In the general formula (Z-5), n is preferably an integer of 0 to 6, and more preferably an integer of 0 to 4.
The total of each n is preferably an integer of 3 to 60, more preferably an integer of 3 to 24, and particularly preferably an integer of 6 to 12.
In general formula (Z-4) or general formula (Z-5), — ((CH 2 ) yCH 2 O) — or — ((CH 2 ) yCH (CH 3 ) O) — represents an oxygen atom side. A form in which the terminal of X is bonded to X is preferred.
　上記一般式（Ｚ－４）または一般式（Ｚ－５）で表される化合物は１種単独で用いてもよいし、２種以上併用してもよい。特に、一般式（ii）において、６個のＸ全てがアクリロイル基である形態が好ましい。 The compounds represented by the general formula (Z-4) or the general formula (Z-5) may be used alone or in combination of two or more. In particular, in the general formula (ii), a form in which all six Xs are acryloyl groups is preferable.
　また、一般式（Ｚ－４）または一般式（Ｚ－５）で表される化合物の重合性化合物中における全含有量としては、２０質量％以上が好ましく、５０質量％以上がより好ましい。 The total content of the compound represented by the general formula (Z-4) or the general formula (Z-5) in the polymerizable compound is preferably 20% by mass or more, and more preferably 50% by mass or more.
　上記一般式（Ｚ－４）または一般式（Ｚ－５）で表される化合物は、従来公知の工程である、ペンタエリスリト－ルまたはジペンタエリスリト－ルにエチレンオキシドまたはプロピレンオキシドを開環付加反応により開環骨格を結合する工程と、開環骨格の末端水酸基に、例えば（メタ）アクリロイルクロライドを反応させて（メタ）アクリロイル基を導入する工程と、から合成することができる。各工程は良く知られた工程であり、当業者は容易に一般式（ｉ）または（ii）で表される化合物を合成することができる。 The compound represented by the general formula (Z-4) or the general formula (Z-5) is a conventionally known process, in which ethylene oxide or propylene oxide is ring-opened to pentaerythritol or dipentaerythritol. It can be synthesized from a step of bonding a ring-opening skeleton by an addition reaction and a step of introducing a (meth) acryloyl group by reacting, for example, (meth) acryloyl chloride with a terminal hydroxyl group of the ring-opening skeleton. Each step is a well-known step, and a person skilled in the art can easily synthesize a compound represented by the general formula (i) or (ii).
　上記一般式（Ｚ－４）または一般式（Ｚ－５）で表される化合物の中でも、ペンタエリスリトール誘導体および／またはジペンタエリスリトール誘導体がより好ましい。
　具体的には、下記式（ａ）～（ｆ）で表される化合物（以下、「例示化合物（ａ）～（ｆ）」ともいう。）が挙げられ、中でも、例示化合物（ａ）、（ｂ）、（ｅ）、（ｆ）が好ましい。 Among the compounds represented by the general formula (Z-4) or the general formula (Z-5), pentaerythritol derivatives and / or dipentaerythritol derivatives are more preferable.
Specific examples include compounds represented by the following formulas (a) to (f) (hereinafter also referred to as “exemplary compounds (a) to (f)”). Among them, exemplary compounds (a), (f) b), (e) and (f) are preferred.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000105
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000105
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000106
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000106
　一般式（Ｚ－４）、（Ｚ－５）で表される重合性化合物の市販品としては、例えばサートマー社製のエチレンオキシ鎖を４個有する４官能アクリレートであるＳＲ－４９４、日本化薬株式会社製のペンチレンオキシ鎖を６個有する６官能アクリレートであるＤＰＣＡ－６０、イソブチレンオキシ鎖を３個有する３官能アクリレートであるＴＰＡ－３３０などが挙げられる。 Examples of commercially available polymerizable compounds represented by the general formulas (Z-4) and (Z-5) include SR-494, a tetrafunctional acrylate having four ethyleneoxy chains manufactured by Sartomer, Nippon Kayaku Examples thereof include DPCA-60, which is a hexafunctional acrylate having six pentyleneoxy chains, and TPA-330, which is a trifunctional acrylate having three isobutyleneoxy chains.
　また、重合性化合物としては、特公昭４８－４１７０８号公報、特開昭５１－３７１９３号公報、特公平２－３２２９３号公報、特公平２－１６７６５号公報に記載されているようなウレタンアクリレート類や、特公昭５８－４９８６０号公報、特公昭５６－１７６５４号公報、特公昭６２－３９４１７号公報、特公昭６２－３９４１８号公報記載のエチレンオキサイド系骨格を有するウレタン化合物類も好適である。さらに、重合性化合物として、特開昭６３－２７７６５３号公報、特開昭６３－２６０９０９号公報、特開平１－１０５２３８号公報に記載される、分子内にアミノ構造やスルフィド構造を有する付加重合性化合物類を用いることによって、非常に感光スピードに優れた硬化性組成物を得ることができる。
　重合性化合物の市販品としては、ウレタンオリゴマーＵＡＳ－１０、ＵＡＢ－１４０（山陽国策パルプ社製）、ＵＡ－７２００」(新中村化学社製、ＤＰＨＡ－４０Ｈ（日本化薬社製）、ＵＡ－３０６Ｈ、ＵＡ－３０６Ｔ、ＵＡ－３０６Ｉ、ＡＨ－６００、Ｔ－６００、ＡＩ－６００（共栄社製）などが挙げられる。 Examples of the polymerizable compound include urethane acrylates as described in JP-B-48-41708, JP-A-51-37193, JP-B-2-32293, and JP-B-2-16765. Also suitable are urethane compounds having an ethylene oxide skeleton as described in JP-B-58-49860, JP-B-56-17654, JP-B-62-39417, and JP-B-62-39418. Furthermore, addition polymerizable compounds having an amino structure or a sulfide structure in the molecule described in JP-A-63-277653, JP-A-63-260909, and JP-A-1-105238 are described as polymerizable compounds. By using the compounds, it is possible to obtain a curable composition having an extremely excellent photosensitive speed.
Commercially available polymerizable compounds include urethane oligomers UAS-10, UAB-140 (Sanyo Kokusaku Pulp Co., Ltd.), UA-7200 (Shin Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd., DPHA-40H (Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), UA- 306H, UA-306T, UA-306I, AH-600, T-600, AI-600 (manufactured by Kyoeisha) and the like.
　環状エーテル（エポキシ、オキセタン）としては、例えば、エポキシ基を有するものとしては、ビスフェノールＡ型エポキシ樹脂として、ＪＥＲ－８２７、ＪＥＲ－８２８、ＪＥＲ－８３４、ＪＥＲ－１００１、ＪＥＲ－１００２、ＪＥＲ－１００３、ＪＥＲ－１０５５、ＪＥＲ－１００７、ＪＥＲ－１００９、ＪＥＲ－１０１０（以上、ジャパンエポキシレジン（株）製）、ＥＰＩＣＬＯＮ８６０、ＥＰＩＣＬＯＮ１０５０、ＥＰＩＣＬＯＮ１０５１、ＥＰＩＣＬＯＮ１０５５（以上、ＤＩＣ（株）製）等であり、ビスフェノールＦ型エポキシ樹脂として、ＪＥＲ－８０６、ＪＥＲ－８０７、ＪＥＲ－４００４、ＪＥＲ－４００５、ＪＥＲ－４００７、ＪＥＲ－４０１０（以上、ジャパンエポキシレジン（株）製）、ＥＰＩＣＬＯＮ８３０、ＥＰＩＣＬＯＮ８３５（以上、ＤＩＣ（株）製）、ＬＣＥ－２１、ＲＥ－６０２Ｓ（以上、日本化薬（株）製）等であり、フェノールノボラック型エポキシ樹脂として、ＪＥＲ－１５２、ＪＥＲ－１５４、ＪＥＲ－１５７Ｓ７０、ＪＥＲ－１５７Ｓ６５、（以上、ジャパンエポキシレジン（株）製）、ＥＰＩＣＬＯＮ Ｎ－７４０、ＥＰＩＣＬＯＮ Ｎ－７４０、ＥＰＩＣＬＯＮ Ｎ－７７０、ＥＰＩＣＬＯＮ Ｎ－７７５（以上、ＤＩＣ（株）製）等であり、クレゾールノボラック型エポキシ樹脂として、ＥＰＩＣＬＯＮ Ｎ－６６０、ＥＰＩＣＬＯＮ Ｎ－６６５、ＥＰＩＣＬＯＮ Ｎ－６７０、ＥＰＩＣＬＯＮ Ｎ－６７３、ＥＰＩＣＬＯＮ Ｎ－６８０、ＥＰＩＣＬＯＮ Ｎ－６９０、ＥＰＩＣＬＯＮ Ｎ－６９５（以上、ＤＩＣ（株）製）、ＥＯＣＮ－１０２０（以上、日本化薬（株）製）、脂肪族エポキシ樹脂として、ＡＤＥＫＡ ＲＥＳＩＮ ＥＰ－４０８０Ｓ、同ＥＰ－４０８５Ｓ、同ＥＰ－４０８８Ｓ（以上、（株）ＡＤＥＫＡ製）セロキサイド２０２１Ｐ、セロキサイド２０８１、セロキサイド２０８３、セロキサイド２０８５、ＥＨＰＥ－３１５０（2,2-ビス(ヒドロキシメチル)-1-ブタノールの1,2-エポキシ-4-(2-オキシラニル)シクロヘキサン付加物）、ＥＰＯＬＥＡＤ ＰＢ ３６００、同ＰＢ ４７００（以上、ダイセル化学工業（株）製）、デナコール ＥＸ－２１１Ｌ、ＥＸ－２１２Ｌ、ＥＸ－２１４Ｌ、ＥＸ－２１６Ｌ、ＥＸ－３２１Ｌ、ＥＸ－８５０Ｌ（以上、ナガセケムテックス(株)製）、ＡＤＥＫＡ ＲＥＳＩＮ ＥＰ－４０００Ｓ、同ＥＰ－４００３Ｓ、同ＥＰ－４０１０Ｓ、同ＥＰ－４０１１Ｓ（以上、（株）ＡＤＥＫＡ製）、ＮＣ－２０００、ＮＣ－３０００、ＮＣ－７３００、ＸＤ－１０００、ＥＰＰＮ－５０１、ＥＰＰＮ－５０２（以上、（株）ＡＤＥＫＡ製）、ＪＥＲ－１０３１Ｓ（ジャパンエポキシレジン（株）製）等が挙げられる。このような重合性化合物は、ドライエッチング法でパターンを形成する場合に好適である。 Examples of the cyclic ether (epoxy, oxetane) include those having an epoxy group such as bisphenol A type epoxy resin, JER-827, JER-828, JER-834, JER-1001, JER-1002, JER-1003. , JER-1055, JER-1007, JER-1009, JER-1010 (manufactured by Japan Epoxy Resin Co., Ltd.), EPICLON 860, EPICLON 1050, EPICLON 1051, EPICLON 1055 (manufactured by DIC Corporation), etc., and bisphenol F As type epoxy resins, JER-806, JER-807, JER-4004, JER-4005, JER-4007, JER-4010 (above, manufactured by Japan Epoxy Resins Co., Ltd.), EPICLON83 EPICLON 835 (above, manufactured by DIC Corporation), LCE-21, RE-602S (above, manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), etc., and phenol novolac type epoxy resins such as JER-152, JER-154, JER -157S70, JER-157S65 (above, manufactured by Japan Epoxy Resin Co., Ltd.), EPICLONＩＣN-740, EPICLON N-740, EPICLON N-770, EPICLON 、 N-775 (above, manufactured by DIC Corporation), etc. As cresol novolac type epoxy resins, EPICLON N-660, EPICLON N-665, EPICLON N-670, EPICLON N-673, EPICLON N-680, EPICLON N-690, EPICLON N-695 (above, DIC Corporation) ), EOCN-1020 (above, manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), aliphatic epoxy resins such as ADEKA RESIN EP-4080S, EP-4085S, EP-4088S (above, manufactured by ADEKA) Celoxide 2021P, Celoxide 2081, Celoxide 2083, Celoxide 2085, EHPE-3150 (1,2-epoxy-4- (2-oxiranyl) cyclohexane adduct of 2,2-bis (hydroxymethyl) -1-butanol), EPOLEEAD PB 3600, the same PB-4700 (above, manufactured by Daicel Chemical Industries, Ltd.), Denacol EX-2111L, EX-212L, EX-214L, EX-216L, EX-321L, EX-850L (above, manufactured by Nagase ChemteX Corporation), ADEKA RESIN EP-4000S, EP-4003S, EP-4010S, EP-4011S (above, manufactured by ADEKA Corporation), NC-2000, NC-3000, NC-7300, XD-1000, EPPN-501, EPPN-502 (above, manufactured by ADEKA Corporation) ), JER-1031S (manufactured by Japan Epoxy Resin Co., Ltd.) and the like. Such a polymerizable compound is suitable for forming a pattern by a dry etching method.
　これらの重合性化合物について、その構造、単独使用か併用か、添加量等の使用方法の詳細は、着色組成物の最終的な性能設計にあわせて任意に設定できる。例えば、感度の観点では、１分子あたりの不飽和基含量が多い構造が好ましく、多くの場合は２官能以上が好ましい。また、着色組成物により形成された硬化膜の強度を高める観点では、３官能以上のものがよく、さらに、異なる官能基数・異なる重合性基（例えばアクリル酸エステル、メタクリル酸エステル、スチレン系化合物、ビニルエーテル系化合物）のものを併用することで、感度と強度の両方を調節する方法も有効である。さらに、３官能以上のものでエチレンオキサイド鎖長の異なる重合性化合物を併用することが、着色組成物の現像性を調節することができ、優れたパターン形成能が得られるという点で好ましい。
　また、着色組成物に含有される他の成分（例えば、光重合開始剤、被分散体、アルカリ可溶性樹脂等）との相溶性、分散性に対しても、重合性化合物の選択・使用法は重要な要因であり、例えば、低純度化合物の使用や２種以上の併用により相溶性を向上させうることがある。また、支持体などの硬質表面との密着性を向上させる観点で特定の構造を選択することもあり得る。 About these polymeric compounds, the details of usage methods, such as the structure, single use or combined use, and addition amount, can be arbitrarily set according to the final performance design of a coloring composition. For example, from the viewpoint of sensitivity, a structure having a high unsaturated group content per molecule is preferable, and in many cases, a bifunctional or higher functionality is preferable. Further, from the viewpoint of increasing the strength of the cured film formed from the colored composition, those having three or more functional groups are preferable, and further, different numbers of functional groups / different polymerizable groups (for example, acrylic acid ester, methacrylic acid ester, styrenic compound, A method of adjusting both sensitivity and strength by using a combination of vinyl ether compounds) is also effective. Furthermore, it is preferable to use a tri- or higher functional polymerizable compound having a different ethylene oxide chain length in that the developability of the colored composition can be adjusted and an excellent pattern forming ability can be obtained.
In addition, the compatibility and dispersibility with other components (for example, photopolymerization initiators, dispersions, alkali-soluble resins, etc.) contained in the colored composition are also selected and used as a polymerizable compound. This is an important factor. For example, compatibility may be improved by using a low-purity compound or using two or more kinds in combination. In addition, a specific structure may be selected from the viewpoint of improving adhesion to a hard surface such as a support.
　本発明の着色組成物中における重合性化合物の含有量は、配合する場合、着色組成物中の全固形分に対して０．１質量％～９０質量％が好ましく、１．０質量％～６０質量％がさらに好ましく、２．０質量％～４０質量％が特に好ましい。
　本発明の組成物は、重合性化合物を、１種類のみを含んでいてもよいし、２種類以上含んでいてもよい。２種類以上含む場合は、その合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 When blended, the content of the polymerizable compound in the colored composition of the present invention is preferably 0.1% by mass to 90% by mass, and 1.0% by mass to 60% by mass with respect to the total solid content in the colored composition. % By mass is more preferable, and 2.0% by mass to 40% by mass is particularly preferable.
The composition of the present invention may contain only one type of polymerizable compound or two or more types. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
　本発明の着色組成物は、重合性化合物の反応を促進させることなどを目的として、分子内に２個以上のメルカプト基を有する多官能チオール化合物を含んでいてもよい。多官能チオール化合物は、２級のアルカンチオール類であることが好ましく、特に下記一般式（Ｉ）で表される構造を有する化合物であることが好ましい。
一般式（Ｉ）
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000107
 （式中、ｎは２～４の整数を表し、Ｌは２～４価の連結基を表す。） The coloring composition of the present invention may contain a polyfunctional thiol compound having two or more mercapto groups in the molecule for the purpose of promoting the reaction of the polymerizable compound. The polyfunctional thiol compound is preferably a secondary alkanethiol, and particularly preferably a compound having a structure represented by the following general formula (I).
Formula (I)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000107
 (In the formula, n represents an integer of 2 to 4, and L represents a divalent to tetravalent linking group.)
　上記一般式（Ｉ）において、連結基Ｌは炭素数２～１２の脂肪族基であることが好ましく、ｎが２であり、Lが炭素数２～１２のアルキレン基であることが特に好ましい。多官能チオール化合物の具体的としては、下記の構造式（ＩＩ）～（ＩＶ）で表される化合物が挙げられ、（ＩＩ）で表される化合物が特に好ましい。これらの多官能チオールは１種または複数組み合わせて使用することが可能である。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000108
 In the above general formula (I), the linking group L is preferably an aliphatic group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms, particularly preferably n is 2 and L is an alkylene group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms. Specific examples of the polyfunctional thiol compound include compounds represented by the following structural formulas (II) to (IV), and a compound represented by (II) is particularly preferable. These polyfunctional thiols can be used alone or in combination.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000108
　本発明の組成物中の多官能チオールの配合量については、溶剤を除いた全固形分に対して０．３～８．９重量％、より好ましくは０．８～６．４重量％の範囲で添加することが望ましい。また、多官能チオールは安定性、臭気、解像性、現像性、密着性等の改良を目的として添加してもよい。 The polyfunctional thiol content in the composition of the present invention is in the range of 0.3 to 8.9% by weight, more preferably 0.8 to 6.4% by weight, based on the total solid content excluding the solvent. It is desirable to add at. Polyfunctional thiols may be added for the purpose of improving stability, odor, resolution, developability, adhesion and the like.
＜光重合開始剤＞
　本発明の着色組成物は、光重合開始剤を含有することが、さらなる感度向上の観点から好ましい。
　上記光重合開始剤としては、上記重合性化合物の重合を開始する能力を有する限り、特に制限はなく、公知の光重合開始剤の中から適宜選択することができる。例えば、紫外線領域から可視の光線に対して感光性を有するものが好ましい。また、光励起された増感剤と何らかの作用を生じ、活性ラジカルを生成する活性剤であってもよく、モノマーの種類に応じてカチオン重合を開始させるような開始剤であってもよい。
　また、上記光重合開始剤は、約３００ｎｍ～８００ｎｍ（３３０ｎｍ～５００ｎｍがより好ましい。）の範囲内に少なくとも約５０の分子吸光係数を有する化合物を、少なくとも１種含有していることが好ましい。 <Photopolymerization initiator>
The colored composition of the present invention preferably contains a photopolymerization initiator from the viewpoint of further improving sensitivity.
The photopolymerization initiator is not particularly limited as long as it has the ability to initiate polymerization of the polymerizable compound, and can be appropriately selected from known photopolymerization initiators. For example, those having photosensitivity to visible light from the ultraviolet region are preferable. Further, it may be an activator that generates some action with a photoexcited sensitizer and generates an active radical, or may be an initiator that initiates cationic polymerization according to the type of monomer.
The photopolymerization initiator preferably contains at least one compound having a molecular extinction coefficient of at least about 50 within a range of about 300 nm to 800 nm (more preferably 330 nm to 500 nm).
　上記光重合開始剤としては、例えば、ハロゲン化炭化水素誘導体（例えば、トリアジン骨格を有するもの、オキサジアゾール骨格を有するもの、など）、アシルホスフィンオキサイド等のアシルホスフィン化合物、ヘキサアリールビイミダゾール、オキシム誘導体等のオキシム化合物、有機過酸化物、チオ化合物、ケトン化合物、芳香族オニウム塩、ケトオキシムエーテル、アミノアセトフェノン化合物、ヒドロキシアセトフェノンなどが挙げられ、オキシム化合物が好ましい。 Examples of the photopolymerization initiator include halogenated hydrocarbon derivatives (for example, those having a triazine skeleton, those having an oxadiazole skeleton, etc.), acylphosphine compounds such as acylphosphine oxide, hexaarylbiimidazole, oxime. Examples include oxime compounds such as derivatives, organic peroxides, thio compounds, ketone compounds, aromatic onium salts, ketoxime ethers, aminoacetophenone compounds, hydroxyacetophenone, and the like, with oxime compounds being preferred.
　また、露光感度の観点から、トリハロメチルトリアジン化合物、ベンジルジメチルケタール化合物、α－ヒドロキシケトン化合物、α－アミノケトン化合物、アシルホスフィン化合物、フォスフィンオキサイド化合物、メタロセン化合物、オキシム化合物、トリアリルイミダゾールダイマー、オニウム化合物、ベンゾチアゾール化合物、ベンゾフェノン化合物、アセトフェノン化合物およびその誘導体、シクロペンタジエン－ベンゼン－鉄錯体およびその塩、ハロメチルオキサジアゾール化合物、３－アリール置換クマリン化合物からなる群より選択される化合物が好ましい。 From the viewpoint of exposure sensitivity, trihalomethyltriazine compounds, benzyldimethylketal compounds, α-hydroxyketone compounds, α-aminoketone compounds, acylphosphine compounds, phosphine oxide compounds, metallocene compounds, oxime compounds, triallylimidazole dimers, oniums Compounds selected from the group consisting of compounds, benzothiazole compounds, benzophenone compounds, acetophenone compounds and derivatives thereof, cyclopentadiene-benzene-iron complexes and salts thereof, halomethyloxadiazole compounds, and 3-aryl substituted coumarin compounds are preferred.
　さらに好ましくは、トリハロメチルトリアジン化合物、α－アミノケトン化合物、アシルホスフィン化合物、フォスフィンオキサイド化合物、オキシム化合物、トリアリルイミダゾールダイマー、トリアリールイミダゾール化合物、ベンゾイミダゾール化合物、オニウム化合物、ベンゾフェノン化合物、アセトフェノン化合物であり、トリハロメチルトリアジン化合物、α－アミノケトン化合物、オキシム化合物、トリアリルイミダゾール化合物、ベンゾフェノン化合物、トリアリールイミダゾール化合物、ベンゾイミダゾール化合物からなる群より選ばれる少なくとも一種の化合物が特に好ましい。また、トリアリールイミダゾール化合物は、ベンゾイミダゾールとの混合物であってもよい。
　具体的には、トリハロメチルトリアジン化合物としては、以下の化合物が例示される。なお、Ｐｈはフェニル基である。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000109
 　トリアリールイミダゾール化合物、ベンゾイミダゾール化合物としては、以下の化合物が例示される。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000110
 More preferred are trihalomethyltriazine compounds, α-aminoketone compounds, acylphosphine compounds, phosphine oxide compounds, oxime compounds, triallylimidazole dimers, triarylimidazole compounds, benzimidazole compounds, onium compounds, benzophenone compounds, and acetophenone compounds. At least one compound selected from the group consisting of a trihalomethyltriazine compound, an α-aminoketone compound, an oxime compound, a triallylimidazole compound, a benzophenone compound, a triarylimidazole compound, and a benzimidazole compound is particularly preferable. The triarylimidazole compound may be a mixture with benzimidazole.
Specifically, examples of the trihalomethyltriazine compound include the following compounds. Note that Ph is a phenyl group.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000109
 Examples of the triarylimidazole compound and the benzimidazole compound include the following compounds.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000110
　トリハロメチルトリアジン化合物としては、市販品も使用でき、例えば、ＴＡＺ－１０７（みどり化学社製）を用いることもできる。
　特に、本発明の着色組成物を固体撮像素子が備えるカラーフィルタの作製に使用する場合には、微細なパターンをシャープな形状で形成する必要があるために、硬化性とともに未露光部に残渣がなく現像されることが重要である。このような観点からは、重合開始剤としてはオキシム化合物を使用することが特に好ましい。特に、固体撮像素子において微細なパターンを形成する場合、硬化用露光にステッパー露光を用いるが、この露光機はハロゲンにより損傷される場合があり、重合開始剤の添加量も低く抑える必要があるため、これらの点を考慮すれば、固体撮像素子の如き微細パターンを形成するには光重合開始剤としては、オキシム化合物を用いるのが特に好ましい。 A commercially available product can be used as the trihalomethyltriazine compound, for example, TAZ-107 (manufactured by Midori Chemical Co., Ltd.) can also be used.
In particular, when the colored composition of the present invention is used for the production of a color filter included in a solid-state imaging device, it is necessary to form a fine pattern with a sharp shape. It is important that it is developed without any problems. From such a viewpoint, it is particularly preferable to use an oxime compound as the polymerization initiator. In particular, when a fine pattern is formed in a solid-state imaging device, stepper exposure is used for curing exposure, but this exposure machine may be damaged by halogen, and it is necessary to keep the addition amount of a polymerization initiator low. Considering these points, it is particularly preferable to use an oxime compound as a photopolymerization initiator for forming a fine pattern such as a solid-state imaging device.
　上記トリアジン骨格を有するハロゲン化炭化水素化合物としては、例えば、若林ら著、Ｂｕｌｌ．Ｃｈｅｍ．Ｓｏｃ．Ｊａｐａｎ，４２、２９２４（１９６９）記載の化合物、英国特許第１３８８４９２号明細書記載の化合物、特開昭５３－１３３４２８号公報記載の化合物、独国特許第３３３７０２４号明細書記載の化合物、Ｆ．Ｃ．ＳｃｈａｅｆｅｒなどによるＪ．Ｏｒｇ．Ｃｈｅｍ．；２９、１５２７（１９６４）記載の化合物、特開昭６２－５８２４１号公報記載の化合物、特開平５－２８１７２８号公報記載の化合物、特開平５－３４９２０号公報記載化合物、米国特許第４２１２９７６号明細書に記載されている化合物、特に、特開２０１３－０７７００９号公報の段落番号００７５に記載の化合物などが挙げられる。 Examples of the halogenated hydrocarbon compound having a triazine skeleton include those described in Wakabayashi et al., Bull. Chem. Soc. Japan, 42, 2924 (1969), a compound described in British Patent No. 1388492, a compound described in JP-A-53-133428, a compound described in German Patent No. 3333724, F.I. C. J. Schaefer et al. Org. Chem. 29, 1527 (1964), compound described in JP-A-62-258241, compound described in JP-A-5-281728, compound described in JP-A-5-34920, US Pat. No. 4,221,976 And the compounds described in paragraph No. 0075 of JP2013-077009A, and the like.
　また、上記以外の光重合開始剤として、アクリジン誘導体が例示される。具体的には、特開２０１３－０７７００９号公報の段落番号００７６に記載の化合物などが挙げられこれらの内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。 Moreover, acridine derivatives are exemplified as photopolymerization initiators other than those described above. Specific examples include the compounds described in paragraph No. 0076 of JP2013-077009A, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
　上記ケトン化合物としては、例えば、特開２０１３－０７７００９号公報の段落番号００７７に記載の化合物などが挙げられこれらの内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。 Examples of the ketone compounds include compounds described in paragraph No. 0077 of JP2013-077009A, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
　光重合開始剤としては、ヒドロキシアセトフェノン化合物、アミノアセトフェノン化合物、および、アシルホスフィン化合物も好適に用いることができる。より具体的には、例えば、特開平１０－２９１９６９号公報に記載のアミノアセトフェノン系開始剤、特許第４２２５８９８号公報に記載のアシルホスフィンオキシド系開始剤も用いることができる。
　ヒドロキシアセトフェノン系開始剤としては、ＩＲＧＡＣＵＲＥ－１８４、ＤＡＲＯＣＵＲ－１１７３、ＩＲＧＡＣＵＲＥ－５００、ＩＲＧＡＣＵＲＥ－２９５９，ＩＲＧＡＣＵＲＥ－１２７（商品名：いずれもＢＡＳＦ社製）を用いることができる。アミノアセトフェノン系開始剤としては、市販品であるＩＲＧＡＣＵＲＥ－９０７、ＩＲＧＡＣＵＲＥ－３６９、および、ＩＲＧＡＣＵＲＥ－３７９（商品名：いずれもＢＡＳＦ社製）を用いることができる。アミノアセトフェノン系開始剤として、３６５ｎｍまたは４０５ｎｍ等の長波光源に吸収波長がマッチングされた特開２００９－１９１１７９号公報に記載の化合物も用いることができる。また、アシルホスフィン系開始剤としては市販品であるＩＲＧＡＣＵＲＥ－８１９やＤＡＲＯＣＵＲ－ＴＰＯ（商品名：いずれもＢＡＳＦ社製）を用いることができる。 As the photopolymerization initiator, hydroxyacetophenone compounds, aminoacetophenone compounds, and acylphosphine compounds can also be suitably used. More specifically, for example, aminoacetophenone initiators described in JP-A-10-291969 and acylphosphine oxide initiators described in Japanese Patent No. 4225898 can also be used.
As the hydroxyacetophenone-based initiator, IRGACURE-184, DAROCUR-1173, IRGACURE-500, IRGACURE-2959, IRGACURE-127 (trade names: all manufactured by BASF) can be used. As the aminoacetophenone-based initiator, commercially available products IRGACURE-907, IRGACURE-369, and IRGACURE-379 (trade names: all manufactured by BASF) can be used. As the aminoacetophenone-based initiator, compounds described in JP-A-2009-191179 whose absorption wavelength is matched with a long wave light source of 365 nm or 405 nm can also be used. As the acylphosphine initiator, commercially available products such as IRGACURE-819 and DAROCUR-TPO (trade names: both manufactured by BASF) can be used.
　光重合開始剤として、より好ましくはオキシム化合物が挙げられる。オキシム化合物の具体例としては、特開２００１－２３３８４２号公報記載の化合物、特開２０００－８００６８号公報記載の化合物、特開２００６－３４２１６６号公報記載の化合物を用いることができる。 More preferable examples of the photopolymerization initiator include oxime compounds. Specific examples of the oxime compound include compounds described in JP-A No. 2001-233842, compounds described in JP-A No. 2000-80068, and compounds described in JP-A No. 2006-342166.
　本発明における光重合開始剤として好適に用いられるオキシム誘導体等のオキシム化合物としては、例えば、３－ベンゾイロキシイミノブタン－２－オン、３－アセトキシイミノブタン－２－オン、３－プロピオニルオキシイミノブタン－２－オン、２－アセトキシイミノペンタン－３－オン、２－アセトキシイミノ－１－フェニルプロパン－１－オン、２－ベンゾイロキシイミノ－１－フェニルプロパン－１－オン、３－（４－トルエンスルホニルオキシ）イミノブタン－２－オン、および２－エトキシカルボニルオキシイミノ－１－フェニルプロパン－１－オンなどが挙げられる。 Examples of oxime compounds such as oxime derivatives that are preferably used as the photopolymerization initiator in the present invention include 3-benzoyloxyiminobutan-2-one, 3-acetoxyiminobutan-2-one, and 3-propionyloxyimino. Butan-2-one, 2-acetoxyiminopentan-3-one, 2-acetoxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 2-benzoyloxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 3- (4 -Toluenesulfonyloxy) iminobutan-2-one, 2-ethoxycarbonyloxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, and the like.
　オキシム化合物としては、Ｊ．Ｃ．Ｓ．Ｐｅｒｋｉｎ　ＩＩ（１９７９年）ｐｐ．１６５３－１６６０）、Ｊ．Ｃ．Ｓ．Ｐｅｒｋｉｎ　ＩＩ（１９７９年）ｐｐ.１５６－１６２、Ｊｏｕｒｎａｌ　ｏｆ　Ｐｈｏｔｏｐｏｌｙｍｅｒ　Ｓｃｉｅｎｃｅ　ａｎｄ　Ｔｅｃｈｎｏｌｏｇｙ（１９９５年）ｐｐ．２０２－２３２、特開２０００－６６３８５号公報記載の化合物、特開２０００－８００６８号公報、特表２００４－５３４７９７号公報、特開２００６－３４２１６６号公報の各公報に記載の化合物等が挙げられる。
　市販品ではＩＲＧＡＣＵＲＥ－ＯＸＥ０１（ＢＡＳＦ社製）、ＩＲＧＡＣＵＲＥ－ＯＸＥ０２（ＢＡＳＦ社製）、ＴＲ－ＰＢＧ－３０４（常州強力電子新材料有限公司社製）も好適に用いられる。 Examples of oxime compounds include J.M. C. S. Perkin II (1979) pp. 1653-1660), J.M. C. S. Perkin II (1979) pp. 156-162, Journal of Photopolymer Science and Technology (1995) pp. 202-232, compounds described in JP-A No. 2000-66385, compounds described in JP-A Nos. 2000-80068, JP-T 2004-534797, JP-A No. 2006-342166, and the like.
IRGACURE-OXE01 (manufactured by BASF), IRGACURE-OXE02 (manufactured by BASF), and TR-PBG-304 (manufactured by Changzhou Strong Electronic New Materials Co., Ltd.) are also preferably used as commercial products.
　また上記記載以外のオキシム化合物として、カルバゾールＮ位にオキシムが連結した特表２００９－５１９９０４号公報に記載の化合物、ベンゾフェノン部位にヘテロ置換基が導入された米国特許第７６２６９５７号公報に記載の化合物、色素部位にニトロ基が導入された特開２０１０－１５０２５号公報および米国特許公開２００９－２９２０３９号記載の化合物、国際公開特許２００９－１３１１８９号公報に記載のケトオキシム化合物、トリアジン骨格とオキシム骨格を同一分子内に含有する米国特許７５５６９１０号公報に記載の化合物、４０５ｎｍに吸収極大を有しｇ線光源に対して良好な感度を有する特開２００９－２２１１１４号公報記載の化合物、などを用いてもよい。 Further, as oxime compounds other than those described above, compounds described in JP-A-2009-519904 in which an oxime is linked to the carbazole N-position, compounds described in US Pat. No. 7,626,957 in which a hetero substituent is introduced into the benzophenone moiety, Compounds described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-15025 and US Patent Publication No. 2009-292039, in which a nitro group is introduced into the dye moiety, a ketoxime compound described in International Patent Publication No. 2009-131189, a triazine skeleton and an oxime skeleton in the same molecule A compound described in US Pat. No. 7,556,910 contained therein, a compound described in JP-A-2009-221114 having an absorption maximum at 405 nm and good sensitivity to a g-line light source, and the like may be used.
　好ましくはさらに、特開２００７－２３１０００号公報、および、特開２００７－３２２７４４号公報に記載される環状オキシム化合物に対しても好適に用いることができる。環状オキシム化合物の中でも、特に特開２０１０－３２９８５号公報、特開２０１０－１８５０７２号公報に記載されるカルバゾール色素に縮環した環状オキシム化合物は、高い光吸収性を有し高感度化の観点から好ましい。
　また、オキシム化合物の特定部位に不飽和結合を有する特開２００９－２４２４６９号公報に記載の化合物も、重合不活性ラジカルから活性ラジカルを再生することで高感度化を達成でき好適に使用することができる。 Preferably, it can also be suitably used for the cyclic oxime compounds described in JP-A-2007-231000 and JP-A-2007-322744. Among cyclic oxime compounds, in particular, cyclic oxime compounds fused to carbazole dyes described in JP2010-32985A and JP2010-185072A have high light absorptivity and high sensitivity. preferable.
Further, the compounds described in JP-A-2009-242469 having an unsaturated bond at a specific site of the oxime compound can be preferably used because high sensitivity can be achieved by regenerating the active radical from the polymerization inert radical. it can.
　特に好ましくは、特開２００７－２６９７７９号公報に示される特定置換基を有するオキシム化合物や、特開２００９－１９１０６１号公報に示されるチオアリール基を有するオキシム化合物が挙げられる。
　具体的には、光重合開始剤であるオキシム化合物としては、下記一般式（ＯＸ－１）で表される化合物が好ましい。なお、オキシムのＮ－Ｏ結合が（Ｅ）体のオキシム化合物であっても、（Ｚ）体のオキシム化合物であっても、（Ｅ）体と（Ｚ）体との混合物であってもよい。 Particularly preferred are oxime compounds having a specific substituent as disclosed in JP 2007-26997A and oxime compounds having a thioaryl group as disclosed in JP 2009-191061 A.
Specifically, the oxime compound that is a photopolymerization initiator is preferably a compound represented by the following general formula (OX-1). The oxime N—O bond may be an (E) oxime compound, a (Z) oxime compound, or a mixture of (E) and (Z) isomers. .
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000111
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000111
　一般式（ＯＸ－１）中、ＲおよびＢは各々独立に一価の置換基を表し、Ａは二価の有機基を表し、Ａｒはアリール基を表す。
　一般式（ＯＸ－１）中、Ｒで表される一価の置換基としては、一価の非金属原子団であることが好ましい。
　上記一価の非金属原子団としては、アルキル基、アリール基、アシル基、アルコキシカルボニル基、アリールオキシカルボニル基、複素環基、アルキルチオカルボニル基、アリールチオカルボニル基等が挙げられる。また、これらの基は、１以上の置換基を有していてもよい。また、前述した置換基は、さらに他の置換基で置換されていてもよい。
　置換基としてはハロゲン原子、アリールオキシ基、アルコキシカルボニル基またはアリールオキシカルボニル基、アシルオキシ基、アシル基、アルキル基、アリール基等が挙げられる。 In general formula (OX-1), R and B each independently represent a monovalent substituent, A represents a divalent organic group, and Ar represents an aryl group.
In the general formula (OX-1), the monovalent substituent represented by R is preferably a monovalent nonmetallic atomic group.
Examples of the monovalent nonmetallic atomic group include an alkyl group, an aryl group, an acyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkylthiocarbonyl group, and an arylthiocarbonyl group. Moreover, these groups may have one or more substituents. Moreover, the substituent mentioned above may be further substituted by another substituent.
Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an aryloxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group or an aryloxycarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, an acyl group, an alkyl group, and an aryl group.
　以下好適に用いられるオキシム化合物の具体例（Ｃ－４）～（Ｃ－１３）を以下に示すが、本発明はこれらに限定されるものではない。 Specific examples (C-4) to (C-13) of oxime compounds that can be suitably used are shown below, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000112
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000112
　オキシム化合物は、３５０ｎｍ～５００ｎｍの波長領域に極大吸収波長を有するものであり、３６０ｎｍ～４８０ｎｍの波長領域に吸収波長を有するものであることが好ましく、３６５ｎｍおよび４５５ｎｍの吸光度が高いものが特に好ましい。 The oxime compound has a maximum absorption wavelength in a wavelength region of 350 nm to 500 nm, preferably has an absorption wavelength in a wavelength region of 360 nm to 480 nm, and particularly preferably has a high absorbance at 365 nm and 455 nm.
　オキシム化合物は、３６５ｎｍまたは４０５ｎｍにおけるモル吸光係数は、感度の観点から、１,０００～３００，０００であることが好ましく、２,０００～３００，０００であることがより好ましく、５,０００～２００，０００であることが特に好ましい。
　化合物のモル吸光係数は、公知の方法を用いることができるが、具体的には、例えば、紫外可視分光光度計（Ｖａｒｉａｎ社製Ｃａｒｒｙ－５　ｓｐｃｔｒｏｐｈｏｔｏｍｅｔｅｒ）にて、酢酸エチル溶媒を用い、０．０１ｇ／Ｌの濃度で測定することが好ましい。 The molar extinction coefficient at 365 nm or 405 nm of the oxime compound is preferably 1,000 to 300,000, more preferably 2,000 to 300,000, more preferably 5,000 to 200, from the viewpoint of sensitivity. Is particularly preferred.
A known method can be used for the molar extinction coefficient of the compound. Specifically, for example, 0.01 g of an ultraviolet-visible spectrophotometer (Varian Inc., Carry-5 spctrophotometer) is used with an ethyl acetate solvent. It is preferable to measure at a concentration of / L.
　本発明の着色組成物に光重合開始剤が含有する場合、光重合開始剤の含有量は、着色組成物の全固形分に対し０．１質量％以上５０質量％以下であることが好ましく、より好ましくは０．５質量％以上３０質量％以下、さらに好ましくは１質量％以上２０質量％以下である。この範囲で、より良好な感度とパターン形成性が得られる。
　本発明の組成物は、光重合開始剤を、１種類のみを含んでいてもよいし、２種類以上含んでいてもよい。２種類以上含む場合は、その合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 When the photopolymerization initiator is contained in the colored composition of the present invention, the content of the photopolymerization initiator is preferably 0.1% by mass or more and 50% by mass or less based on the total solid content of the color composition, More preferably, they are 0.5 mass% or more and 30 mass% or less, More preferably, they are 1 mass% or more and 20 mass% or less. Within this range, better sensitivity and pattern formability can be obtained.
The composition of the present invention may contain only one type of photopolymerization initiator, or may contain two or more types. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
＜顔料＞
　本発明の着色組成物は、さらに、上記色素多量体以外の着色剤を含んでいても良い。具体的には、顔料を含有することが好ましい。
　本発明で使用する顔料としては、従来公知の種々の無機顔料または有機顔料を用いることができ、有機顔料を用いることが好ましい。上記顔料としては、高透過率であることが好ましい。 <Pigment>
The colored composition of the present invention may further contain a colorant other than the above-mentioned dye multimer. Specifically, it is preferable to contain a pigment.
As the pigment used in the present invention, various conventionally known inorganic pigments or organic pigments can be used, and organic pigments are preferably used. The pigment preferably has a high transmittance.
　無機顔料としては、金属酸化物、金属錯塩等で示される金属化合物を挙げることができ、具体的には、鉄、コバルト、アルミニウム、カドミウム、鉛、銅、チタン、マグネシウム、クロム、亜鉛、アンチモン等の金属酸化物、および上記金属の複合酸化物を挙げることができる。 Examples of inorganic pigments include metal compounds represented by metal oxides, metal complex salts, and the like. Specifically, iron, cobalt, aluminum, cadmium, lead, copper, titanium, magnesium, chromium, zinc, antimony, etc. And metal oxides of the above metals.
　有機顔料としては、例えば、
Ｃ．Ｉ．ピグメントイエロー１１，２４，３１，５３，８３，９３，９９，１０８，１０９，１１０，１３８，１３９，１４７，１５０，１５１，１５４，１５５，１６７，１８０，１８５，１９９，；
Ｃ．Ｉ．ピグメントオレンジ３６，３８，４３，７１；
Ｃ．Ｉ．ピグメントレッド８１，１０５，１２２，１４９，１５０，１５５，１７１，１７５，１７６，１７７，２０９，２２０，２２４，２４２，２５４，２５５，２６４，２７０；
Ｃ．Ｉ．ピグメントバイオレット１９，２３，３２，３９；
Ｃ．Ｉ．ピグメントブルー１，２，１５，１５：１，１５：３，１５：６，１６，２２，６０，６６；
Ｃ．Ｉ．ピグメントグリーン７，３６，３７，５８；
Ｃ．Ｉ．ピグメントブラウン２５，２８；
Ｃ．Ｉ．ピグメントブラック１，７；
等を挙げることができる。 As an organic pigment, for example,
C. I. Pigment yellow 11,24,31,53,83,93,99,108,109,110,138,139,147,150,151,154,155,167,180,185,199;
C. I. Pigment orange 36, 38, 43, 71;
C. I. Pigment red 81,105,122,149,150,155,171,175,176,177,209,220,224,242,254,255,264,270;
C. I. Pigment violet 19, 23, 32, 39;
C. I. Pigment Blue 1, 2, 15, 15: 1, 15: 3, 15: 6, 16, 22, 60, 66;
C. I. Pigment green 7, 36, 37, 58;
C. I. Pigment brown 25, 28;
C. I. Pigment black 1, 7;
Etc.
　本発明において好ましく用いることができる顔料として、以下のものを挙げることができる。但し本発明は、これらに限定されるものではない。 Examples of pigments that can be preferably used in the present invention include the following. However, the present invention is not limited to these.
　Ｃ．Ｉ．ピグメントイエロー１１，２４，１０８，１０９，１１０，１３８，１３９，１５０，１５１，１５４，１６７，１８０，１８５，
　Ｃ．Ｉ．ピグメントオレンジ３６，７１，
　Ｃ．Ｉ．ピグメントレッド１２２，１５０，１７１，１７５，１７７，２０９，２２４，２４２，２５４，２５５，２６４，
　Ｃ．Ｉ．ピグメントバイオレット１９，２３，３２，
　Ｃ．Ｉ．ピグメントブルー１５：１，１５：３，１５：６，１６，２２，６０，６６，
　Ｃ．Ｉ．ピグメントグリーン７，３６，３７，５８；
　Ｃ．Ｉ．ピグメントブラック１，７ C. I. Pigment Yellow 11, 24, 108, 109, 110, 138, 139, 150, 151, 154, 167, 180, 185
C. I. Pigment orange 36, 71,
C. I. Pigment Red 122, 150, 171, 175, 177, 209, 224, 242, 254, 255, 264
C. I. Pigment violet 19, 23, 32,
C. I. Pigment Blue 15: 1, 15: 3, 15: 6, 16, 22, 60, 66,
C. I. Pigment green 7, 36, 37, 58;
C. I. Pigment Black 1,7
　これら有機顔料は、単独もしくは、分光の調整や色純度を上げるために種々組合せて用いることができる。上記組合せの具体例を以下に示す。例えば、赤の顔料として、アントラキノン系顔料、ペリレン系顔料、ジケトピロロピロール系顔料単独またはそれらの少なくとも一種と、ジスアゾ系黄色顔料、イソインドリン系黄色顔料、キノフタロン系黄色顔料またはペリレン系赤色顔料と、の混合などを用いることができる。例えば、アントラキノン系顔料としては、Ｃ．Ｉ．ピグメントレッド１７７が挙げられ、ペリレン系顔料としては、Ｃ．Ｉ．ピグメントレッド１５５、Ｃ．Ｉ．ピグメントレッド２２４が挙げられ、ジケトピロロピロール系顔料としては、Ｃ．Ｉ．ピグメントレッド２５４が挙げられ、色分解性の点でＣ．Ｉ．ピグメントイエロー１３９との混合が好ましい。また、赤色顔料と黄色顔料との質量比は、１００：５～１００：５０が好ましい。１００：４以下では４００ｎｍから５００ｎｍの光透過率を抑えることが困難であり、また１００：５１以上では主波長が短波長寄りになり、色分解能を上げることができない場合がある。特に、上記質量比としては、１００：１０～１００：３０の範囲が最適である。尚、赤色顔料同士の組み合わせの場合は、求める分光に併せて調整することができる。 These organic pigments can be used alone or in various combinations in order to adjust the spectrum and increase the color purity. Specific examples of the above combinations are shown below. For example, as a red pigment, an anthraquinone pigment, a perylene pigment, a diketopyrrolopyrrole pigment alone or at least one of them, a disazo yellow pigment, an isoindoline yellow pigment, a quinophthalone yellow pigment or a perylene red pigment , Etc. can be used. For example, as an anthraquinone pigment, C.I. I. Pigment red 177, and perylene pigments include C.I. I. Pigment red 155, C.I. I. Pigment Red 224, and diketopyrrolopyrrole pigments include C.I. I. Pigment Red 254, and C.I. I. Mixing with Pigment Yellow 139 is preferred. The mass ratio of the red pigment to the yellow pigment is preferably 100: 5 to 100: 50. When the ratio is 100: 4 or less, it is difficult to suppress the light transmittance from 400 nm to 500 nm. When the ratio is 100: 51 or more, the main wavelength tends to be closer to the short wavelength, and the color resolution may not be improved. In particular, the mass ratio is optimally in the range of 100: 10 to 100: 30. In the case of a combination of red pigments, it can be adjusted in accordance with the required spectrum.
　また、緑の顔料としては、ハロゲン化フタロシアニン系顔料を単独で、または、これとジスアゾ系黄色顔料、キノフタロン系黄色顔料、アゾメチン系黄色顔料若しくはイソインドリン系黄色顔料との混合を用いることができる。例えば、このような例としては、Ｃ．Ｉ．ピグメントグリーン７、３６、３７とＣ．Ｉ．ピグメントイエロー８３、Ｃ．Ｉ．ピグメントイエロー１３８、Ｃ．Ｉ．ピグメントイエロー１３９、Ｃ．Ｉ．ピグメントイエロー１５０、Ｃ．Ｉ．ピグメントイエロー１８０またはＣ．Ｉ．ピグメントイエロー１８５との混合が好ましい。緑顔料と黄色顔料との質量比は、１００：５～１００：１５０が好ましい。上記質量比としては１００：３０～１００：１２０の範囲が特に好ましい。 As the green pigment, a halogenated phthalocyanine pigment can be used alone, or a mixture thereof with a disazo yellow pigment, a quinophthalone yellow pigment, an azomethine yellow pigment, or an isoindoline yellow pigment can be used. For example, C.I. I. Pigment Green 7, 36, 37 and C.I. I. Pigment yellow 83, C.I. I. Pigment yellow 138, C.I. I. Pigment yellow 139, C.I. I. Pigment yellow 150, C.I. I. Pigment yellow 180 or C.I. I. Mixing with Pigment Yellow 185 is preferred. The mass ratio of green pigment to yellow pigment is preferably 100: 5 to 100: 150. The mass ratio is particularly preferably in the range of 100: 30 to 100: 120.
　青の顔料としては、フタロシアニン系顔料を単独で、若しくはこれとジオキサジン系紫色顔料との混合を用いることができる。例えばＣ．Ｉ．ピグメントブルー１５：６とＣ．Ｉ．ピグメントバイオレット２３との混合が好ましい。青色顔料と紫色顔料との質量比は、１００：０～１００：１００が好ましく、より好ましくは１００：１０以下である。 As the blue pigment, a phthalocyanine pigment can be used alone, or a mixture of this with a dioxazine purple pigment can be used. For example, C.I. I. Pigment blue 15: 6 and C.I. I. Mixing with pigment violet 23 is preferred. The mass ratio of the blue pigment to the violet pigment is preferably 100: 0 to 100: 100, more preferably 100: 10 or less.
　また、ブラックマトリックス用の顔料としては、カーボン、チタンブラック、酸化鉄、酸化チタン単独または混合が用いられ、カーボンとチタンブラックとの組合せが好ましい。また、カーボンとチタンブラックとの質量比は、１００：０～１００：６０の範囲が好ましい。 Further, as the pigment for the black matrix, carbon, titanium black, iron oxide, titanium oxide alone or a mixture thereof is used, and a combination of carbon and titanium black is preferable. The mass ratio of carbon to titanium black is preferably in the range of 100: 0 to 100: 60.
　本発明の着色組成物は、黒以外の顔料を配合することが好ましく、青色の顔料に適している。 The coloring composition of the present invention preferably contains a pigment other than black, and is suitable for a blue pigment.
　顔料の一次粒子サイズは、カラーフィルタ用として用いる場合には、色ムラやコントラストの観点から、１００ｎｍ以下であることが好ましく、また、分散安定性の観点から５ｎｍ以上であることが好ましい。顔料の一次粒子サイズとしてより好ましくは、５～７５ｎｍであり、さらに好ましくは５～５５ｎｍであり、特に好ましくは５～３５ｎｍである。
　顔料の一次粒子サイズは、電子顕微鏡等の公知の方法で測定することができる。
　中でも、顔料としては、アントラキノン顔料、ジケトピロロピロール顔料、フタロシアニン顔料、キノフタロン顔料、イソインドリン顔料、アゾメチン顔料、およびジオキサジン顔料から選ばれる顔料であることが好ましい。特に、Ｃ．Ｉ．ピグメントレッド１７７（アントラキノン顔料），Ｃ．Ｉ．ピグメントレッド２５４（ジケトピロロピロール顔料）、Ｃ．Ｉ．ピグメントグリーン７，３６，５８、Ｃ．Ｉ．ピグメントブルー１５：６（フタロシアニン顔料）、Ｃ．Ｉ．ピグメントイエロー１３８（キノフタロン顔料）、Ｃ．Ｉ．ピグメントイエロー１３９，１８５（イソインドリン顔料）、Ｃ．Ｉ．ピグメントイエロー１５０（アゾメチン顔料）、Ｃ．Ｉ．ピグメントバイオレット２３（ジオキサジン顔料）が特に好ましい。 When used for a color filter, the primary particle size of the pigment is preferably 100 nm or less from the viewpoint of color unevenness and contrast, and is preferably 5 nm or more from the viewpoint of dispersion stability. The primary particle size of the pigment is more preferably 5 to 75 nm, further preferably 5 to 55 nm, and particularly preferably 5 to 35 nm.
The primary particle size of the pigment can be measured by a known method such as an electron microscope.
Among these, the pigment is preferably a pigment selected from anthraquinone pigments, diketopyrrolopyrrole pigments, phthalocyanine pigments, quinophthalone pigments, isoindoline pigments, azomethine pigments, and dioxazine pigments. In particular, C.I. I. Pigment red 177 (anthraquinone pigment), C.I. I. Pigment red 254 (diketopyrrolopyrrole pigment), C.I. I. Pigment green 7, 36, 58, C.I. I. Pigment Blue 15: 6 (phthalocyanine pigment), C.I. I. Pigment yellow 138 (quinophthalone pigment), C.I. I. Pigment yellow 139,185 (isoindoline pigment), C.I. I. Pigment yellow 150 (azomethine pigment), C.I. I. Pigment violet 23 (dioxazine pigment) is particularly preferred.
　顔料の含有量は、着色組成物に含有される溶剤を除いた全成分に対して、１０質量％～７０質量％が好ましく、より好ましくは２０質量％～６０質量％であり、さらに好ましくは２５質量％～５０質量％である。
　本発明の組成物は、顔料を、１種類のみを含んでいてもよいし、２種類以上含んでいてもよい。２種類以上含む場合は、その合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 The content of the pigment is preferably 10% by mass to 70% by mass, more preferably 20% by mass to 60% by mass, and still more preferably 25%, based on all components excluding the solvent contained in the coloring composition. % By mass to 50% by mass.
The composition of the present invention may contain only one type of pigment or two or more types of pigment. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
　また、本発明では、上記色素多量体以外の染料や上述以外の顔料を含んでいても良い。例えば特開昭６４－９０４０３号公報、特開昭６４－９１１０２号公報、特開平１－９４３０１号公報、特開平６－１１６１４号公報、特登２５９２２０７号、米国特許４８０８５０１号明細書、米国特許５６６７９２０号明細書、米国特許５０５９５０号明細書、米国特許５６６７９２０号明細書、特開平５－３３３２０７号公報、特開平６－３５１８３号公報、特開平６－５１１１５号公報、特開平６－１９４８２８号公報等に開示されている色素を使用できる。化学構造としては、ピラゾールアゾ系、アニリノアゾ系、トリフェニルメタン系、アントラキノン系、ベンジリデン系、オキソノール系、ピラゾロトリアゾールアゾ系、ピリドンアゾ系、シアニン系、フェノチアジン系、ピロロピラゾールアゾメチン系等の染料を使用できる。 In the present invention, dyes other than the above-mentioned dye multimers and pigments other than those described above may be included. For example, JP-A-64-90403, JP-A-64-91102, JP-A-1-94301, JP-A-6-11614, Tokuho 2592207, U.S. Pat. No. 4,808,501, U.S. Pat. No., US Pat. No. 505950, US Pat. No. 5,667,920, JP-A-5-333207, JP-A-6-35183, JP-A-6-51115, JP-A-6-194828, etc. Can be used. The chemical structure uses dyes such as pyrazole azo, anilino azo, triphenylmethane, anthraquinone, benzylidene, oxonol, pyrazolotriazole azo, pyridone azo, cyanine, phenothiazine, pyrrolopyrazole azomethine. it can.
＜顔料分散剤＞
　本発明の着色組成物が顔料を有する場合は、顔料分散剤を、所望により併用することができる。
　本発明に用いうる顔料分散剤としては、高分子分散剤〔例えば、ポリアミドアミンとその塩、ポリカルボン酸とその塩、高分子量不飽和酸エステル、変性ポリウレタン、変性ポリエステル、変性ポリ（メタ）アクリレート、（メタ）アクリル系共重合体、ナフタレンスルホン酸ホルマリン縮合物〕、および、ポリオキシエチレンアルキルリン酸エステル、ポリオキシエチレンアルキルアミン、アルカノールアミン等の界面活性剤、および、顔料誘導体等を挙げることができる。
　高分子分散剤は、その構造からさらに直鎖状高分子、末端変性型高分子、グラフト型高分子、ブロック型高分子に分類することができる。 <Pigment dispersant>
When the coloring composition of the present invention has a pigment, a pigment dispersant can be used in combination as desired.
Examples of pigment dispersants that can be used in the present invention include polymer dispersants [for example, polyamidoamines and salts thereof, polycarboxylic acids and salts thereof, high molecular weight unsaturated acid esters, modified polyurethanes, modified polyesters, and modified poly (meth) acrylates. , (Meth) acrylic copolymers, naphthalenesulfonic acid formalin condensates], and surfactants such as polyoxyethylene alkyl phosphate esters, polyoxyethylene alkyl amines, alkanol amines, and pigment derivatives, etc. Can do.
The polymer dispersant can be further classified into a linear polymer, a terminal-modified polymer, a graft polymer, and a block polymer according to the structure.
　顔料表面へのアンカー部位を有する末端変性型高分子としては、例えば、特開平３－１１２９９２号公報、特表２００３－５３３４５５号公報等に記載の末端にりん酸基を有する高分子、特開２００２－２７３１９１号公報等に記載の末端にスルホン酸基を有する高分子、特開平９－７７９９４号公報等に記載の有機色素の部分骨格や複素環を有する高分子などが挙げられる。また、特開２００７－２７７５１４号公報に記載の高分子末端に２個以上の顔料表面へのアンカー部位（酸基、塩基性基、有機色素の部分骨格やヘテロ環等）を導入した高分子も分散安定性に優れ好ましい。 Examples of the terminal-modified polymer having an anchor site to the pigment surface include a polymer having a phosphate group at the terminal described in JP-A-3-112992, JP-A-2003-533455, and the like. Examples thereof include polymers having a sulfonic acid group at the terminal end described in JP-A-273191 and the like, and polymers having a partial skeleton of an organic dye and a heterocyclic ring described in JP-A-9-77994. In addition, polymers having two or more pigment surface anchor sites (acid groups, basic groups, organic dye partial skeletons, heterocycles, etc.) introduced at the polymer ends described in JP-A-2007-277514 are also available. It is preferable because of excellent dispersion stability.
　顔料表面へのアンカー部位を有するグラフト型高分子としては、例えば、ポリエステル系分散剤等が挙げられ、具体的には、特開昭５４－３７０８２号公報、特表平８－５０７９６０号公報、特開２００９－２５８６６８号公報等に記載のポリ（低級アルキレンイミン）とポリエステルの反応生成物、特開平９－１６９８２１号公報等に記載のポリアリルアミンとポリエステルの反応生成物、特開平１０－３３９９４９号公報、特開２００４－３７９８６号公報、国際公開パンフレットＷＯ２０１０／１１０４９１等に記載のマクロモノマーと、窒素原子モノマーとの共重合体、特開２００３－２３８８３７号公報、特開２００８－９４２６号公報、特開２００８－８１７３２号公報等に記載の有機色素の部分骨格や複素環を有するグラフト型高分子、特開２０１０－１０６２６８号公報等に記載のマクロモノマーと酸基含有モノマーの共重合体等が挙げられる。特に、特開２００９－２０３４６２号公報に記載の塩基性基と酸性基を有する両性分散樹脂は、顔料分散物の分散性、分散安定性、および顔料分散物を用いた着色組成物が示す現像性の観点から特に好ましい。 Examples of the graft polymer having an anchor site to the pigment surface include a polyester-based dispersant, and specific examples thereof include JP-A-54-37082, JP-A-8-507960, Reaction products of poly (lower alkyleneimine) and polyester described in JP-A-2009-258668, etc., reaction products of polyallylamine and polyester described in JP-A-9-169821, etc., JP-A-10-339949 A copolymer of a macromonomer and a nitrogen atom monomer described in JP-A-2004-37986, International Publication Pamphlet WO 2010/110491, JP-A-2003-238837, JP-A-2008-9426, JP-A Graphs having partial skeletons and heterocyclic rings of organic dyes described in JP-A-2008-81732 Type polymer, and a copolymer of a macromonomer and acid group-containing monomers described in JP 2010-106268 Publication. In particular, the amphoteric dispersion resin having a basic group and an acidic group described in JP-A-2009-203462 has the dispersibility and dispersion stability of the pigment dispersion and the developability exhibited by the color composition using the pigment dispersion. From the viewpoint of
　顔料表面へのアンカー部位を有するグラフト型高分子をラジカル重合で製造する際に用いるマクロモノマーとしては、公知のマクロモノマーを用いることができ、東亜合成（株）製のマクロモノマーＡＡ－６（末端基がメタクリロイル基であるポリメタクリル酸メチル）、ＡＳ－６（末端基がメタクリロイル基であるポリスチレン）、ＡＮ－６Ｓ（末端基がメタクリロイル基であるスチレンとアクリロニトリルの共重合体）、ＡＢ－６（末端基がメタクリロイル基であるポリアクリル酸ブチル）、ダイセル化学工業（株）製のプラクセルＦＭ５（メタクリル酸２－ヒドロキシエチルのε－カプロラクトン５モル当量付加品）、ＦＡ１０Ｌ（アクリル酸２－ヒドロキシエチルのε－カプロラクトン１０モル当量付加品）、および特開平２－２７２００９号公報に記載のポリエステル系マクロモノマー等が挙げられる。これらの中でも、特に柔軟性且つ親溶剤性に優れるポリエステル系マクロモノマーが、顔料分散物の分散性、分散安定性、および顔料分散物を用いた着色組成物が示す現像性の観点から特に好ましく、さらに、特開平２－２７２００９号公報に記載のポリエステル系マクロモノマーで表されるポリエステル系マクロモノマーが特に好ましい。 As the macromonomer used when the graft polymer having an anchor site to the pigment surface is produced by radical polymerization, a known macromonomer can be used. Macromonomer AA-6 (terminal) manufactured by Toa Gosei Co., Ltd. Polymethyl methacrylate having a methacryloyl group), AS-6 (polystyrene having a methacryloyl group at the end group), AN-6S (a copolymer of styrene and acrylonitrile having a methacryloyl group at the end group), AB-6 ( Polybutyl acrylate whose end group is a methacryloyl group), Plaxel FM5 manufactured by Daicel Chemical Industries, Ltd. (5-hydroxyethyl methacrylate, ε-caprolactone 5 molar equivalent addition product), FA10L (2-hydroxyethyl acrylate) ε-caprolactone 10 molar equivalent addition product), and JP-A-2-27 Examples thereof include a polyester-based macromonomer described in the 2009 publication. Among these, a polyester-based macromonomer that is particularly excellent in flexibility and solvophilicity is particularly preferable from the viewpoint of dispersibility of the pigment dispersion, dispersion stability, and developability exhibited by the coloring composition using the pigment dispersion, Furthermore, a polyester macromonomer represented by a polyester macromonomer described in JP-A-2-272009 is particularly preferable.
　顔料表面へのアンカー部位を有するブロック型高分子としては、特開２００３－４９１１０号公報、特開２００９－５２０１０号公報等に記載のブロック型高分子が好ましい。 As the block polymer having an anchor site to the pigment surface, block polymers described in JP-A Nos. 2003-49110 and 2009-52010 are preferable.
　本発明に用いうる顔料分散剤は、市販品としても入手可能であり、そのような具体例としては、楠木化成株式会社製「ＤＡ－７３０１」、ＢＹＫＣｈｅｍｉｅ社製「Ｄｉｓｐｅｒｂｙｋ－１０１（ポリアミドアミン燐酸塩）、１０７（カルボン酸エステル）、１１０、１１１（酸基を含む共重合物）、１３０（ポリアミド）、１６１、１６２、１６３、１６４、１６５、１６６、１７０（高分子共重合物）」、「ＢＹＫ－Ｐ１０４、Ｐ１０５（高分子量不飽和ポリカルボン酸）、ＥＦＫＡ社製「ＥＦＫＡ４０４７、４０５０～４０１０～４１６５（ポリウレタン系）、ＥＦＫＡ４３３０～４３４０（ブロック共重合体）、４４００～４４０２（変性ポリアクリレート）、５０１０（ポリエステルアミド）、５７６５（高分子量ポリカルボン酸塩）、６２２０（脂肪酸ポリエステル）、６７４５（フタロシアニン誘導体）、６７５０（アゾ顔料誘導体）」、味の素ファンテクノ社製「アジスパーＰＢ８２１、ＰＢ８２２、ＰＢ８８０、ＰＢ８８１」、共栄社化学社製「フローレンＴＧ－７１０（ウレタンオリゴマー）」、「ポリフローＮｏ．５０Ｅ、Ｎｏ．３００（アクリル系共重合体）」、楠本化成社製「ディスパロンＫＳ－８６０、８７３ＳＮ、８７４、＃２１５０（脂肪族多価カルボン酸）、＃７００４（ポリエーテルエステル）、ＤＡ－７０３－５０、ＤＡ－７０５、ＤＡ－７２５」、花王社製「デモールＲＮ、Ｎ（ナフタレンスルホン酸ホルマリン重縮合物）、ＭＳ、Ｃ、ＳＮ－Ｂ（芳香族スルホン酸ホルマリン重縮合物）」、「ホモゲノールＬ－１８（高分子ポリカルボン酸）」、「エマルゲン９２０、９３０、９３５、９８５（ポリオキシエチレンノニルフェニルエーテル）」、「アセタミン８６（ステアリルアミンアセテート）」、日本ルーブリゾール（株）製「ソルスパース５０００（フタロシアニン誘導体）、２２０００（アゾ顔料誘導体）、１３２４０（ポリエステルアミン）、３０００、１７０００、２７０００（末端部に機能部を有する高分子）、２４０００、２８０００、３２０００、３８５００（グラフト型高分子）」、日光ケミカル者製「ニッコールＴ１０６（ポリオキシエチレンソルビタンモノオレート）、ＭＹＳ－ＩＥＸ（ポリオキシエチレンモノステアレート）」、川研ファインケミカル（株）製　ヒノアクトＴ－８０００Ｅ等、信越化学工業（株）製、オルガノシロキサンポリマーＫＰ３４１、裕商（株）製「Ｗ００１：カチオン系界面活性剤」、ポリオキシエチレンラウリルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンステアリルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンオレイルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンオクチルフェニルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンノニルフェニルエーテル、ポリエチレングリコールジラウレート、ポリエチレングリコールジステアレート、ソルビタン脂肪酸エステル等のノニオン系界面活性剤、「Ｗ００４、Ｗ００５、Ｗ０１７」等のアニオン系界面活性剤、森下産業（株）製「ＥＦＫＡ－４６、ＥＦＫＡ－４７、ＥＦＫＡ－４７ＥＡ、ＥＦＫＡポリマー１００、ＥＦＫＡポリマー４００、ＥＦＫＡポリマー４０１、ＥＦＫＡポリマー４５０」、サンノプコ（株）製「ディスパースエイド６、ディスパースエイド８、ディスパースエイド１５、ディスパースエイド９１００」等の高分子分散剤、（株）ＡＤＥＫＡ製「アデカプルロニックＬ３１、Ｆ３８、Ｌ４２、Ｌ４４、Ｌ６１、Ｌ６４、Ｆ６８、Ｌ７２、Ｐ９５、Ｆ７７、Ｐ８４、Ｆ８７、Ｐ９４、Ｌ１０１、Ｐ１０３、Ｆ１０８、Ｌ１２１、Ｐ－１２３」、および三洋化成（株）製「イオネット（商品名）Ｓ－２０」等が挙げられる。 The pigment dispersant that can be used in the present invention is also available as a commercial product. Specific examples thereof include “DA-7301” manufactured by Kashiwagi Kasei Co., Ltd., “Disperbyk-101 (polyamidoamine phosphate) manufactured by BYK Chemie. ), 107 (carboxylic acid ester), 110, 111 (copolymer containing an acid group), 130 (polyamide), 161, 162, 163, 164, 165, 166, 170 (polymer copolymer) ”,“ BYK-P104, P105 (high molecular weight unsaturated polycarboxylic acid), “EFKA 4047, 4050 to 4010 to 4165 (polyurethane type), EFKA 4330 to 4340 (block copolymer), 4400 to 4402 (modified polyacrylate), manufactured by EFKA, 5010 (polyesteramide), 5765 (high molecular weight polycarboxylic acid) Salt), 6220 (fatty acid polyester), 6745 (phthalocyanine derivative), 6750 (azo pigment derivative) ”,“ Ajisper PB821, PB822, PB880, PB881 ”manufactured by Ajinomoto Fan Techno Co.,“ Floren TG-710 (urethane) manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd. Oligomer) ”,“ Polyflow No. 50E, No. 300 (acrylic copolymer) ”,“ Disparon KS-860, 873SN, 874, # 2150 (aliphatic polycarboxylic acid), # 7004 (manufactured by Enomoto Kasei Co., Ltd.) Polyether ester), DA-703-50, DA-705, DA-725 "," Demol RN, N (Naphthalenesulfonic acid formalin polycondensate), MS, C, SN-B (aromatic sulfonic acid) "manufactured by Kao Corporation Formalin polycondensate) ”,“ homogenol L-18 (polymer polycal) Acid ")," Emulgen 920, 930, 935, 985 (polyoxyethylene nonylphenyl ether) "," Acetamine 86 (stearylamine acetate) "," Solsperse 5000 (phthalocyanine derivative) "manufactured by Nippon Lubrizol Co., Ltd., 22000 (Azo Pigment Derivatives), 13240 (Polyesteramine), 3000, 17000, 27000 (Polymer having a functional part at the end), 24000, 28000, 32000, 38500 (graft type polymer) ”,“ Nikkor ”manufactured by Nikko Chemicals T106 (polyoxyethylene sorbitan monooleate), MYS-IEX (polyoxyethylene monostearate) ”, Kawano Fine Chemical Co., Ltd., Hinoact T-8000E, etc., Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., organosiloxane polymer -KP341, "W001: Cationic surfactant" manufactured by Yusho Co., Ltd., polyoxyethylene lauryl ether, polyoxyethylene stearyl ether, polyoxyethylene oleyl ether, polyoxyethylene octyl phenyl ether, polyoxyethylene nonyl phenyl ether , Nonionic surfactants such as polyethylene glycol dilaurate, polyethylene glycol distearate, sorbitan fatty acid ester, anionic surfactants such as “W004, W005, W017”, “EFKA-46, EFKA-” manufactured by Morishita Sangyo Co., Ltd. 47, EFKA-47EA, EFKA polymer 100, EFKA polymer 400, EFKA polymer 401, EFKA polymer 450 "," Disperse Aid 6, Disperse Aid by San Nopco Corporation 8, Disperse Aid 15, Disperse Aid 9100 and other polymer dispersants, manufactured by ADEKA Corporation “Adeka Pluronic L31, F38, L42, L44, L61, L64, F68, L72, P95, F77, P84, F87” , P94, L101, P103, F108, L121, P-123 ”,“ Ionet (trade name) S-20 ”manufactured by Sanyo Kasei Co., Ltd., and the like.
　これらの顔料分散剤は、単独で使用してもよく、２種以上を組み合わせて使用してもよい。本発明においては、特に、顔料誘導体と高分子分散剤とを組み合わせて使用することが好ましい。また、顔料分散剤は、上記顔料表面へのアンカー部位を有する末端変性型高分子、グラフト型高分子、ブロック型高分子と伴に、アルカリ可溶性樹脂と併用して用いても良い。アルカリ可溶性樹脂としては、（メタ）アクリル酸共重合体、イタコン酸共重合体、クロトン酸共重合体、マレイン酸共重合体、部分エステル化マレイン酸共重合体等、並びに側鎖にカルボン酸を有する酸性セルロース誘導体、が挙げられるが、特に（メタ）アクリル酸共重合体が好ましい。また、特開平１０－３００９２２号公報に記載のＮ位置換マレイミドモノマー共重合体、特開２００４－３００２０４号公報に記載のエーテルダイマー共重合体、特開平７－３１９１６１号公報に記載の重合性基を含有するアルカリ可溶性樹脂も好ましい。具体的には、アルカリ可溶性樹脂：メタクリル酸ベンジル／メタクリル酸／メタクリル酸－２－ヒドロキシエチル共重合体が例示される。 These pigment dispersants may be used alone or in combination of two or more. In the present invention, it is particularly preferable to use a combination of a pigment derivative and a polymer dispersant. The pigment dispersant may be used in combination with an alkali-soluble resin together with the terminal-modified polymer, graft polymer, or block polymer having an anchor site to the pigment surface. Alkali-soluble resins include (meth) acrylic acid copolymer, itaconic acid copolymer, crotonic acid copolymer, maleic acid copolymer, partially esterified maleic acid copolymer, etc., and carboxylic acid in the side chain. Examples thereof include acidic cellulose derivatives, and (meth) acrylic acid copolymers are particularly preferable. Further, N-substituted maleimide monomer copolymers described in JP-A-10-300922, an ether dimer copolymer described in JP-A-2004-300204, and a polymerizable group described in JP-A-7-319161. An alkali-soluble resin containing is also preferred. Specifically, an alkali-soluble resin: benzyl methacrylate / methacrylic acid / methacrylic acid-2-hydroxyethyl copolymer is exemplified.
　着色組成物において、顔料分散剤を含有する場合、顔料分散剤の総含有量としては、顔料１００質量部に対して、１質量部～８０質量部であることが好ましく、５質量部～７０質量部がより好ましく、１０質量部～６０質量部であることがさらに好ましい。特定分散樹脂は、着色組成物に含有される分散剤成分のうち、５０質量％以上であることが好ましく、６０質量％以上であることがより好ましく７０質量％以上であることがさらに好ましい。
　本発明の組成物は、顔料分散剤を、それぞれ、１種類のみを含んでいてもよいし、２種類以上含んでいてもよい。２種類以上含む場合は、その合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 When the coloring composition contains a pigment dispersant, the total content of the pigment dispersant is preferably 1 part by weight to 80 parts by weight with respect to 100 parts by weight of the pigment, and 5 parts by weight to 70 parts by weight. More preferred is 10 parts by mass to 60 parts by mass. The specific dispersion resin is preferably 50% by mass or more, more preferably 60% by mass or more, and still more preferably 70% by mass or more, among the dispersant components contained in the coloring composition.
The composition of the present invention may contain only one type of pigment dispersant, or two or more types of pigment dispersants. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
　具体的には、高分子分散剤を用いる場合であれば、その使用量としては、顔料１００質量部に対して、質量換算で５質量部～１００質量部の範囲が好ましく、１０質量部～８０部の範囲であることがより好ましい。
　また、顔料誘導体を併用する場合、顔料誘導体の使用量としては、顔料１００質量部に対し、質量換算で１質量部～３０質量部の範囲にあることが好ましく、３質量部～２０質量部の範囲にあることがより好ましく、５質量部～１５質量部の範囲にあることが特に好ましい。 Specifically, when a polymer dispersant is used, the amount used is preferably in the range of 5 to 100 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the pigment, and 10 to 80 parts by mass. More preferred is the range of parts.
When the pigment derivative is used in combination, the amount of the pigment derivative used is preferably in the range of 1 to 30 parts by mass in terms of mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the pigment. The range is more preferable, and the range of 5 to 15 parts by mass is particularly preferable.
　着色組成物において、硬化感度、色濃度の観点から、着色剤および分散剤成分の含有量の総和が、着色組成物を構成する全固形分に対して５０質量％以上９０質量％以下であることが好ましく、５５質量％以上８５質量％以下であることがより好ましく、６０質量％以上８０質量％以下であることがさらに好ましい。 In the coloring composition, from the viewpoint of curing sensitivity and color density, the total content of the coloring agent and the dispersing agent component is 50% by mass or more and 90% by mass or less with respect to the total solid content constituting the coloring composition. Is more preferable, 55 mass% or more and 85 mass% or less is more preferable, and 60 mass% or more and 80 mass% or less is further more preferable.
＜（Ｆ）アルカリ可溶性樹脂＞
　本発明の着色組成物は、さらに、アルカリ可溶性樹脂を含有することが好ましい。
　アルカリ可溶性樹脂の分子量としては、特に定めるものではないが、Ｍｗが５０００～１００，０００であることが好ましい。また、Ｍｎは１０００～２０，０００であることが好ましい。 <(F) Alkali-soluble resin>
The coloring composition of the present invention preferably further contains an alkali-soluble resin.
The molecular weight of the alkali-soluble resin is not particularly defined, but it is preferable that Mw is 5000 to 100,000. Further, Mn is preferably 1000 to 20,000.
　アルカリ可溶性樹脂としては、線状有機高分子重合体であって、分子（好ましくは、アクリル系共重合体、スチレン系共重合体を主鎖とする分子）中に少なくとも１つのアルカリ可溶性を促進する基を有するアルカリ可溶性樹脂の中から適宜選択することができる。耐熱性の観点からは、ポリヒドロキシスチレン系樹脂、ポリシロキサン系樹脂、アクリル系樹脂、アクリルアミド系樹脂、アクリル／アクリルアミド共重合体樹脂が好ましく、現像性制御の観点からは、アクリル系樹脂、アクリルアミド系樹脂、アクリル／アクリルアミド共重合体樹脂が好ましい。 The alkali-soluble resin is a linear organic polymer, and promotes at least one alkali-solubility in a molecule (preferably a molecule having an acrylic copolymer or a styrene copolymer as a main chain). It can be suitably selected from alkali-soluble resins having a group. From the viewpoint of heat resistance, polyhydroxystyrene resins, polysiloxane resins, acrylic resins, acrylamide resins, and acryl / acrylamide copolymer resins are preferable. From the viewpoint of development control, acrylic resins and acrylamide resins are preferable. Resins and acrylic / acrylamide copolymer resins are preferred.
　アルカリ可溶性を促進する基（以下、酸基ともいう）としては、例えば、カルボキシル基、リン酸基、スルホン酸基、フェノール性水酸基などが挙げられるが、有機溶剤に可溶で弱アルカリ水溶液により現像可能なものが好ましく、（メタ）アクリル酸が特に好ましいものとして挙げられる。これら酸基は、１種のみであってもよいし、２種以上であってもよい。 Examples of the group that promotes alkali solubility (hereinafter also referred to as an acid group) include a carboxyl group, a phosphoric acid group, a sulfonic acid group, and a phenolic hydroxyl group. The group is soluble in an organic solvent and developed with a weak alkaline aqueous solution. Possible are preferable, and (meth) acrylic acid is particularly preferable. These acid groups may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
　上記重合後に酸基を付与しうるモノマーとしては、例えば、２－ヒドロキシエチル（メタ）アクリレート等の水酸基を有するモノマー、グリシジル（メタ）アクリレート等のエポキシ基を有するモノマー、２－イソシアナートエチル（メタ）アクリレート等のイソシアネート基を有するモノマー等が挙げられる。これら酸基を導入するための単量体は、１種のみであってもよいし、２種以上であってもよい。アルカリ可溶性樹脂に酸基を導入するには、例えば、酸基を有するモノマーおよび／または重合後に酸基を付与しうるモノマー（以下「酸基を導入するための単量体」と称することもある。）を、単量体成分として重合するようにすればよい。
　なお、重合後に酸基を付与しうるモノマーを単量体成分として酸基を導入する場合には、重合後に例えば後述するような酸基を付与するための処理が必要となる。 Examples of the monomer capable of imparting an acid group after the polymerization include, for example, a monomer having a hydroxyl group such as 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate, a monomer having an epoxy group such as glycidyl (meth) acrylate, and 2-isocyanatoethyl (methacrylate). ) Monomers having an isocyanate group such as acrylate. These monomers for introducing an acid group may be only one type or two or more types. In order to introduce an acid group into an alkali-soluble resin, for example, a monomer having an acid group and / or a monomer capable of imparting an acid group after polymerization (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “monomer for introducing an acid group”) .) May be polymerized as a monomer component.
In addition, when introducing an acid group using a monomer capable of imparting an acid group after polymerization as a monomer component, for example, a treatment for imparting an acid group as described later is required after the polymerization.
　アルカリ可溶性樹脂の製造には、例えば、公知のラジカル重合法による方法を適用することができる。ラジカル重合法でアルカリ可溶性樹脂を製造する際の温度、圧力、ラジカル開始剤の種類およびその量、溶媒の種類等々の重合条件は、当業者において容易に設定可能であり、実験的に条件を定めるようにすることもできる。 For the production of the alkali-soluble resin, for example, a known radical polymerization method can be applied. Polymerization conditions such as temperature, pressure, type and amount of radical initiator, type of solvent, etc. when producing an alkali-soluble resin by radical polymerization can be easily set by those skilled in the art, and the conditions are determined experimentally. It can also be done.
　アルカリ可溶性樹脂として用いられる線状有機高分子重合体としては、側鎖にカルボン酸を有するポリマーが好ましく、メタクリル酸共重合体、アクリル酸共重合体、イタコン酸共重合体、クロトン酸共重合体、マレイン酸共重合体、部分エステル化マレイン酸共重合体、ノボラック型樹脂などのアルカリ可溶性フェノール樹脂等、並びに側鎖にカルボン酸を有する酸性セルロース誘導体、水酸基を有するポリマーに酸無水物を付加させたもの挙げられる。特に、（メタ）アクリル酸と、これと共重合可能な他の単量体との共重合体が、アルカリ可溶性樹脂として好適である。（メタ）アクリル酸と共重合可能な他の単量体としては、アルキル（メタ）アクリレート、アリール（メタ）アクリレート、ビニル化合物などが挙げられる。アルキル（メタ）アクリレートおよびアリール（メタ）アクリレートとしては、メチル（メタ）アクリレート、エチル（メタ）アクリレート、プロピル（メタ）アクリレート、ブチル（メタ）アクリレート、イソブチル（メタ）アクリレート、ペンチル（メタ）アクリレート、ヘキシル（メタ）アクリレート、オクチル（メタ）アクリレート、フェニル（メタ）アクリレート、ベンジル（メタ）アクリレート、トリル（メタ）アクリレート、ナフチル（メタ）アクリレート、シクロヘキシル（メタ）アクリレート等、ビニル化合物としては、スチレン、α－メチルスチレン、ビニルトルエン、グリシジルメタクリレート、アクリロニトリル、ビニルアセテート、Ｎ－ビニルピロリドン、テトラヒドロフルフリルメタクリレート、ポリスチレンマクロモノマー、ポリメチルメタクリレートマクロモノマー等、特開平１０－３００９２２号公報に記載のＮ位置換マレイミドモノマーとして、Ｎ―フェニルマレイミド、Ｎ－シクロヘキシルマレイミド等を挙げることができる。なお、これらの（メタ）アクリル酸と共重合可能な他の単量体は１種のみであってもよいし、２種以上であってもよい。
　アルカリ可溶性樹脂としては、下記一般式（ＥＤ）で示される化合物および／または下記一般式（ＥＤ２）で表される化合物（以下、これらの化合物を「エーテルダイマー」と称することもある。）を必須とする単量体成分を重合してなるポリマー（ａ）を含むことも好ましい。 As the linear organic polymer used as the alkali-soluble resin, a polymer having a carboxylic acid in the side chain is preferable, such as a methacrylic acid copolymer, an acrylic acid copolymer, an itaconic acid copolymer, and a crotonic acid copolymer. , Maleic acid copolymers, partially esterified maleic acid copolymers, alkali-soluble phenolic resins such as novolak resins, etc., acid cellulose derivatives having a carboxylic acid in the side chain, and acid anhydrides added to polymers having a hydroxyl group. Can be mentioned. In particular, a copolymer of (meth) acrylic acid and another monomer copolymerizable therewith is suitable as the alkali-soluble resin. Examples of other monomers copolymerizable with (meth) acrylic acid include alkyl (meth) acrylates, aryl (meth) acrylates, and vinyl compounds. As alkyl (meth) acrylate and aryl (meth) acrylate, methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, propyl (meth) acrylate, butyl (meth) acrylate, isobutyl (meth) acrylate, pentyl (meth) acrylate, Examples of vinyl compounds such as hexyl (meth) acrylate, octyl (meth) acrylate, phenyl (meth) acrylate, benzyl (meth) acrylate, tolyl (meth) acrylate, naphthyl (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, styrene, α-methylstyrene, vinyltoluene, glycidyl methacrylate, acrylonitrile, vinyl acetate, N-vinylpyrrolidone, tetrahydrofurfuryl methacrylate, polystyrene Macromonomer, polymethylmethacrylate macromonomer, as N-position-substituted maleimide monomer described in JP-A-10-300922, may be mentioned N- phenylmaleimide, an N- cyclohexyl maleimide and the like. In addition, only 1 type may be sufficient as the other monomer copolymerizable with these (meth) acrylic acids, and 2 or more types may be sufficient as it.
As the alkali-soluble resin, a compound represented by the following general formula (ED) and / or a compound represented by the following general formula (ED2) (hereinafter, these compounds may be referred to as “ether dimers”) are essential. It is also preferable to include a polymer (a) obtained by polymerizing the monomer component.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000113
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000113
　一般式（ＥＤ）中、Ｒ1およびＲ2は、それぞれ独立して、水素原子または置換基を有していてもよい炭素数１～２５の炭化水素基を表す。
一般式（ＥＤ２）
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000114
 　一般式（ＥＤ２）中、Ｒは、水素原子または炭素数１～３０の有機基を表す。一般式（ＥＤ２）の具体例としては、特開２０１０－１６８５３９号公報の記載を参酌できる。 In general formula (ED), R 1 and R 2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 25 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
General formula (ED2)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000114
 In general formula (ED2), R represents a hydrogen atom or an organic group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms. As a specific example of the general formula (ED2), the description in JP 2010-168539 A can be referred to.
　これにより、本発明の着色組成物は、耐熱性とともに透明性にも極めて優れた硬化塗膜を形成しうる。上記エーテルダイマーを示す上記一般式（１）中、Ｒ1およびＲ2で表される置換基を有していてもよい炭素数１～２５の炭化水素基としては、特に制限はないが、例えば、メチル、エチル、ｎ－プロピル、イソプロピル、ｎ－ブチル、イソブチル、ｔｅｒｔ－ブチル、ｔｅｒｔ－アミル、ステアリル、ラウリル、２－エチルヘキシル等の直鎖状または分岐状のアルキル基；フェニル等のアリール基；シクロヘキシル、ｔｅｒｔ－ブチルシクロヘキシル、ジシクロペンタジエニル、トリシクロデカニル、イソボルニル、アダマンチル、２－メチル－２－アダマンチル等の脂環式基；１－メトキシエチル、１－エトキシエチル等のアルコキシで置換されたアルキル基；ベンジル等のアリール基で置換されたアルキル基；等が挙げられる。これらの中でも特に、メチル、エチル、シクロヘキシル、ベンジル等のような酸や熱で脱離しにくい１級または２級炭素の置換基が耐熱性の点で好ましい。 Thereby, the coloring composition of this invention can form the cured coating film which was very excellent also in transparency with heat resistance. In the general formula (1) showing the ether dimer, the hydrocarbon group having 1 to 25 carbon atoms which may have a substituent represented by R 1 and R 2 is not particularly limited. Linear or branched alkyl groups such as methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, isobutyl, tert-butyl, tert-amyl, stearyl, lauryl, 2-ethylhexyl; aryl groups such as phenyl; Alicyclic groups such as cyclohexyl, tert-butylcyclohexyl, dicyclopentadienyl, tricyclodecanyl, isobornyl, adamantyl, 2-methyl-2-adamantyl; substituted with alkoxy such as 1-methoxyethyl, 1-ethoxyethyl An alkyl group substituted with an aryl group such as benzyl; and the like. Among these, an acid such as methyl, ethyl, cyclohexyl, benzyl or the like, or a primary or secondary carbon substituent which is difficult to be removed by heat is preferable from the viewpoint of heat resistance.
　上記エーテルダイマーの具体例としては、例えば、ジメチル－２，２'－［オキシビス（メチレン）］ビス－２－プロペノエート、ジエチル－２，２'－［オキシビス（メチレン）］ビス－２－プロペノエート、ジ（ｎ－プロピル）－２，２'－［オキシビス（メチレン）］ビス－２－プロペノエート、ジ（イソプロピル）－２，２'－［オキシビス（メチレン）］ビス－２－プロペノエート、ジ（ｎ－ブチル）－２，２'－［オキシビス（メチレン）］ビス－２－プロペノエート、ジ（イソブチル）－２，２'－［オキシビス（メチレン）］ビス－２－プロペノエート、ジ（ｔｅｒｔ－ブチル）－２，２'－［オキシビス（メチレン）］ビス－２－プロペノエート、ジ（ｔｅｒｔ－アミル）－２，２'－［オキシビス（メチレン）］ビス－２－プロペノエート、ジ（ステアリル）－２，２'－［オキシビス（メチレン）］ビス－２－プロペノエート、ジ（ラウリル）－２，２'－［オキシビス（メチレン）］ビス－２－プロペノエート、ジ（２－エチルヘキシル）－２，２'－［オキシビス（メチレン）］ビス－２－プロペノエート、ジ（１－メトキシエチル）－２，２'－［オキシビス（メチレン）］ビス－２－プロペノエート、ジ（１－エトキシエチル）－２，２'－［オキシビス（メチレン）］ビス－２－プロペノエート、ジベンジル－２，２'－［オキシビス（メチレン）］ビス－２－プロペノエート、ジフェニル－２，２'－［オキシビス（メチレン）］ビス－２－プロペノエート、ジシクロヘキシル－２，２'－［オキシビス（メチレン）］ビス－２－プロペノエート、ジ（ｔｅｒｔ－ブチルシクロヘキシル）－２，２'－［オキシビス（メチレン）］ビス－２－プロペノエート、ジ（ジシクロペンタジエニル）－２，２'－［オキシビス（メチレン）］ビス－２－プロペノエート、ジ（トリシクロデカニル）－２，２'－［オキシビス（メチレン）］ビス－２－プロペノエート、ジ（イソボルニル）－２，２'－［オキシビス（メチレン）］ビス－２－プロペノエート、ジアダマンチル－２，２'－［オキシビス（メチレン）］ビス－２－プロペノエート、ジ（２－メチル－２－アダマンチル）－２，２'－［オキシビス（メチレン）］ビス－２－プロペノエート等が挙げられる。これらの中でも特に、ジメチル－２，２'－［オキシビス（メチレン）］ビス－２－プロペノエート、ジエチル－２，２'－［オキシビス（メチレン）］ビス－２－プロペノエート、ジシクロヘキシル－２，２'－［オキシビス（メチレン）］ビス－２－プロペノエート、ジベンジル－２，２'－［オキシビス（メチレン）］ビス－２－プロペノエートが好ましい。これらエーテルダイマーは、１種のみであってもよいし、２種以上であってもよい。上記一般式（ＥＤ）で示される化合物由来の構造体は、その他の単量体を共重合させてもよい。 Specific examples of the ether dimer include dimethyl-2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, diethyl-2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, (N-propyl) -2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, di (isopropyl) -2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, di (n-butyl) ) -2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, di (isobutyl) -2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, di (tert-butyl) -2, 2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, di (tert-amyl) -2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-pro Noate, di (stearyl) -2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, di (lauryl) -2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, di (2- Ethylhexyl) -2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, di (1-methoxyethyl) -2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, di (1-ethoxy) Ethyl) -2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, dibenzyl-2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, diphenyl-2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene) )] Bis-2-propenoate, dicyclohexyl-2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, di (tert-butyl) Dicyclohexyl) -2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, di (dicyclopentadienyl) -2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, di (tri Cyclodecanyl) -2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, di (isobornyl) -2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, diadamantyl-2,2 Examples include '-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate and di (2-methyl-2-adamantyl) -2,2'-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate. Among these, dimethyl-2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, diethyl-2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, dicyclohexyl-2,2′- [Oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate and dibenzyl-2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate are preferred. These ether dimers may be only one kind or two or more kinds. The structure derived from the compound represented by the general formula (ED) may be copolymerized with other monomers.
　また、アルカリ可溶性樹脂は、下記式（Ｘ）で示されるエチレン性不飽和単量体に由来する構造単位を含んでいてもよい。
一般式（Ｘ）
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000115
 （式（Ｘ）において、Ｒ1は、水素原子またはメチル基を表し、Ｒ2は炭素数２～１０のアルキレン基を表し、Ｒ3は、水素原子またはベンゼン環を含んでもよい炭素数１～２０のアルキル基を表す。ｎは１～１５の整数を表す。） Moreover, alkali-soluble resin may contain the structural unit derived from the ethylenically unsaturated monomer shown by following formula (X).
Formula (X)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000115
 (In Formula (X), R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, R 2 represents an alkylene group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms, and R 3 represents a hydrogen atom or a benzene ring which may contain a benzene ring. And represents an alkyl group of 20. n represents an integer of 1 to 15.)
　上記式（Ｘ）において、Ｒ2のアルキレン基の炭素数は、２～３であることが好ましい。また、Ｒ3のアルキル基の炭素数は１～２０であるが、より好ましくは１～１０であり、Ｒ3のアルキル基はベンゼン環を含んでもよい。Ｒ3で表されるベンゼン環を含むアルキル基としては、ベンジル基、２－フェニル（イソ）プロピル基等を挙げることができる。 In the above formula (X), the alkylene group of R 2 preferably has 2 to 3 carbon atoms. The alkyl group of R 3 has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 10, and the alkyl group of R 3 may contain a benzene ring. Examples of the alkyl group containing a benzene ring represented by R 3 include a benzyl group and a 2-phenyl (iso) propyl group.
　また、本発明における着色組成物の架橋効率を向上させるために、重合性基を有したアルカリ可溶性樹脂を使用することが好ましい。このようなアルカリ可溶性樹脂を用いると本発明の効果がより向上する傾向にある。さらに、耐光性や耐熱性もより向上する傾向にある。重合性基を有したアルカリ可溶性樹脂としては、アリル基、（メタ）アクリル基、アリルオキシアルキル基等を側鎖に含有したアルカリ可溶性樹脂等が有用である。上述の重合性基を含有するポリマーの例としては、ダイヤナ－ルＮＲシリーズ（三菱レイヨン株式会社製）、Ｐｈｏｔｏｍｅｒ６１７３（COOH含有 polyurethane acrylic oligomer. Diamond Shamrock Co.Ltd.,製）、ビスコートＲ－２６４、ＫＳレジスト１０６(いずれも大阪有機化学工業株式会社製)、サイクロマーＰシリーズ、プラクセル　ＣＦ２００シリーズ（いずれもダイセル化学工業株式会社製）、Ｅｂｅｃｒｙｌ３８００（ダイセルユーシービー株式会社製）などが挙げられる。これら重合性基を含有するアルカリ可溶性樹脂としては、予めイソシアネート基とＯＨ基を反応させ、未反応のイソシアネート基を１つ残し、かつ（メタ）アクリロイル基を含む化合物とカルボキシル基を含むアクリル樹脂との反応によって得られるウレタン変性した重合性二重結合含有アクリル樹脂、カルボキシル基を含むアクリル樹脂と分子内にエポキシ基および重合性二重結合を共に有する化合物との反応によって得られる不飽和基含有アクリル樹脂、酸ペンダント型エポキシアクリレート樹脂、ＯＨ基を含むアクリル樹脂と重合性二重結合を有する２塩基酸無水物を反応させた重合性二重結合含有アクリル樹脂、ＯＨ基を含むアクリル樹脂とイソシアネートと重合性基を有する化合物を反応させた樹脂、特開２００２－２２９２０７号公報および特開２００３－３３５８１４号公報に記載されるα位またはβ位にハロゲン原子或いはスルホネート基などの脱離基を有するエステル基を側鎖に有する樹脂を、塩基性処理することで得られる樹脂などが好ましい。 In order to improve the crosslinking efficiency of the colored composition in the present invention, it is preferable to use an alkali-soluble resin having a polymerizable group. When such an alkali-soluble resin is used, the effect of the present invention tends to be further improved. Furthermore, light resistance and heat resistance tend to be further improved. As the alkali-soluble resin having a polymerizable group, an alkali-soluble resin containing an allyl group, a (meth) acryl group, an allyloxyalkyl group or the like in the side chain is useful. Examples of the above-described polymer containing a polymerizable group include a dial NR series (manufactured by Mitsubishi Rayon Co., Ltd.), Photomer 6173 (COOH-containing polyurethane acrylic oligomer. Diamond Shamrock Co.Ltd.), Biscote R-264, KS resist 106 (all manufactured by Osaka Organic Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), Cyclomer P series, Plaxel CF200 series (all manufactured by Daicel Chemical Industries, Ltd.), Ebecryl 3800 (manufactured by Daicel UCB Co., Ltd.), and the like. As an alkali-soluble resin containing these polymerizable groups, an isocyanate group and an OH group are reacted in advance to leave one unreacted isocyanate group and a compound containing a (meth) acryloyl group and an acrylic resin containing a carboxyl group; Urethane-modified polymerizable double bond-containing acrylic resin obtained by the above reaction, unsaturated group-containing acrylic obtained by reaction of an acrylic resin containing a carboxyl group and a compound having both an epoxy group and a polymerizable double bond in the molecule Resin, acid pendant type epoxy acrylate resin, OH group-containing acrylic resin and polymerizable double bond-containing acrylic resin obtained by reacting a polymerizable double bond, OH group-containing acrylic resin and isocyanate Resin obtained by reacting compound having polymerizable group, JP 2002-229207 A Resin obtained by basic treatment of a resin having an ester group having a leaving group such as a halogen atom or a sulfonate group at the α-position or β-position described in JP-A-2003-335814 Etc. are preferable.
　アルカリ可溶性樹脂としては、特に、（メタ）アクリル酸ベンジル／（メタ）アクリル酸共重合体や（メタ）アクリル酸ベンジル／（メタ）アクリル酸／他のモノマーからなる多元共重合体が好適である。この他、２－ヒドロキシエチルメタクリレートを共重合した（メタ）アクリル酸ベンジル／（メタ）アクリル酸／（メタ）アクリル酸－２－ヒドロキシエチル共重合体、特開平７－１４０６５４号公報に記載の２－ヒドロキシプロピル（メタ）アクリレート／ポリスチレンマクロモノマー／ベンジルメタクリレート／メタクリル酸共重合体、２－ヒドロキシ－３－フェノキシプロピルアクリレート／ポリメチルメタクリレートマクロモノマー／ベンジルメタクリレート／メタクリル酸共重合体、２－ヒドロキシエチルメタクリレート／ポリスチレンマクロモノマー／メチルメタクリレート／メタクリル酸共重合体、２－ヒドロキシエチルメタクリレート／ポリスチレンマクロモノマー／ベンジルメタクレート／メタクリル酸共重合体などが挙げられ、特に好ましくはメタクリル酸ベンジル／メタクリル酸の共重合体等が挙げられる。 As the alkali-soluble resin, in particular, a benzyl (meth) acrylate / (meth) acrylic acid copolymer or a multi-component copolymer composed of benzyl (meth) acrylate / (meth) acrylic acid / other monomers is suitable. . In addition, benzyl (meth) acrylate / (meth) acrylic acid / (meth) acrylic acid-2-hydroxyethyl copolymer copolymerized with 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate, 2 described in JP-A-7-140654 -Hydroxypropyl (meth) acrylate / polystyrene macromonomer / benzyl methacrylate / methacrylic acid copolymer, 2-hydroxy-3-phenoxypropyl acrylate / polymethyl methacrylate macromonomer / benzyl methacrylate / methacrylic acid copolymer, 2-hydroxyethyl Methacrylate / polystyrene macromonomer / methyl methacrylate / methacrylic acid copolymer, 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate / polystyrene macromonomer / benzyl methacrylate / methacrylic acid copolymer, etc. Are particularly preferred examples include a copolymer of benzyl methacrylate / methacrylic acid.
　アルカリ可溶性樹脂としては、特開２０１２－２０８４９４号公報段落０５５８～０５７１（対応する米国特許出願公開第２０１２／０２３５０９９号明細書の[０６８５]～[０７００]）以降の記載を参酌でき、これらの内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。
　さらに、特開２０１２－３２７６７号公報に記載の段落番号００２９～００６３に記載の共重合体（Ｂ）および実施例で用いられているアルカリ可溶性樹脂、特開２０１２－２０８４７４号公報の段落番号００８８～００９８に記載のバインダー樹脂および実施例で用いられているバインダー樹脂、特開２０１２－１３７５３１号公報の段落番号００２２～００３２に記載のバインダー樹脂および実施例で用いられているバインダー樹脂、特開２０１３－０２４９３４号公報の段落番号０１３２～０１４３に記載のバインダー樹脂および実施例で用いられているバインダー樹脂、特開２０１１－２４２７５２号公報の段落番号００９２～００９８および実施例で用いられているバインダー樹脂、特開２０１２－０３２７７０号公報の段落番号００３０～００７２の記載のバインダー樹脂を用いること好ましい。これらの内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。より具体的には、下記の樹脂が好ましい。 As for the alkali-soluble resin, paragraphs 0558 to 0571 of JP 2012-208494 A (corresponding to [0685] to [0700] of the corresponding US Patent Application Publication No. 2012/0235099) can be referred to, and the contents thereof can be referred to. Is incorporated herein.
Further, the copolymer (B) described in paragraph Nos. 0029 to 0063 described in JP 2012-32767 A and the alkali-soluble resin used in Examples, paragraph Nos. 0088 to 2020 of JP 2012-208474 A The binder resin described in 0098 and the binder resin used in Examples, the binder resin described in Paragraph Nos. 0022 to 0032 of JP 2012-137531 B, and the binder resin used in Examples, The binder resin described in paragraph Nos. 0132 to 0143 of No. 024934 and the binder resin used in Examples, the binder resin used in paragraph Nos. 0092 to 0098 and Examples of JP 2011-242752 A, Paragraph No. of Kokai 2012-032770 It preferred to use a binder resin according to 030-0072. These contents are incorporated herein. More specifically, the following resins are preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000116
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000116
　アルカリ可溶性樹脂の酸価としては好ましくは３０ｍｇＫＯＨ／ｇ～２００ｍｇＫＯＨ／ｇ、より好ましくは５０ｍｇＫＯＨ／ｇ～１５０ｍｇＫＯＨ／ｇであることが好ましく、７０ｍｇＫＯＨ／ｇ～１２０ｍｇＫＯＨ／ｇであることが特に好ましい。
　また、アルカリ可溶性樹脂の重量平均分子量（Ｍｗ）としては、２，０００～５０，０００が好ましく、５，０００～３０，０００がさらに好ましく、７，０００～２０，０００が特に好ましい。 The acid value of the alkali-soluble resin is preferably 30 mgKOH / g to 200 mgKOH / g, more preferably 50 mgKOH / g to 150 mgKOH / g, and particularly preferably 70 mgKOH / g to 120 mgKOH / g.
The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the alkali-soluble resin is preferably 2,000 to 50,000, more preferably 5,000 to 30,000, and particularly preferably 7,000 to 20,000.
　着色組成物中にアルカリ可溶性樹脂を含有する場合、アルカリ可溶性樹脂の含有量としては、着色組成物の全固形分に対して、１質量％～１５質量％が好ましく、より好ましくは、２質量％～１２質量％であり、特に好ましくは、３質量％～１０質量％である。
　本発明の組成物は、アルカリ可溶性樹脂を、１種類のみを含んでいてもよいし、２種類以上含んでいてもよい。２種類以上含む場合は、その合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 When the alkali-soluble resin is contained in the coloring composition, the content of the alkali-soluble resin is preferably 1% by mass to 15% by mass, more preferably 2% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the coloring composition. It is ˜12% by mass, and particularly preferably 3% by mass to 10% by mass.
The composition of the present invention may contain only one kind of alkali-soluble resin, or may contain two or more kinds. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
＜他の成分＞
　本発明の着色組成物は、上述の各成分に加えて、本発明の効果を損なわない範囲で、さらに、有機溶剤、架橋剤、重合禁止剤、界面活性剤、有機カルボン酸、有機カルボン酸無水物などの他の成分を含んでいてもよい。 <Other ingredients>
In addition to the above-mentioned components, the coloring composition of the present invention is within the range that does not impair the effects of the present invention, and further includes an organic solvent, a crosslinking agent, a polymerization inhibitor, a surfactant, an organic carboxylic acid, and an organic carboxylic acid anhydride. It may contain other components such as products.
＜＜有機溶剤＞＞
　本発明の着色組成物は、有機溶剤を含有してもよい。
　有機溶剤は、各成分の溶解性や着色組成物の塗布性を満足すれば基本的には特に制限はないが、特に紫外線吸収剤、アルカリ可溶性樹脂や分散剤等の溶解性、塗布性、安全性を考慮して選ばれることが好ましい。また、本発明における着色組成物を調製する際には、少なくとも２種類の有機溶剤を含むことが好ましい。 << Organic solvent >>
The coloring composition of the present invention may contain an organic solvent.
The organic solvent is basically not particularly limited as long as the solubility of each component and the coating property of the coloring composition are satisfied, but in particular, the solubility, coating property, and safety of ultraviolet absorbers, alkali-soluble resins and dispersants, etc. It is preferable to select in consideration of the properties. Moreover, when preparing the coloring composition in this invention, it is preferable that at least 2 type of organic solvent is included.
　有機溶剤としては、エステル類として、例えば、酢酸エチル、酢酸－ｎ－ブチル、酢酸イソブチル、ギ酸アミル、酢酸イソアミル、酢酸イソブチル、プロピオン酸ブチル、酪酸イソプロピル、酪酸エチル、酪酸ブチル、乳酸メチル、乳酸エチル、オキシ酢酸アルキル（例：オキシ酢酸メチル、オキシ酢酸エチル、オキシ酢酸ブチル（例えば、メトキシ酢酸メチル、メトキシ酢酸エチル、メトキシ酢酸ブチル、エトキシ酢酸メチル、エトキシ酢酸エチル等））、３－オキシプロピオン酸アルキルエステル類（例：３－オキシプロピオン酸メチル、３－オキシプロピオン酸エチル等（例えば、３－メトキシプロピオン酸メチル、３－メトキシプロピオン酸エチル、３－エトキシプロピオン酸メチル、３－エトキシプロピオン酸エチル等））、２－オキシプロピオン酸アルキルエステル類（例：２－オキシプロピオン酸メチル、２－オキシプロピオン酸エチル、２－オキシプロピオン酸プロピル等（例えば、２－メトキシプロピオン酸メチル、２－メトキシプロピオン酸エチル、２－メトキシプロピオン酸プロピル、２－エトキシプロピオン酸メチル、２－エトキシプロピオン酸エチル））、２－オキシ－２－メチルプロピオン酸メチルおよび２－オキシ－２－メチルプロピオン酸エチル（例えば、２－メトキシ－２－メチルプロピオン酸メチル、２－エトキシ－２－メチルプロピオン酸エチル等）、ピルビン酸メチル、ピルビン酸エチル、ピルビン酸プロピル、アセト酢酸メチル、アセト酢酸エチル、２－オキソブタン酸メチル、２－オキソブタン酸エチル等、並びに、エーテル類として、例えば、ジエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル、テトラヒドロフラン、エチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、エチレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、メチルセロソルブアセテート、エチルセロソルブアセテート、ジエチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールモノブチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート、プロピレングリコールモノエチルエーテルアセテート、プロピレングリコールモノプロピルエーテルアセテート等、並びに、ケトン類として、例えば、メチルエチルケトン、シクロヘキサノン、２－ヘプタノン、３－ヘプタノン等、並びに、芳香族炭化水素類として、例えば、トルエン、キシレン等が好適に挙げられる。 Examples of organic solvents include esters such as ethyl acetate, n-butyl acetate, isobutyl acetate, amyl formate, isoamyl acetate, isobutyl acetate, butyl propionate, isopropyl butyrate, ethyl butyrate, butyl butyrate, methyl lactate, and ethyl lactate. , Alkyl oxyacetates (eg, methyl oxyacetate, ethyl oxyacetate, butyl oxyacetate (eg, methyl methoxyacetate, ethyl methoxyacetate, butyl methoxyacetate, methyl ethoxyacetate, ethyl ethoxyacetate)), alkyl 3-oxypropionate Esters (eg, methyl 3-oxypropionate, ethyl 3-oxypropionate, etc. (eg, methyl 3-methoxypropionate, ethyl 3-methoxypropionate, methyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, etc.) )) 2 Oxypropionic acid alkyl esters (eg, methyl 2-oxypropionate, ethyl 2-oxypropionate, propyl 2-oxypropionate, etc. (eg, methyl 2-methoxypropionate, ethyl 2-methoxypropionate, 2-methoxy) Propyl propionate, methyl 2-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 2-ethoxypropionate)), methyl 2-oxy-2-methylpropionate and ethyl 2-oxy-2-methylpropionate (for example, 2-methoxy-2- Methyl methyl propionate, ethyl 2-ethoxy-2-methylpropionate, etc.), methyl pyruvate, ethyl pyruvate, propyl pyruvate, methyl acetoacetate, ethyl acetoacetate, methyl 2-oxobutanoate, ethyl 2-oxobutanoate, etc. And ethers For example, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, ethylene glycol monoethyl ether, methyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl cellosolve acetate, diethylene glycol monomethyl ether, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether, diethylene glycol monobutyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether Acetate, propylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate, propylene glycol monopropyl ether acetate and the like, and ketones such as methyl ethyl ketone, cyclohexanone, 2-heptanone and 3-heptanone, and aromatic hydrocarbons such as Tolue And xylene are preferable.
　これらの有機溶剤は、紫外線吸収剤およびアルカリ可溶性樹脂の溶解性、塗布面状の改良などの観点から、２種以上を混合することも好ましい。この場合、特に好ましくは、上記の３－エトキシプロピオン酸メチル、３－エトキシプロピオン酸エチル、エチルセロソルブアセテート、乳酸エチル、ジエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル、酢酸ブチル、３－メトキシプロピオン酸メチル、２－ヘプタノン、シクロヘキサノン、エチルカルビトールアセテート、ブチルカルビトールアセテート、プロピレングリコールメチルエーテル、およびプロピレングリコールメチルエーテルアセテートから選択される２種以上で構成される混合溶液である。 These organic solvents are preferably mixed in two or more types from the viewpoints of solubility of the ultraviolet absorber and the alkali-soluble resin, improvement of the coated surface, and the like. In this case, particularly preferably, the above-mentioned methyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl lactate, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, butyl acetate, methyl 3-methoxypropionate, 2-heptanone, cyclohexanone, ethyl It is a mixed solution composed of two or more selected from carbitol acetate, butyl carbitol acetate, propylene glycol methyl ether, and propylene glycol methyl ether acetate.
　有機溶剤の着色組成物中における含有量は、塗布性の観点から、組成物の全固形分濃度が５質量％～８０質量％になる量とすることが好ましく、５質量％～６０質量％がさらに好ましく、１０質量％～５０質量％が特に好ましい。
　本発明の組成物は、有機溶剤を、１種類のみを含んでいてもよいし、２種類以上含んでいてもよい。２種類以上含む場合は、その合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 The content of the organic solvent in the colored composition is preferably such that the total solid content of the composition is 5% by mass to 80% by mass from the viewpoint of applicability, and 5% by mass to 60% by mass. More preferred is 10% by mass to 50% by mass.
The composition of the present invention may contain only one type of organic solvent or two or more types of organic solvents. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
＜＜架橋剤＞＞
　本発明の着色組成物に補足的に架橋剤を用い、着色組成物を硬化させてなる硬化膜の硬度をより高めることもできる。
　架橋剤としては、架橋反応により膜硬化を行なえるものであれば、特に限定はなく、例えば、（ａ）エポキシ樹脂、（ｂ）メチロール基、アルコキシメチル基、およびアシロキシメチル基から選ばれる少なくとも１つの置換基で置換された、メラミン化合物、グアナミン化合物、グリコールウリル化合物またはウレア化合物、（ｃ）メチロール基、アルコキシメチル基、およびアシロキシメチル基から選ばれる少なくとも１つの置換基で置換された、フェノール化合物、ナフトール化合物またはヒドロキシアントラセン化合物、が挙げられる。中でも、多官能エポキシ樹脂が好ましい。
　架橋剤の具体例などの詳細については、特開２００４－２９５１１６号公報の段落０１３４～０１４７の記載を参照することができる。
　本発明の着色組成物中に架橋剤を含有する場合、架橋剤の配合量は、特に定めるものではないが、組成物の全固形分の２～３０質量％が好ましく、３～２０質量％がより好ましい。
　本発明の組成物は、架橋剤を、１種類のみを含んでいてもよいし、２種類以上含んでいてもよい。２種類以上含む場合は、その合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 << Crosslinking agent >>
It is also possible to further increase the hardness of the cured film obtained by curing the colored composition by using a crosslinking agent in the colored composition of the present invention.
The crosslinking agent is not particularly limited as long as the film can be cured by a crosslinking reaction. For example, at least selected from (a) an epoxy resin, (b) a methylol group, an alkoxymethyl group, and an acyloxymethyl group. Substituted with at least one substituent selected from a melamine compound, a guanamine compound, a glycoluril compound or a urea compound, (c) a methylol group, an alkoxymethyl group, and an acyloxymethyl group, which is substituted with one substituent; Phenol compounds, naphthol compounds or hydroxyanthracene compounds. Of these, polyfunctional epoxy resins are preferred.
For details such as specific examples of the crosslinking agent, the description in paragraphs 0134 to 0147 of JP-A No. 2004-295116 can be referred to.
When the coloring composition of the present invention contains a crosslinking agent, the blending amount of the crosslinking agent is not particularly defined, but is preferably 2 to 30% by mass, and preferably 3 to 20% by mass based on the total solid content of the composition. More preferred.
The composition of the present invention may contain only one type of cross-linking agent, or may contain two or more types. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
＜＜重合禁止剤＞＞
　本発明の着色組成物においては、上記着色組成物の製造中または保存中において、重合性化合物の不要な熱重合を阻止するために、少量の重合禁止剤を添加することが望ましい。
　本発明に用いうる重合禁止剤としては、ハイドロキノン、ｐ－メトキシフェノール、ジ－ｔｅｒｔ－ブチル－ｐ－クレゾール、ピロガロール、ｔｅｒｔ－ブチルカテコール、ベンゾキノン、４，４’－チオビス（３－メチル－６－ｔｅｒｔ－ブチルフェノール）、２，２’－メチレンビス（４－メチル－６－ｔｅｒｔ－ブチルフェノール）、Ｎ－ニトロソフェニルヒドロキシアミン第一セリウム塩等が挙げられる。
　本発明の着色組成物中に重合禁止剤を含有する場合、重合禁止剤の添加量は、全組成物の質量に対して、約０．０１質量％～約５質量％が好ましい。
　本発明の組成物は、重合禁止剤を、１種類のみを含んでいてもよいし、２種類以上含んでいてもよい。２種類以上含む場合は、その合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 << Polymerization inhibitor >>
In the colored composition of the present invention, it is desirable to add a small amount of a polymerization inhibitor in order to prevent unnecessary thermal polymerization of the polymerizable compound during the production or storage of the colored composition.
Examples of the polymerization inhibitor that can be used in the present invention include hydroquinone, p-methoxyphenol, di-tert-butyl-p-cresol, pyrogallol, tert-butylcatechol, benzoquinone, 4,4′-thiobis (3-methyl-6- tert-butylphenol), 2,2′-methylenebis (4-methyl-6-tert-butylphenol), N-nitrosophenylhydroxyamine primary cerium salt and the like.
When the colored composition of the present invention contains a polymerization inhibitor, the addition amount of the polymerization inhibitor is preferably about 0.01% by mass to about 5% by mass with respect to the mass of the whole composition.
The composition of the present invention may contain only one type of polymerization inhibitor, or may contain two or more types. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
＜＜界面活性剤＞＞
　本発明の着色組成物には、塗布性をより向上させる観点から、各種の界面活性剤を添加してもよい。界面活性剤としては、フッ素系界面活性剤、ノニオン系界面活性剤、カチオン系界面活性剤、アニオン系界面活性剤、シリコーン系界面活性剤などの各種界面活性剤を使用できる。 << Surfactant >>
Various surfactants may be added to the colored composition of the present invention from the viewpoint of further improving coatability. As the surfactant, various surfactants such as a fluorine-based surfactant, a nonionic surfactant, a cationic surfactant, an anionic surfactant, and a silicone-based surfactant can be used.
　特に、本発明の着色組成物は、フッ素系界面活性剤を含有することで、塗布液として調製したときの液特性（特に、流動性）がより向上することから、塗布厚の均一性や省液性をより改善することができる。
　即ち、フッ素系界面活性剤を含有する着色組成物を適用した塗布液を用いて膜形成する場合においては、被塗布面と塗布液との界面張力を低下させることにより、被塗布面への濡れ性が改善され、被塗布面への塗布性が向上する。このため、少量の液量で数μｍ程度の薄膜を形成した場合であっても、厚みムラの小さい均一厚の膜形成をより好適に行える点で有効である。 In particular, the coloring composition of the present invention contains a fluorosurfactant, so that liquid properties (particularly fluidity) when prepared as a coating solution are further improved. Liquidity can be further improved.
That is, in the case of forming a film using a coating liquid to which a coloring composition containing a fluorosurfactant is applied, wetting the coated surface by reducing the interfacial tension between the coated surface and the coating liquid. The coating property is improved and the coating property to the coated surface is improved. For this reason, even when a thin film of about several μm is formed with a small amount of liquid, it is effective in that it is possible to more suitably form a film having a uniform thickness with small thickness unevenness.
　フッ素系界面活性剤中のフッ素含有率は、３質量％～４０質量％が好適であり、より好ましくは５質量％～３０質量％であり、特に好ましくは７質量％～２５質量％である。フッ素含有率がこの範囲内であるフッ素系界面活性剤は、塗布膜の厚さの均一性や省液性の点で効果的であり、着色組成物中における溶解性も良好である。 The fluorine content in the fluorosurfactant is preferably 3% by mass to 40% by mass, more preferably 5% by mass to 30% by mass, and particularly preferably 7% by mass to 25% by mass. A fluorine-based surfactant having a fluorine content within this range is effective in terms of uniformity of coating film thickness and liquid-saving properties, and has good solubility in a colored composition.
　フッ素系界面活性剤としては、例えば、メガファックＦ１７１、同Ｆ１７２、同Ｆ１７３、同Ｆ１７６、同Ｆ１７７、同Ｆ１４１、同Ｆ１４２、同Ｆ１４３、同Ｆ１４４、同Ｒ３０、同Ｆ４３７、同Ｆ４７５、同Ｆ４７９、同Ｆ４８２、同Ｆ５５４、同Ｆ７８０、同Ｆ７８１（以上、ＤＩＣ（株）製）、フロラードＦＣ４３０、同ＦＣ４３１、同ＦＣ１７１（以上、住友スリーエム（株）製）、サーフロンＳ－３８２、同ＳＣ－１０１、同ＳＣ－１０３、同ＳＣ－１０４、同ＳＣ－１０５、同ＳＣ１０６８、同ＳＣ－３８１、同ＳＣ－３８３、同Ｓ３９３、同ＫＨ－４０（以上、旭硝子（株）製）等が挙げられる。 Examples of the fluorosurfactant include Megafac F171, F172, F173, F176, F176, F177, F141, F142, F143, F144, R30, F437, F475, F479, F482, F554, F780, F780, F781 (above DIC Corporation), Florard FC430, FC431, FC171 (above, Sumitomo 3M Limited), Surflon S-382, SC-101, SC-103, SC-104, SC-105, SC1068, SC-381, SC-383, S393, KH-40 (above, manufactured by Asahi Glass Co., Ltd.) and the like.
　ノニオン系界面活性剤として具体的には、グリセロール、トリメチロールプロパン、トリメチロールエタン並びにそれらのエトキシレートおよびプロポキシレート（例えば、グリセロールプロポキシレート、グリセリンエトキシレート等）、ポリオキシエチレンラウリルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンステアリルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンオレイルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンオクチルフェニルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンノニルフェニルエーテル、ポリエチレングリコールジラウレート、ポリエチレングリコールジステアレート、ソルビタン脂肪酸エステル（ＢＡＳＦ社製のプルロニックＬ１０、Ｌ３１、Ｌ６１、Ｌ６２、１０Ｒ５、１７Ｒ２、２５Ｒ２、テトロニック３０４、７０１、７０４、９０１、９０４、１５０Ｒ１）、ソルスパース２００００（日本ルーブリゾール（株））等が挙げられる。 Specific examples of the nonionic surfactant include glycerol, trimethylolpropane, trimethylolethane, and ethoxylates and propoxylates thereof (for example, glycerol propoxylate, glycerol ethoxylate, etc.), polyoxyethylene lauryl ether, polyoxyethylene Stearyl ether, polyoxyethylene oleyl ether, polyoxyethylene octylphenyl ether, polyoxyethylene nonylphenyl ether, polyethylene glycol dilaurate, polyethylene glycol distearate, sorbitan fatty acid ester (Pluronic L10, L31, L61, L62 manufactured by BASF, 10R5, 17R2, 25R2, Tetronic 304, 701, 704, 901, 904, 150R1) Solsperse 20000 (Lubrizol Japan Co., Ltd.), and the like.
　カチオン系界面活性剤として具体的には、フタロシアニン誘導体（商品名：ＥＦＫＡ－７４５、森下産業（株）製）、オルガノシロキサンポリマーＫＰ３４１（信越化学工業（株）製）、（メタ）アクリル酸系（共）重合体ポリフローＮｏ．７５、Ｎｏ．９０、Ｎｏ．９５（共栄社化学（株）製）、Ｗ００１（裕商（株）製）等が挙げられる。 Specific examples of the cationic surfactant include phthalocyanine derivatives (trade name: EFKA-745, manufactured by Morishita Sangyo Co., Ltd.), organosiloxane polymer KP341 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), (meth) acrylic acid ( Co) polymer polyflow no. 75, no. 90, no. 95 (manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.) and W001 (manufactured by Yusho Co., Ltd.).
　アニオン系界面活性剤として具体的には、Ｗ００４、Ｗ００５、Ｗ０１７（裕商（株）社製）等が挙げられる。 Specific examples of anionic surfactants include W004, W005, W017 (manufactured by Yusho Co., Ltd.) and the like.
　シリコーン系界面活性剤としては、例えば、東レ・ダウコーニング（株）製「トーレシリコーンＤＣ３ＰＡ」、「トーレシリコーンＳＨ７ＰＡ」、「トーレシリコーンＤＣ１１ＰＡ」，「トーレシリコーンＳＨ２１ＰＡ」，「トーレシリコーンＳＨ２８ＰＡ」、「トーレシリコーンＳＨ２９ＰＡ」、「トーレシリコーンＳＨ３０ＰＡ」、「トーレシリコーンＳＨ８４００」、モメンティブ・パフォーマンス・マテリアルズ社製「ＴＳＦ－４４４０」、「ＴＳＦ－４３００」、「ＴＳＦ－４４４５」、「ＴＳＦ－４４６０」、「ＴＳＦ－４４５２」、信越シリコーン株式会社製「ＫＰ３４１」、「ＫＦ６００１」、「ＫＦ６００２」、ビックケミー社製「ＢＹＫ３０７」、「ＢＹＫ３２３」、「ＢＹＫ３３０」等が挙げられる。
　本発明の着色組成物に界面活性剤を含有する場合、界面活性剤の添加量は、着色組成物の全質量に対して、０．００１質量％～２．０質量％が好ましく、より好ましくは０．００５質量％～１．０質量％である。
　本発明の組成物は、界面活性剤を、１種類のみを含んでいてもよいし、２種類以上含んでいてもよい。２種類以上含む場合は、その合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 Examples of the silicone surfactant include “Toray Silicone DC3PA”, “Toray Silicone SH7PA”, “Toray Silicone DC11PA”, “Tore Silicone SH21PA”, “Tore Silicone SH28PA”, “Toray Silicone” manufactured by Toray Dow Corning Co., Ltd. Silicone SH29PA, Torre Silicone SH30PA, Torre Silicone SH8400, Momentive Performance Materials TSF-4440, TSF-4300, TSF-4445, TSF-4460, TSF -4552 "," KP341 "," KF6001 "," KF6002 "manufactured by Shin-Etsu Silicone Co., Ltd.," BYK307 "," BYK323 "," BYK330 "manufactured by BYK Chemie.
When the coloring composition of the present invention contains a surfactant, the addition amount of the surfactant is preferably 0.001% by mass to 2.0% by mass with respect to the total mass of the coloring composition, more preferably 0.005% by mass to 1.0% by mass.
The composition of the present invention may contain only one type of surfactant or two or more types of surfactant. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
＜＜有機カルボン酸、有機カルボン酸無水物＞＞
　本発明の着色組成物は、分子量１０００以下の有機カルボン酸、および／または有機カルボン酸無水物を含有していてもよい。
　有機カルボン酸化合物としては、具体的には、脂肪族カルボン酸または芳香族カルボン酸が挙げられる。脂肪族カルボン酸としては、例えば、ギ酸、酢酸、プロピオン酸、酪酸、吉草酸、ピバル酸、カプロン酸、グリコール酸、アクリル酸、メタクリル酸等のモノカルボン酸、シュウ酸、マロン酸、コハク酸、グルタル酸、アジピン酸、ピメリン酸、シクロヘキサンジカルボン酸、シクロヘキセンジカルボン酸、イタコン酸、シトラコン酸、マレイン酸、フマル酸等のジカルボン酸、トリカルバリル酸、アコニット酸等のトリカルボン酸等が挙げられる。また、芳香族カルボン酸としては、例えば、安息香酸、フタル酸等のフェニル基に直接カルボキシル基が結合したカルボン酸、およびフェニル基から炭素結合を介してカルボキシル基が結合したカルボン酸類が挙げられる。これらの中では、特に分子量６００以下、とりわけ分子量５０～５００のもの、具体的には、例えば、マレイン酸、マロン酸、コハク酸、イタコン酸が好ましい。 << Organic carboxylic acid, organic carboxylic anhydride >>
The coloring composition of the present invention may contain an organic carboxylic acid having a molecular weight of 1000 or less and / or an organic carboxylic acid anhydride.
Specific examples of the organic carboxylic acid compound include aliphatic carboxylic acids and aromatic carboxylic acids. Examples of aliphatic carboxylic acids include monocarboxylic acids such as formic acid, acetic acid, propionic acid, butyric acid, valeric acid, pivalic acid, caproic acid, glycolic acid, acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, oxalic acid, malonic acid, succinic acid, Examples thereof include dicarboxylic acids such as glutaric acid, adipic acid, pimelic acid, cyclohexanedicarboxylic acid, cyclohexenedicarboxylic acid, itaconic acid, citraconic acid, maleic acid and fumaric acid, and tricarboxylic acids such as tricarbaryl acid and aconitic acid. Examples of the aromatic carboxylic acid include carboxylic acids in which a carboxyl group is directly bonded to a phenyl group such as benzoic acid and phthalic acid, and carboxylic acids in which a carboxyl group is bonded to the phenyl group through a carbon bond. Of these, those having a molecular weight of 600 or less, particularly those having a molecular weight of 50 to 500, specifically maleic acid, malonic acid, succinic acid, and itaconic acid are preferred.
　有機カルボン酸無水物としては、例えば、脂肪族カルボン酸無水物、芳香族カルボン酸無水物が挙げられ、具体的には、例えば、無水酢酸、無水トリクロロ酢酸、無水トリフルオロ酢酸、無水テトラヒドロフタル酸、無水コハク酸、無水マレイン酸、無水シトラコン酸、無水イタコン酸、無水グルタル酸、無水１，２－シクロヘキセンジカルボン酸、無水ｎ－オクタデシルコハク酸、無水５－ノルボルネン－２，３－ジカルボン酸等の脂肪族カルボン酸無水物が挙げられる。芳香族カルボン酸無水物としては、例えば、無水フタル酸、トリメリット酸無水物、ピロメリット酸無水物、無水ナフタル酸等が挙げられる。これらの中では、特に分子量６００以下、とりわけ分子量５０～５００のもの、具体的には、例えば、無水マレイン酸、無水コハク酸、無水シトラコン酸、無水イタコン酸が好ましい。 Examples of organic carboxylic acid anhydrides include aliphatic carboxylic acid anhydrides and aromatic carboxylic acid anhydrides. Specific examples include acetic anhydride, trichloroacetic anhydride, trifluoroacetic anhydride, and tetrahydrophthalic anhydride. Succinic anhydride, maleic anhydride, citraconic anhydride, itaconic anhydride, glutaric anhydride, 1,2-cyclohexene dicarboxylic anhydride, n-octadecyl succinic anhydride, 5-norbornene-2,3-dicarboxylic anhydride, etc. An aliphatic carboxylic acid anhydride is mentioned. Examples of the aromatic carboxylic acid anhydride include phthalic anhydride, trimellitic anhydride, pyromellitic anhydride, and naphthalic anhydride. Of these, those having a molecular weight of 600 or less, particularly those having a molecular weight of 50 to 500, specifically maleic anhydride, succinic anhydride, citraconic anhydride, and itaconic anhydride are preferred.
　本発明の着色組成物に有機カルボン酸、有機カルボン酸無水物を含有する場合、有機カルボン酸および／または有機カルボン酸無水物の添加量は、通常、全固形分中０．０１～１０重量％、好ましくは０．０３～５重量％、より好ましくは０．０５～３重量％の範囲である。
　本発明の組成物は、有機カルボン酸および／または有機カルボン酸無水物を、それぞれ、１種類のみを含んでいてもよいし、２種類以上含んでいてもよい。２種類以上含む場合は、その合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
　これら分子量１０００以下の有機カルボン酸、および／または有機カルボン酸無水物を添加することによって、高いパターン密着性を保ちながら、着色組成物の未溶解物の残存をより一層低減することが可能である。 When the colored composition of the present invention contains an organic carboxylic acid or an organic carboxylic acid anhydride, the amount of the organic carboxylic acid and / or organic carboxylic acid anhydride is usually 0.01 to 10% by weight based on the total solid content. The range is preferably 0.03 to 5% by weight, more preferably 0.05 to 3% by weight.
The composition of the present invention may contain only one type of organic carboxylic acid and / or organic carboxylic acid anhydride, or may contain two or more types. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
By adding these organic carboxylic acids and / or organic carboxylic acid anhydrides having a molecular weight of 1000 or less, it is possible to further reduce the residual undissolved coloring composition while maintaining high pattern adhesion. .
　上記のほか、着色組成物には、必要に応じて、各種添加物、例えば、充填剤、密着促進剤、酸化防止剤、紫外線吸収剤、凝集防止剤等を配合することができる。これらの添加物としては、特開２００４－２９５１１６号公報の段落０１５５～０１５６に記載のものを挙げることができ、これらの内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。
　本発明の着色組成物においては、特開２００４－２９５１１６号公報の段落００７８に記載の増感剤や光安定剤、同公報の段落００８１に記載の熱重合防止剤を含有することができる。
　本発明の組成物は、上記成分を、それぞれ、１種類のみを含んでいてもよいし、２種類以上含んでいてもよい。２種類以上含む場合は、その合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 In addition to the above, various additives such as fillers, adhesion promoters, antioxidants, ultraviolet absorbers, anti-aggregation agents and the like can be blended with the coloring composition as necessary. Examples of these additives include those described in JP-A No. 2004-295116, paragraphs 0155 to 0156, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
The coloring composition of the present invention may contain a sensitizer and a light stabilizer described in paragraph 0078 of JP-A No. 2004-295116 and a thermal polymerization inhibitor described in paragraph 0081 of the same publication.
The composition of the present invention may contain only one type of the above components, or may contain two or more types. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
＜着色組成物の調製方法＞
　本発明の着色組成物は、前述の成分を混合することで調製される。
　なお、着色組成物の調製に際しては、着色組成物を構成する各成分を一括配合してもよいし、各成分を溶剤に溶解・分散した後に逐次配合してもよい。また、配合する際の投入順序や作業条件は特に制約を受けない。例えば、全成分を同時に溶剤に溶解・分散して組成物を調製してもよいし、必要に応じては、各成分を適宜２つ以上の溶液・分散液としておいて、使用時（塗布時）にこれらを混合して組成物として調製してもよい。
　上記のようにして調製された着色組成物は、好ましくは、孔径０．０１μｍ～３．０μｍ、より好ましくは孔径０．０５μｍ～０．５μｍ程度のフィルタなどを用いて濾別した後、使用に供することができる。 <Method for preparing colored composition>
The coloring composition of the present invention is prepared by mixing the aforementioned components.
In preparing the colored composition, the components constituting the colored composition may be mixed together, or may be sequentially added after each component is dissolved and dispersed in a solvent. In addition, there are no particular restrictions on the charging order and working conditions when blending. For example, the composition may be prepared by dissolving and dispersing all components in a solvent at the same time. If necessary, each component may be suitably used as two or more solutions / dispersions at the time of use (at the time of application). ) May be mixed to prepare a composition.
The colored composition prepared as described above is preferably used after being filtered using a filter having a pore size of 0.01 μm to 3.0 μm, more preferably a pore size of about 0.05 μm to 0.5 μm. Can be provided.
　本発明の着色組成物は、カラーフィルタの着色層形成用として好ましく用いられる。より具体的には、本発明の着色組成物は、耐熱性および色特性に優れた硬化膜を形成することができるため、カラーフィルタの着色パターン（着色層）を形成するために好適に用いられる。また、本発明の着色組成物は、固体撮像素子（例えば、ＣＣＤ、ＣＭＯＳ等）や、液晶表示装置（ＬＣＤ）や有機ＥＬ表示装置などの画像表示装置に用いられるカラーフィルタなどの着色パターン形成用として好適に用いることができる。さらに、印刷インキ、インクジェットインキおよび塗料などの作製用途としても好適に用いることができる。なかでも、ＣＣＤおよびＣＭＯＳ等の固体撮像素子用のカラーフィルタを作製用途として好適に用いることができる。 The colored composition of the present invention is preferably used for forming a colored layer of a color filter. More specifically, since the colored composition of the present invention can form a cured film having excellent heat resistance and color characteristics, it is suitably used for forming a colored pattern (colored layer) of a color filter. . The colored composition of the present invention is used for forming a colored pattern such as a solid-state imaging device (for example, CCD, CMOS, etc.), a color filter used in an image display device such as a liquid crystal display device (LCD) or an organic EL display device. Can be suitably used. Furthermore, it can be suitably used as a production application for printing ink, inkjet ink, paint, and the like. In particular, a color filter for a solid-state imaging device such as a CCD and a CMOS can be suitably used as a production application.
＜硬化膜、パターン形成方法、カラーフィルタおよびカラーフィルタの製造方法＞
　次に、本発明における硬化膜、パターン形成方法およびカラーフィルタについて、その製造方法を通じて詳述する。
　本発明の硬化膜は、本発明の着色組成物を硬化してなる。かかる硬化膜はカラーフィルタに好ましく用いられる。 <Curing film, pattern forming method, color filter, and color filter manufacturing method>
Next, the cured film, the pattern forming method, and the color filter in the present invention will be described in detail through the manufacturing method.
The cured film of the present invention is formed by curing the colored composition of the present invention. Such a cured film is preferably used for a color filter.
　本発明のパターン形成方法は、本発明の着色組成物を支持体上に適用して着色組成物層を形成し、不要部分を除去して、着色パターンを形成する。
　本発明のパターン形成方法は、カラーフィルタが有する着色パターン（画素）の形成に好適に適用することができる。
　本発明の組成物は、いわゆるフォトリソグラフィ法でパターン形成によって、カラーフィルタを製造してもよいし、ドライエッチング法によってパターンを形成してもよい。
　すなわち、本発明のカラーフィルタの第一の製造方法として、着色組成物を支持体上に適用して着色組成物層を形成する工程と、上記着色組成物層をパターン状に露光する工程と、未露光部を現像除去して着色パターンを形成する工程とを含むカラーフィルタの製造方法が例示される。
　また、本発明のカラーフィルタの第二の製造方法として、着色組成物を支持体上に適用して着色組成物層を形成し、硬化して着色層を形成する工程、上記着色層上にフォトレジスト層を形成する工程、露光および現像することにより上記フォトレジスト層をパターニングしてレジストパターンを得る工程、および上記レジストパターンをエッチングマスクとして上記着色層をドライエッチングする工程を含む、カラーフィルタの製造方法が例示される。
　本発明では、フォトリソグラフィ法で製造することがより好ましい。
　以下これらの詳細を述べる。 In the pattern forming method of the present invention, the colored composition of the present invention is applied onto a support to form a colored composition layer, and unnecessary portions are removed to form a colored pattern.
The pattern forming method of the present invention can be suitably applied to the formation of a colored pattern (pixel) included in a color filter.
The composition of the present invention may produce a color filter by pattern formation by a so-called photolithography method, or may form a pattern by dry etching.
That is, as a first production method of the color filter of the present invention, a step of applying a colored composition on a support to form a colored composition layer, a step of exposing the colored composition layer in a pattern, A method for producing a color filter including a step of developing and removing an unexposed portion to form a colored pattern is exemplified.
Further, as a second production method of the color filter of the present invention, a step of applying a colored composition on a support to form a colored composition layer and curing to form a colored layer, a photo on the colored layer Production of a color filter comprising a step of forming a resist layer, a step of patterning the photoresist layer by exposure and development to obtain a resist pattern, and a step of dry etching the colored layer using the resist pattern as an etching mask A method is illustrated.
In the present invention, it is more preferable to manufacture by photolithography.
These details are described below.
　以下、本発明のパターン形成方法における各工程については、固体撮像素子用カラーフィルタの製造方法を通じて詳細に説明するが、本発明はこの方法に限定されるものではない。以下、固体撮像素子用カラーフィルタを単に「カラーフィルタ」ということがある。 Hereinafter, each step in the pattern forming method of the present invention will be described in detail through a method for manufacturing a color filter for a solid-state imaging device, but the present invention is not limited to this method. Hereinafter, the color filter for the solid-state imaging device may be simply referred to as “color filter”.
＜＜着色組成物層を形成する工程＞＞
　着色組成物層を形成する工程では、支持体上に、本発明の着色組成物を適用して着色組成物層形成工程を形成する。 << Step of Forming Colored Composition Layer >>
In the step of forming the colored composition layer, the colored composition layer forming step is formed on the support by applying the colored composition of the present invention.
　本工程に用いうる支持体としては、例えば、基板（例えば、シリコン基板）上にＣＣＤ（Charge Coupled Device）やＣＭＯＳ（Complementary Metal-Oxide Semiconductor）等の撮像素子（受光素子）が設けられた固体撮像素子用基板を用いることができる。
　本発明における着色パターンは、固体撮像素子用基板の撮像素子形成面側（おもて面）に形成されてもよいし、撮像素子非形成面側（裏面）に形成されてもよい。
　固体撮像素子における着色パターンの間や、固体撮像素子用基板の裏面には、遮光膜が設けられていてもよい。
　また、支持体上には、必要により、上部の層との密着改良、物質の拡散防止或いは基板表面の平坦化のために下塗り層を設けてもよい。下塗り層には、溶剤、アルカリ可溶性樹脂、重合性化合物、重合禁止剤、界面活性剤、光重合開始剤等を配合でき、これらの各成分は、上述の本発明の組成物に配合する成分から適宜選択されることが好ましい。 As a support that can be used in this step, for example, a solid-state imaging in which an imaging element (light receiving element) such as a CCD (Charge Coupled Device) or a CMOS (Complementary Metal-Oxide Semiconductor) is provided on a substrate (for example, a silicon substrate). An element substrate can be used.
The colored pattern in the present invention may be formed on the imaging element forming surface side (front surface) of the solid-state imaging element substrate, or may be formed on the imaging element non-forming surface side (back surface).
A light shielding film may be provided between the colored patterns in the solid-state image sensor or on the back surface of the substrate for the solid-state image sensor.
Further, if necessary, an undercoat layer may be provided on the support for improving adhesion with the upper layer, preventing diffusion of substances, or flattening the substrate surface. In the undercoat layer, a solvent, an alkali-soluble resin, a polymerizable compound, a polymerization inhibitor, a surfactant, a photopolymerization initiator, and the like can be blended, and each of these components is derived from the components blended in the above-described composition of the present invention. It is preferable to select appropriately.
　支持体上への本発明の着色組成物の付与方法としては、スリット塗布、インクジェット法、回転塗布、流延塗布、ロール塗布、スクリーン印刷法等の各種の塗布方法を適用することができる。 As a method for applying the coloring composition of the present invention on the support, various coating methods such as slit coating, ink jet method, spin coating, cast coating, roll coating, and screen printing can be applied.
　支持体上に塗布された着色組成物層の乾燥（プリベーク）は、ホットプレート、オーブン等で５０℃～１４０℃の温度で１０秒～３００秒で行うことができる。 The drying (pre-baking) of the colored composition layer coated on the support can be performed at a temperature of 50 ° C. to 140 ° C. for 10 seconds to 300 seconds using a hot plate, oven or the like.
＜フォトリソグラフィ法でパターン形成する工程＞
＜＜露光する工程＞＞
　露光工程では、着色組成物層形成工程において形成された着色組成物層を、例えば、ステッパー等の露光装置を用い、所定のマスクパターンを有するマスクを介してパターン露光する。これにより、硬化膜が得られる。
　露光に際して用いることができる放射線（光）としては、特に、ｇ線、ｉ線等の紫外線が好ましく（特に好ましくはｉ線）用いられる。照射量（露光量）は３０ｍＪ／ｃｍ2～１５００ｍＪ／ｃｍ2が好ましく５０ｍＪ／ｃｍ2～１０００ｍＪ／ｃｍ2がより好ましく、８０ｍＪ／ｃｍ2～５００ｍＪ／ｃｍ2が特に好ましい。 <Process for pattern formation by photolithography>
<< Exposure Step >>
In the exposure step, the colored composition layer formed in the colored composition layer forming step is subjected to pattern exposure through a mask having a predetermined mask pattern, for example, using an exposure apparatus such as a stepper. Thereby, a cured film is obtained.
As radiation (light) that can be used for exposure, ultraviolet rays such as g-line and i-line are particularly preferable (particularly preferably i-line). Irradiation dose (exposure dose) is more preferably 30mJ / cm 2 ~ 1500mJ / cm 2 is preferably 50mJ / cm 2 ~ 1000mJ / cm 2, 80mJ / cm 2 ~ 500mJ / cm 2 is particularly preferred.
　硬化膜（着色膜）の膜厚は１．０μｍ以下であることが好ましく、０．１μｍ～０．９μｍであることがより好ましく、０．２μｍ～０．８μｍであることがさらに好ましい。
　膜厚を、１．０μｍ以下とすることにより、高解像性、高密着性を得られるため、好ましい。
　また、本工程においては、０．７μｍ以下の薄い膜厚を有する硬化膜も好適に形成することができ、得られた硬化膜を、後述するパターン形成工程にて現像処理することで、薄膜でありながらも、現像性、表面荒れ抑制、およびパターン形状に優れた着色パターンを得ることができる。 The thickness of the cured film (colored film) is preferably 1.0 μm or less, more preferably 0.1 μm to 0.9 μm, and further preferably 0.2 μm to 0.8 μm.
It is preferable to set the film thickness to 1.0 μm or less because high resolution and high adhesion can be obtained.
In addition, in this step, a cured film having a thin film thickness of 0.7 μm or less can also be suitably formed, and the obtained cured film is developed in a pattern forming process described later, thereby forming a thin film. Although it exists, the coloring pattern excellent in developability, surface roughness suppression, and pattern shape can be obtained.
＜＜現像工程＞＞
　次いでアルカリ現像処理を行うことにより、露光工程における光未照射部分の着色組成物層がアルカリ水溶液に溶出し、光硬化した部分だけが残る。
　現像液としては、下地の撮像素子や回路などにダメージを起さない、有機アルカリ現像液が望ましい。現像温度としては通常２０℃～３０℃であり、現像時間は、従来２０秒～９０秒であった。より残渣を除去するため、近年では１２０秒～１８０秒実施する場合もある。さらには、より残渣除去性を向上するため、現像液を６０秒ごとに振り切り、さらに新たに現像液を供給する工程を数回繰り返す場合もある。 << Development process >>
Next, by performing an alkali development treatment, the colored composition layer of the light non-irradiated portion in the exposure step is eluted in the alkaline aqueous solution, and only the photocured portion remains.
The developer is preferably an organic alkali developer that does not cause damage to the underlying image sensor or circuit. The development temperature is usually 20 ° C. to 30 ° C., and the development time is conventionally 20 seconds to 90 seconds. In order to remove the residue more, in recent years, it may be carried out for 120 seconds to 180 seconds. Furthermore, in order to further improve residue removability, the process of shaking off the developer every 60 seconds and further supplying a new developer may be repeated several times.
　現像液に用いるアルカリ剤としては、例えば、アンモニア水、エチルアミン、ジエチルアミン、ジメチルエタノールアミン、テトラメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラエチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラプロピルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラブチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、ベンジルトリメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、コリン、ピロール、ピペリジン、１，８－ジアザビシクロ－［５、４、０］－７－ウンデセンなどの有機アルカリ性化合物が挙げられ、これらのアルカリ剤を濃度が０．００１質量％～１０質量％、好ましくは０．０１質量％～１質量％となるように純水で希釈したアルカリ性水溶液が現像液として好ましく使用される。
　なお、現像液には無機アルカリを用いてもよく、無機アルカリとしては、例えば、水酸化ナトリウム、水酸化カリウム、炭酸ナトリウム、炭酸水素ナトリウム、硅酸ナトリウム、メタ硅酸ナトリウムなどが好ましい。
　なお、このようなアルカリ性水溶液からなる現像液を使用した場合には、一般に現像後純水で洗浄（リンス）する。 Examples of the alkaline agent used in the developer include ammonia water, ethylamine, diethylamine, dimethylethanolamine, tetramethylammonium hydroxide, tetraethylammonium hydroxide, tetrapropylammonium hydroxide, tetrabutylammonium hydroxide, benzyltrimethylammonium hydroxide. Organic alkaline compounds such as choline, pyrrole, piperidine, 1,8-diazabicyclo- [5,4,0] -7-undecene, and the concentration of these alkaline agents is 0.001 to 10% by mass, An alkaline aqueous solution diluted with pure water so as to be preferably 0.01% by mass to 1% by mass is preferably used as the developer.
In addition, an inorganic alkali may be used for the developer, and as the inorganic alkali, for example, sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, sodium hydrogencarbonate, sodium oxalate, sodium metaoxalate and the like are preferable.
In the case where a developer composed of such an alkaline aqueous solution is used, it is generally washed (rinsed) with pure water after development.
　次いで、乾燥を施した後に加熱処理（ポストベーク）を行うことが好ましい。多色の着色パターンを形成するのであれば、色ごとに上記工程を順次繰り返して硬化皮膜を製造することができる。これによりカラーフィルタが得られる。
　ポストベークは、硬化を完全なものとするための現像後の加熱処理であり、通常１００℃～２４０℃、好ましくは２００℃～２４０℃の熱硬化処理を行う。
　このポストベーク処理は、現像後の塗布膜を、上記条件になるようにホットプレートやコンベクションオーブン（熱風循環式乾燥機）、高周波加熱機等の加熱手段を用いて、連続式あるいはバッチ式で行うことができる。 Next, it is preferable to perform heat treatment (post-bake) after drying. If a multicolor coloring pattern is to be formed, a cured film can be produced by sequentially repeating the above steps for each color. Thereby, a color filter is obtained.
The post-baking is a heat treatment after development for complete curing, and a heat curing treatment is usually performed at 100 ° C. to 240 ° C., preferably 200 ° C. to 240 ° C.
This post-bake treatment is performed continuously or batchwise using a heating means such as a hot plate, a convection oven (hot air circulation dryer), a high-frequency heater, or the like so that the coating film after development is in the above-described condition. be able to.
＜ドライエッチング法でパターン形成する場合＞
　ドライエッチングにより、パターンを形成する場合、特開２０１３－６４９９３号公報の記載を参酌でき、これらの内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。 <When patterning by dry etching>
In the case of forming a pattern by dry etching, the description of JP2013-64993A can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
　なお、本発明の製造方法は、必要に応じ、上記以外の工程として、固体撮像素子用カラーフィルタの製造方法として公知の工程を有していてもよい。例えば、上述した、着色組成物層形成工程、露光工程およびパターン形成工程を行った後に、必要により、形成された着色パターンを加熱および／または露光により硬化する硬化工程を含んでいてもよい。 In addition, the manufacturing method of this invention may have a well-known process as a manufacturing method of the color filter for solid-state image sensors as a process other than the above as needed. For example, after performing the coloring composition layer forming step, the exposure step, and the pattern forming step described above, a curing step of curing the formed colored pattern by heating and / or exposure may be included as necessary.
　また、本発明に係る着色組成物を用いる場合、例えば、塗布装置吐出部のノズルや配管部の目詰まりや塗布機内への着色組成物や顔料の付着・沈降・乾燥による汚染等が生じる場合がある。そこで、本発明の着色組成物によってもたらされた汚染を効率よく洗浄するためには、前掲の本組成物に関する溶剤を洗浄液として用いることが好ましい。また、特開平７－１２８８６７号公報、特開平７－１４６５６２号公報、特開平８－２７８６３７号公報、特開２０００－２７３３７０号公報、特開２００６－８５１４０号公報、特開２００６－２９１１９１号公報、特開２００７－２１０１号公報、特開２００７－２１０２号公報、特開２００７－２８１５２３号公報などに記載の洗浄液も本発明に係る着色組成物の洗浄除去として好適に用いることができる。
　上記のうち、アルキレングリコールモノアルキルエーテルカルボキシレートおよびアルキレングリコールモノアルキルエーテルが好ましい。
　これら溶媒は、単独で用いても２種以上を混合して用いてもよい。２種以上を混合する場合、水酸基を有する溶剤と水酸基を有しない溶剤とを混合することが好ましい。水酸基を有する溶剤と水酸基を有しない溶剤との質量比は、１／９９～９９／１、好ましくは１０／９０～９０／１０、さらに好ましくは２０／８０～８０／２０である。プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート（ＰＧＭＥＡ）とプロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル（ＰＧＭＥ）の混合溶剤で、その比率が６０／４０であることが特に好ましい。なお、汚染物に対する洗浄液の浸透性を向上させるために、洗浄液には前掲の本組成物に関する界面活性剤を添加してもよい。 Further, when the colored composition according to the present invention is used, for example, clogging of the nozzle of the coating device discharge section or the piping section, contamination due to adhesion, sedimentation, or drying of the colored composition or pigment in the coating machine may occur. is there. Therefore, in order to efficiently clean the contamination caused by the colored composition of the present invention, it is preferable to use the solvent relating to the present composition described above as a cleaning liquid. Also, JP-A-7-128867, JP-A-7-146562, JP-A-8-278737, JP-A-2000-273370, JP-A-2006-85140, JP-A-2006-291191, The cleaning liquids described in JP-A-2007-2101, JP-A-2007-2102, JP-A-2007-281523 and the like can also be suitably used for cleaning and removing the colored composition according to the present invention.
Of the above, alkylene glycol monoalkyl ether carboxylates and alkylene glycol monoalkyl ethers are preferred.
These solvents may be used alone or in combination of two or more. When mixing 2 or more types, it is preferable to mix the solvent which has a hydroxyl group, and the solvent which does not have a hydroxyl group. The mass ratio of the solvent having a hydroxyl group and the solvent having no hydroxyl group is from 1/99 to 99/1, preferably from 10/90 to 90/10, more preferably from 20/80 to 80/20. In a mixed solvent of propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA) and propylene glycol monomethyl ether (PGME), the ratio is particularly preferably 60/40. In addition, in order to improve the permeability of the cleaning liquid with respect to contaminants, a surfactant related to the present composition described above may be added to the cleaning liquid.
　本発明のカラーフィルタは、本発明の着色組成物を用いているため、露光マージンに優れた露光ができる共に、形成された着色パターン（着色画素）は、パターン形状に優れ、パターン表面の荒れや現像部における残渣が抑制されていることから、色特性に優れたものとなる。
　本発明のカラーフィルタは、ＣＣＤ、ＣＭＯＳ等の固体撮像素子に好適に用いることができ、特に１００万画素を超えるような高解像度のＣＣＤやＣＭＯＳ等に好適である。本発明の固体撮像素子用カラーフィルタは、例えば、ＣＣＤまたはＣＭＯＳを構成する各画素の受光部と、集光するためのマイクロレンズと、の間に配置されるカラーフィルタとして用いることができる。 Since the color filter of the present invention uses the colored composition of the present invention, the color filter of the present invention can be exposed with an excellent exposure margin, and the formed colored pattern (colored pixel) is excellent in pattern shape, and the surface of the pattern is not rough. Since the residue in the developing part is suppressed, the color characteristics are excellent.
The color filter of the present invention can be suitably used for a solid-state imaging device such as a CCD or CMOS, and is particularly suitable for a CCD or CMOS having a high resolution exceeding 1 million pixels. The color filter for a solid-state imaging device of the present invention can be used as a color filter disposed between, for example, a light receiving portion of each pixel constituting a CCD or CMOS and a microlens for condensing light.
　なお、本発明のカラーフィルタにおける着色パターン（着色画素）の膜厚としては、２．０μｍ以下が好ましく、１．０μｍ以下がより好ましく、０．７μｍ以下がさらに好ましい。
　また、着色パターン（着色画素）のサイズ（パターン幅）としては、２．５μｍ以下が好ましく、２．０μｍ以下がより好ましく、１．７μｍ以下が特に好ましい。 In addition, as a film thickness of the coloring pattern (color pixel) in the color filter of this invention, 2.0 micrometers or less are preferable, 1.0 micrometer or less is more preferable, and 0.7 micrometer or less is further more preferable.
Further, the size (pattern width) of the colored pattern (colored pixel) is preferably 2.5 μm or less, more preferably 2.0 μm or less, and particularly preferably 1.7 μm or less.
＜固体撮像素子＞
　本発明の固体撮像素子は、既述の本発明のカラーフィルタを備える。本発明の固体撮像素子の構成としては、本発明におけるカラーフィルタが備えられた構成であり、固体撮像素子として機能する構成であれば特に限定はないが、例えば、以下のような構成が挙げられる。 <Solid-state imaging device>
The solid-state imaging device of the present invention includes the above-described color filter of the present invention. The configuration of the solid-state imaging device of the present invention is a configuration provided with the color filter in the present invention, and is not particularly limited as long as it is a configuration that functions as a solid-state imaging device. .
　支持体上に、固体撮像素子（ＣＣＤイメージセンサー、ＣＭＯＳイメージセンサー、等）の受光エリアを構成する複数のフォトダイオードおよびポリシリコン等からなる転送電極を有し、上記フォトダイオードおよび上記転送電極上にフォトダイオードの受光部のみ開口したタングステン等からなる遮光膜を有し、遮光膜上に遮光膜全面およびフォトダイオード受光部を覆うように形成された窒化シリコン等からなるデバイス保護膜を有し、上記デバイス保護膜上に、本発明の固体撮像素子用カラーフィルタを有する構成である。
　さらに、上記デバイス保護層上であってカラーフィルタの下（支持体に近い側）に集光手段（例えば、マイクロレンズ等。以下同じ）を有する構成や、カラーフィルタ上に集光手段を有する構成等であってもよい。 A transfer electrode made of a plurality of photodiodes and polysilicon constituting a light receiving area of a solid-state imaging device (CCD image sensor, CMOS image sensor, etc.) is provided on a support, and the photodiode and the transfer electrode are provided on the support. A light-shielding film made of tungsten or the like having an opening only in the light-receiving portion of the photodiode, and a device protection film made of silicon nitride or the like formed on the light-shielding film so as to cover the entire surface of the light-shielding film and the photodiode light-receiving portion. It is the structure which has the color filter for solid-state image sensors of this invention on a device protective film.
Further, a configuration having light collecting means (for example, a microlens, etc., the same shall apply hereinafter) on the device protective layer and under the color filter (on the side close to the support), or a structure having the light collecting means on the color filter Etc.
＜画像表示装置＞
　本発明のカラーフィルタは、上記固体撮像素子のみならず、液晶表示装置や有機ＥＬ表示装置などの、画像表示装置に用いることができ、特に液晶表示装置の用途に好適である。本発明のカラーフィルタを備えた液晶表示装置は、表示画像の色合いが良好で表示特性に優れた高画質画像を表示することができる。 <Image display device>
The color filter of the present invention can be used not only for the solid-state imaging device but also for image display devices such as liquid crystal display devices and organic EL display devices, and is particularly suitable for use in liquid crystal display devices. The liquid crystal display device provided with the color filter of the present invention can display a high-quality image with a good display image color and excellent display characteristics.
　表示装置の定義や各表示装置の詳細については、例えば「電子ディスプレイデバイス（佐々木　昭夫著、（株）工業調査会　１９９０年発行）」、「ディスプレイデバイス（伊吹　順章著、産業図書（株）平成元年発行）」などに記載されている。また、液晶表示装置については、例えば「次世代液晶ディスプレイ技術（内田　龍男編集、（株）工業調査会　１９９４年発行）」に記載されている。本発明が適用できる液晶表示装置に特に制限はなく、例えば、上記の「次世代液晶ディスプレイ技術」に記載されている色々な方式の液晶表示装置に適用できる。 For the definition of display devices and details of each display device, refer to, for example, “Electronic Display Device (Akio Sasaki, Kogyo Kenkyukai, 1990)”, “Display Device (Junsho Ibuki, Industrial Books Co., Ltd.) Issued in the first year). The liquid crystal display device is described, for example, in “Next-generation liquid crystal display technology (edited by Tatsuo Uchida, Industrial Research Co., Ltd., published in 1994)”. The liquid crystal display device to which the present invention can be applied is not particularly limited, and can be applied to, for example, various types of liquid crystal display devices described in the “next generation liquid crystal display technology”.
　本発明のカラーフィルタは、カラーＴＦＴ方式の液晶表示装置に用いてもよい。カラーＴＦＴ方式の液晶表示装置については、例えば「カラーＴＦＴ液晶ディスプレイ（共立出版（株）１９９６年発行）」に記載されている。さらに、本発明はＩＰＳなどの横電界駆動方式、ＭＶＡなどの画素分割方式などの視野角が拡大された液晶表示装置や、ＳＴＮ、ＴＮ、ＶＡ、ＯＣＳ、ＦＦＳ、およびＲ－ＯＣＢ等にも適用できる。
　また、本発明におけるカラーフィルタは、明るく高精細なＣＯＡ（Color-filter On Array）方式にも供することが可能である。ＣＯＡ方式の液晶表示装置にあっては、カラーフィルタ層に対する要求特性は、前述のような通常の要求特性に加えて、層間絶縁膜に対する要求特性、すなわち低誘電率および剥離液耐性が必要とされることがある。本発明のカラーフィルタにおいては、色相に優れた色素多量体を用いることから、色純度、光透過性などが良好で着色パターン(画素）の色合いに優れるので、解像度が高く長期耐久性に優れたＣＯＡ方式の液晶表示装置を提供することができる。なお、低誘電率の要求特性を満足するためには、カラーフィルタ層の上に樹脂被膜を設けてもよい。
　これらの画像表示方式については、例えば、「ＥＬ、ＰＤＰ、ＬＣＤディスプレイ－技術と市場の最新動向－（東レリサーチセンター調査研究部門　２００１年発行）」の４３ページなどに記載されている。 The color filter of the present invention may be used in a color TFT liquid crystal display device. The color TFT liquid crystal display device is described in, for example, “Color TFT liquid crystal display (issued in 1996 by Kyoritsu Publishing Co., Ltd.)”. Furthermore, the present invention is applied to a liquid crystal display device with a wide viewing angle, such as a horizontal electric field driving method such as IPS and a pixel division method such as MVA, STN, TN, VA, OCS, FFS, and R-OCB. it can.
In addition, the color filter in the present invention can be used for a bright and high-definition COA (Color-filter On Array) system. In the case of a COA type liquid crystal display device, the required characteristics for the color filter layer require the required characteristics for the interlayer insulating film, that is, the low dielectric constant and the resistance to the stripping solution, in addition to the normal required characteristics as described above. Sometimes. In the color filter of the present invention, since a dye multimer excellent in hue is used, the color purity, light transmittance, etc. are good and the color pattern (pixel) is excellent in color, so the resolution is high and the long-term durability is excellent. A COA type liquid crystal display device can be provided. In order to satisfy the required characteristics of a low dielectric constant, a resin film may be provided on the color filter layer.
These image display methods are described, for example, on page 43 of "EL, PDP, LCD display-latest technology and market trends (issued in 2001 by Toray Research Center Research Division)".
　本発明におけるカラーフィルタを備えた液晶表示装置は、本発明におけるカラーフィルタ以外に、電極基板、偏光フィルム、位相差フィルム、バックライト、スペーサ、視野角保障フィルムなど様々な部材から構成される。本発明のカラーフィルタは、これらの公知の部材で構成される液晶表示装置に適用することができる。これらの部材については、例えば、「'９４液晶ディスプレイ周辺材料・ケミカルズの市場（島　健太郎　（株）シーエムシー　１９９４年発行）」、「２００３液晶関連市場の現状と将来展望（下巻）（表良吉（株）富士キメラ総研、２００３年発行）」に記載されている。
　バックライトに関しては、SID meeting Digest 1380（2005）（A.Konno et.al）や、月刊ディスプレイ　２００５年１２月号の１８～２４ページ（島 康裕）、同２５～３０ページ（八木隆明）などに記載されている。 In addition to the color filter of the present invention, the liquid crystal display device provided with the color filter of the present invention includes various members such as an electrode substrate, a polarizing film, a retardation film, a backlight, a spacer, and a viewing angle guarantee film. The color filter of the present invention can be applied to a liquid crystal display device composed of these known members. Regarding these components, for example, “'94 Liquid Crystal Display Peripheral Materials / Chemicals Market (Kentaro Shima CMC 1994)”, “2003 Liquid Crystal Related Markets Current Status and Future Prospects (Volume 2)” Fuji Chimera Research Institute, Ltd., published in 2003) ”.
Regarding backlighting, SID meeting Digest 1380 (2005) (A. Konno et.al), Monthly Display December 2005, pages 18-24 (Yasuhiro Shima), pages 25-30 (Takaaki Yagi), etc. Are listed.
　本発明におけるカラーフィルタを液晶表示装置に用いると、従来公知の冷陰極管の三波長管と組み合わせたときに高いコントラストを実現できるが、さらに、赤、緑、青のＬＥＤ光源（ＲＧＢ－ＬＥＤ）をバックライトとすることによって輝度が高く、また、色純度の高い色再現性の良好な液晶表示装置を提供することができる。 When the color filter according to the present invention is used in a liquid crystal display device, a high contrast can be realized when combined with a conventionally known three-wavelength tube of a cold cathode tube, and further, red, green and blue LED light sources (RGB-LED). By using as a backlight, a liquid crystal display device having high luminance and high color purity and good color reproducibility can be provided.
　以下、本発明を実施例によりさらに具体的に説明するが、本発明はその趣旨を越えない限り以下の実施例に限定されるものではない。なお、特に断りのない限り、「％」および「部」は質量基準である。 Hereinafter, the present invention will be described more specifically with reference to examples. However, the present invention is not limited to the following examples as long as the gist thereof is not exceeded. Unless otherwise specified, “%” and “parts” are based on mass.
＜合成例１＞
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000117
 <Synthesis Example 1>
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000117
　モノマー（ａ－１）８．０ｇ、メタクリル酸２．０ｇ、２－シアノ－２－プロピルドデシルトリチオカルボナート０．５ｇをシクロヘキサノン２０．０ｇに溶解させ、窒素気流下８０℃に加熱した。ここに２，２‘－アゾビス（２－メチルプロピオン酸メチル）０．１ｇを添加し２時間加熱撹拌した。さらに０．１ｇの２，２‘－アゾビス（２－メチルプロピオン酸メチル）を添加し２時間加熱後、９０℃で２時間加熱した。次にメタクリル酸グリシジル１．０ｇ及びテトラブチルアンモニウムブロミド０．０１０ｇを添加し、１００℃で１０時間加熱した。メタノール１００ｍＬと水１００ｍＬの混合液に反応液を滴下し、析出した固体をろ過、乾燥することで（Ａ－１）が７．５ｇ得られた。 Monomer (a-1) 8.0 g, methacrylic acid 2.0 g, and 2-cyano-2-propyldodecyltrithiocarbonate 0.5 g were dissolved in cyclohexanone 20.0 g and heated to 80 ° C. in a nitrogen stream. To this, 0.1 g of 2,2′-azobis (methyl 2-methylpropionate) was added and stirred with heating for 2 hours. Further, 0.1 g of 2,2′-azobis (methyl 2-methylpropionate) was added and heated for 2 hours, and then heated at 90 ° C. for 2 hours. Next, 1.0 g of glycidyl methacrylate and 0.010 g of tetrabutylammonium bromide were added and heated at 100 ° C. for 10 hours. The reaction solution was dropped into a mixed solution of 100 mL of methanol and 100 mL of water, and the precipitated solid was filtered and dried to obtain 7.5 g of (A-1).
＜合成例２～８＞
　モノマー（ａ－１）を（ａ－２）～（ａ－８）に変更した以外は合成例１と同様の操作を行い、（Ａ－２）～（Ａ－８）を得た。 <Synthesis Examples 2 to 8>
Operations (A-2) to (A-8) were carried out in the same manner as in Synthesis Example 1, except that the monomer (a-1) was changed to (a-2) to (a-8).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000118
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000118
＜合成例９＞
　合成例１の２－シアノ－２－プロピルドデシルトリチオカルボナートを２－シアノ－２－プロピルベンゾジチオエートに変更した以外は同様の操作を行い、（Ａ－９）を得た。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000119
 <Synthesis Example 9>
The same operation as in Synthesis Example 1 was carried out except that 2-cyano-2-propyldodecyltrithiocarbonate was changed to 2-cyano-2-propylbenzodithioate to obtain (A-9).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000119
＜合成例１０＞
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000120
 <Synthesis Example 10>
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000120
　モノマー（ａ－１）８．０ｇ、メタクリル酸２．０ｇ、（ｂ－１）０．５ｇをシクロヘキサノン８．０ｇに溶解させ、窒素気流下１４０℃に加熱した。ここに過酸化ベンゾイル０．１ｇを添加し２時間加熱撹拌した。さらに０．１ｇの過酸化ベンゾイルを添加し２時間加熱した。次にメタクリル酸グリシジル１．０ｇ及びテトラブチルアンモニウムブロミド０．０１０ｇを添加し、１００℃で１０時間加熱した。メタノール１００ｍＬと水１００ｍＬの混合液に反応液を滴下し、析出した固体をろ過、乾燥することで（Ａ－１３）が８．５ｇ得られた。 Monomer (a-1) 8.0 g, methacrylic acid 2.0 g, and (b-1) 0.5 g were dissolved in cyclohexanone 8.0 g and heated to 140 ° C. in a nitrogen stream. The benzoyl peroxide 0.1g was added here, and it heat-stirred for 2 hours. Further, 0.1 g of benzoyl peroxide was added and heated for 2 hours. Next, 1.0 g of glycidyl methacrylate and 0.010 g of tetrabutylammonium bromide were added and heated at 100 ° C. for 10 hours. The reaction solution was dropped into a mixed solution of 100 mL of methanol and 100 mL of water, and the precipitated solid was filtered and dried to obtain 8.5 g of (A-13).
＜合成例１１、１２＞
　合成例１０の化合物（ｂ－１）をそれぞれ下記化合物（ｂ－２）、（ｂ－３）に変更した以外は同様の操作を行い、（Ａ－１１）及び（Ａ－１２）を得た。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000121
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000122
 <Synthesis Examples 11 and 12>
The same operations were carried out except that the compound (b-1) of Synthesis Example 10 was changed to the following compounds (b-2) and (b-3) to obtain (A-11) and (A-12). .
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000121
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000122
＜合成例１３＞
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000123
 <Synthesis Example 13>
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000123
　モノマー（ａ－２）８．０ｇ、スチレンカルボン酸２．０ｇ、２，２，６，６－テトラメチルピペリジン－１－オキシル　フリーラジカル０．５ｇをシクロヘキサノン８．０ｇに溶解させ、窒素気流下１４０℃に加熱した。ここに過酸化ベンゾイル０．１ｇを添加し２時間加熱撹拌した。さらに０．１ｇの過酸化ベンゾイルを添加し２時間加熱した。次にメタクリル酸グリシジル１．０ｇ及びテトラブチルアンモニウムブロミド０．０１０ｇを添加し、１００℃で１０時間加熱した。メタノール１００ｍＬと水１００ｍＬの混合液に反応液を滴下し、析出した固体をろ過、乾燥することで（Ａ－１３）が８．５ｇ得られた。 Monomer (a-2) 8.0 g, styrene carboxylic acid 2.0 g, 2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine-1-oxyl 0.5 g free radical was dissolved in cyclohexanone 8.0 g, and a nitrogen stream 140 Heated to ° C. The benzoyl peroxide 0.1g was added here, and it heat-stirred for 2 hours. Further, 0.1 g of benzoyl peroxide was added and heated for 2 hours. Next, 1.0 g of glycidyl methacrylate and 0.010 g of tetrabutylammonium bromide were added and heated at 100 ° C. for 10 hours. The reaction solution was dropped into a mixed solution of 100 mL of methanol and 100 mL of water, and the precipitated solid was filtered and dried to obtain 8.5 g of (A-13).
＜合成例１４＞　ブロック重合体の合成
　モノマー（ａ－１）８．０ｇ、２－シアノ－２－プロピルドデシルトリチオカルボナート０．５ｇをシクロヘキサノン２０．０ｇに溶解させ、窒素気流下８０℃に加熱した。ここに２，２‘－アゾビス（２－メチルプロピオン酸メチル）０．１ｇを添加し２ｈ加熱撹拌した。さらにメタクリル酸２．０ｇ、０．１ｇの２，２‘－アゾビス（２－メチルプロピオン酸メチル）を添加し２時間加熱後、９０℃で２時間加熱した。次にメタクリル酸グリシジル１．０ｇを添加し、１４０℃まで昇温し１０時間加熱した。メタノール１００ｍＬと水１００ｍＬの混合液に反応液を滴下し、析出した固体をろ過、乾燥することで（Ａ－１４）が７．５ｇ得られた。 <Synthesis Example 14> Synthesis of Block Polymer 8.0 g of monomer (a-1) and 0.5 g of 2-cyano-2-propyldodecyltrithiocarbonate were dissolved in 20.0 g of cyclohexanone and heated at 80 ° C. under a nitrogen stream. Heated. To this, 0.1 g of 2,2′-azobis (methyl 2-methylpropionate) was added and stirred with heating for 2 hours. Further, 2.0 g of methacrylic acid and 0.1 g of 2,2′-azobis (methyl 2-methylpropionate) were added, heated for 2 hours, and then heated at 90 ° C. for 2 hours. Next, 1.0 g of glycidyl methacrylate was added, and the temperature was raised to 140 ° C. and heated for 10 hours. The reaction solution was dropped into a mixed solution of 100 mL of methanol and 100 mL of water, and the precipitated solid was filtered and dried to obtain 7.5 g of (A-14).
＜合成例１５＞
　合成例１の２－シアノ－２－プロピルドデシルトリチオカルボナートをドデシルメルカプタンに変更した以外は同様の操作を行い、（Ａ－１５）を得た。 <Synthesis Example 15>
The same operation as in Synthesis Example 1 was carried out except that 2-cyano-2-propyldodecyltrithiocarbonate was changed to dodecyl mercaptan to obtain (A-15).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000124
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000124
１．レジスト液の調製
　下記組成の成分を混合して溶解し、下塗り層用レジスト液を調製した。
＜下塗り層用レジスト液の組成＞
・溶剤：プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート（ＰＧＭＥＡ）　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　１９．２０部
・溶剤：乳酸エチル　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　３６．６７部
・アルカリ可溶性樹脂：メタクリル酸ベンジル／メタクリル酸／メタクリル酸－２－ヒド
ロキシエチル共重合体（モル比＝６０／２２／１８、重量平均分子量１５，０００、数平
均分子量９，０００）の４０％ＰＧＭＥＡ溶液　　　　　　　３０．５１部
・ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサアクリレート　　　　　　　１２．２０部
・重合禁止剤：ｐ－メトキシフェノール　　　　　　　　　０．００６１部
・フッ素系界面活性剤：Ｆ－４７５、ＤＩＣ（株）製　　　　　０．８３部
・光重合開始剤：トリハロメチルトリアジン系の光重合開始剤
　　（ＴＡＺ－１０７、みどり化学社製）　　　　　　　　　０．５８６部 1. Preparation of resist solution Components of the following composition were mixed and dissolved to prepare an undercoat layer resist solution.
<Composition of resist solution for undercoat layer>
Solvent: propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA) 19.20 parts Solvent: ethyl lactate 36.67 parts Alkali-soluble resin: benzyl methacrylate / methacrylic acid / 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate copolymer (molar ratio = 60/22/18, weight average molecular weight 15,000, number average molecular weight 9,000) 40% PGMEA solution 30.51 parts, dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate 12.20 parts, polymerization inhibitor: p-methoxyphenol 0061 parts Fluorosurfactant: F-475, manufactured by DIC Corporation 0.83 parts Photopolymerization initiator: trihalomethyltriazine photopolymerization initiator (TAZ-107, manufactured by Midori Chemical Co., Ltd.) 0.586 Part
２．下塗り層付シリコンウエハ基板の作製
　６インチのシリコンウエハをオーブン中で２００℃のもと３０分加熱処理した。次いで、このシリコンウエハ上に、上記レジスト液を乾燥膜厚が１．５μｍになるように塗布し、さらに２２０℃のオーブン中で１時間加熱乾燥させて下塗り層を形成し、下塗り層付シリコンウエハ基板を得た。 2. Production of silicon wafer substrate with undercoat layer A 6-inch silicon wafer was heat-treated in an oven at 200 ° C. for 30 minutes. Next, the resist solution is applied onto the silicon wafer so that the dry film thickness is 1.5 μm, and further heated and dried in an oven at 220 ° C. for 1 hour to form an undercoat layer. A substrate was obtained.
３．着色組成物の調製
３－１－１．青色（ピグメントブルー１５：６）顔料分散液の調製
　青色顔料分散液１を、以下のようにして調製した。
　Ｃ．Ｉ．Ｐｉｇｍｅｎｔ　Ｂｌｕｅ１５：６を１３．０部（青色顔料、平均粒子サイズ５５ｎｍ）、および顔料分散剤であるＤｉｓｐｅｒｂｙｋ１１１を５．０部、ＰＧＭＥＡ８２．０部からなる混合液を、ビーズミル(beads mill)（ジルコニアビーズ０．３ｍｍ径）により３時間混合・分散して、顔料分散液を調製した。その後さらに、減圧機構付き高圧分散機ＮＡＮＯ－３０００－１０（日本ビーイーイー（株）製）を用いて、２０００ｋｇ／ｃｍ3の圧力下で流量５００ｇ／分として分散処理を行なった。この分散処理を１０回繰り返し、実施例または比較例の着色組成物に用いる青色用顔料分散液１（Ｃ．Ｉ．Ｐｉｇｍｅｎｔ　Ｂｌｕｅ１５：６分散液、顔料濃度１３％）を得た。
　得られた青色顔料分散液について、顔料の粒子サイズを動的光散乱法（Ｍｉｃｒｏｔｒａｃ　Ｎａｎｏｔｒａｃ　ＵＰＡ－ＥＸ１５０（日機装社(Nikkiso Co., Ltd.)製））により測定したところ、２４ｎｍであった。 3. Preparation of coloring composition 3-1-1. Preparation of Blue (Pigment Blue 15: 6) Pigment Dispersion Blue Pigment Dispersion 1 was prepared as follows.
C. I. Pigment Blue 15: 6 (13.0 parts (blue pigment, average particle size 55 nm)), Dispersbyk 111 as a pigment dispersant (5.0 parts) and PGMEA (82.0 parts) were mixed into a beads mill (zirconia beads). 0.3 mm diameter) was mixed and dispersed for 3 hours to prepare a pigment dispersion. Thereafter, dispersion treatment was further performed at a flow rate of 500 g / min under a pressure of 2000 kg / cm 3 using a high-pressure disperser NANO-3000-10 (manufactured by Nippon BEE Co., Ltd.) with a decompression mechanism. This dispersion treatment was repeated 10 times to obtain a blue pigment dispersion 1 (CI Pigment Blue 15: 6 dispersion, pigment concentration 13%) used in the coloring compositions of Examples and Comparative Examples.
With respect to the obtained blue pigment dispersion, the particle size of the pigment was measured by a dynamic light scattering method (Microtrac Nanotrac UPA-EX150 (manufactured by Nikkiso Co., Ltd.)) and found to be 24 nm.
３－１－２．緑色（ピグメントグリーン３６）顔料分散液の調整
３－１－１のＣ．Ｉ．Ｐｉｇｍｅｎｔ　Ｂｌｕｅ１５：６をＣ．Ｉ．Ｐｉｇｍｅｎｔ　Ｇｒｅｅｎ３６（緑色顔料、平均粒子サイズ４５ｎｍ）に変更した以外は同様の操作を行い、緑色要顔料分散液（Ｃ．Ｉ．Ｐｉｇｍｅｎｔ　Ｇｒｅｅｎ３６分散液、顔料濃度１３％）を得た。 3-1-2. Preparation of Green (Pigment Green 36) Pigment Dispersion 3-1-1 C.I. I. Pigment Blue 15: 6 to C.I. I. The same operation was performed except that Pigment Green 36 (green pigment, average particle size 45 nm) was changed to obtain a green pigment dispersion (CI Pigment Green 36 dispersion, pigment concentration 13%).
３－２．着色組成物の調製
（１）着色組成物
　下記の各成分を混合して分散、溶解し、実施例および比較例の各着色組成物を得た。
・シクロヘキサノン　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　１．１３３部
・アルカリ可溶性樹脂（下記Ｊ１、Ｊ２またはＪ３：下記表２に記載の化合物）　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　０．０３０部
・ソルスパース２００００（１％シクロヘキサン溶液、日本ルーブリゾール（株）製）　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　０．１２５部
・光重合開始剤（下記（Ｉ－１）～（Ｉ－８）：下記に記載の化合物）
　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　０．０１２部
・色素（下記表に記載の化合物）　　　　　　　固形分として０．０４０部
・下記表に記載の顔料を含む顔料分散液（顔料濃度１３．０％）
　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　０．６１５部
・重合性化合物（ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサアクリレート、ＫＡＹＡＲＡＤ　ＤＰＨＡ、日本化薬社製）　　　　　　　　　　　　　０．０７０部
・グリセロールプロポキシレート（１％シクロヘキサン溶液）０．０４８部 3-2. Preparation of colored composition (1) Colored composition The following components were mixed, dispersed and dissolved to obtain colored compositions of Examples and Comparative Examples.
・ Cyclohexanone 1.133 parts ・ Alkali-soluble resin (the following J1, J2 or J3: compounds described in Table 2 below) 0.030 parts ・ Solsperse 20000 (1% cyclohexane solution, manufactured by Nippon Lubrizol Co., Ltd.) 0.125 Part / photopolymerization initiator (the following (I-1) to (I-8): the compounds described below)
0.012 part. Dye (compound described in the following table) 0.040 part as a solid content. Pigment dispersion containing pigment described in the following table (pigment concentration: 13.0%)
0.615 parts ・ Polymerizable compound (dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate, KAYARAD DPHA, manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) 0.070 parts ・ Glycerol propoxylate (1% cyclohexane solution) 0.048 parts
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000125
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000125
アルカリ可溶性樹脂
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000126
 Alkali-soluble resin
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000126
４．着色組成物によるカラーフィルタの作製
＜パターン形成＞
　上記のように調製した実施例および比較例の着色組成物の各々を、上記２で得られた下塗り層付シリコンウエハ基板の下塗り層上に塗布し、着色組成物層（塗布膜）を形成した。そして、この塗布膜の乾燥膜厚が０．６μｍになるように、１００℃のホットプレートを用いて１２０秒間加熱処理（プリベーク）を行なった。 4). Fabrication of color filter by coloring composition <Pattern formation>
Each of the colored compositions of Examples and Comparative Examples prepared as described above was applied on the undercoat layer of the silicon wafer substrate with the undercoat layer obtained in 2 above to form a colored composition layer (coating film). . Then, heat treatment (pre-baking) was performed for 120 seconds using a hot plate at 100 ° C. so that the dry film thickness of the coating film became 0.6 μm.
　次いで、ｉ線ステッパー露光装置ＦＰＡ－３０００ｉ５＋（Ｃａｎｏｎ（株）製）を使用して３６５ｎｍの波長でパターンが１．０μｍ四方のＩｓｌａｎｄパターンマスクを通して５０～１２００ｍＪ／ｃｍ2の種々の露光量で露光した。
　その後、照射された塗布膜が形成されているシリコンウエハ基板をスピン・シャワー現像機（ＤＷ－３０型、（株）ケミトロニクス製）の水平回転テーブル上に載置し、ＣＤ－２０００（富士フイルムエレクトロニクスマテリアルズ（株）製）を用いて２３℃で６０秒間パドル現像を行ない、シリコンウエハ基板に着色パターンを形成した。 Next, using an i-line stepper exposure apparatus FPA-3000i5 + (manufactured by Canon Inc.), exposure was performed at various exposure doses of 50 to 1200 mJ / cm 2 through an Island pattern mask having a pattern of 1.0 μm square at a wavelength of 365 nm. .
Thereafter, the silicon wafer substrate on which the irradiated coating film is formed is placed on a horizontal rotary table of a spin shower developing machine (DW-30 type, manufactured by Chemitronics Co., Ltd.), and CD-2000 (Fuji Film). Paddle development was performed at 23 ° C. for 60 seconds using Electronics Materials Co., Ltd. to form a colored pattern on the silicon wafer substrate.
　着色パターンが形成されたシリコンウエハを、真空チャック方式で上記水平回転テーブルに固定し、回転装置によって上記シリコンウエハ基板を回転数５０ｒ．ｐ．ｍ．で回転させつつ、その回転中心の上方より純水を噴出ノズルからシャワー状に供給してリンス処理を行ない、その後スプレー乾燥した。
　以上のようにして、実施例または比較例の着色組成物により形成された着色パターンを有する単色のカラーフィルタを作製した。
　その後、測長ＳＥＭ「Ｓ－９２６０Ａ」（日立ハイテクノロジーズ（株）製）を用いて、着色パターンのサイズを測定した。パターンサイズが１．０μｍとなる露光量を最適露光量とした。 The silicon wafer on which the colored pattern is formed is fixed to the horizontal rotary table by a vacuum chuck method, and the silicon wafer substrate is rotated at a rotation speed of 50 r. p. m. While being rotated, pure water was supplied from the upper part of the rotation center in the form of a shower through a spray nozzle, followed by rinsing treatment, and then spray drying.
As described above, a monochromatic color filter having a colored pattern formed by the colored composition of the example or the comparative example was produced.
Thereafter, the size of the colored pattern was measured using a length measuring SEM “S-9260A” (manufactured by Hitachi High-Technologies Corporation). The exposure amount at which the pattern size was 1.0 μm was determined as the optimum exposure amount.
５．性能評価
５－１． 耐光性
－単色のカラーフィルタの作製と耐光性の評価－
　上記で得られた各着色硬化性組成物を、ガラス基板の上に乾燥後の膜厚が０．６μｍになるようにスピンコーターを用いて塗布し、１００℃で１２０秒間プリベークし、耐光性評価用の単色のカラーフィルタを得た。
　得られた耐光性評価用の単色のカラーフィルタに対し、キセノンランプを１０万ｌｕｘで２０時間照射（２００万ｌｕｘ・ｈ相当）した。キセノンランプ照射の前後での単色のカラーフィルタの色差（ΔＥ*ａｂ値）を測定し、耐光性の指標とした。なお、ΔＥ*ａｂ値の小さいほうが、耐光性が良好である。 5. Performance evaluation 5-1. Light resistance-Fabrication of monochromatic color filters and evaluation of light resistance-
Each colored curable composition obtained above was applied on a glass substrate using a spin coater so that the film thickness after drying was 0.6 μm, prebaked at 100 ° C. for 120 seconds, and evaluated for light resistance. A monochromatic color filter was obtained.
The obtained monochromatic color filter for light resistance evaluation was irradiated with a xenon lamp at 100,000 lux for 20 hours (equivalent to 2 million lux · h). The color difference (ΔE * ab value) of the monochromatic color filter before and after the xenon lamp irradiation was measured and used as an index of light resistance. Note that the smaller the ΔE * ab value, the better the light resistance.
５－２．耐熱性
　上記得た着色組成物が塗布されたガラス基板を、上記基板面で接するように２００℃のホットプレートに載置して１時間加熱した後、色度計ＭＣＰＤ－１０００（大塚電子（株）製）にて、加熱前後での色差（ΔＥ＊ａｂ値）を測定して熱堅牢性を評価する指標とし、下記判定基準に従って評価した。ΔＥ＊ａｂ値は、値の小さい方が、耐熱性が良好なことを示す。なお、ΔＥ＊ａｂ値は、ＣＩＥ１９７６（Ｌ＊，ａ＊，ｂ＊）空間表色系による以下の色差公式から求められる値である（日本色彩学会編 新編色彩科学ハンドブック（昭和６０年）ｐ．２６６）。
ΔＥ＊ａｂ＝｛（ΔＬ＊）2＋（Δａ＊）2＋（Δｂ＊）2｝1/2 5-2. Heat resistance A glass substrate coated with the obtained colored composition was placed on a hot plate at 200 ° C. so as to be in contact with the substrate surface, heated for 1 hour, and then the chromaticity meter MCPD-1000 (Otsuka Electronics Co., Ltd.). )), The color difference (ΔE * ab value) before and after heating was measured as an index for evaluating heat fastness, and evaluated according to the following criteria. A smaller ΔE * ab value indicates better heat resistance. The ΔE * ab value is a value obtained from the following color difference formula based on the CIE 1976 (L *, a *, b *) space color system (New Color Science Handbook edited by the Japan Color Society (1985) p. 60). 266).
ΔE * ab = {(ΔL *) 2 + (Δa *) 2 + (Δb *) 2 } 1/2
５－３． 塗布性
　各着色組成物の塗布時の塗布性について、下記の方法で評価した。即ち、各着色組成物をスピンコータ－で、乾燥後の膜厚が０．６μｍになるように塗布し、光学顕微鏡で観察し、塗布性を評価した。評価基準は以下の通りである。
－評価基準－
Ａ：全く塗布ムラが確認されなかった。
Ｂ：多少の塗布ムラが確認された。
Ｃ：多くの塗布ムラが確認された。 5-3. Coating property The coating property at the time of coating each colored composition was evaluated by the following method. That is, each colored composition was applied with a spin coater so that the film thickness after drying was 0.6 μm, and observed with an optical microscope to evaluate the coating property. The evaluation criteria are as follows.
-Evaluation criteria-
A: Application unevenness was not confirmed at all.
B: Some coating unevenness was confirmed.
C: Many coating unevenness was confirmed.
５－４．現像性
　断面ＳＥＭ「Ｓ－４８００」（日立ハイテクノロジーズ（株）製）を用いて着色パターンの現像液で除去された部分を１００個観察し、現像が不完全な部分の個数を数えた。この個数が少ないほど、現像性に優れていることを表す。 5-4. Developability A cross section SEM “S-4800” (manufactured by Hitachi High-Technologies Corporation) was used to observe 100 removed portions of the colored pattern with the developer, and the number of incompletely developed portions was counted. The smaller the number, the better the developability.
５－５．耐溶剤性
　上記で得られた実施例および比較例の着色硬化性組成物を、ガラスウェハ上に乾燥後の膜厚が０．６μｍになるようにスピンコーターを用いて塗布し、２００℃のホットプレートで３００秒加熱した。
　上記で得られたカラーフィルタに対し、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート（ＰＧＭＥＡ）を滴下後、１２０秒放置し、流水にて１０秒リンスした。
　各種液の滴下前後での透過率の分光変動をＭＣＰＤ－３０００（大塚電子（株）製）を使用して測定し、色差ΔＥａｂを測定した。ΔＥａｂが低いほど、耐溶剤性に優れることを意味する。 5-5. Solvent resistance The colored curable compositions of Examples and Comparative Examples obtained above were applied on a glass wafer using a spin coater so that the film thickness after drying was 0.6 μm. Heated on plate for 300 seconds.
To the color filter obtained above, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA) was added dropwise, left for 120 seconds, and rinsed with running water for 10 seconds.
The spectral variation of the transmittance before and after the dropping of various liquids was measured using MCPD-3000 (manufactured by Otsuka Electronics Co., Ltd.), and the color difference ΔEab was measured. It means that it is excellent in solvent resistance, so that (DELTA) Eab is low.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000127
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000127
　上記表から明らかな通り、本発明の組成物を用いてフォトレジストによってカラーフィルタを作製した場合、耐光性、耐熱性、塗布性および耐溶剤性に優れた組成物が得られた。さらに、現像性にも優れていた。特に、末端基としてトリチオカルボナート及びｔ－ブチル基を有するニトロキシドを有する色素は特に優れた性能を示すことが分かった。 As is apparent from the above table, when a color filter was produced with a photoresist using the composition of the present invention, a composition excellent in light resistance, heat resistance, coating property and solvent resistance was obtained. Furthermore, the developability was also excellent. In particular, it has been found that a dye having a nitroxide having a trithiocarbonate and a t-butyl group as a terminal group exhibits particularly excellent performance.
６．ドライエッチング法を適用したパターン形成
着色組成物の調製
　下記成分を混合・溶解して、実施例３７～７２、比較例３～４の各着色組成物を得た。
・シクロヘキサノン　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　１．１３３部
・色素多量体（下記表に記載の化合物）　　　　固形分として０．０４０部
・上述の青色顔料分散液（顔料濃度１３．０％）　　　　　　０．６１５部
・重合性化合物（ＥＨＰＥ－３１５０（ダイセル化学社製、２，２－ビス
（ヒドロキシメチル）－１－ブタノールの１，２－エポキシ－４－
（２－オキシラニル）シクロヘキサン付加物））　　　　　　０．０７０部
・グリセロールプロポキシレート（１％シクロヘキサン溶液）０．０４８部 6). Preparation of Patterned Coloring Composition Applying Dry Etching Method The following components were mixed and dissolved to obtain colored compositions of Examples 37 to 72 and Comparative Examples 3 to 4.
-Cyclohexanone 1.133 parts-Dye multimer (compound described in the following table) 0.040 parts as solid content-Blue pigment dispersion liquid (pigment concentration 13.0%) 0.615 parts-Polymerizable compound (EHPE -3150 (Daicel Chemical Industries, 2,2-bis (hydroxymethyl) -1-butanol 1,2-epoxy-4-
(2-oxiranyl) cyclohexane adduct)) 0.070 parts glycerol propoxylate (1% cyclohexane solution) 0.048 parts
６－１． 耐光性
－単色のカラーフィルタの作製と耐光性の評価－
　上記で得られた各着色硬化性組成物を、ガラス基板の上に乾燥後の膜厚が０．６μｍになるようにスピンコーターを用いて塗布し、１００℃で１２０秒間プリベークし、耐光性評価用の単色のカラーフィルタを得た。
　得られた耐光性評価用の単色のカラーフィルタに対し、キセノンランプを１０万ｌｕｘで２０時間照射（２００万ｌｕｘ・ｈ相当）した。キセノンランプ照射の前後での単色のカラーフィルタの色差（ΔＥ*ａｂ値）を測定し、耐光性の指標とした。なお、ΔＥ*ａｂ値の小さいほうが、耐光性が良好である。 6-1. Light resistance-Fabrication of monochromatic color filters and evaluation of light resistance-
Each colored curable composition obtained above was applied on a glass substrate using a spin coater so that the film thickness after drying was 0.6 μm, prebaked at 100 ° C. for 120 seconds, and evaluated for light resistance. A monochromatic color filter was obtained.
The obtained monochromatic color filter for light resistance evaluation was irradiated with a xenon lamp at 100,000 lux for 20 hours (equivalent to 2 million lux · h). The color difference (ΔE * ab value) of the monochromatic color filter before and after the xenon lamp irradiation was measured and used as an index of light resistance. Note that the smaller the ΔE * ab value, the better the light resistance.
６－２．耐熱性
　上記得た着色組成物が塗布されたガラス基板を、上記基板面で接するように２００℃のホットプレートに載置して１時間加熱した後、色度計ＭＣＰＤ－１０００（大塚電子（株）製）にて、加熱前後での色差（ΔＥ＊ａｂ値）を測定して熱堅牢性を評価する指標とし、下記判定基準に従って評価した。ΔＥ＊ａｂ値は、値の小さい方が、耐熱性が良好なことを示す。なお、ΔＥ＊ａｂ値は、ＣＩＥ１９７６（Ｌ＊，ａ＊，ｂ＊）空間表色系による以下の色差公式から求められる値である（日本色彩学会編 新編色彩科学ハンドブック（昭和６０年）ｐ．２６６）。
ΔＥ＊ａｂ＝｛（ΔＬ＊）2＋（Δａ＊）2＋（Δｂ＊）2｝1/2 6-2. Heat resistance A glass substrate coated with the obtained colored composition was placed on a hot plate at 200 ° C. so as to be in contact with the substrate surface, heated for 1 hour, and then the chromaticity meter MCPD-1000 (Otsuka Electronics Co., Ltd.). )), The color difference (ΔE * ab value) before and after heating was measured as an index for evaluating heat fastness, and evaluated according to the following criteria. A smaller ΔE * ab value indicates better heat resistance. The ΔE * ab value is a value obtained from the following color difference formula based on the CIE 1976 (L *, a *, b *) space color system (New Color Science Handbook edited by the Japan Color Society (1985) p. 60). 266).
ΔE * ab = {(ΔL *) 2 + (Δa *) 2 + (Δb *) 2 } 1/2
６－３．塗布性
　各着色組成物の塗布時の塗布性について、下記の方法で評価した。即ち、各着色組成物をスピンコータ－で、乾燥後の膜厚が０．６μｍになるように塗布し、光学顕微鏡で観察し、塗布性を評価した。評価基準は以下の通りである。
－評価基準－
Ａ：全く塗布ムラが確認されなかった。
Ｂ：多少の塗布ムラが確認された。
Ｃ：多くの塗布ムラが確認された。 6-3. Coating property The coating property at the time of coating each colored composition was evaluated by the following method. That is, each colored composition was applied with a spin coater so that the film thickness after drying was 0.6 μm, and observed with an optical microscope to evaluate the coating property. The evaluation criteria are as follows.
-Evaluation criteria-
A: Application unevenness was not confirmed at all.
B: Some coating unevenness was confirmed.
C: Many coating unevenness was confirmed.
６－４．耐溶剤性
　上記で得られた実施例および比較例の着色硬化性組成物を、ガラスウェハ上に乾燥後の膜厚が０．６μｍになるようにスピンコーターを用いて塗布し、２００℃のホットプレートで３００秒加熱した。
　上記で得られたカラーフィルタに対し、Ｎ－メチルピロリドンを滴下後、１２０秒放置し、流水にて１０秒リンスした。
　各種液の滴下前後での透過率の分光変動をＭＣＰＤ－３０００（大塚電子（株）製）を使用して測定し、色差ΔＥａｂを測定した。ΔＥａｂが低いほど、耐溶剤性に優れることを意味する。 6-4. Solvent resistance The colored curable compositions of Examples and Comparative Examples obtained above were applied on a glass wafer using a spin coater so that the film thickness after drying was 0.6 μm. Heated on plate for 300 seconds.
N-methylpyrrolidone was added dropwise to the color filter obtained above, and then left for 120 seconds and rinsed with running water for 10 seconds.
The spectral variation of the transmittance before and after the dropping of various liquids was measured using MCPD-3000 (manufactured by Otsuka Electronics Co., Ltd.), and the color difference ΔEab was measured. It means that it is excellent in solvent resistance, so that (DELTA) Eab is low.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000128
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000128
　実施例２３～４４の組成物を用いてエッチングレジストによってカラーフィルタを作製した場合、耐光性、耐熱性、塗布性および耐溶剤性に優れていることが分かった、一方、比較例４～６の組成物は、これらが劣っていた。 When a color filter was produced by using an etching resist using the compositions of Examples 23 to 44, it was found that the color filter was excellent in light resistance, heat resistance, coating property and solvent resistance, whereas in Comparative Examples 4 to 6 The compositions were inferior.
＜実施例４５＞
　実施例１において、重合性化合物を同質量のＡ－ＤＰＨ－１２Ｅ（日本化薬（株）製、エチレンオキシ変性ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサアクリレート）に変更し、その他は実施例１と同じように試験を行ったところ、実施例１と同様の好ましい結果が得られた。 <Example 45>
In Example 1, the polymerizable compound was changed to the same mass of A-DPH-12E (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., ethyleneoxy-modified dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate), and other tests were performed in the same manner as in Example 1. As a result, the same preferable results as in Example 1 were obtained.

Claims (19)

  1. 色素構造を有し、かつ、一般式（Ｉ）で表される基または一般式（ＩＩ）で表される基を主鎖末端に有する色素多量体、ならびに、重合性化合物を含む着色組成物；
    一般式（Ｉ）
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
     一般式（Ｉ）中、Ｚは水素原子または１価の置換基を表す；＊は、主鎖末端との結合位置を示す；
    一般式（ＩＩ）
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
     一般式（ＩＩ）中、ＡおよびＢは、それぞれ独立に、１価の置換基を表す；ＡとＢは互いに連結して環を形成しても良い；＊は、主鎖末端との結合位置を示す。     A coloring composition comprising a dye multimer having a dye structure and having a group represented by the general formula (I) or a group represented by the general formula (II) at the end of the main chain; and a polymerizable compound;
    Formula (I)
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
     In the general formula (I), Z represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent; * represents a bonding position with the main chain end;
    Formula (II)
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
     In general formula (II), A and B each independently represent a monovalent substituent; A and B may be linked to each other to form a ring; * represents the position of bonding to the end of the main chain Indicates.
  2. さらに光重合開始剤を含む、請求項１に記載の着色組成物。 Furthermore, the coloring composition of Claim 1 containing a photoinitiator.
  3. さらに顔料を含む、請求項１または２に記載の着色組成物。 Furthermore, the coloring composition of Claim 1 or 2 containing a pigment.
  4. 前記色素多量体の分散度であるＭｗ／Ｍｎが１．０～１．８である、請求項１～３のいずれか１項に記載の着色組成物。 The colored composition according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein Mw / Mn, which is a degree of dispersion of the dye multimer, is 1.0 to 1.8.
  5. さらにアルカリ可溶性樹脂を含む、請求項１～４のいずれか１項に記載の着色組成物。 The colored composition according to any one of claims 1 to 4, further comprising an alkali-soluble resin.
  6. 前記色素多量体が、色素を含む重合性化合物と他の重合性化合物のランダム重合体である、請求項１～５のいずれか１項に記載の着色組成物。 The colored composition according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the dye multimer is a random polymer of a polymerizable compound containing a dye and another polymerizable compound.
  7. 前記色素多量体が、ジピロメテン色素、トリアリールメタン色素、キサンテン色素、アゾ色素、シアニン色素及びスクアリリウム色素の少なくとも１種を含む、請求項１～６のいずれか１項に記載の着色組成物。 The colored composition according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein the dye multimer comprises at least one of a dipyrromethene dye, a triarylmethane dye, a xanthene dye, an azo dye, a cyanine dye, and a squarylium dye.
  8. 前記色素多量体の少なくとも１種が、スチレン系樹脂または（メタ）アクリル系樹脂である、請求項１～７のいずれか１項に記載の着色組成物。 The colored composition according to any one of claims 1 to 7, wherein at least one of the dye multimers is a styrene resin or a (meth) acrylic resin.
  9. 一般式（Ｉ）におけるＺが、－ＳＲ1、アリール基、ヘテロアリール基、アルキル基およびアリール基の少なくとも１つで置換されたアミノ基、アルコキシ基、ならびに、アリールオキシ基から選択されるか、一般式（ＩＩ）におけるＡおよびＢが、それぞれ独立に、炭素数１～３０のアルキル基または炭素数６～３０のアリール基である、請求項１～８のいずれか１項に記載の着色組成物；但し、Ｒ1は、炭素数１～３０のアルキル基、炭素数２～３０のアルケニル基、炭素数６～３０の１価の芳香族炭化水素基または炭素原子と異項原子との合計原子数３～３０の１価の複素環基を表し、ＡとＢは互いに連結して環を形成しても良い。 Z in the general formula (I) is selected from —SR 1 , an aryl group, a heteroaryl group, an amino group substituted with at least one of an alkyl group and an aryl group, an alkoxy group, and an aryloxy group; The colored composition according to any one of claims 1 to 8, wherein A and B in the general formula (II) are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms or an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms. Wherein R 1 is an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, an alkenyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, a monovalent aromatic hydrocarbon group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, or the sum of carbon atoms and hetero atoms It represents a monovalent heterocyclic group having 3 to 30 atoms, and A and B may be connected to each other to form a ring.
  10. 一般式（Ｉ）におけるＺが、－ＳＲ1またはアリール基であるか、一般式（ＩＩ）におけるＡおよびＢが、それぞれ独立に、炭素数１～３０の二級または三級アルキル基である、請求項９に記載の着色組成物；但し、ＡとＢは互いに結合して環を形成していてもよい。 Z in the general formula (I) is —SR 1 or an aryl group, or A and B in the general formula (II) are each independently a secondary or tertiary alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms. The colored composition according to claim 9, wherein A and B may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  11. カラーフィルタ用である請求項１～１０のいずれか１項に記載の着色組成物。 The colored composition according to any one of claims 1 to 10, which is used for a color filter.
  12. 請求項１～１１のいずれか１項に記載の着色組成物を支持体上に適用して着色組成物層を形成する工程と、前記着色組成物層をパターン状に露光する工程と、未露光部を現像除去して着色パターンを形成する工程とを含むパターン形成方法。 A step of applying a colored composition according to any one of claims 1 to 11 on a support to form a colored composition layer, a step of exposing the colored composition layer in a pattern, and an unexposed state Forming a colored pattern by developing and removing the portion.
  13. 請求項１２に記載のパターン形成方法を含む、カラーフィルタの製造方法。 A method for producing a color filter, comprising the pattern forming method according to claim 12.
  14. 請求項１～１１のいずれか１項に記載の着色組成物を用いて作成されたカラーフィルタまたは請求項１３に記載のカラーフィルタの製造方法により製造されたカラーフィルタ。 A color filter produced by using the colored composition according to any one of claims 1 to 11, or a color filter produced by the method for producing a color filter according to claim 13.
  15. 請求項１４に記載のカラーフィルタを有する固体撮像素子。 A solid-state imaging device having the color filter according to claim 14.
  16. 請求項１４に記載のカラーフィルタを有する画像表示装置。 An image display device comprising the color filter according to claim 14.
  17. 色素構造を有する重合性化合物をリビングラジカル重合した後、重合性化合物を配合することを含む、着色組成物の製造方法。 The manufacturing method of a coloring composition including mix | blending a polymeric compound after carrying out living radical polymerization of the polymeric compound which has a pigment | dye structure.
  18. 一般式（Ｉａ）で表される化合物、一般式（ＩＩａ）で表される化合物、および、一般式（ＩＩｂ）で表されるラジカルの少なくとも１種の存在下で、色素構造を有する重合性化合物と他の重合性化合物をラジカル重合することを含む、請求項１７に記載の着色組成物の製造方法；
    一般式（Ｉａ）
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
     一般式（Ｉａ）中、Ｚは一般式（Ｉ）と同義である；Ｃは一価の有機基を表す；
    一般式（ＩＩａ）
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
     一般式（ＩＩａ）中、Ｚは一般式（ＩＩ）と同義であるＤは一価の有機基を表す；
    一般式（ＩＩｂ）
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
     一般式（ＩＩｂ）中、ＡおよびＢは一般式（ＩＩ）と同義である。     A polymerizable compound having a dye structure in the presence of at least one of a compound represented by general formula (Ia), a compound represented by general formula (IIa), and a radical represented by general formula (IIb) And a method for producing a colored composition according to claim 17, comprising radical polymerization of said polymerizable compound with other polymerizable compound;
    Formula (Ia)
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
     In general formula (Ia), Z has the same meaning as in general formula (I); C represents a monovalent organic group;
    Formula (IIa)
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
     In general formula (IIa), Z is synonymous with general formula (II), D represents a monovalent organic group;
    Formula (IIb)
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
     In general formula (IIb), A and B are synonymous with general formula (II).
  19. 前記着色組成物が、請求項１～１１のいずれか１項に記載の着色組成物である、請求項１７または１８に記載の着色組成物の製造方法。 The method for producing a colored composition according to claim 17 or 18, wherein the colored composition is the colored composition according to any one of claims 1 to 11.
PCT/JP2015/052166 2014-01-31 2015-01-27 Coloring composition, pattern formation method, color filter manufacturing method, color filter, solid-state imaging element, image display device, and method for manufacturing coloring composition WO2015115413A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201580004351.2A CN105899549B (en) 2014-01-31 2015-01-27 Coloured composition, pattern formation method, the manufacture method of colored filter, colored filter, solid-state imaging element, the manufacture method of image display device and coloured composition
KR1020167020085A KR101892551B1 (en) 2014-01-31 2015-01-27 Coloring composition, pattern formation method, color filter manufacturing method, color filter, solid-state imaging element, image display device, and method for manufacturing coloring composition

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2014017697A JP6054894B2 (en) 2014-01-31 2014-01-31 Coloring composition, pattern forming method, color filter manufacturing method, color filter, solid-state imaging device, image display device, and coloring composition manufacturing method
JP2014-017697 2014-01-31

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2015115413A1 true WO2015115413A1 (en) 2015-08-06

Family

ID=53756986

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2015/052166 WO2015115413A1 (en) 2014-01-31 2015-01-27 Coloring composition, pattern formation method, color filter manufacturing method, color filter, solid-state imaging element, image display device, and method for manufacturing coloring composition

Country Status (5)

Country Link
JP (1) JP6054894B2 (en)
KR (1) KR101892551B1 (en)
CN (1) CN105899549B (en)
TW (1) TWI631191B (en)
WO (1) WO2015115413A1 (en)

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TWI707922B (en) * 2015-11-16 2020-10-21 日商富士軟片股份有限公司 Colored composition, color filter, pattern forming method, solid-state imaging device, image display device, and pigmented multi-weight body

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2007154177A (en) * 2005-11-11 2007-06-21 Canon Inc Polymer, charge controller and static charge developing toner
JP2009063895A (en) * 2007-09-07 2009-03-26 Fujifilm Corp Curable composition, color filter using the same, and method for manufacturing color filter
JP2012162677A (en) * 2011-02-08 2012-08-30 Fujifilm Corp Coloring composition, colored radiation-sensitive composition, method of producing dye polymer, ink for inkjet, color filter and method of manufacturing the same, solid imaging device, and display device
JP2012194466A (en) * 2011-03-17 2012-10-11 Dainippon Printing Co Ltd Colored composition for color filter and color filter using the same, and display device
JP2013195854A (en) * 2012-03-21 2013-09-30 Fujifilm Corp Colored radiation-sensitive composition, colored cured film, color filter, method for forming pattern, method for manufacturing color filter, solid state image sensor, and image display device

Family Cites Families (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2003342494A (en) 2002-05-28 2003-12-03 Ipposha Oil Ind Co Ltd Polymeric dye composed of block copolymer
CN100528968C (en) * 2003-03-31 2009-08-19 日本化药株式会社 Phthalocyanine dye and use thereof for ink-jet printing
KR101213358B1 (en) 2005-09-08 2012-12-17 제이에스알 가부시끼가이샤 Radiation-sensitive resin composition and color filters
KR20110023759A (en) * 2009-08-31 2011-03-08 후지필름 가부시키가이샤 Colored composition, colored photosensitive composition, color filter, solid-state imaging device and liquid crystal display
JP5791874B2 (en) * 2010-03-31 2015-10-07 富士フイルム株式会社 COLORING COMPOSITION, INKJET INK, COLOR FILTER AND ITS MANUFACTURING METHOD, SOLID-STATE IMAGING DEVICE, AND DISPLAY DEVICE
KR20120071742A (en) * 2010-12-23 2012-07-03 주식회사 이엔에프테크놀로지 Colored photosensitive resin composition
US8633260B2 (en) 2011-08-04 2014-01-21 Lg Chem, Ltd. Polymer compound comprising dye and curable resin composition comprising same
JP6201325B2 (en) 2012-02-29 2017-09-27 東洋インキＳｃホールディングス株式会社 Kinophthalone dye monomer, colorable polymer using the same, colored photosensitive composition using the same, and use thereof

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2007154177A (en) * 2005-11-11 2007-06-21 Canon Inc Polymer, charge controller and static charge developing toner
JP2009063895A (en) * 2007-09-07 2009-03-26 Fujifilm Corp Curable composition, color filter using the same, and method for manufacturing color filter
JP2012162677A (en) * 2011-02-08 2012-08-30 Fujifilm Corp Coloring composition, colored radiation-sensitive composition, method of producing dye polymer, ink for inkjet, color filter and method of manufacturing the same, solid imaging device, and display device
JP2012194466A (en) * 2011-03-17 2012-10-11 Dainippon Printing Co Ltd Colored composition for color filter and color filter using the same, and display device
JP2013195854A (en) * 2012-03-21 2013-09-30 Fujifilm Corp Colored radiation-sensitive composition, colored cured film, color filter, method for forming pattern, method for manufacturing color filter, solid state image sensor, and image display device

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN105899549B (en) 2018-01-02
TW201529756A (en) 2015-08-01
CN105899549A (en) 2016-08-24
KR20160102286A (en) 2016-08-29
JP2015145440A (en) 2015-08-13
JP6054894B2 (en) 2016-12-27
TWI631191B (en) 2018-08-01
KR101892551B1 (en) 2018-08-28

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP6374172B2 (en) Colored composition, cured film using the same, color filter, pattern forming method, color filter manufacturing method, solid-state imaging device, image display device, and dye multimer
KR101755422B1 (en) Colored composition, cured film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid-state image sensor, and image display device
JP6082705B2 (en) Coloring composition, cured film using the same, color filter, pattern forming method, color filter manufacturing method, solid-state imaging device, and image display device
KR101938600B1 (en) Coloring composition, cured film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging element, and image display device
KR101932978B1 (en) Coloring composition, colored cured film, color filter, solid-state image sensor and image display device
JP6339208B2 (en) Coloring composition, cured film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging device, and image display device
JP6159309B2 (en) Coloring composition, cured film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging device, and image display device
JP6054824B2 (en) Coloring composition, cured film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging device, and image display device
JP6147134B2 (en) Coloring composition, cured film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging device, and image display device
JP6166711B2 (en) Coloring composition, cured film using the same, color filter, pattern forming method, color filter manufacturing method, solid-state imaging device, and image display device
KR20160013932A (en) Pigment multimer, coloring composition, cured film, color filter, method for manufacturing color filter, solid-state imaging element, and image display device
JP6251067B2 (en) Coloring composition, cured film, method for producing color filter, color filter, solid-state imaging device, and image display device
JP6147133B2 (en) Coloring composition, cured film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging device, and image display device
WO2016031574A1 (en) Composition, cured film, pattern forming method, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging element, and image display device
JP6054894B2 (en) Coloring composition, pattern forming method, color filter manufacturing method, color filter, solid-state imaging device, image display device, and coloring composition manufacturing method

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 15742593

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 20167020085

Country of ref document: KR

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 15742593

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1